Operating Manual

OPTIMOD-FM
2300
Digital Audio Processor

Version 2.0 Software

IMPORTANT NOTE: Refer to the unit’s rear panel for your Model Number.

Model Number: Description:

2300 OPTIMOD 2300, Stereo Encoder, Digital I/O, Protec-

tion/Two-Band Structure, 115V (for 90-130V opera-
tion) or 230V (for 200-250V operation), switchable
to 50µs or 75µs.

2300J As above, but for 90-117V operation.

MANUAL:

Part Number: Description:

96122.202.01 2300 Operating Manual

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK,

DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

This symbol, wherever it appears, alerts you to

This symbol, wherever it appears, alerts you to important
the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage
operating and maintenance instructions in the accompa-
inside the enclosure  voltage that may be
nying literature. Read the manual.
sufficient to constitute a risk of shock.

In accordance to the WEEE (waste electrical and electronic equipment) direc-

tive of the European Parliament, this product must not be discarded into the
municipal waste stream in any of the Member States. This product may be
sent back to your Orban dealer at end of life where it will be reused or recycled
at no cost to you.

If this product is discarded into an approved municipal WEEE collection site or

turned over to an approved WEEE recycler at end of life, your Orban dealer
must be notified and supplied with model, serial number and the name and
location of site/facility.

Please contact your Orban dealer for further assistance.

www.orban.com
 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the appliance is operated.
Retain Instructions: The safety and operation instructions should be retained for future reference.
Heed Warnings: All warnings on the appliance and in the operating instructions should be adhered to.
Follow Instructions: All operation and user instructions should be followed.
Water and Moisture: The appliance should not be used near water (e.g., near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, laundry tub, in a wet base-
ment, or near a swimming pool, etc.).
Ventilation: The appliance should be situated so that its location or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation. For example, the appli-
ance should not be situated on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface that may block the ventilation openings; or, placed in a built-in installation, such as a
bookcase or cabinet that may impede the flow of air through the ventilation openings.
Heat: The appliance should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other appliances (including amplifiers)
that produce heat.
Power Sources: The appliance should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on
the appliance.
Grounding or Polarization: Precautions should be taken so that the grounding or polarization means of an appliance is not defeated.
Power-Cord Protection: Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or
against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the appliance.
Cleaning: The appliance should be cleaned only as recommended by the manufacturer.
Non-Use Periods: The power cord of the appliance should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period of time.
Object and Liquid Entry: Care should be taken so that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through openings.
Damage Requiring Service: The appliance should be serviced by qualified service personnel when: The power supply cord or the plug has
been damaged; or Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the appliance; or The appliance has been exposed to rain; or The appliance
does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance; or The appliance has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.
Servicing: The user should not attempt to service the appliance beyond that described in the operating instructions. All other servicing should be
referred to qualified service personnel.
The Appliance should be used only with a cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer.

Safety Instructions (European)

Notice For U.K. Customers If Your Unit Is Equipped With A Power Cord.

WARNING: THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED.

The cores in the mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:
GREEN and YELLOW - Earth BLUE - Neutral BROWN - Live
As colours of the cores in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, pro-
ceed as follows:
The core which is coloured green and yellow must be connected to the terminal in the plug marked with the letter E, or with the earth symbol, or col-
oured green, or green and yellow.
The core which is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal marked N or coloured black.
The core which is coloured brown must be connected to the terminal marked L or coloured red.
The power cord is terminated in a CEE7 / 7 plug (Continental Europe). The green / yellow wire is connected directly to the unit's chassis. If you need to
change the plug and if you are qualified to do so, refer to the table below.
WARNING: If the ground is defeated, certain fault conditions in the unit or in the system to which it is connected can result in full line voltage between
chassis and earth ground. Severe injury or death can then result if the chassis and earth ground are touched simultaneously.

Conductor WIRE COLOR

Normal Alt
L LIVE BROWN BLACK
N NEUTRAL BLUE WHITE
E EARTH GND GREEN-YELLOW GREEN
AC Power Cord Color Coding
Safety Instructions (German)
Gerät nur an der am Leistungsschild vermerkten Spannung und Stromart betreiben.
Sicherungen nur durch solche, gleicher Stromstärke und gleichen Abschaltverhaltens ersetzen. Sicherungen nie überbrücken.
Jedwede Beschädigung des Netzkabels vermeiden. Netzkabel nicht knicken oder quetschen. Beim Abziehen des Netzkabels den
Stecker und nicht das Kabel enfassen. Beschädigte Netzkabel sofort auswechseln.
Gerät und Netzkabel keinen übertriebenen mechanischen Beaspruchungen aussetzen.
Um Berührung gefährlicher elektrischer Spannungen zu vermeiden, darf das Gerät nicht geöffnet werden. Im Fall von Betriebsstörun-
gen darf das Gerät nur Von befugten Servicestellen instandgesetzt werden. Im Gerät befinden sich keine, durch den Benutzer
reparierbare Teile.
Zur Vermeidung von elektrischen Schlägen und Feuer ist das Gerät vor Nässe zu schützen. Eindringen von Feuchtigkeit und
Flüssigkeiten in das Gerät vermeiden.
Bei Betriebsstörungen bzw. nach Eindringen von Flüssigkeiten oder anderen Gegenständen, das Gerät sofort vom Netz trennen und
eine qualifizierte Servicestelle kontaktieren.

Safety Instructions (French)

On s'assurera toujours que la tension et la nature du courant utilisé correspondent bien à ceux indiqués sur la plaque de l'appareil.
N'utiliser que des fusibles de même intensité et du même principe de mise hors circuit que les fusibles d'origine. Ne jamais
shunter les fusibles.
Eviter tout ce qui risque d'endommager le câble seceur. On ne devra ni le plier, ni l'aplatir. Lorsqu'on débranche l'appareil,
tirer la fiche et non le câble. Si un câble est endommagé, le remplacer immédiatement.
Ne jamais exposer l'appareil ou le câble ä une contrainte mécanique excessive.
Pour éviter tout contact averc une tension électrique dangereuse, on n'oouvrira jamais l'appareil. En cas de dysfonctionnement,
l'appareil ne peut être réparé que dans un atelier autorisé. Aucun élément de cet appareil ne peut être réparé par l'utilisateur.
Pour éviter les risques de décharge électrique et d'incendie, protéger l'appareil de l'humidité. Eviter toute pénétration
d'humidité ou fr liquide dans l'appareil.
En cas de dysfonctionnement ou si un liquide ou tout autre objet a pénétré dans l'appareil couper aussitôt l'appareil
de son alimentation et s'adresser à un point de service aprésvente autorisé.

Safety Instructions (Spanish)

Hacer funcionar el aparato sólo con la tensión y clase de corriente señaladas en la placa indicadora de características.
Reemplazar los fusibles sólo por otros de la misma intensidad de corriente y sistema de desconexión. No poner nunca los fusibles en
puente.
Proteger el cable de alimentación contra toda clase de daños. No doblar o apretar el cable. Al desenchufar, asir el enchufe y no el
cable. Sustituir inmediatamente cables dañados.
No someter el aparato y el cable de alimentación a esfuerzo mecánico excesivo.
Para evitar el contacto con tensiones eléctricas peligrosas, el aparato no debe abrirse. En caso de producirse fallos de funcionamiento,
debe ser reparado sólo por talleres de servicio autorizados. En el aparato no se encuentra ninguna pieza que pudiera ser reparada por
el usuario.
Para evitar descargas eléctricas e incendios, el aparato debe protegerse contra la humedad, impidiendo que penetren ésta o líquidos
en el mismo.
En caso de producirse fallas de funcionamiento como consecuencia de la penetración de líquidos u otros objetos en el aparato,
hay que desconectarlo inmediatamente de la red y ponerse en contacto con un taller de servicio autorizado.

Safety Instructions (Italian)

Far funzionare l'apparecchio solo con la tensione e il tipo di corrente indicati sulla targa riportante i dati sulle prestazioni.
Sostituire i dispositivi di protezione (valvole, fusibili ecc.) solo con dispositivi aventi lo stesso amperaggio e lo stesso comportamento
di interruzione. Non cavallottare mai i dispositivi di protezione.
Evitare qualsiasi danno al cavo di collegamento alla rete. Non piegare o schiacciare il cavo. Per staccare il cavo, tirare la presa e mai
il cavo. Sostituire subito i cavi danneggiati.
Non esporre l'apparecchio e il cavo ad esagerate sollecitazioni meccaniche.
Per evitare il contatto con le tensioni elettriche pericolose, l'apparecchio non deve venir aperto. In caso di anomalie di funzionamento
l'apparecchio deve venir riparato solo da centri di servizio autorizzati. Nell'apparecchio non si trovano parti che possano essere riparate
dall'utente.
Per evitare scosse elettriche o incendi, l'apparecchio va protetto dall'umidità. Evitare che umidità o liquidi entrino nell'apparecchio.
In caso di anomalie di funzionamento rispettivamente dopo la penetrazione di liquidi o oggetti nell'apparecchio, staccare immediatamente
l'apparecchio dalla rete e contattare un centro di servizio qualificato.
 PLEASE READ BEFORE PROCEEDING!
Manual
The Operating Manual contains instructions to verify the proper operation of this unit and initialization of certain options.
You will find these operations are most conveniently performed on the bench before you install the unit in the rack.

Please review the Manual, especially the installation section, before unpacking the unit.

Trial Period Precautions

If your unit has been provided on a trial basis:

You should observe the following precautions to avoid reconditioning charges in case you later wish to return the unit to
your dealer.
(1) Note the packing technique and save all packing materials. It is not wise to ship in other than the factory carton. (Re-
placements cost $35.00).

(2) Avoid scratching the paint or plating. Set the unit on soft, clean surfaces.
(3) Do not cut the grounding pin from the line cord.
(4) Use care and proper tools in removing and tightening screws to avoid burring the heads.

(5) Use the nylon-washered rack screws supplied, if possible, to avoid damaging the panel. Support the unit when tighten-
ing the screws so that the threads do not scrape the paint inside the slotted holes.

Packing
When you pack the unit for shipping:
(1) Tighten all screws on any barrier strip(s) so the screws do not fall out from vibration.
(2) Wrap the unit in its original plastic bag to avoid abrading the paint.
(3) Seal the inner and outer cartons with tape.
If you are returning the unit permanently (for credit), be sure to enclose:

 The Manual(s)
 The Registration / Warranty Card
 The Line Cord
 All Miscellaneous Hardware (including the Rack Screws and Keys)
 The Extender Card (if applicable)
 The Monitor Rolloff Filter(s) (OPTIMOD-AM only)
 The COAX Connecting Cable (OPTIMOD-FM and OPTIMOD-TV only)

Your dealer may charge you for any missing items.

If you are returning a unit for repair, do not enclose any of the above items.

Further advice on proper packing and shipping is included in the Manual (see Table of Contents).

Trouble
If you have problems with installation or operation:

(1) Check everything you have done so far against the instructions in the Manual. The information contained therein is
based on our years of experience with OPTIMOD and broadcast stations.
(2) Check the other sections of the Manual (consult the Table of Contents and Index) to see if there might be some sug-
gestions regarding your problem.

(3) After reading the section on Factory Assistance, you may call Orban Customer Service for advice during normal Cali-
fornia business hours. The number is (1) 510 / 351-3500.
 WARNING
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed
and used as directed by this manual, it may cause interference to radio communication. This
equipment complies with the limits for a Class A computing device, as specified by FCC
Rules, Part 15, subject J, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such
interference when this type of equipment is operated in a commercial environment. Operation
of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference. If it does, the user will be
required to eliminate the interference at the user’s expense.

WARNING
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digi-
tal apparatus set out in the radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of
Communications. (Le present appareil numerique n’emet pas de bruits radioelectriques de-
passant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques [de las class A] prescrites dans le
Reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le ministere des Communications du
Canada.)

IMPORTANT
Perform the installation under static control conditions. Simply walking across a rug can gen-
erate a static charge of 20,000 volts. This is the spark or shock you may have felt when
touching a doorknob or some other conductive surface. A much smaller static discharge is
likely to destroy one or more of the CMOS semiconductors employed in OPTIMOD-FM. Static
damage will not be covered under warranty.
There are many common sources of static. Most involve some type of friction between two
dissimilar materials. Some examples are combing your hair, sliding across a seat cover or
rolling a cart across the floor. Since the threshold of human perception for a static discharge
is 3000 volts, you will not even notice many damaging discharges.
Basic damage prevention consists of minimizing generation, discharging any accumulated
static charge on your body or workstation, and preventing that discharge from being sent to or
through an electronic component. You should use a static grounding strap (grounded through
a protective resistor) and a static safe workbench with a conductive surface. This will prevent
any buildup of damaging static.

U.S. patents 4,208,548, 4,460,871, 6,337,999, 6,434,241, 6,618,486, and 6,937,912 protect OPTIMOD 2300.
Orban® and Optimod® are registered trademarks.
All trademarks are property of their respective companies.
This manual is part number 96122.202.01. Published September 2007.

© Copyright Orban

8350 East Evans Suite C4, Scottsdale, AZ 85260 USA

Phone: (1) (480) 403-8300; Fax: (1) (480) 403-8301; E-Mail: [email protected]; Site: www.orban.com
Operating Manual

OPTIMOD-FM
2300
Digital Audio Processor

Version 2.0 Software

Table of Contents

Index.........................................................................................................................0-8
Section 1 Introduction
.........................................................................................................................................1-1

ABOUT THIS MANUAL.......................................................................................................1-1

THE OPTIMOD-FM 2300 DIGITAL AUDIO PROCESSOR .......................................................1-1
User-Friendly Interface............................................................................................1-2
Absolute Control of Peak Modulation...................................................................1-2
Flexible Configuration ............................................................................................1-3
Controllable .............................................................................................................1-4
Stand-Alone Stereo Encoder Operation ................................................................1-5
PRESETS IN OPTIMOD-FM ..............................................................................................1-6
Factory Presets .........................................................................................................1-6
User Presets ..............................................................................................................1-6
INPUT/OUTPUT CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................1-7
Digital AES3 Left/Right Input/Output ....................................................................1-7
Analog Left/Right Input/Output.............................................................................1-8
Stereo Analog Baseband Composite Output ........................................................1-8
Subcarriers................................................................................................................1-8
Remote Control Interface .......................................................................................1-9
Computer Interface ...............................................................................................1-10
RS-232 Serial Port ........................................................................................................... 1-10
RJ45 Ethernet Connector ............................................................................................... 1-10
Optimal Control of Peak Modulation Levels .......................................................1-10
Best Location for OPTIMOD-FM ...........................................................................1-11
If the transmitter is not accessible:................................................................................ 1-12
If the transmitter is accessible: ...................................................................................... 1-12
STUDIO-TRANSMITTER LINK .............................................................................................1-14
Transmission from Studio to Transmitter.............................................................1-14
Digital Links .................................................................................................................... 1-14
Composite Baseband Microwave STLs........................................................................... 1-15
Dual Microwave STLs...................................................................................................... 1-16
Analog Landline (PTT / Post Office Line)....................................................................... 1-17
Using the Orban 8100AST (or 8100A/ST) External AGC with the 2300 .............1-17
STL and Exciter Overshoot ....................................................................................1-17
USING LOSSY DATA REDUCTION IN THE STUDIO..................................................................1-18
ABOUT TRANSMISSION LEVELS AND METERING ..................................................................1-18
Meters ....................................................................................................................1-18
Studio Line-up Levels and Headroom ..................................................................1-19
Fig. 1-1: Absolute Peak Level, VU and PPM Reading.................................................... 1-19
Transmission Levels................................................................................................1-19
LINE-UP FACILITIES .........................................................................................................1-20
Metering of Levels.................................................................................................1-20
Composite Output Level ................................................................................................ 1-20
Built-in Calibrated Line-up Tones.................................................................................. 1-20
Built-in Calibrated Bypass Test Mode............................................................................ 1-21
MONITORING ON LOUDSPEAKERS AND HEADPHONES..........................................................1-21
EAS TEST ......................................................................................................................1-22
PC CONTROL AND SECURITY PASSCODE ............................................................................1-23
 WARRANTY, USER FEEDBACK...........................................................................................1-23
User Feedback........................................................................................................1-23
LIMITED WARRANTY .............................................................................................1-23
INTERNATIONAL WARRANTY ...............................................................................1-24
EXTENDED WARRANTY ........................................................................................1-24
Section 2 Installation
.........................................................................................................................................2-1

INSTALLING THE 2300.......................................................................................................2-1

Figure 2-1: AC Line Cord Wire Standard)......................................................................... 2-2
Figure 2-2: Wiring the 25-pin Remote Interface Connector ........................................... 2-4
2300 REAR PANEL ...........................................................................................................2-5
INPUT AND OUTPUT CONNECTIONS .....................................................................................2-6
Cable.........................................................................................................................2-6
Connectors ...............................................................................................................2-6
Analog Audio Input.................................................................................................2-6
Analog Audio Output .............................................................................................2-7
AES3 Digital Input and Output...............................................................................2-7
Composite Output and Subcarrier Input ...............................................................2-8
Figure 2-3: Separation vs. load capacitance .................................................................... 2-9
Grounding..............................................................................................................2-10
Power Ground........................................................................................................2-11
Circuit Ground .......................................................................................................2-11
2300 FRONT PANEL .......................................................................................................2-11
STUDIO LEVEL CONTROLLER INSTALLATION (OPTIONAL) .......................................................2-13
If you are using Orban 8200ST external AGC ......................................................2-14
Figure 2-4: 8200ST Jumper Settings (*Factory Configuration) ..................................... 2-15
QUICK SETUP (AUDIO PROCESSOR MODE) ........................................................................2-16
Setup for Stand-Alone Stereo Encoder Mode .....................................................2-24
ANALOG AND DIGITAL I/O SETUP .....................................................................................2-29
AUTOMATION USING THE 2300’S INTERNAL CLOCK ............................................................2-35
SECURITY AND PASSCODE PROGRAMMING .........................................................................2-37
To Create a Passcode: ............................................................................................2-38
To Edit a Passcode:.................................................................................................2-39
To Delete a Passcode: ............................................................................................2-39
To Lock the Front Panel Immediately:..................................................................2-39
To Program local lockout: .....................................................................................2-39
To Unlock the Front Panel: ...................................................................................2-40
Dial-up Networking and the Passcode.................................................................2-40
If You Have Forgotten Your Passcode..................................................................2-40
REMOTE CONTROL INTERFACE PROGRAMMING ..................................................................2-41
NETWORKING AND REMOTE CONTROL ..............................................................................2-42
SYNCHRONIZING OPTIMOD TO A NETWORK TIME SERVER....................................................2-44
Table 2-1: NIST-referenced timeservers ......................................................................... 2-45
INSTALLING 2300 PC REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE ..........................................................2-48
Installing the Necessary Windows Services..........................................................2-48
Check Hardware Requirements ............................................................................2-48
Running the Orban Installer Program..................................................................2-49
Setting Up Ethernet, LAN, and VPN Connections ...............................................2-50
Conclusion..............................................................................................................2-50
APPENDIX: SETTING UP SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS..............................................................2-51
Preparing for Communication through Null Modem Cable ..............................2-51
Connecting Using Windows 2000 Direct Serial Connection:..............................2-51
 Connecting Using Windows XP Direct Serial Connection ..................................2-56
Preparing for Communication through Modems ...............................................2-61
Connecting Using Windows 2000 Modem Connection ......................................2-61
Connecting using Windows XP Modem Connection ..........................................2-67
UPDATING YOUR 2300’S SOFTWARE.................................................................................2-73
Section 3 Operation
.........................................................................................................................................3-1

2300 FRONT PANEL .........................................................................................................3-1

INTRODUCTION TO PROCESSING..........................................................................................3-3
Some Audio Processing Concepts.................................................................................... 3-3
Distortion in Processing ................................................................................................... 3-3
Loudness and Distortion .................................................................................................. 3-4
OPTIMOD-FM—from Bach to Rock ........................................................................3-4
Fundamental Requirements: High-Quality Source Material and Accurate
Monitoring...............................................................................................................3-5
ABOUT THE 2300’S SIGNAL PROCESSING FEATURES ..............................................................3-6
Signal Flow...............................................................................................................3-6
Stand-Alone Stereo Encoder Mode ................................................................................. 3-9
ITU-R BS412 Compliance .......................................................................................3-10
Two-Band Purist Processing ..................................................................................3-10
CUSTOMIZING THE 2300’S SOUND ...................................................................................3-10
Basic Modify...........................................................................................................3-11
Full Modify .............................................................................................................3-11
Advanced Modify ..................................................................................................3-12
Gain Reduction Metering .....................................................................................3-12
To Create or Save a User Preset ............................................................................3-13
FACTORY PROGRAMMING PRESETS ...................................................................................3-14
Table 3-1: Factory Programming Presets....................................................................... 3-15
THE 2300’S AUDIO PROCESSING CONTROLS DESCRIBED ......................................................3-16
Equalizer Controls .................................................................................................3-17
Table 3-2: Equalizer Controls......................................................................................... 3-18
Stereo Enhancer Controls .....................................................................................3-20
Table 3-3: Stereo Enhancer Controls ............................................................................. 3-20
AGC Controls..........................................................................................................3-21
Table 3-4: AGC Controls ................................................................................................. 3-22
Advanced AGC Controls........................................................................................3-24
Clipper Controls .....................................................................................................3-26
Table 3-5: Clipper Controls ............................................................................................ 3-27
Two-Band Controls ................................................................................................3-30
Table 3-6: Two-Band Controls ....................................................................................... 3-30
Advanced Two-Band Controls ..............................................................................3-33
ITU-R MULTIPLEX POWER CONTROLLER ...........................................................................3-34
Figure 3-1: Multiplex Power over 15 Minute Observation Interval with MPX Power
Controller Active, measured at Optimod’s Composite Output.................................... 3-34
Multiplex Power Threshold............................................................................................ 3-34
Audio Processing and the Multiplex Power Threshold Control................................... 3-35
Multiplex Power Control in Stand-Alone Stereo Encoder Mode................................. 3-35
TEST MODES .................................................................................................................3-36
Table 3-7: Test Modes .................................................................................................... 3-36
GETTING THE BASS SOUND YOU WANT ............................................................................3-36
USING THE 2300 PC REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE ...........................................................3-38
 To set up a new connection: .................................................................................3-39
To initiate communication: ...................................................................................3-39
To modify a control setting:..................................................................................3-40
To recall a preset:...................................................................................................3-40
To save a user preset you have created: ..............................................................3-41
To back up User Presets, system files, and automation files onto your computer’s
hard drive:..............................................................................................................3-41
To restore archived presets, system files, and automation files:........................3-42
To modify INPUT/OUTPUT and SYSTEM SETUP: ...........................................................3-43
To modify AUTOMATION: .........................................................................................3-43
To group multiple 2300s: ......................................................................................3-43
Operation Using the Keyboard ............................................................................3-44
To Quit the Program..............................................................................................3-44
About Aliases created by Optimod 2300 PC Remote Software .........................3-44
Multiple Installations of Optimod 2300 PC Remote ...........................................3-45
Section 4 Maintenance
.........................................................................................................................................4-1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................................4-1

SUBASSEMBLY REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT .......................................................................4-2
FIELD AUDIT OF PERFORMANCE..........................................................................................4-6
Table 4-1: Decoder Chart for Power Supervisor .............................................................. 4-9
Table 4-2: Layout Diagram of J7, with expected voltages on each pin ......................... 4-9
Table 4-3: Typical Power Supply Voltages and AC Ripple .............................................. 4-9

Section 5 Troubleshooting
.........................................................................................................................................5-1

PROBLEMS AND POTENTIAL SOLUTIONS ...............................................................................5-1

RFI, Hum, Clicks, or Buzzes ............................................................................................... 5-1
Unexpectedly Quiet On-Air Levels ................................................................................... 5-1
Poor Peak Modulation Control ........................................................................................ 5-1
Audible Distortion On-Air ................................................................................................ 5-2
Audible Noise on Air ........................................................................................................ 5-3
Whistle on Air, Perhaps Only in Stereo Reception.......................................................... 5-3
Interference from stereo into SCA ................................................................................... 5-4
Fig. 5-1: Typical 2300 baseband spectrum with heavy processing, 0-100 kHz. .............. 5-4
Shrill, Harsh Sound............................................................................................................ 5-5
Dull Sound......................................................................................................................... 5-5
System Will Not Pass Line-Up Tones at 100% Modulation ............................................. 5-5
System Will Not Pass Emergency Alert System (“EAS” USA Standard) Tones at the
Legally Required Modulation Level ................................................................................. 5-5
System Receiving 2300’s Digital Output Will Not Lock................................................... 5-6
19 kHz Frequency Out-of-Tolerance ................................................................................ 5-6
L–R (Stereo Difference Channel) Will Not Null with Monophonic Input....................... 5-6
General Dissatisfaction with Subjective Sound Quality .................................................. 5-6
Security Passcode Lost (When Unit is Locked Out).......................................................... 5-6
Connection Issues between the 2300 and a PC, Modem, or Network ................5-6
Troubleshooting Connections.................................................................................5-7
You Cannot Access the Internet After Making a Direct or Modem Connection to
the 2300: ..................................................................................................................5-8
OS-SPECIFIC TROUBLESHOOTING ADVICE ............................................................................5-8
 Troubleshooting Windows 2000 Direct Connect:..................................................5-8
Troubleshooting Windows 2000 Modem Connect:.............................................5-10
Troubleshooting Windows XP Direct Connect: ...................................................5-11
Troubleshooting Windows XP Modem Connect: ................................................5-12
TROUBLESHOOTING IC OPAMPS .......................................................................................5-13
TECHNICAL SUPPORT.......................................................................................................5-13
FACTORY SERVICE...........................................................................................................5-13
SHIPPING INSTRUCTIONS ..................................................................................................5-14
Section 6 Technical Data
.........................................................................................................................................6-1

SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................................................6-1
Performance.............................................................................................................6-1
Installation ...............................................................................................................6-2
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................6-5
Overview ..................................................................................................................6-5
Control Circuits ........................................................................................................6-6
User Control Interface and LCD Display Circuits ...................................................6-6
Input Circuits............................................................................................................6-8
Output Circuits.........................................................................................................6-9
DSP Circuit..............................................................................................................6-12
Power Supply .........................................................................................................6-12
ABBREVIATIONS .............................................................................................................6-13
PARTS LIST ....................................................................................................................6-14
Obtaining Spare Parts ...........................................................................................6-15
Base Board .............................................................................................................6-15
CPU Module ...........................................................................................................6-17
RS-232 Board..........................................................................................................6-18
Power Supply .........................................................................................................6-19
Input/Output (I/O) Board ......................................................................................6-20
DSP Board...............................................................................................................6-23
Display Board .........................................................................................................6-24
SCHEMATICS AND PARTS LOCATOR DRAWINGS ...................................................................6-25

Function Description Drawing Page

Chassis Circuit Board Locator and Basic In- Top view 6-29
terconnections (not to scale)
Base Board Glue logic; supports CPU module Parts Locator 6-30
and RS-232 daughterboard. Drawing
Contains:
System Connections Schematic 1 of 4 6-31
CPU module interface Schematic 2 of 4 6-32
CPU module interface (ver. .06) Schematic 2 of 4 6-33
Power Supply Monitor Schematic 3 of 4 6-34
CPLD, General Purpose Interface, Schematic 4 of 4 6-35
and Remotes
CPU Module Control microprocessor. Services Parts Locator 6-36
front panel, serial port, Ethernet, Drawing
DSP board, and control board. Re-
sides on base board.
Contains:
Ethernet Schematic 1 of 5 6-37
General Purpose Bus Schematic 2 of 5 6-38
Memory Schematic 3 of 5 6-39
Miscellaneous Functions Schematic 4 of 5 6-40
Power and Ground Distribution Schematic 5 of 5 6-41
RS-232 Board Supports Serial Port Parts Locator 6-42
Drawing
Schematic 1 of 1 6-43
Power Supply ±15V analog supply; ±5V analog Parts Locator 6-44
supply; +5V digital supply Drawing
Schematic 1 of 1 6-45
I/O Board Analog Input/Output Parts Locator 6-46
AES3 Input/Output Drawing
Composite Output
SCA Input.
Contains:
L and R Analog Inputs Schematic 1 of 5 6-47
L and R Analog Outputs Schematic 2 of 5 6-48
Composite / SCA Schematic 3 of 5 6-49
Control and Digital I/O Schematic 4 of 5 6-50
Interface and Power Distribution Schematic 5 of 5 6-51
DSP Board DSP Chips; Local +3.3V regulator. Parts Locator 6-52
Contains: Drawing
DSP Extended Serial Audio Inter- Schematic 1 of 7 6-53
face (ESAI)
DSP Host Interface Schematic 2 of 7 6-54
DSP Serial Peripheral Interface, Schematic 3 of 7 6-55
Power, and Ground
ISA Bus 8-bit I/O Schematic 4 of 7 6-56
Serial Audio Interface and Clock Schematic 5 of 7 6-57
Generation
Power Distribution Schematic 6 of 7 6-58
No-Connects Schematic 7 of 7 6-59
Display Board Front-Panel LCD, LEDs, Buttons, Parts Locator 6-60
(Front) and Rotary Encoder Drawing
Schematic 1 of 1 6-61
Display Board Front-Panel electronics Parts Locator 6-62
(Rear) Drawing
Schematic 1 of 1 6-63
DSP Block Shows signal processing 6-64
Diagram
Index

analog I/O 1- · 8
analog input
2 circuit description 6- · 8
ref level, I/O setup 2- · 30
2300 OPTIMOD-FM 1- · 1 analog input 2- · 6
analog landline 1- · 17
analog output
8
circuit description 6- · 10
analog output 2- · 7
8100A/ST 1- · 17
anti-aliased 3- · 29
8100A1 1- · 17
archiving presets 3- · 41
8100AST 1- · 17
attack
8100AXT2 1- · 17
time, band 1 3- · 37
8200ST 2- · 14
attack 3- · 25
audio
A connections 2- · 6
input, connecting 2- · 6
A/D converter output 2- · 7
circuit description 5- · 9 output, connecting 2- · 7
specification 6- · 2 Audio Precision 4- · 6
Abbreviations 6- · 13 auditing performance 4- · 6
AC Line Cord Standard 2- · 2 automation
Advanced Modify 3- · 12 add event 2- · 36
delete event 2- · 37
AES/EBU I/O 2- · 7
edit event 2- · 37
AGC
automation 2- · 35
bass attack control 3- · 25
bass coupling control 3- · 23
automation 3- · 43
bass release control 3- · 25
bass threshold control 3- · 24
control list 3- · 21
B
crossover control 3- · 25
backing up presets 3- · 41
defeating 3- · 21
drive control 3- · 21 balance adjust 2- · 31
dual band 3- · 23 balanced
external AGC setup 2- · 13 inputs 2- · 6
gate threshold control 3- · 23 output, simulates transformer 2- · 7
idle gain control 3- · 25 base board
master attack control 3- · 25 removing 4- · 3
master release control 3- · 22 replacing 4- · 5
meter 2- · 13, 2 baseband spectrum
meter 3- · 2 control 3- · 6
ratio control 3- · 24 baseband spectrum 5- · 4
window release control 3- · 24 Basic Modify 3- · 11
window size control 3- · 24 bass clip control 3- · 37
AGC 3- · 7 bass clip shape 3- · 37
allpass crossover 3- · 25 bass clip threshold 3- · 26
Analog auto-fallback 2- · 28 bass punch
analog baseband outputs 1- · 8 and the bass clipper 3- · 26
bass threshold 3- · 24 clock
bass, getting sound you want 3- · 36 battery 6- · 6
battery reset to hour 2- · 41
replacing 6- · 6 reset to midnight 2- · 42
bit depth of internal processing 6- · 1 resetting via remote control 2- · 42
block diagram 6- · 64 setting 2- · 35

buttons common-mode rejection 2- · 10

escape 2- · 12 components
escape 3- · 2 obtaining 6- · 15
modify 2- · 12 composite
modify 3- · 1 circuit description 6- · 11
next 2- · 11 isolation transformer 2- · 9
NEXT 3- · 1 peak level control 1- · 20
previous 2- · 11 Composite
PREVIOUS 3- · 1 limiter 3- · 8
RECALL 2- · 12 composite baseband microwave STL 1- ·
RECALL 3- · 1 15
setup 2- · 12 composite limiter
setup 3- · 1 drive 3- · 28
soft buttons 2- · 11 pilot tone protection 2- · 9
buzz 5- · 1 composite output
bypass cable specification 2- · 8
local 1- · 22 I/O setup 2- · 20, 32
PC remote 1- · 23 impedance 2- · 8
remote interface 1- · 22 level adjustment range 2- · 8
test mode 1- · 21 level control 2- · 8
setting output impedance 2- · 8
specifications 6- · 3
C termination 2- · 8
composite output 2- · 8
cable composite outputs 1- · 8
shielding 2- · 10 compression
type recommended for analog I/O 2- · 6
defined 3- · 3
CD mastering, overprocessing in 3- · 5 compressor gate 3- · 23
chassis computer
getting inside 4 · 2
connecting to 2- · 5
ground 2- · 11
troubleshooting connections 5- · 7
circuit board locator drawing 6- · 29 Windows 2000 5- · 8
circuit description Windows XP 5- · 11
control 6- · 6 computer interface
LCD display 6- · 6 RS-232 2- · 5
user control interface 6- · 6 serial 2- · 5
circuit description 6- · 5 computer interface 1- · 10
CIT25 2- · 9 connecting
classical 3- · 15 through Win XP direct serial 2- · 56
cleaning front panel 4- · 1 connection to PC
clipper troubleshooting 5- · 6
bass clip threshold control 3- · 26 connectors
clipper shape control 3- · 27 audio 2- · 6
control list 3- · 26 input and output 2- · 6
final clip drive control 3- · 27 contrast 2- · 11
clipper, bass 3- · 8 contrast control 3- · 1
control knob 2- · 12 replacing 4- · 5
control knob 3- · 1 dual microwave STLs 1- · 16
controls dull sound
contrast 2- · 11 troubleshooting 5- · 5
contrast 3- · 1
description 3- · 1
soft buttons 3- · 1
E
corrosion 4- · 1
EAS
CPU board
modulation low 5- · 5
replacing 4- · 5
test tones 1- · 22
CPU module
easy setup 2- · 16
removing 4- · 3
equalizer
crossover
bass 3- · 37
allpass 3- · 25
bass shelf 3- · 17
linear phase 3- · 25
control list 3- · 17
modes 3- · 25
parametric 3- · 18
equalizer 3- · 7
D escape button 2- · 12
escape button 3- · 2
D/A converter Ethernet 2- · 42, 50, 39
circuit description 6- · 10 exciter overshoot 1- · 17
specification 6- · 2 Exit Test 2- · 41
delay
input/output spec 6- · 1
digital I/O 1- · 7 F
digital input
circuit description 6- · 9 factory presets
digital links 1- · 14 selecting 2- · 21
digital output factory presets 1- · 6
circuit description 6- · 11 factory service 5- · 13
display assembly final clip drive 3- · 27
removing 4 · 2 Firewall 2- · 50, 39
display board Firmware
parts list 6- · 24 updating 2300 2- · 73
replacing 4 · 5 five-band
distortion high frequency limiter control 3- · 27, 33
caused by poor source material 3- · 5 Fletcher-Munson 3- · 36
excessive 5- · 6 frequency response
IM 3- · 37 specification 6- · 1
on material with strong HF content 3- · 28 testing 4- · 10
specification 6- · 1 front panel 3- · 1
testing 4- · 10 Full Modify 3- · 11
troubleshooting 5- · 2 fuse 2- · 5
Distortion
Aliasing 3- · 9
dither 2- · 34 G
DSP
block diagram 6- · 64 gain reduction
circuit description 6- · 12 meters 2- · 12, 2
DSP board gate 3- · 23
removing 3- · 4 gate LED 2- · 13, 2
Gateway 2- · 50, 39 input meters 3- · 2
gateway address 2- · 43 input selector
getting inside the unit 4 · 2 I/O setup 2- · 30
GPI input/output board
specifications 6- · 4 removing 4- · 3
GPI interface inspection of package contents 2- · 1
testing 4- · 13 installation procedure 2- · 1
ground Internet
chassis 2- · 11 cannot access 5- · 8
ground lift switch 2- · 3, 5 IP address 2- · 42
grounding IP port 2- · 43
circuit 2- · 11 ITU412
loss of 4- · 1 setting up controller 2- · 22
power 2- · 11 ITU412 3- · 10, 34
grounding 2- · 10
grouping 2300s 3- · 43
J
H J.17
and 2300 digital I/O 1- · 7
Half-cosine interpolation limiter 3- · 8, 9 and NICAM 1- · 15
headphones 1- · 21 deemphasis applied to digital audio input 6-
HF enhancer 3- · 7 ·2
high frequency defined 1- · 7
excessive energy in source material 3- · 5 preemphasis applied to digital audio output
High Frequency Enhancer 3- · 20 6- · 3

high frequency limiter 3- · 27, 33

high-pass filter L
30 Hz 3- · 7, 20
hum 5- · 1 LEDs
gate 2- · 13, 2
Less-More
I
index 3- · 33
Less-More 3- · 21
I/O
level
AES/EBU 2- · 7
metering 1- · 19
connections 2- · 3
setup 2- · 18
I/O board
transmission 1- · 19
replacing 4- · 5
limiting
IC opamps
defined 3- · 3
troubleshooting 5- · 13
line voltage 2- · 2
idle gain 3- · 25
linear-phase crossover 3- · 25
input
line-up tones
analog, connecting 2- · 6
system will not pass at 100% modulation 5- ·
analog, specifications 6- · 2
5
digital, specifications 6- · 2
meters 2- · 12 line-up tones 1- · 20
SCA, specifications 6- · 4 lock
subcarrier 2- · 8 driven equipment cannot lock to 2300 output
input level 5- · 6
line-up 1- · 19 lockout
input meters 1- · 20 immediate 2- · 39
 programming local 2- · 39 multipath distortion 3- · 21
unlocking front panel 2- · 40 multiplex power 3- · 34
look-ahead
limiting 3- · 3
lossy data reduction N
in studio 1- · 18
NICAM 1- · 15 NAB Broadcast and Audio System Test CD
used in STLs · 14 4- · 6
loudness network
and distortion 3- · 4 timeserver 2- · 44
insufficient 5- · 6 networking 2- · 42
insufficient due to poor peak control 5- · 1 NEXT button 2- · 11
loudness/distortion tradeoff 3- · 27 NEXT button 3- · 1
L–R will not null 5- · 6 NICAM 1- · 15
noise
troubleshooting 5- · 3
M
null modem cable
communicating through 2- · 51
MAC address 5- · 7
null modem cable 2- · 48
main board
reattaching 4 · 5
measuring performance 4- · 6 O
meter
circuit description 6- · 7 Orban 222 stereo enhancer 3- · 20
composite 1- · 20
output
gain reduction 3- · 12
analog output level trim adjustment 4- · 9
meters
analog, connecting 2- · 7
AGC 2- · 13, 2
analog, specifications 6- · 2
AGC 3- · 2
composite 2- · 8
circuit description 6- · 7
composite, specifications 6- · 3
gain reduction 2- · 12, 2
digital, setting dither 2- · 34
input 2- · 12
digital, setting sample rate 2- · 34
input 3- · 2
digital, setting sync 2- · 34
studio 1- · 18
digital, setting word length · 34
Mod Reduction control 2- · 41 digital, specifications 6- · 3
modem output level
preparing for connection 2- · 61 I/O setup 2- · 33
recommended baud rate 2- · 62 quick setup 2- · 20
setting up 2- · 43 overshoot
specification for 2- · 49
in exciter 1- · 17
Windows 2000 configuration 2- · 61
overshoot
Windows XP configuration 2- · 67
excessive 5- · 1
modify button 2- · 12
overshoot 3- · 35
modify button 3- · 1
overshoot compensator drive 3- · 28
modulation control
troubleshooting poor 5- · 1
monitoring 1- · 21 P
Mono mode 2- · 41
MPX power controller parametric equalizer 3- · 7
stand-alone stereo encoder 3- · 35 parent preset 3- · 33
stereo generator mode 2- · 24 parts
MPX Power Offset 3- · 29 obtaining 6- · 15
parts list prcocessing
base board 6- · 15 styles 3- · 4
CPU module 6- · 17 pre-emphasis
display board 6- · 24 defeating 2- · 19
DSP board 6- · 23 quick setup 2- · 18
I/O board 6- · 20 preset
power supply 6- · 19 recalling 3- · 40
RS-232 board 6- · 18 restoring archived 3- · 42
parts list 6- · 14 saving user 3- · 41
passcode presets
and dial-up networking 2- · 40 backup 3- · 41
creating 2- · 38 classical 3- · 15
deleting 2- · 39 customizing 3- · 10
editing 2- · 39 factory 1- · 6
programming 2- · 37 factory programming 3- · 14
recovering from lost 2- · 40 saving user 3- · 7, 29, 13
PC sharing between 2300s 3- · 43
Orban installer program 2- · 49 user presets 1- · 6
PC board locator diagram 6- · 29 PREVIOUS button 2- · 11
PC control PREVIOUS button 3- · 1
security 1- · 23 processing
PC hardware requirements 2- · 48 AGC 3- · 7
PC Remote block diagram 6- · 64
aliases 3- · 44 distortion in 3- · 3
moving alias folders 3- · 45 equalization 3- · 7
multiple coexisting versions 3- · 45 input conditioning 3- · 6
upgrading versions 3- · 45 introduction to 3- · 3
PC Remote Software 3- · 38 multiband compression 3- · 8
peak control criteria 1- · 10 signal flow 3- · 6
peak-to-average ratio 3- · 3 stereo enhancement 3- · 7
two-band purist 30 · 10
performance
Proof of Performance 1- · 4
measuring 4- · 6
phase rotator 3- · 7, 20 Proof of Performance 3- · 36
phase-linear psychoacoustics 3- · 36
system group delay spec · 11 punch
two-band purist processing 3- · 10 bass 3- · 37
pilot tone
frequency out of tolerance 5- · 6
reference output 1- · 9
Q
reference output 2- · 10
quick setup 2- · 16
port, IP 2- · 43
Ports 2- · 50, 39
power R
cord 2- · 2, 5
power 2- · 2 rack-mounting unit 2- · 3
power supply ratio
circuit description 6- · 12 AGC 3- · 24
parts list 6- · 19 control 3- · 7
testing 4- · 8 limit 3- · 21
power supply board rear panel 2- · 5
reattaching 4 · 4 RECALL button 2- · 12
removing 4 · 4
RECALL button 3- · 1 screens
registration card 2- · 1 System Setup 2- · 16
remote Security
PC Remote software 3- · 38 lock immediately 2- · 39
remote control security 1- · 23
bypass 1- · 22 security 2- · 37
connecting 2- · 3 Serial Communications
GPI, specifications 6- · 4 setting up 2- · 51
wiring 2- · 4 serial connection
remote control 2- · 5 setting up direct 2- · 44
remote interface serial connector 2- · 5
functions controllable by 2- · 41 service 5- · 13
GPI 1- · 9 setup
programming GPI 2- · 41 I/O 2- · 29
testing 4- · 13 quick 2- · 16
wiring 2- · 4 setup button 2- · 12
remote interface connector 2- · 5 setup button 3- · 1
Remote Software 2- · 44, 48, 73 shelving equalizer
resolution bass, slope of 3- · 7
specification 6- · 1 shipping instructions 5- · 14
RFI 5- · 1 shrill sound
right channel balance troubleshooting 5- · 5
I/O setup 2- · 31 signal flow diagram 6- · 64
RJ45 jack 2- · 43 Silence sense
routine maintenance 4- · 1 Tally output 2- · 9, 29
RS232 Silence sense 2- · 28
testing 4- · 13 soft buttons 2- · 11
RS232 board soft buttons 3- · 1
replacing 4- · 5
Software
RS-232 connector 2- · 5
updating 2300 2- · 73
RS-232 interface Sound Technology 4- · 6
circuit description 6- · 7
source material
removing board 4- · 2
poor-quality, adjusting processing for 3- · 5
requirements for 3- · 5

S spare parts
obtaining 6- · 15
specifications 6- · 1
sample rate
at digital output 6- · 3
spectrum analyzer 4- · 6
internal, specification 6- · 1 ST ENC NO LIMIT 2- · 24
setting output 2- · 20 Stanford Research Systems 4- · 6
sample rate converter station ID
testing 4- · 11 setting 2- · 22
saving user presets 3- · 7, 29, 13 stereo encoder
SCA testing 4- · 12
composite meter does not indicate 1- · 20 stereo encoder 3- · 8
input, specifications 6- · 4 stereo encoder mode
inputs 1- · 8 audio processing for 2- · 25
interference from stereo 5- · 4 feature set 1- · 5
modulation reduction 2- · 23 input/output 1- · 7
screen display 2- · 11 lowpass filter 2- · 25
screen display 3- · 1 MPX power controller and 3- · 35
 selecting 1- · 6 bass attack control 3- · 33
setup 2- · 24 bass coupling control 3- · 32
signal flow 3- · 9 bass threshold control 3- · 33
stereo enhancer 3- · 20 clipping control 3- · 27
Stereo mode 2- · 41 crossover control 3- · 34
STL drive control 3- · 30
compatibility with 32 kHz sample rate 2- · 8 full modify controls 3- · 30
overshoot in uncomressed digital 2- · 8 gate control 3- · 31
systems 1- · 14, 15 high frequency clip threshold control 3- · 27
studio chassis mode 2- · 18 high frequency limiting control 3- · 32
master attack control 3- · 33
studio-transmitter link 1- · 14
master compression threshold 3- · 33
subassembly removal and replacement 4- ·
release control 3- · 30
2
subcarrier
input, specifications 6- · 4 U
inputs 2- · 9
modulation reduction 2- · 23 unlock front panel 2- · 40
subcarrier input 2- · 8 unpacking 2- · 1
subcarrier inputs 1- · 8 Updating software 2- · 73
subnet mask 2- · 42 user presets
switches archiving 3- · 13
ground lift 2- · 3, 5 creating 3- · 7, 29, 11, 13
voltage select 2- · 2, 5 user presets 1- · 6
system setup
quick setup 2- · 16
System Setup screen 2- · 16 V
voltage select switch 2- · 2, 5
T VPN, setting up 2- · 50, 39

Tally output
Programming 2- · 28 W
Silence sense threshold 2- · 28
Wiring 2- · 4 Warranty 1- · 23
TCP/IP warranty 6- · 5
setting parameters 2- · 42 whistle on-air
technical support 5- · 24, 13 troubleshooting 5- · 3
telephone support 5- · 24, 13 window
test modes 3- · 36 release control 3- · 24
time window size control 3- · 24
daylight saving 2- · 17 Windows
summer 2- · 17 installing services 2- · 48
time & date 2- · 17 Windows 2000
timeserver 2- · 44 adding direct serial connection 2- · 52, 56,
top cover 62, 69
reattaching 4 · 6 Direct Connect 5- · 8
removing 4 · 2 direct serial connection 2- · 51
transformer modem connect 5- · 10
composite isolation 2- · 9 modem connection 2- · 61
troubleshooting Windows XP
installation 5- · 1 direct connect 5- · 11
two-band modem configuration 2- · 67
 modem connect 5- · 12
word length
X
at output, specification 6- · 3
XLR connector
setting output 2- · 34
wiring standard 2- · 7
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INTRODUCTION 1-1

Section 1
Introduction
About this Manual
The Adobe pdf form of this manual contains numerous hyperlinks and bookmarks. A
reference to a numbered step or a page number (except in the Index) is a live hyper-
link; click on it to go immediately to that reference.

If the bookmarks are not visible, click the “Bookmarks” tab on the left
side of the Acrobat Reader window.
This manual has a table of contents and index. To search for a specific word or
phrase in the pdf version, you can also use the Adobe Acrobat Reader’s text search
function.

The OPTIMOD-FM 2300 Digital Audio Processor

Orban’s all-digital OPTIMOD-FM 2300 Audio Processor can help you achieve excel-
lent audio quality in FM stereo broadcasting. Because all processing is performed by
high-speed mathematical calculations within Motorola DSP56362 Digital Signal
Processing chips, the processing has cleanliness, quality, and stability over time and
temperature that is unmatched by analog processors.

Starting with V2.0 software, the 2300 can be used as an extremely high-quality
stand-alone stereo encoder operating at 64 kHz to 512 kHz sample rates and offer-
ing lowpass filtering, overshoot limiting, composite limiting, and an ITU412 multi-
plex power controller. When used in this mode, the 2300 must be driven (usually via
an STL) by a full-featured FM audio processor (like Orban’s 8500) that incorporates
preemphasis-aware HF limiting and peak control.

OPTIMOD-FM 2300 is descended from the industry-standard OPTIMOD-FM audio

processors. Thousands of these processors are on the air all over the world. They
have proven that the “OPTIMOD sound” attracts and keeps an audience even in the
most competitive commercial environment.

Because OPTIMOD-FM incorporates several audio processing innovations

exclusive to Orban products, you should not assume that it can be operated
in the same way as less sophisticated processors. If you do, you may get
disappointing results.
1-2 INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 2300

Take a little time now to familiarize yourself with OPTIMOD-FM. A small investment
of your time now will yield large dividends in audio quality.

The rest of Section 1 explains how OPTIMOD-FM fits into the FM broadcast facility.
Section 2 explains how to install it and set it up. Section 3 tells how to operate
OPTIMOD-FM. Sections 4 through 6 provide reference information.

OPTIMOD-FM was designed to deliver a high quality sound while simultaneously in-
creasing the average modulation of the channel substantially beyond that achiev-
able by “recording studio”-style compressors and limiters. Because such processing
can exaggerate flaws in the source material, it is very important that the source
audio be as clean as possible.

For best results, feed OPTIMOD-FM unprocessed audio. No other audio process-
ing is necessary or desirable.

If you wish to place level protection prior to your studio/transmitter link (STL), use
an Orban studio level control system expressly designed for this purpose. (At the
time of this writing, this is the Orban 8200ST OPTIMOD-Studio Compressor / Limiter /
HF Limiter / Clipper.) The 8200ST can be adjusted so that it substitutes for the broad-
band AGC circuitry in OPTIMOD-FM, which is then defeated.

User-Friendly Interface
 An LCD and full-time LED meters make setup, adjustment and programming
of OPTIMOD-FM easy—you can always see the metering while you’re adjusting
the processor. Navigation is by dedicated buttons, soft buttons (whose functions
are context-sensitive), and a large rotary knob.

Absolute Control of Peak Modulation

 The 2300 provides universal transmitter protection and audio processing
for FM broadcast. It can be configured to interface ideally with any commonly
found transmission system in the world.

 The 2300 provides pre-emphasis limiting for the two standard pre-emphasis
curves of 50s and 75s. Its pre-emphasis control is seldom audibly apparent,
producing a clean, open sound with subjective brightness matching the original
program.

 The 2300 achieves extremely tight peak control at all its outputs—analog
Left/Right, AES3 Left/Right, and composite baseband.

 By integrating the stereo encoder with the audio processing, the 2300 elimi-
nates the overshoot problems that waste valuable modulation in traditional ex-
ternal encoders. The stereo encoder has two outputs with independent level
controls, each capable of driving 7in parallel with 47,000pF, (100ft / 30m of
coaxial cable).
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INTRODUCTION 1-3
 The 2300 prevents aliasing distortion in subsequent stereo encoders or transmis-
sion links by providing bandwidth-limiting and overshoot-compensated 15
kHz low-pass filters ahead of the 2300’s audio outputs and stereo encoder.

Flexible Configuration
 The 2300 includes analog and AES3 digital inputs and outputs. Both digital in-
put and digital output are equipped with sample-rate converters and can oper-
ate at 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48, 88.2, and 96 kHz sample rates. The pre-emphasis
status and output levels are separately adjustable for the analog and digital
outputs.

 The 2300 has an internal, DSP-based stereo encoder (with a patented “half-
cosine interpolation” composite limiter operating at 512 kHz sample rate)
to generate the pilot tone stereo baseband signal and control its peak level. This
composite limiter is a unique, “you can only do this in DSP” process that beats
composite clippers by preserving stereo imaging while fully protecting the
stereo pilot tone, RDS / RBDS, and subcarriers.

 The analog inputs are transformerless, balanced 10k instrumentation-

amplifier circuits, and the analog outputs are transformerless balanced, and
floating (with 50 impedance) to ensure highest transparency and accurate
pulse response.

 The 2300 has two independent composite baseband outputs with digitally
programmable output levels. Robust line drivers enable them to drive 100 feet
of RG-59 coaxial cable without audible performance degradation.

 The 2300 has two subcarrier inputs that are mixed with the output of
OPTIMOD-FM’s stereo encoder before application to the composite output con-
nectors. One input can be re-jumpered to provide a 19 kHz pilot reference out-
put. The other input has an internal level trim to accommodate subcarrier gen-
erators with output levels as low as 220 mV.

 The 2300 precisely controls the audio bandwidth to 15 kHz. This prevents
overshoots in uncompressed digital links operating at a 32 kHz-sample rate and
prevents interference to the pilot tone and RDS (or RBDS) subcarrier.

 The 2300 has a defeatable, patented multiplex power limiter that controls
the multiplex power to ITU-R BS412 standards. An adjustable threshold allows a
station to achieve maximum legal multiplex power even if the downstream
transmission system introduces peak overshoots into the 2300-processed signal.
Because this limiter closes a feedback loop around the audio processing, it al-
lows the user to adjust the processor’s subjective setup controls freely
without violating BS412 limits, regardless of program material. The multiplex
power limiter acts on all outputs (not just the composite output) and works by
adjusting the thresholds in the multiband compressor instead of adding another
1-4 INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 2300

wideband gain control stage. The limiter is thus entirely multiband, which mini-
mizes spectral gain intermodulation. It reduces clipper drive when it reduces
power, simultaneously reducing clipping distortion.

 All input, output, and power connections are rigorously RFI-suppressed to

Orban’s traditional exacting standards, ensuring trouble-free installation.

 The 2300 is designed and certified to meet all applicable international

safety and emissions standards.

 The 2300 features a versatile Two-Band processing structure that can be set for
loudness processing or for “purist” processing, depending on the user-
configurable crossover type (either allpass or phase-linear).

 The 2300 can increase the density and loudness of the program material by
two-band compression, limiting, and clipping. This improves the consistency of
the station’s sound and increasing loudness and definition without producing
unpleasant side effects.

 The 2300 rides gain over an adjustable range of up to 25 dB, compressing dy-
namic range and compensating for both operator gain-riding errors and gain in-
consistencies in automated systems.

Controllable
 The 2300 can be remote-controlled by 5-12V pulses applied to eight pro-
grammable, optically isolated “general-purpose interface” (GPI) ports.

 2300 PC Remote software is a highly graphical application that runs under

Windows 2000 and XP. It communicates with a given 2300 via TCP/IP over mo-
dem, direct serial, and Ethernet connections. You can configure PC Remote to
switch between many 2300s via a convenient organizer that supports giving any
2300 an alias and grouping multiple 2300s into folders. Clicking a 2300’s icon
causes PC Remote to connect to that 2300 through an Ethernet network, or ini-
tiates a Windows Dial-Up or Direct Cable Connection if appropriate. The PC Re-
mote software allows the user to access all 2300 features (including advanced
controls not available from the 2300’s front panel), and allows the user to ar-
chive and restore presets, automation lists, and system setups (containing I/O
levels, digital word lengths, GPI functional assignments, etc.).

 OPTIMOD-FM contains a versatile real-time clock, which allows automation of

various events (including recalling presets) at pre-programmed times.

 A Bypass Test Mode can be invoked locally, by remote control (from either the
2300’s GPI port or the 2300 PC Remote application), or by automation to permit
broadcast system test and alignment or “proof of performance” tests.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INTRODUCTION 1-5
 OPTIMOD-FM contains a built-in line-up tone generator, facilitating quick and
accurate level setting in any system.

 OPTIMOD-FM's software can be upgraded by running Orban-supplied

downloadable upgrade software on a PC. The upgrade can occur remotely
through the 2300’s Ethernet port or serial port (connected to an external mo-
dem), or locally (by connecting a Windows® computer to the 2300’s serial port
through a null modem cable).

Stand-Alone Stereo Encoder Operation

 The sample rate is 64 kHz and multiples thereof, up to 512 kHz. The inter-
nal audio bandwidth is high enough to prevent overshoot caused by spectral
truncation of the left/right input signals that are band-limited to 18 kHz or
lower.

 15, 16, and 17 kHz linear-phase lowpass filtering can be applied to the input
signal. To minimize input/output delay, this filter can be bypassed, which is ap-
propriate if the input signal is correctly band limited by the audio processor driv-
ing the 2300.

 A Left/right domain overshoot limiter is available. This uses the same tech-
nology as Orban’s 8218 stand-alone stereo encoder, combining look-ahead and
band-limited clipping techniques to control STL-induced overshoots while mini-
mizing artifacts.

 A dual-mode composite limiter is available. It can operate in either “Half-

Cosine Interpolation” mode or conventional hard clipper mode. The “Half-
Cosine” mode provides better separation and preservation of stereo imaging,
while the “Hard” mode provides brighter sound because it creates waveforms
that are closer to square waves. Both modes provide excellent spectral protec-
tion of the pilot tone and subcarrier regions. To ensure accurate peak control,
the limiter operates at 512 kHz sample rate.

 A high-accuracy ITU412 multiplex power controller is available, with user

control over the multiplex power threshold. This allows you to compensate for
overshoots in the signal path upstream from the 2300, preventing excessive re-
duction of the multiplex power

 The input signal can be flat or pre-emphasized to 50 µs or 75 µs.

 The 2300 can apply J.17 de-emphasis to the input signal.

 Silence alarm and digital audio fault tally outputs are available.

 Versatile remote control is available via RS232 serial, GPI, and Ethernet.
1-6 INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 2300

 All normal 2300 inputs and outputs are available, including analog and digi-
tal inputs, two composite outputs with independent level controls, and two
subcarrier inputs (one of which can be repurposed to emit a 19 kHz pilot
reference output for RDS/RBDS generators).

Presets in OPTIMOD-FM
There are two distinct kinds of presets in OPTIMOD-FM: factory presets and user
presets.

Factory Presets
The Factory Presets are our “factory recommended settings” for various program
formats or types. The description indicates the processing structure and the type of
processing. Each Factory Preset on the Preset list is really a library of more than 20
separate presets, selected by navigating to MODIFY PROCESSING / LESS-MORE and us-
ing the LESS-MORE control to adjust OPTIMOD-FM for less or more processing. The
factory presets are listed and described starting on page 3-14.

Factory Presets are stored in OPTIMOD-FM’s non-volatile memory and cannot be

erased. You can change the settings of a Factory Preset, but you must then store
those settings as a User Preset, which you are free to name as you wish. The Factory
Preset remains unchanged.

To select “audio processor mode” or “stand-alone stereo encoder mode,” recall a

Factory or User Preset that uses this mode. The 2300 will automatically re-load DSP
code to switch modes. This reload will cause all outputs to mute for less than one
second. At the composite outputs, the stereo pilot tone will mute but any external
subcarriers applied to the 2300’s SCA inputs will not.

User Presets
User Presets permit you to change a Factory Preset to suit your requirements and
then store those changes. You can make User Presets from any Factory Preset, in-
cluding Factory Presets associated with the 2300’s stand-alone stereo encoder mode.

You can store more than 100 User Presets, limited only by available memory in your
2300 (which will vary slightly depending on the version of your 2300’s software). You
can give your preset a name up to 18 characters long.

You cannot create User Presets from scratch. You must always start by recalling a
Factory Preset. Make your changes and then store your modified preset as a User
Preset. You can also recall a previously created user preset, modify it, and save it
again, either overwriting the old version or saving under a new name. In all cases,
the original Factory Preset remains for you to return to if you wish.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INTRODUCTION 1-7
User Presets are stored in non-volatile memory that does not require battery
backup. To Create or Save a User Preset on page 3-13 has more about User Presets.

Input/Output Configuration
OPTIMOD-FM simultaneously accommodates:

 Digital AES3 Left/Right inputs and outputs.

 Analog Left/Right inputs and outputs.

 Composite stereo outputs.

 Subcarrier (SCA and RDS / RBDS) inputs.

Digital AES3 Left/Right Input/Output

The digital input and output conform to the professional AES3 standard. They both
have sample rate converters to allow operation at 32, 44.1, 48, 88.2, and 96 kHz
sample frequencies.

The Left/Right digital input is on one XLR-type female connector on the rear panel;
the Left/Right digital output is on one XLR-type male connector on the rear panel.

OPTIMOD-FM provides digital and analog inputs and outputs. You select whether
OPTIMOD-FM uses the digital or analog input either locally or by remote interface.
If OPTIMOD-FM is set to accept a digital input and the feed fails, OPTIMOD-FM will
automatically switch back to the analog input.

Level control of the AES3 input is accomplished via software control through System
Setup (see step 5 on page 2-32) or through PC Remote.

Both analog and digital outputs are active continuously.

The 2300’s output sample rate can be locked either to the 2300’s internal crystal
clock or to the sample rate present at its AES3 input.

The 2300 can apply J.17 de-emphasis to signals applied to its digital input and J.17
pre-emphasis to the processed signal emitted from its digital output. J.17 is a
6 dB/octave shelving pre-emphasis/de-emphasis standard with break points at
400 Hz and 4 kHz. It is used mainly in older studio/transmitter links that employ
NICAM technology. The 2300’s provisions for J.17 make it fully compatible with sys-
tems using this standard.

When the 2300 is operated as a stand-alone stereo encoder, the analog and digital
outputs emit the same signal that drives the 2300’s stereo encoder DSP block. This
signal may be lowpass filtered and/or protection-limited, depending on control set-
tings in the active preset. The level, de-emphasis, and other parameters of these
1-8 INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 2300

outputs are set in SYSTEM SETUP and are the same regardless of whether the 2300 is
operating in its audio processor or stand-alone stereo encoder modes.

Analog Left/Right Input/Output

The left and right analog inputs are on XLR-type female connectors on the rear
panel. Input impedance is greater than 10k; balanced and floating. Inputs can ac-
commodate up to +27 dBu (0 dBu = 0.775Vrms).

The left and right analog outputs are on XLR-type male connectors on the rear
panel. Output impedance is 50; balanced and floating. The outputs can drive 600
or higher impedances, balanced or unbalanced. The peak output level is adjustable
from –6 dBu to +24 dBu.

Level control of the analog inputs and outputs is accomplished via software control
through System Setup (see step 3 on page 2-30 and step 7 on page 2-33) or through
2300 PC Remote.

Stereo Analog Baseband Composite Output

The stereo encoder has two unbalanced analog baseband outputs on two BNC con-
nectors on the rear panel. Each output can be strapped for or 7source imped-
ance and can drive up to 8V peak-to-peak into 7in parallel with up to 0.047F
(100ft / 30m of RG-59/U cable) before any significant audible performance degrada-
tion occurs.

See the footnote on page 1-13 and refer to Figure 2-3 on page 2-9.

Independent level control of each output is via software (see step 6 on page 2-32)

A ground lift switch is available on the rear panel. This is useful to prevent ground
loops between the 2300 and the transmitter.

Subcarriers
The stereo encoder has two unbalanced 60subcarrier (SCA) inputs with rear-
panel BNC connectors to accept any subcarrier at or above 23 kHz. The subcarriers
are mixed into each composite output and their level is not affected by the compos-
ite level control for that output.

The 2300 does not digitize subcarriers; the mixing occurs after D/A conversion and is
analog.

Subcarrier inputs sum into composite baseband outputs before digitally controlled
composite attenuator. The sensitivity of the SCA 1 input is variable from 220 mV p-p
to >10 V p-p to produce 10% injection. Sensitivity is adjustable by an internal PC-
board-mounted trim pot. The sensitivity of the SCA 2 input is fixed at 772 mV p-p to
produce 10% injection.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INTRODUCTION 1-9
The correct peak level of the stereo program applied to the stereo encoder some-
times depends on the number of subcarriers in use. Some regulatory authorities re-
quire that total baseband peak modulation be maintained within specified limits.
Thus, the level of the stereo main and subchannel must be reduced when a subcar-
rier is turned on. The 2300’s remote control feature allows you to reduce the stereo
main and subchannel level by connecting an on/off signal from your subcarrier gen-
erator (See page 2-8). You define the amount of reduction in percent using the pro-
cedure in step 20 on page 2-23. See page 2-41 for information on programming the
remote control.

A jumper on the circuit board can reconfigure the SCA 2 input to provide the stereo
pilot tone only, which can provide a pilot reference for an RDS subcarrier generator.

Remote Control Interface

The Remote Control Interface is a set of eight optically isolated GPI inputs and two
open-collector tally outputs on a DB-25 connector, which can be activated by 5-12V
DC. The GPI inputs can control various functions of the 2300:

 Recall any Factory Preset, User Preset, Test Mode state (Bypass or Tone), or
exit from a Test Mode to the previous processing preset.

 Switch the stereo encoder to stereo, mono-from-left, mono-from-right, or

mono-from-sum audio input. This also determines the feed to the entire proc-
essing chain so that facilities that do not use the 2300’s stereo encoder can
change stereo/mono mode and select the source when in mono mode.

 Switch the 2300 to use either the analog input or the digital input.

 Reduce the stereo main and subchannel modulation to compensate for

transmitter overshoot and subcarrier inputs (SCAs).
The remote control of overshoot compensation and SCA modulation (see
page 2-41) is not latching. You must supply a continuous current to the
programmed remote input to hold the gain at its compensated level. Use
the status outputs of your transmitter and / or SCA generators to provide
the switching signal so the compensation will automatically follow the
transmitter and / or subcarrier generator on the air.

 Reset the 2300’s internal clock to the nearest hour or to midnight.

The tally outputs can be programmed to indicate the following:

 Input: Analog: Indicates that the 2300 is processing audio from its analog in-
put.

 Input: Digital: Indicates that the 2300 is processing audio from its AES3 digital
input.

 Analog Input Silent: Indicates that the level at either or both analog input
channels is below the threshold set in step (A) on page 2-28.
1-10 INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 2300

 AES Input Silent: Indicates that the level at either or both digital input chan-
nels is below the threshold set in step in step (A) on page 2-28.

 AES Input Error: Indicates that the 2300’s AES input receiver chip has detected
a problem with the data being received such that the data is unusable. When
the chip detects such an error, it automatically switches the input to Analog.

 No Function: Tally output is disabled.

You can reconfigure the functions of the inputs and outputs via System Setup. For
example, if you are not using the stereo encoder, the three inputs ordinarily dedi-
cated to controlling the state of the stereo encoder can instead be re-configured to
call three additional presets.

See page 2-41 for information on programming the remote control interface.

Computer Interface
On the rear panel of the 2300 are an RS-232 serial port and an Ethernet port for in-
terfacing to IBM-compatible PCs. These computer interfaces support remote control
and metering, and allow downloading software upgrades.

Each 2300 package ships with 2300 PC Remote software, an application for any IBM-
compatible PC running Microsoft Windows 2000 (Service Pack 3 or higher) or XP.
2300 PC Remote permits you to adjust any 2300 preset by remote control or to do
virtually anything else that you can do from the 2300’s front panel controls. The
program displays all of the 2300’s LCD meters on the computer screen to aid remote
adjustment.

RS-232 Serial Port

2300 PC Remote can communicate at up to 115 kbps via modem or direct connection
between the computer and the 2300 through their RS-232 serial ports.

RJ45 Ethernet Connector

The 2300 can be connected to any 10 or 100 Mbps Ethernet network that supports
the TCP/IP protocol.

See Networking and Remote Control on page 2-42 for more information.

Optimal Control of Peak Modulation Levels

In the 2300’s audio processor mode, the audio processing circuitry produces a signal
that is pre-emphasized to either the 50s or 75s standard pre-emphasis curve. It is
precisely and absolutely high-frequency-controlled and peak-controlled to prevent
over-modulation, and is filtered at 15 kHz to protect the 19 kHz pilot and prevent
distortion caused by aliasing-related non-linear crosstalk. If this signal is fed directly
into a stereo encoder, peak modulation levels on the air will be precisely controlled.
However, if the audio processor’s signal is fed to the stereo encoder through any cir-
cuitry with frequency response errors and/or non-constant group delay, the peaks
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INTRODUCTION 1-11
will be magnified. Peak modulation will increase, but average modulation will not.
The modulation level must therefore be reduced to accommodate the larger peaks.
Reduced average modulation level will cause reduced loudness and a poorer signal-
to-noise ratio at the receiver.

Landline equalizers, transformers, and 15 kHz low-pass filters and pre-emphasis

networks in stereo encoders typically introduce frequency response errors and non-
constant group delay. There are three criteria for preservation of peak levels
through the audio system:

1) The system group delay must be essentially constant throughout the frequency
range containing significant energy (30-15,000Hz). If low-pass filters are present,
this may require the use of delay equalization. The deviation from linear-phase
must not exceed 1 from 30-15,000Hz.

2) The low-frequency 3 dB point of the system must be placed at 0.15Hz or lower

(this is not a misprint!). This is necessary to ensure less than 1% overshoot in a
50Hz square wave and essentially constant group delay to 30Hz.

3) Any pre-emphasis used in the audio transmission system prior to the stereo en-
coder must be canceled by a precisely complementary de-emphasis: Every pole
and zero in the pre-emphasis filter must be complemented by a zero and pole of
identical complex frequency in the de-emphasis network. An all-pole de-
emphasis network (like the classic series resistor feeding a grounded capacitor) is
not appropriate.

In this example, the network could be fixed by adding a second resistor

between ground and the capacitor, which would introduce a zero.
Low-pass filters (including anti-aliasing filters in digital links), high-pass filters, trans-
formers, distribution amplifiers, and long transmission lines can all cause the above
criteria to be violated, and must be tested and qualified. It is clear that the above
criteria for optimal control of peak modulation levels are most easily met when the
audio processor directly feeds the stereo encoder. In the 2300, no circuit elements
that might distort the shape of the waveform are interposed between the audio
processor and the stereo encoder. We therefore recommend using the 2300 with its
built-in stereo encoder whenever practical.

Best Location for OPTIMOD-FM

The best location for OPTIMOD-FM is as close as possible to the transmitter, so that
its stereo encoder output can be connected to the transmitter through a circuit path
that introduces the least possible change in the shape of OPTIMOD-FM’s carefully
peak-limited composite waveform—a short length of coaxial cable. If this is impossi-
ble, the next best arrangement is to feed the 2300’s AES3 digital output through an
all-digital, uncompressed path to the transmitter's exciter, although this will pre-
clude using the 2300’s composite limiter.
1-12 INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 2300

Use the 2300’s left and right analog audio outputs in situations where the stereo en-
coder and exciter are under the jurisdiction of an independent transmission author-
ity, and where the programming agency’s jurisdiction ends at the interface between
the audio facility and the link connecting the audio facility to the transmitter. (The
link might be telephone / post lines, analog microwave radio, or various types of
digital paths.) This situation is not ideal because artifacts that cannot be controlled
by the audio processor can be introduced by the link to the transmitter, by transmit-
ter peak limiters, or by the external stereo encoder.

If the transmitter is not accessible:

All audio processing must be done at the studio and you must tolerate any damage
that occurs later. If you can obtain a broadband (0-75 kHz) phase-linear link to the
transmitter, and the transmitter authority will accept the delivery of a baseband en-
coded signal, use the 2300’s internal stereo encoder at the studio location to feed
the STL. Then feed the output of the STL receiver directly into the transmitter’s ex-
citer with no intervening processing.

If an uncompressed left/right digital link is available to the transmitter, this is also an

excellent means of transmission, although it will not pass the effects of the 2300’s
composite processor (if you are using it). However, if the digital link employs lossy
compression, it will disturb peak levels.

If only an audio link is available, use the 2300’s left and right audio outputs and feed
the audio, without pre-emphasis, directly into the link. If possible, request that any
transmitter protection limiters be adjusted for minimum possible action—OPTIMOD-
FM does most of that work. Transmitter protection limiters should respond only to
signals caused by faults or by spurious peaks introduced by imperfections in the link.
To ensure maximum quality, all equipment in the signal path after the studio should
be carefully aligned and qualified to meet the appropriate standards for bandwidth,
distortion, group delay and gain stability, and such equipment should be re-
qualified at reasonable intervals. (See Optimal Control of Peak Modulation Levels on
page 1-10).

If the transmitter is accessible:

You can achieve the most accurate control of modulation peaks by locating
OPTIMOD-FM at the transmitter site and using OPTIMOD-FM’s stereo encoder to
drive the transmitter. You can usually also obtain good results by locating OPTIMOD-
FM at the studio and connecting the baseband output of its stereo encoder to the
transmitter through a composite baseband STL (see page 1-15). However, many ana-
log composite baseband STLs do not control peaks perfectly because of bounce (see
page 1-17), and locating OPTIMOD-FM at the transmitter site (where it can control
peaks just prior to the transmitter’s RF exciter) is thus likely to maximize loudness.
The ideal link is an uncompressed digital composite STL because these have virtually
flawless waveform fidelity and allow full use of the 2300’s composite limiter.

Because OPTIMOD-FM controls peaks, it is irrelevant whether the audio link feeding
OPTIMOD-FM’s input terminals is phase-linear. However, the link should have low
noise, the flattest possible frequency response from 30-15,000Hz, and low non-linear
distortion.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INTRODUCTION 1-13
We strongly recommend that you use the 2300’s internal stereo encoder to feed the
output of the encoder directly. You will achieve a louder sound on the air, with bet-
ter control of peak modulation, than if you use most external stereo encoders. Ex-
ceptions are Orban’s 8218 stereo encoder and the 2300 in stereo encoder mode.
These encoders do not add overshoot, and, in fact, contains their own overshoot
limiters. However, because it accepts audio in left/right form, the 8218 will not let
you exploit the 2300’s composite limiter. The 2300 (in stereo encoder mode) includes
a composite limiter and does not have this limitation.

The shorter the baseband cable from OPTIMOD-FM to exciter, the less likely that
ground loops or other noise problems will occur in the installation. If you require a
long cable run, you can use Orban’s CIT25 Composite Isolation Transformer to break
any ground loops. This transformer will ordinarily cure even the most stubborn hum
or noise caused by the composite connection between OPTIMOD-FM and the exciter.
Its instruction manual contains complete information on its installation and applica-
tion.

If a separate stereo encoder must be used, feed the encoder directly from the 2300’s
left and right analog outputs. If possible, bypass the pre-emphasis network and the
input low-pass filters in the encoder so that they cannot introduce spurious peaks.
Because of their special design, OPTIMOD-FM’s pre-emphasis network and low-pass
filters perform the same functions while retaining tight peak control.

Connect the composite output of the 2300 to the baseband input of the exciter
through less than 100 feet (30 meters) of coaxial cable. 100 feet of coaxial cable (as-
suming 30-pF / foot capacitance) will reduce measured separation at 15 kHz (worst
case) to approximately 60dB. This separation is comfortably above the separation
(approximately 20dB) that starts to cause perceptible changes in the stereo image. 1
See Figure 2-3 on page 2-9.

1Julie M. Adkins and Robert D. Sorkin: “Effect of Channel Separation on Earphone-

Presented Tones, Noise, and Stereophonic Material,” J. Audio Engineering Society,
vol. 33 pp. 234-239, 1985.

Subjects listened to 500-Hz tones, broadband noise, and stereophonic program ma-
terial through earphones and adjusted the channel separation, via a manual control,
until the degradation of the spatial effect became detectable. Mean channel separa-
tions ranged from 10 to 15.9 dB for the musical selections employed and from 13.7
to 16.8 dB for the noise and tonal stimuli. The results are discussed in terms of exist-
ing data on detectable stereo separation and on the discrimination of interaural
time differences. [Abstract ©Audio Engineering Society, Inc.]
1-14 INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 2300

Studio-Transmitter Link

Transmission from Studio to Transmitter

There are five types of studio-transmitter links (STLs) in common use in broadcast
service: uncompressed digital, digital with lossy compression (like MPEG, Dolby®, or
APT-x®), microwave, analog landline (telephone / post line), and audio subcarrier on
a video microwave STL.

STLs are used in three fundamentally different ways. They can either (1) pass un-
processed audio for application to the 2300’s input, (2) they can pass the 2300’s
peak-controlled analog or digital left and right audio outputs, or (3) they can pass
the 2300’s peak-controlled composite stereo baseband output. The three applica-
tions have different performance requirements. In general, a link that passes un-
processed audio should have very low noise and low non-linear distortion, but its
transient response is not important. A link that passes processed audio doesn’t need
as low a noise floor as a link passing unprocessed audio. However, its transient re-
sponse is critical. At the current state of the art, an uncompressed digital link using
digital inputs and outputs to pass audio in left/right format achieves best results. We
will elaborate below.

Digital Links
Digital links may pass audio as straightforward PCM encoding or they may apply
lossy data reduction processing to the signal to reduce the number of bits per sec-
ond required for transmission through the digital link. Such processing will almost
invariably distort peak levels, and such links must therefore be carefully qualified
before you use them to carry the peak-controlled output of the 2300 to the trans-
mitter. For example, the MPEG Layer 2 algorithm can increase peak levels up to 4 dB
at 160kB / sec by adding large amounts of quantization noise to the signal. While
the desired program material may psychoacoustically mask this noise, it is neverthe-
less large enough to affect peak levels severely. For any lossy compression system the
higher the data rate, the less the peak levels will be corrupted by added noise, so
use the highest data rate practical in your system.

It is practical (though not ideal) to use lossy data reduction to pass unprocessed au-
dio to the 2300’s input. The data rate should be at least of “contribution quality”—
the higher, the better. If any part of the studio chain is analog, we recommend using
at least 20-bit A/D conversion before encoding.

Because the 2300 uses multiband limiting, it can dynamically change the frequency
response of the channel. This can violate the psychoacoustic masking assumptions
made in designing the lossy data reduction algorithm. Therefore, you need to leave
“headroom” in the algorithm so that the 2300’s multiband processing will not un-
mask quantization noise. This is also true of any lossy data reduction applied in the
studio (such as hard disk digital delivery systems). For MPEG Layer 2 encoding, we
recommend 384 kb/second or higher.

Some links may use straightforward PCM (pulse-code modulation) without lossy
data reduction. If you connect to these through an AES3 digital interface, these can
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INTRODUCTION 1-15
be very transparent provided they do not truncate the digital words produced by
the devices driving their inputs. Because the 2300’s output is tightly band-limited to
15 kHz, it can be passed without significant overshoot by equally well by any link
with 32 kHz or higher sample frequency.

Currently available sample rate converters use phase-linear filters (which have con-
stant group delay at all frequencies). If they do not remove spectral energy from the
original signal, the sample rate conversion, whether upward or downward, will not
add overshoot to the signal. This is not true of systems that are not strictly band-
limited to 15 kHz, where downward sample rate conversion will remove spectral en-
ergy and will therefore introduce overshoot.

If the link does not have an AES3 input, you must drive its analog input from the
2300’s analog output. This is less desirable because the link’s analog input circuitry
may not meet all requirements for passing processed audio without overshoot.

NICAM is a sort of hybrid between PCM and lossy data reduction systems. It uses a
block-companded floating-point representation of the signal with J.17 pre-
emphasis.

Older technology converters (including some older NICAM encoders) may exhibit
quantization distortion unless they have been correctly dithered. Additionally, they
can exhibit rapid changes in group delay around cut-off because their analog filters
are ordinarily not group-delay equalized. The installing engineer should be aware of
all of these potential problems when designing a transmission system.

Any problems can be minimized by always driving a digital STL with the 2300’s AES3
digital output, which will provide the most accurate interface to the STL. The digital
input and output accommodate sample rates of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz,
and 96 kHz.

Composite Baseband Microwave STLs

The composite baseband microwave STL carries the standard pilot-tone stereo base-
band, and therefore receives the output of a stereo encoder located at the studio
site. The receiver output of the composite STL is the stereo baseband signal, which is
applied directly to the wideband input of the FM broadcast transmitter’s exciter.
Thus, no stereo encoder is needed at the transmitter.

In general, a composite microwave STL provides good audio quality, as long as there
is a line-of-sight transmission path from studio to transmitter of less than 10 miles
(16 km). If not, RF signal-to-noise ratio, multipath distortion, and diffraction effects
can cause serious quality problems. Where a composite STL is used, use the 2300’s
stereo encoder to drive the composite STL transmitter.

Uncompressed digital composite baseband microwave STLs, if properly designed,

have excellent performance and we recommend them highly. However, the fact that
they are digital does not eliminate the requirement that they have low frequency
response that is less than 3 dB down at 0.15 Hz. Any such STL should be qualified to
ensure that it meets this specification.
1-16 INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 2300

Dual Microwave STLs

Dual microwaves STLs use two separate transmitters and receivers to pass the left
and right channels in discrete form. Dual microwave STLs offer greater noise immu-
nity than composite microwave STLs. However, problems include gain- and phase-
matching of the left and right channels, overloads induced by pre-emphasis, and re-
quirements that the audio applied to the microwave transmitters be processed to
prevent over-modulation of the microwave system.

Lack of transparency in the path will cause overshoot. Unless carefully designed,
dual microwave STLs can introduce non-constant group delay in the audio spectrum,
distorting peak levels when used to pass processed audio. Nevertheless, in a system
using a microwave STL, the 2300 is sometimes located at the studio and any over-
shoots induced by the link are tolerated or removed by the transmitter’s protection
limiter (if any). The 2300 can only be located at the transmitter if the signal-to-noise
ratio of the STL is good enough to pass unprocessed audio. The signal-to-noise ratio
of the STL can be used optimally if an Orban Optimod-PC 1101, Optimod 6300,
8200ST Compressor / Limiter / HF Limiter / Clipper or an 4000 Transmission Limiter
protects the link from overload. Of these, the 1101 and 6300 are currently manufac-
tured as of this writing and are the preferred choices because their AGCs are identi-
cal to the AGC in the 8500.

If the 2300 is located at the transmitter and fed unprocessed audio from a micro-
wave STL, it may be useful to use a companding-type noise reduction system (like
dbx Type 2 or Dolby SR) around the link. This will minimize any audible noise
buildup caused by compression within the 2300.

Some microwave links can be modified such that the deviation from linear phase is
less than +10 from 20 Hz to 15 kHz and frequency response is less than 3 dB down
at 0.15Hz and less than 0.1 dB down at 20 kHz. This specification results in less than
1% overshoot with processed audio. Many such links have been designed to be eas-
ily configured at the factory for composite operation, where an entire FM stereo
baseband is passed. The requirements for maintaining stereo separation in compos-
ite operation are similar to the requirements for high waveform fidelity with low
overshoot. Therefore, most links have the potential for excellent waveform fidelity
if they are configured for composite operation (even if a composite FM stereo signal
is not actually being applied to the link).

Nevertheless, in a dual-microwave system, the 2300 is usually located at the main FM

transmitter and is driven by the microwave receivers. One of Orban’s studio level
control systems, such as the 8200ST, protects the microwave transmitters at the stu-
dio from overload. These units also perform the gain riding function ordinarily exe-
cuted by the AGC section of the 2300’s processing, and optimize the signal-to-noise
ratio obtainable from the dual-microwave link.

If the STL microwave uses pre-emphasis, its input pre-emphasis filter will probably
introduce overshoots that will increase peak modulation without any increases in
average modulation. If the studio level control system is capable of producing a pre-
emphasized output, we strongly recommend that the microwave STL’s pre-emphasis
be defeated, and pre-emphasis performed in the studio level control system. This
frees the system from potential overshoot. (The Orban 8200ST can be readily con-
figured to produce a pre-emphasized output.)
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INTRODUCTION 1-17
Further, it is common for a microwave STL to bounce because of a large infrasonic
peak in its frequency response caused by an under-damped automatic frequency
control (AFC) phase-locked loop. This bounce can increase the STL’s peak carrier de-
viation by as much as 2dB, reducing average modulation. Many commercial STLs
have this problem.

Some consultants presently offer modifications to minimize or eliminate this prob-

lem. If your exciter or STL has this problem, you may contact Orban Customer Service
for the latest information on such services.

Analog Landline (PTT / Post Office Line)

Analog landline quality is extremely variable, ranging from excellent to poor.
Whether landlines should be used or not depends upon the quality of the lines lo-
cally available, and upon the availability of other alternatives. Due to line equalizer
characteristics and phase shifts, even the best landlines tend to veil audio quality
slightly. They will certainly be the weakest link in a FM broadcast chain.

Slight frequency response irregularities and non-constant group delay characteristics

will alter the peak-to-average ratio, and will thus reduce the effectiveness of any
peak limiting performed prior to their inputs.

Using the Orban 8100AST (or 8100A/ST) External AGC

with the 2300
If you have an OPTIMOD-FM 8100A1 (or 8100A or 8100A/1) installation that uses an
Orban 8100AST (or 8100A/ST) external AGC at the studio to protect an STL (with the
main 8100A, 8100A1 or 8100A/1 chassis at the transmitter), you may wish to con-
tinue to use the external AGC to protect the STL when you install the 2300 at the
transmitter.

If you are keeping your analog OPTIMOD-FM as a standby processor, you will proba-
bly want to use the external AGC to drive both the 2300 and the 8100A1 (also called
8100A/1) transmitter chassis in parallel. This is usually practical. However, complica-
tions will occur if you are not using an Orban 8100AXT2 (also called 8100A/XT2) Six-
Band Limiter Accessory with your 8100A1, because, to correctly drive a 2300, the ex-
ternal AGC must be strapped as if it were driving an 8100A1 (or 8100A/1) +
8100AXT2 (or 8100A/XT2) system. Therefore, if you have only an 8100A1 (or
8100A/1), you will have to re-strap the external AGC for operation without the XT2
before you can put the standby 8100A1 (or 8100A/1) on the air.

STL and Exciter Overshoot

Earlier in this section, we discussed at length what is required to prevent STLs from
overshooting. There are similar requirements for FM exciters. Nevertheless, in some
installations, some overshoot is inevitable. If this is a problem in your installation,
the 2300’s remote control feature offers the means to reduce the peak level of the
2300’s audio output as necessary. This way, you can still use the 2300’s line-up tone
to adjust the steady-state deviation to 75 kHz. Yet, the reduced peak level of the
1-18 INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 2300

audio emitted from the 2300 ensures that the carrier deviates no further than 75
kHz after overshoot. (See step 20 on page 2-23.)

Using Lossy Data Reduction in the Studio

Many stations are now using lossy data reduction algorithms like MPEG-1 Layer 2 to
increase the storage time of digital playback media. In addition, source material is
often supplied through a lossy data reduction algorithm, whether from satellite or
over landlines. Sometimes, several encode / decode cycles will be cascaded before
the material is finally presented to OPTIMOD-FM’s input.

All such algorithms operate by increasing the quantization noise in discrete fre-
quency bands. If not psychoacoustically masked by the program material, this noise
may be perceived as distortion, “gurgling,” or other interference. Psychoacoustic
calculations are used to ensure that the added noise is masked by the desired pro-
gram material and not heard. Cascading several stages of such processing can raise
the added quantization noise above the threshold of masking, such that it is heard.

In addition, at least one other mechanism can cause the noise to become audible at
the radio. OPTIMOD-FM’s multiband limiter performs an “automatic equalization”
function that can radically change the frequency balance of the program. This can
cause noise that would otherwise have been masked to become unmasked because
the psychoacoustic masking conditions under which the masking thresholds were
originally computed have changed.

Accordingly, if you use lossy data reduction in the studio, you should use the highest
data rate possible. This maximizes the headroom between the added noise and the
threshold where it will be heard. Also, you should minimize the number of encode
and decode cycles, because each cycle moves the added noise closer to the threshold
where the added noise is heard.

About Transmission Levels and Metering

Meters
Studio engineers and transmission engineers consider audio levels and their meas-
urements differently, so they typically use different methods of metering to monitor
these levels. The VU meter is an average-responding meter (measuring the approxi-
mate RMS level) with a 300ms rise time and decay time; the VU indication usually
under-indicates the true peak level by 8 to 14 dB. The Peak Program Meter (PPM)
indicates a level between RMS and the actual peak. The PPM has an attack time of
10ms, which is slow enough to cause the meter to ignore narrow peaks and under-
indicate the true peak level by 5 dB or more. The absolute peak-sensing meter or
LED indicator shows the true peak level. It has an instantaneous attack time and a
release time slow enough to allow the engineer to read the peak level easily. Fig. 1-1
shows the relative difference between the absolute peak level, and the indications
of a VU meter and a PPM for a few seconds of music program.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INTRODUCTION 1-19
Studio Line-up Levels and Headroom
The studio engineer is primarily concerned with calibrating the equipment to pro-
vide the required input level for proper operation of each device, and so that all de-
vices operate with the same input and output levels. This facilitates patching devices
in and out without recalibration.

For line-up, the studio engineer uses a calibration tone at a studio standard level,
commonly called line-up level, reference level, or operating level. Metering at the
studio is by a VU meter or PPM (Peak Program Meter). As discussed above, the VU or
PPM indication under-indicates the true peak level. Most modern studio audio de-
vices have a clipping level of no less than +21 dBu and often +24 dBu or more.
Therefore, the studio standardizes on a maximum program indication on the meter
that is lower than the clipping level, so those peaks that the meter does not indicate
will not be clipped. Line-up level is usually at this same maximum meter indication.
In facilities that use VU meters, this level is usually at 0VU, which corresponds to the
studio standard level, typically +4 or +8 dBu.

For facilities using +4 dBu standard level, instantaneous peaks can reach +18 dBu or
higher (particularly if the operator overdrives the console or desk). Older facilities
with +8 dBu standard level and equipment that clips at +18 or +21 dBu will experi-
ence noticeable clipping on some program material.

In facilities that use the BBC-standard PPM, maximum program level is usually PPM4
for music, PPM6 for speech. Line-up level is usually PPM4, which corresponds to +4
dBu. Instantaneous peaks will reach +17 dBu or more on voice.

In facilities that use PPMs that indicate level directly in dBu, maximum program and
line-up level is often +6 dBu. Instantaneous peaks will reach +11 dBu or more.

Transmission Levels
The transmission engineer is primarily concerned with the peak level of a program

ABSOLUTE PEAK

PPM

VU

Fig. 1-1: Absolute Peak Level, VU and PPM Reading

1-20 INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 2300

to prevent overloading or over-modulation of the transmission system. This peak

overload level is defined differently, system to system.

In FM modulation (FM / VHF radio and television broadcast, microwave or analog

satellite links), it is the maximum permitted RF carrier frequency deviation. In AM
modulation, it is negative carrier pinch-off. In analog telephone / post / PTT trans-
mission, it is the level above which serious crosstalk into other channels occurs, or
the level at which the amplifiers in the channel overload. In digital, it is the largest
possible digital word.

For metering, the transmission engineer uses an oscilloscope, absolute peak-sensing

meter, calibrated peak-sensing LED indicator, or a modulation meter. A modulation
meter usually has two components—a semi-peak reading meter (like a PPM), and a
peak-indicating light, which is calibrated to turn on whenever the instantaneous
peak modulation exceeds the overmodulation threshold.

Line-Up Facilities

Metering of Levels
The meters on the 2300 show Left/Right input levels and composite modulation. Left
and right input level is shown on a VU-type scale 0 to –40 dB), while the metering
indicates absolute instantaneous peak (much faster than a standard PPM or VU me-
ter). The input meter is scaled so that 0 dB corresponds to the absolute maximum
peak level that the 2300 can accept (+26 dBu). If you are using the AES3 digital in-
put, the maximum digital word at the input corresponds to the 0 dB point on the
2300’s input meter.

Composite Output Level

The Orban 2300 Audio Processor controls instantaneous, absolute peak levels to a
tolerance of approximately 0.1 dB. Composite modulation is indicated in percent-
age modulation, absolute instantaneous peak indicating. 100% is calibrated to the
highest composite peak modulation level that the processing will produce, including
the pilot tone, under any program, processing, or setup condition (except when the
processing is switched to BYPASS or is being operated in stand-alone stereo encoder
mode without overshoot limiting). 100% ordinarily corresponds to 75 kHz-carrier
deviation.

Note that if the 2300’s subcarrier inputs are used, the meter will not indicate the
subcarriers’ effect on composite modulation because the subcarriers are mixed into
the composite signal in the analog domain, after it is metered. Therefore, you must
mentally add the subcarriers to the meter indication, or refer to an external, cali-
brated modulation monitor.

Built-in Calibrated Line-up Tones

To facilitate matching the output level of the 2300 to the transmission system that it
is driving, the 2300 contains an adjustable test tone oscillator that produces sine
waves at 2300’s (analog or digital) left, right and composite outputs. The frequency
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INTRODUCTION 1-21
and modulation level of the line-up tones can be adjusted from the front panel (as
described in Section 3).

The stereo encoder is calibrated so that 100% left or right modulation will provide
100% modulation of the stereo composite signal, including pilot tone, but excluding
any SCA subcarriers.

The pilot tone stereo system has an interleaving property, which means that the ste-
reo composite modulation is approximately equal to the higher of the left or right
channels. Because the pilot tone is phase-synchronous with the stereo subcarrier, the
composite modulation will actually increase about 2.7% when the modulation is
changed from pure single-channel to L+R modulation while the peak audio level is
held constant.

When the 2300’s Left/Right analog output is switched to FLAT, a de-emphasis filter is
inserted between output of the 2300’s audio processing and its line output. Thus, as
the frequency of the Test Tone is changed, the level at the 2300’s line output will fol-
low the selected de-emphasis curve. In most cases, the pre-emphasis filter in the
driven equipment will undo the effect of the 2300’s internal de-emphasis, so the
2300’s output level should be adjusted such that the tone produces 100% modula-
tion of the transmission link as measured after the link’s pre-emphasis filter. At
100Hz, switching the de-emphasis out or in will have negligible effect on the level
appearing at the 2300’s left and right audio outputs.

You can adjust the frequency and modulation level of the built-in line-up tone. You
can use the front panel, the PC Control software, or the opto-isolated remote con-
trol interface ports to activate the Test Tone.

Built-in Calibrated Bypass Test Mode

A BYPASS Test Mode is available to transparently pass line-up tones generated ear-
lier in the system. It will also pass program material, with no gain reduction or pro-
tection against overmodulation. It can transparently pass any line-up tone applied
to its input up to about 130% output modulation, at which point clipping may oc-
cur.

Monitoring on Loudspeakers and Headphones

In live operations, highly processed audio often causes a problem with the DJ or
presenter’s headphones. Some talent moving from an analog processing chain
will require a learning period to become accustomed to the voice coloration caused
by “bone-conduction” comb filtering. This is caused by the delayed headphone
sound’s mixing with the live voice sound and introducing notches in the spectrum
that the talent hears as a “hollow” sound when he or she talks. All digital processors
induce this coloration to a greater or lesser extent. Fortunately, it does not cause
confusion or hesitation in the talent’s performance unless the delay is above the
psychoacoustic “echo fusion” (Haas) threshold of approximately 20 ms and the tal-
ent starts to hear slap echo in addition to frequency response colorations.
1-22 INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 2300

The normal delay through the 2300 is about 5 ms. A 5 ms delay is comfortable for
most talent because they do not hear echoes of their own voices in their head-
phones. Because of the relatively low delay, customers can confidently replace an
older, low-delay processor with the 2300 with no studio wiring changes. Moreover,
off-air cueing of remote talent is routine.

If talent is particularly finicky, they may complain about comb-filtering-induced col-

oration even with the 2300’s 5 ms delay. If this is the case, the best solution is to
drive studio headphones from the output of an analog processor. Many stations
have an older analog processor (like an Orban 8100) installed as a standby processor;
this processor can be used to drive headphones.

EAS Test
For stations participating in the Emergency Alert System (EAS) in the United States,
broadcast of EAS tones and data can be accomplished in three different ways:

1. Run EAS tones and data through the 2300.

Note that 2300 processing may not allow the full modulation level as required by
EAS standards. It may therefore be necessary to temporarily defeat the 2300’s
processing during the broadcast of EAS tones and data. Placing the 2300 in its
BYPASS Test Mode can defeat the processing. The BYPASS GAIN control allows
a fixed gain trim through the 2300. See “Test Modes,” on page 3-34 for more in-
formation.

2. Place the 2300 in Bypass mode locally.

A) Navigate to SETUP / MODE and set MODE to BYPASS.

You can set the bypass gain with the BYPASS GAIN control located to the
right of the MODE control.
B) Begin EAS broadcast.
After the EAS broadcast, resume normal processing:
C) Set the MODE to OPERATE.
This will restore the processing preset in use prior to the Test Mode.

3. Place the 2300 in Bypass mode by remote control. Then program any
two Remote Interface inputs for “Bypass” and “Exit Test,” respectively.

A) Connect two outputs from your station remote control system to the
REMOTE INTERFACE connector on the rear panel of the 2300, according to
the wiring diagram in Figure 2-2 on page 2-4.
B) Program two GPI ports for BYPASS and EXIT TEST according to the instructions
in Remote Control Interface Programming starting on page 2-41.
C) Place the 2300 in bypass mode by remote control.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INTRODUCTION 1-23
a) Switch the 2300 into BYPASS mode by a momentary command from your
station’s remote control to the GPI port programmed as BYPASS.
b) Begin EAS broadcast.
c) When the EAS broadcast is finished, switch the 2300 from BYPASS mode by
a momentary command from your station’s remote control to the GPI port
programmed as EXIT TEST.
You may also choose to insert EAS broadcast tones and data directly into the
transmitter, thus bypassing the 2300 for the duration of the EAS tones and data
broadcast.

PC Control and Security Passcode

PC software control provides access to OPTIMOD-FM via network, modem or direct
(null modem cable) connection, with IBM PC-compatible computers running Win-
dows. PC access is permitted only with a valid user-defined passcode.

PC remote control can be ended from the front panel; this feature effectively pre-
vents simultaneous remote and local control.

See Security and Passcode Programming (starting on page 2-38) for more detail.

Warranty, User Feedback

User Feedback
We are very interested in your comments about this product. We will carefully re-
view your suggestions for improvements to either the product or the manual. Please
email us at [email protected].

LIMITED WARRANTY
[Valid only for products purchased and used in the United States]

Orban warrants Orban products against defects in material or workmanship for a

period of two years from the date of original purchase for use, and agrees to repair
or, at our option, replace any defective item without charge for either parts or labor.

IMPORTANT: This warranty does not cover damage resulting from accident, misuse
or abuse, lack of reasonable care, the affixing of any attachment not provided with
the product, loss of parts, or connecting the product to any but the specified recep-
tacles. This warranty is void unless service or repairs are performed by an authorized
service center. No responsibility is assumed for any special, incidental, or consequen-
tial damages. However, the limitation of any right or remedy shall not be effective
where such is prohibited or restricted by law.
1-24 INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 2300

Simply take or ship your Orban products prepaid to our service department. Be sure
to include a copy of your sales slip as proof of purchase date. We will not repair
transit damage under the no-charge terms of this warranty. Orban will pay return
shipping. (See Technical Support on page 5-13.)

No other warranty, written or oral, is authorized for Orban Products.

This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may have other rights that vary
from state to state. Some states do not allow the exclusion of limitations of inciden-
tal or consequential damages or limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts,
so the above exclusions and limitations may not apply to you.

INTERNATIONAL WARRANTY
Orban warrants Orban products against evident defects in material and workman-
ship for a period of two years from the date of original purchase for use. This war-
ranty does not cover damage resulting from misuse or abuse, or lack of reasonable
care, or inadequate repairs performed by unauthorized service centers. Performance
of repairs or replacements under this warranty is subject to submission of this War-
ranty/Registration Card, completed and signed by the dealer on the day of purchase,
and the sales slip. Shipment of the defective item is for repair under this warranty
will be at the customer’s own risk and expense. This warranty is valid for the original
purchaser only.

EXTENDED WARRANTY
Any time during the initial two-year Warranty period (but not thereafter), you may
purchase a three-year extension to the Warranty (yielding a total Warranty period
of five years) by remitting to Orban ten percent of the gross purchase price of your
Orban product. This offer applies only to new Orban products purchased from an
authorized Orban Dealer. To accept the extended five-year warranty, please sign and
date below, and fax this copy along with a copy of your original invoice (showing
date of purchase) to Gareth Paredes at (510) 351-0500.

I ACCEPT THE EXTENDED FIVE-YEAR WARRANTY

__________________________________________________________________________

DATE______________________________________________________________________

MODEL NUMBER: 2300

SERIAL NUMBER____________________________________________________________
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-1

Section 2
Installation
Installing the 2300
Allow about 2 hours for installation.

Installation consists of: (1) unpacking and inspecting the 2300, (2) checking the line
voltage setting, fuse, and power cord, (3) setting the Ground Lift switch, (4) mount-
ing the 2300 in a rack, (5) connecting inputs, outputs and power, (6) optional con-
necting of remote control leads, (7) optional connection of tally output leads, and
(8) optional connecting of computer interface control leads.

When you have finished installing the 2300, proceed to “Quick Setup,” on page 2-
16.

DO NOT connect power to the unit yet!

1. Unpack and inspect.

If you note obvious physical damage, contact the carrier immediately to make a
damage claim. Packed with the 2300 are:

1ea. Operating Manual

2ea. Line Cords (domestic, European)
2ea. Fuses ( ½-A-250V Slow-Blow for 115V; 500mA-250V for 230V)
2ea. Fuse holders (gray for 115V fuses and black for 230V fuses)
4ea. Rack-mounting screws, 10-32 x ½—with washers, #10
1ea. PC Remote Software CD
Save all packing materials! If you should ever have to ship the 2300 (e.g., for ser-
vicing), it is best to ship it in the original carton with its packing materials be-
cause both the carton and packing material have been carefully designed to pro-
tect the unit.
Complete the Registration Card and return it to Orban. (please)
The Registration Card enables us to inform you of new applications, per-
formance improvements, software updates, and service aids that may be
developed, and it helps us respond promptly to claims under warranty
without our having to request a copy of your bill of sale or other proof
of purchase. Please fill in the Registration Card and send it to us today.
(The Registration Card is located after the cover page).
2-2 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

Customer names and information are confidential and are not sold to
anyone.

2. Check the line voltage, fuse and power cord.

DO NOT connect power to the unit yet!

A) Check the VOLTAGE SELECT switch. This is on the rear panel.
The 2300 is shipped from the factory with the VOLTAGE SELECT switch set
to the 230V position. Check and set the VOLTAGE SELECT switch to your
local voltage requirements. To change the operating voltage, set the
VOLTAGE SELECT to 115V (for 90-130V) or 230V (for 200-250V) as appro-
priate.
B) Install the proper fuse and fuse holder, per your country’s standards.
The 2300 is shipped from the factory with the fuse and fuse holder both
removed. Select the appropriate fuse holder and fuse from the supplied
parts in the accessory kit. Use the gray fuse holder for domestic / 115V
operation, or the black fuse holder for European / 230V operation. For
safety, use ½-A-250V Slow-Blow for 115V, or 500mA-250V for 230V.

TYPE 18/3 SVT COR, TYP

(3 x .82 mm 2 )

CONDUCTOR WIRE COLOR

NORMAL ALT

L LINE BROWN BLACK

N NEUTRAL BLUE WHITE
E EARTH GND GREEN-YELLOW GREEN

PLUG FOR
115 VAC
(USA)

TYPE H05VV - F - 0.75

CONDUCTOR WIRE COLOR

L LINE BROWN
N NEUTRAL BLUE
E EARTH GND GREEN-YELLOW

PLUG FOR
230 VAC
(EUROPEAN)

Figure 2-1: AC Line Cord Wire Standard)

C) Check the power cord.
AC power passes through an IEC-standard mains connector and an RF fil-
ter designed to meet the standards of all international safety authorities.
The power cord is terminated in a “U-ground” plug (USA standard), or
CEE7 / 7 plug (Continental Europe), as appropriate to your 2300’s Model
Number. The green / yellow wire is connected directly to the 2300 chassis.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-3
If you need to change the plug to meet your country’s standard and you
are qualified to do so, see Figure 2-1. Otherwise, purchase a new mains
cord with the correct line plug attached.

3. Set Ground Lift switch.

The GROUND LIFT switch is located on the rear panel.

The GROUND LIFT switch is shipped from the factory in the GROUND position, (to
connect the 2300’s circuit ground to its chassis ground). If you are using the
2300’s composite output to drive an exciter with an unbalanced output, set the
switch to LIFT.
This will break most potential ground loops. If you have an installation that does
not respond to use of the GROUND LIFT switch, you can always break a ground
loop by using Orban’s CIT25 Composite Isolation Transformer. If the CIT25 is in
use, the GROUND LIFT switch will usually be set to GROUND.

4. Mount the 2300 in a rack.

The 2300 requires one standard rack unit (1  inches / 4.8 cm).
There should be a good ground connection between the rack and the 2300 chas-
sis—check this with an ohmmeter to verify that the resistance is less than 0.5.
Mounting the unit over large heat-producing devices (such as a vacuum-tube
power amplifier) may shorten component life and is not recommended. Ambient
temperature should not exceed 45C (113F) when equipment is powered.
Equipment life will be extended if the unit is mounted away from sources of vi-
bration, such as large blowers and is operated as cool as possible.

5. Connect inputs and outputs.

See the hookup and grounding information on the following pages.

TOPIC PAGE

Audio Input and Audio Output Connections.............................................2-6

AES3 Digital Input and Output ...................................................................2-7
Composite Output and Subcarrier Inputs ..................................................2-8
Grounding ..................................................................................................2-10

6. Connect remote control interface. (optional)

For a full listing of 2300’s extensive remote control provisions, refer to Remote
Control Interface Programming on page 2-41.
Optically isolated remote control connections are terminated in a type DB-25
male connector located on the rear panel. It is wired according to Figure 2-2. To
select the desired function, apply a 5-12V AC or DC pulse between the appropri-
ate REMOTE INTERFACE terminals. The () terminals can be connected together
and then connected to ground at pin 1 to create a Remote Common. A current-
limited +12VDC source is available on pin 25. If you use 48V, connect a 2 k
2-4 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

10%, 2-watt carbon composition resistor in series with the Remote Common or
the (+) terminal to provide current limiting.
In a high-RF environment, these wires should be short and should be run
through foil-shielded cable, with the shield connected to CHASSIS GROUND at
both ends.
PIN ASSIGNMENT

1. DIGITAL GOUND
2. REMOTE 1+
3. REMOTE 2+
4. REMOTE 3+
5. REMOTE 4+
6. REMOTE 5+
7. REMOTE 6+
REMOTE INTERFACE
8. REMOTE 7+
9. REMOTE 8+
10. TALLY 1
11. TALLY 2
12. N/C
13. ANALOG GROUND
14. REMOTE 1-
15. REMOTE 2-
16. REMOTE 3-
17. REMOTE 4-
18. REMOTE 5-
19. REMOTE 6-
20. REMOTE 7-
21. REMOTE 8-
22-24. N/C
25. +12 VOLTS DC

Figure 2-2: Wiring the 25-pin Remote Interface Connector

7. Connect tally outputs (optional)

See the schematic on page 6-35.

In stereo encoder mode, the 2300 supports two hardware tally outputs, which
are NPN open-collector and operate with respect to pin 1 (common). Therefore,
the voltage applied to the load (such as a relay or opto-isolator) must be positive.
You can use the 12 VDC source on pin 25 to drive the high side of the load, tak-
ing into account the fact that the voltage on pin 25 is current limited by a 310 Ω
resistor.
The tally outputs are protected against reverse polarity.

To avoid damaging the 2300, limit the current into a tally output to
30 mA. DO NOT connect a tally output directly to a low-impedance
voltage source! The tally outputs are not protected against this
abuse and the output transistors are likely to burn out.

Note that the tally outputs have no special RFI protection. Therefore, it is wise to
use shielded cable to make connections to them.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-5
See step 11 on page 2-28 for instructions on using the tally outputs.

8. Connect to a computer

You can connect to a computer via the 2300’s serial connector or via an Ethernet
network. (See Networking on page 2-42.)
You must have the 2300 PC Remote application installed on your com-
puter before you upgrade your 2300’s firmware because 2300 PC Remote
manages the upgrade.
See Installing 2300 PC Remote Control Software on page 2-48 for more detail.

2300 Rear Panel

The Ground Lift Switch can be set to connect the 2300’s circuit ground to its chas-
sis ground (in the GROUND position). In the LIFT position, it breaks that connection.
(See Set Ground Lift switch on page 2-3.)

The Voltage Select switch can be set to 115V (for 90-130V operation) or 230V (for
180-260V operation).

Fuse values can be changed to support 115V or 230V operation. For safety, use ½-A
250V Slow-Blow for 115V, or 500mA-250V for 230V.

The Power Cord is detachable and is terminated in a “U-ground” plug (USA stan-
dard), or CEE7 / 7 plug (Continental Europe), as appropriate to your 2300’s Model
Number.

An RS-232 (PC Remote) Computer Interface, labeled SERIAL PORT can be con-
nected to to IBM PC-compatible computers, directly or via modem, for remote con-
trol, metering and software downloads.

A Remote Interface Connector allows you to connect the 2300 to your existing
transmitter remote control or other simple contact-closure control devices. The 2300
remote control supports user-programmable selection of up to eight optically iso-
lated inputs for any one of the following parameters: recalling any factory- or user
presets, tone or bypass modes, selecting stereo encoder modes (stereo, mono-left,
mono-right, mono-sum), selecting analog, digital or digital+J.17 input, overshoot
compensation, SCA modulation compensation, and clock synchronization. (See Re-
mote Control Interface Programming on page 2-41.) The 2300 remote control ac-
cepts a DB-25 connector.

The Ethernet Port accepts a 10Mb / second or 100Mb / second Ethernet connection
terminated with an RJ45 connector.

Digital AES3 Input and Output are provided to support two-channel AES3-
standard digital audio signals through XLR-type connectors.

Analog Inputs and Outputs are provided to support left and right audio signals
through XLR-type connectors.
2-6 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

Two Composite Baseband Outputs are provided, each with independent output
level control. Each output uses a BNC connector.

Two SCA Inputs are provided for stations that use additional subcarriers (SCAs).
Each input uses a BNC connector. The second SCA input can be reconfigured via an
internal hardware jumper as a Pilot Reference Output useful for RDS (RBDS) subcar-
rier generators that require an external sync reference.

Input and Output Connections

Cable
We recommend using two-conductor foil-shielded cable (such as Belden 8451 or
equivalent) for the audio input and output connections because signal current flows
through the two conductors only. The shield does not carry signal and is used only
for shielding.

Connectors
 Input and output connectors are XLR-type connectors.

In the XLR-type connectors, pin 1 is CHASSIS GROUND, while pin 2 and

pin 3 are a balanced, floating pair. This wiring scheme is compatible with
any studio-wiring standard: If pin 2 or 3 is considered LOW, the other pin
is automatically HIGH.

Analog Audio Input

 Nominal input level between –14 dBu and +8 dBu will result in normal operation
of the 2300.

(0 dBu = 0.775Vrms. For this application, the dBm @600 scale on volt-
meters can be read as if it were calibrated in dBu.)

 The peak input level that causes overload is +27.0 dBu.

 The electronically balanced input uses an ultra low noise and distortion differen-
tial amplifier for best common mode rejection. It is compatible with most profes-
sional and semi-professional audio equipment, balanced or unbalanced, having
a source impedance of 600 or less. The input is EMI suppressed.

 Input connections are the same whether the driving source is balanced or unbal-
anced.

 Connect the red (or white) wire to the pin on the XLR-type connector (#2 or #3)
that is considered HIGH by the standards of your organization. Connect the black
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-7
wire to the pin on the XLR-type connector (#3 or #2) that is considered LOW by
the standards of your organization.

 In low RF fields (like a studio site not co-located with an RF transmitter), connect
the cable shield at 2300 input only—it should not be connected at the source
end. In high RF fields (like a transmitter site), also connect the shield to pin 1 of
the male XLR-type connector at the 2300 input.

 If the output of the driving unit is unbalanced and does not have separate
CHASSIS GROUND and (–) (or LOW) output terminals, connect both the shield and
the black wire to the common (–) or ground terminal of the driving unit.

Analog Audio Output

 Electronically balanced and floating outputs simulate a true transformer output.
The source impedance is 50. The output is capable of driving loads of 600 or
higher; the 100% modulation level is adjustable with the AO 100% control over
a –6 dBu to +24 dBu range. The outputs are EMI suppressed.

 If an unbalanced output is required (to drive unbalanced inputs of other equip-

ment), it should be taken between pin 2 and pin 3 of the XLR-type connector.
Connect the LOW pin of the XLR-type connector (#3 or #2, depending on your
organization’s standards) to circuit ground; take the HIGH output from the re-
maining pin. No special precautions are required even though one side of the
output is grounded.

 Use two-conductor foil-shielded cable (Belden 8451, or equivalent).

 At the 2300’s output (and at the output of other equipment in the system), do
not connect the cable’s shield to the CHASSIS GROUND terminal (pin 1) on the
XLR-type connector. Instead, connect the shield to the input destination. Con-
nect the red (or white) wire to the pin on the XLR-type connector (#2 or #3) that
is considered HIGH by the standards of your organization. Connect the black wire
to the pin on the XLR-type connector (#3 or #2) that is considered LOW by the
standards of your organization.

AES3 Digital Input and Output

There is one AES3 input and one AES3 output. The program input and output are
both equipped with sample rate converters and can operate at 32, 44.1, 48, 88.2,
and 96 kHz.

Per the AES3 standard, each digital input or output line carries both the
left and right stereo channels. The connection is 110 balanced. The
AES3 standard specifies a maximum cable length of 100 meters. While
almost any balanced, shielded cable will work for relatively short runs (5
meters or less), longer runs require used of 110 balanced cable like
2-8 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

Belden 1800B. Single-pair category 5, 5e, and 6 Ethernet cable will also
work well if you do not require shielding. (In most cases, the tight bal-
ance of Category 5/5e/6 cable makes shielding unnecessary.)
Very long cable runs are best handled by using the AES3id standard. This
specifies 75 unbalanced coaxial cable, terminated in BNC connectors. A
110/75 balun transformer is required to interface an AES3id connec-
tion to your Optimod’s digital input or output.
The digital input clip level is fixed at 0 dB relative to the maximum digital
word. The maximum digital input will make the 2300 input meters dis-
play 0 dB. The reference level is adjustable using the DI REF control.
The 2300 is a “multirate” system whose internal sample rate is 32 kHz
and multiples thereof (up to 512 kHz). The output is strictly band-limited
to 16 kHz. Therefore, the output can pass through a 32 kHz uncom-
pressed link with bit-for-bit transparency. Because sample rate conversion
is a phase-linear process that does not add bandwidth, the 2300’s output
signal will continue to be compatible with 32 kHz links even if it under-
goes intermediate sample rate conversions (for example, 32 kHz to 48
kHz to 32 kHz).

Composite Output and Subcarrier Input

There are two composite outputs. These carry the encoded stereo signal, the ste-
reo pilot tone, and any subcarriers that may have been applied to the 2300’s subcar-
rier inputs.

Each output’s level is independently adjustable from –12.3 dBu to +12.0 dBu.

The output impedance of composite output #1 and composite output #2 can be set
to 0 or 75 via jumpers J2 and J3 respectively (located on the I/O Board). As
shipped, the link is on pins 3 and 4, yielding 0 impedance. To reset a given output
to 75, place the link on pins 1 and 2 of its associated jumper. (See the schematic on
page 6-49 and the parts locator diagram on page 6-46.)

Each output can drive up to 75 in parallel with 0.047F before perform-
ance deteriorates significantly (see Figure 2-3 on page 2-9). A GROUND LIFT
switch is available on the rear panel. This is useful to prevent ground
loops between the 2300 and the transmitter.
Connect the 2300’s composite output to the exciter input with up to 100 feet
(30.5m) of RG-58 / U or RG-59 / U coaxial cable terminated in BNC connectors.

Longer runs of coax may increase problems with noise, hum, and RF
pickup at the exciter. In general, the least troublesome installations place
the 2300 close to the exciter and limit the length of the composite cable
to less than 6 feet (1.8m).
We do not recommend terminating the exciter input by 50 or 75
unless this is unavoidable. The frequencies in the stereo baseband are
low by comparison to RF and video, and the characteristic impedance of
coaxial cable is not constant at very low frequencies. Therefore, the
transmission system will usually have better amplitude and phase re-
sponse (and thus, higher stereo separation) if the coax is driven by a very
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-9
low impedance source and is terminated by greater than 1k at the ex-
citer end. This also eases thermal stresses on the output amplifier in the
stereo encoder, and can thus extend equipment life.
If the Orban CIT25 Composite Isolation Transformer is used, the exciter
must present a 1k or greater load to the transformer for proper trans-
former operation.
Designed to be installed adjacent to each exciter, the CIT25 Composite
Isolation Transformer provides ground loop isolation between the 2300
composite output and the exciter’s input, and presents the 2300 with a
balanced, floating load.
Even when its composite limiter is being used heavily, the 2300 will al-
ways protect the stereo pilot tone by at least 60 dB (250Hz from 19 kHz)
and will protect the region from 55 kHz to 100 kHz by at least 75 dB (re
100% modulation).
The subcarrier inputs are provided for convenience in summing subcarriers into
the baseband prior to their presentation to the FM exciter.

The subcarrier inputs will accept any subcarrier (or combinations of sub-
carriers) above 23 kHz. Below 5 kHz, sensitivity rolls off at 6 dB/octave to
suppress hum that might otherwise be introduced into the subcarrier in-
puts, which are unbalanced.
The subcarrier inputs are mixed into the 2300’s composite output in the
analog domain, after D/A conversion of the 2300 stereo encoder’s output
but before the digitally controlled attenuators that set the composite
output levels.

Figure 2-3: Separation vs. load capacitance

2-10 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

As shipped from the factory, the second SCA connector emits a stereo pilot tone
reference for RDS or RBDS subcarrier generators. If you wish to reconfigure it to ac-
cept an SCA signal, move the link on jumper J400 (on the I/O board) from pins 3 and
4 to pins 1 and 2.

To access J400, remove the 2300’s top cover according to the instructions
in step 1 on page 4-2. To find J400, see page 6-46 for the I/O board parts
locator drawing. To find the I/O board, see the circuit board locator
drawing on page 6-29. The schematic showing J400 is on page 6-49.
Connect your subcarrier generator(s) to the 2300’s subcarrier input(s) with coaxial
cable terminated with BNC connectors.

The subcarrier inputs have greater than 600 load impedance and are
unbalanced. The two SCA inputs have different behaviors. SCA1’s sensi-
tivity is variable from 220 mV p-p to >10 V p-p to produce 10% injection,
while SCA2’s sensitivity is fixed at 772 mV p-p to produce 10% injection.
VR400 on the I/O board sets SCA1’s sensitivity. To access VR400, remove
the top cover according to the instructions in step 1 on page 4-2. To find
VR400, see page 6-46 for the I/O board parts locator drawing.
A special variant of the I/O board is available having an added trimmer
(VR401) to set the gain of SCA2. This variant should be specified at time
of order. Please contact Orban customer service (see page 5-13) for more
information.

Grounding
Very often, grounding is approached in a “hit or miss” manner. However, with care
it is possible to wire an audio studio so that it provides maximum protection from
power faults and is free from ground loops (which induce hum and can cause oscilla-
tion).

In an ideal system:

 All units in the system should have balanced inputs. In a modern system with
low output impedances and high input impedances, a balanced input will pro-
vide common-mode rejection and prevent ground loops—regardless of whether
it is driven from a balanced or unbalanced source.

 The 2300 has balanced inputs. Its subcarrier inputs are unbalanced, but fre-
quency response is rolled off at low frequencies to reject hum.

 All equipment circuit grounds must be connected to each other; all equipment
chassis grounds must be connected together.

 In a low RF field, cable shields should be connected at one end only—preferably

the source (output) end.

 In a high RF field, audio cable shields should be connected to a solid earth

ground at both ends to achieve best shielding against RFI.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-11
 Whenever coaxial cable is used, shields are automatically grounded at both ends
through the terminating BNC connectors.

Power Ground
 Ground the 2300 chassis through the third wire in the power cord. Proper
grounding techniques never leave equipment chassis unconnected to
power/earth ground. A proper power ground is essential for safe operation. Lift-
ing a chassis from power ground creates a potential safety hazard.

Circuit Ground
To maintain the same potential in all equipment, the circuit (audio) grounds must be
connected together:

 Circuit and chassis ground should always be connected by setting the 2300’s
GROUND LIFT switch to its GROUND connect position, except when the 2300’s ste-
reo encoder is driving an unbalanced exciter input. (Many older exciters have
unbalanced inputs.) This is an unbalanced-to-unbalanced connection, so set the
2300’s GROUND LIFT switch to LIFT to break the ground loop that would other-
wise occur.

Alternately, you can balance and float the exciter input with the Orban
CIT25 Composite Isolation Transformer—see page 2-9.

 In high RF fields, the system is usually grounded through the equipment rack in
which the 2300 is mounted. The rack should be connected to a solid earth
ground by a wide copper strap—wire is completely ineffective at VHF because of
the wire’s self-inductance.

2300 Front Panel

 Screen Display labels the four soft buttons and provides control-setting infor-
mation.

 Screen Contrast button adjusts the optimum viewing angle of the screen dis-
play.

 Four Soft buttons provide access to all 2300 functions and controls. The func-
tions of the soft buttons change with each screen, according to the labels at the
bottom of each screen.

 Next and Prev ( and ) buttons scroll the screen horizontally to accommo-
date menus that cannot fit in the available space. They also allow you to move
from one character to the next when you enter data into your 2300.
2-12 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

These flash when such a menu is in use. Otherwise, they are inactive.

 Control Knob is used to change the setting that is selected by the soft buttons.
To change a value, you ordinarily have to hold down a soft button while you are
turning the control knob.

 Recall button allows you recall a Factory or User Preset.

Selecting the Recall button does not immediately recall a preset. See step
17 on page 2-21 for instructions on recalling a preset.

 Modify button brings you to list of controls that you can use to edit a Factory or
User Preset. If you edit a Factory Preset, you must save it as a new User Preset to
retain your edit.

 Setup button accesses the technical parameters necessary to match the 2300 to
your transmission system.

 Escape button provides an escape from current screen and returns user to the
next higher-level screen. Repeatedly pressing Escape will always return you to
the Idle screen which is at the top level of the screen hierarchy.

 Input meters show the peak input level applied to the 2300’s analog or digital
inputs with reference to 0 = digital full-scale. If the input meter’s red segment
lights up, you are overdriving the 2300’s analog to digital converter, which is a
very common cause of audible distortion.

 Composite meter shows the output level of the stereo encoder before
the composite output attenuators. The meter is calibrated in percent
modulation.
 Multiplex Power meter indicates the action of the ITU-R BS412 Multiplex
Power controller. It shows how much the Multiplex Power Controller has re-
duced the clipper drive, thereby reducing the average power in the processed
audio. It will show no gain reduction unless the MPX Power Controller is turned
on. (See step 19 on page 2-22.)

 Gain Reduction meters show the gain reduction in the Master and Bass bands
of the two-band compressor when the 2300 is in audio processor mode. Full-
scale is 25 dB gain reduction.

When the 2300 is in stand-alone stereo encoder mode, these meters show the
gain reduction in the left/right overshoot limiter meters. Full scale is 5 dB gain
reduction. If the overshoot limiter is turned off, these meters will not illuminate.

 Left/Right Output meters operate only when the 2300 is in stand-alone stereo
encoder mode. These meters use the same LED arrays as the HF ENHANCE and HF
LIMITER meters.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-13
The following meters and indicators do not operate when the 2300 is in stand-alone
stereo encoder mode:

 Gate LED indicates gate activity, lighting when the input audio falls below the
threshold set by the multiband gate threshold control (with the Full Modify
screen’s 2B GATE control). When this happens, the multiband compressor’s recov-
ery time slows drastically to prevent noise rush-up during low-level passages.

 AGC meters show the gain reduction in the Master and Bass bands of the slow
two-band AGC processing that precedes the two-band compressor. Full-scale is
25 dB gain reduction.

 HF Enhance meter indicates the amount of HF boost provided by the dynamic,

program-adaptive high frequency enhancer located in the Equalization section.
Calibration is in relative units because the amount of enhancement (in dB) de-
pends on frequency.

When the 2300 is in stand-alone stereo encoder mode, this LED array is
repurposed to indicate the peak left channel drive level to the stereo en-
coder modulator, which follows all lowpass filtering and overshoot limit-
ing. It uses the same scale as the COMPOSITE meter.

 HF Limiter meter indicates the amount of HF limiting. Because the left and
right HF limiters are independent, we have programmed this meter so that it
reads the higher of the left and right gain reductions.

When the 2300 is in stand-alone stereo encoder mode, this LED array is
repurposed to indicate the right channel level.

Studio Level Controller Installation (optional)

[This section does not apply to a 2300 being used as a stand-alone stereo encoder. In
this mode, the 2300 must be driven by a full–featured FM audio processor (like
Orban’s 8500), usually via an STL].

[Skip this section if you are not using a studio level controller ahead of the 2300.
Continue with “Quick Setup” on page 2-16.]

 If you are using an Orban 8100AST (or 8100A/ST) external AGC, refer to page 1-
10.

 As of this writing, the currently manufactured Orban products that can be used
as external AGCs are Optimod-PC 1101 and Optimod 6300. Their manuals con-
tain instructions on how to use them in this application. They are the preferred
choices because their AGCs are identical to the AGC in the 2300.

 Discontinued Orban products usable as external AGCs include the 8200ST, 464A
“Co-Operator,” 8100AST, and 1100 OPTIMOD-PC. In this manual, we do not pro-
2-14 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

vide step-by-step instructions for setting up all of these older products, although
it should be easy to extrapolate from the instructions we do provide.

If you are using Orban 8200ST external AGC

If the STL uses pre-emphasis, its input pre-emphasis network will probably introduce
overshoots that will increase peak modulation without any increase in average
modulation. We therefore strongly recommend that the STL transmitter’s pre-
emphasis be defeated (freeing the STL from such potential overshoot), and that the
8200ST be used to provide the necessary pre-emphasis.

If the STL transmitter’s pre-emphasis cannot be defeated, then configure the 8200ST
for flat output. In this case average modulation levels of the STL may have to be re-
duced to accommodate the overshoots.

1. Configure the 8200ST’s internal jumpers.

A) Remove all screws holding the 8200ST’s cover in place; then lift it off.
Refer to Figure 2-4 on page 2-15.
B) Place jumper JA in the CLIPPER ON position.
C) If you have defeated the STL transmitter’s pre-emphasis, place jumpers JE and
JF in the PRE-EMPHASIZED position.
D) If you cannot defeat the STL transmitter’s pre-emphasis, place jumpers JE and
JF in the FLAT position.
E) Replace the top cover, and then replace all screws snugly. (Be careful not to
strip the threads by fastening the screws too tightly.)

2. Install the 8200ST in the rack. Connect the 8200ST’s audio input and out-
put.

Refer to the 8200ST Operating Manual if you require information about installa-
tion, audio input, and audio output connections to the 8200ST.

3. Set 8200ST Output Level with tone.

A) Press the TONE button on the 8200ST.

The TONE lamp should light and the modulation meters should indicate
“0.” If they do not, re-strap jumpers JB and JC to “peak.” (Refer to Figure
2-4 on page 2-15.)
The 8200ST is now producing a 400Hz sine wave at each output. The
peak level of this tone corresponds to 100% modulation.
B) Adjust the 8200ST’s L OUT and R OUT controls so that the STL transmitter is be-
ing driven to 100% modulation.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-15
JE JF

TOP OF MAIN BOARD

JB JA JC

Clipper Jumpers Output Pre-Emphasis Jumpers

*FLAT PRE-EMPHASIZED
*CLIPPER ON CLIPPER OFF
LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT
OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT

JA JA JE JF JE JF

Line-up Level Jumpers

*PEAK AVG

LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT

OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT

JB JC JB JC

Figure 2-4: 8200ST Jumper Settings (*Factory Configuration)

2-16 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

The L OUT and R OUT controls are now correctly calibrated to the transmit-
ter. If no significant overshoot occurs in the transmitter, the MODULATION
meter will now give an accurate indication of peak modulation of the
STL.
C) Turn off the tone by pressing the TONE button.
If the STL transmitter suffers from bounce or overshoot, you may have to
reduce the L OUT and R OUT control settings to avoid peak over-
modulation caused by overshoots on certain audio signals.

4. Set controls for normal operation with program material.

The following assumes that a VU meter is used to determine 8200ST line drive
levels with program material.
A) Set controls as follows:
HF LIMITER... Set to match the pre-emphasis of the transmission system
L&R Out ................................................................................do not change
GATE .................................................................................................... 12:00
RELEASE ............................................................................................... 12:00
VOICE ......................................................................................................OFF
AGC ..........................................................................................................ON
COUPLE ....................................................................................................ON

B) Feed the 8200ST either with tone at your system reference level (0VU), or with
typical program material at normal levels.
C) Adjust the GAIN REDUCTION control for the desired amount of gain reduction.
We recommend 8-15 dB gain reduction for most formats.
If the STL uses pre-emphasis, its input pre-emphasis filter will probably in-
troduce overshoots that will increase peak modulation without any in-
crease in average modulation. We therefore strongly recommend that
the STL transmitter’s pre-emphasis be defeated (freeing the STL from
such potential overshoot), and that the 8200ST be used to provide the
necessary pre-emphasis.
If the STL transmitter’s pre-emphasis cannot be defeated, configure the
8200ST for flat output. In this case, average modulation levels of the STL
may have to be reduced to accommodate the overshoots.

Quick Setup (Audio Processor Mode)

Quick Setup guides you through 2300 setup. It is appropriate for users without spe-
cial or esoteric requirements. Following this section, you can find more detailed in-
formation regarding setup beyond the Quick Setup screens. In most cases, you will
not need this extra information.

Regardless of whether you will be using the 2300 in audio processor or stereo en-
coder mode, you should complete this procedure. See Setup for Stand-Alone Stereo
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-17
Encoder Mode on page 2-24 for additional steps that apply to the stereo encoder
mode.

For the following adjustments, use the appropriately labeled soft button to choose
the parameter you wish to adjust. To change a parameter (like an output level), it is
usually necessary to hold down the soft button while turning the knob. However, if
there is only one parameter on a screen (like choosing 50 or 75µs pre-emphasis), you
can change this with the knob alone. (You do not have to hold down a button.) Let
the text on the screen guide you through the process.

1. Press the front-panel Setup button.

2. Press the Quick Setup soft button when its label appears on the display.

Quick Setup presents a guided sequence of screens into which you must insert in-
formation about your particular requirements. In general, the screens are self-
explanatory.
Use the NEXT and PREV buttons to navigate between screens. These buttons will
flash to indicate that they are active.

3. Set the time.

A) Press the NEXT button.

The set time screen appears.
B) Hold down the appropriate soft button while turning the knob to enter the
hour, minute, and seconds. Enter seconds slightly ahead of the correct time.
C) Wait until the entered time agrees with the correct time. Then press the
ENTER TIME button to set the clock.

4. Set the date.

Hold down the appropriate soft button while turning the knob to enter the day,
month, and year.

5. Set up Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time).

A) Turn the knob to specify the date at which Daylight Saving Time begins in
your area.
B) Press the NEXT button.
C) Turn the knob to specify the date at which Daylight Saving Time ends in your
area.
Version 1.0 only supports Daylight Saving Time settings for the Northern
Hemisphere. A more complete implementation will appear in a future
software update.
2-18 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

6. Set pre-emphasis.

A) Press the NEXT button.

B) Select the pre-emphasis (either 75S or 50S) used in your country by turning
the knob.

7. Set external AGC mode.

Most of the 2300’s processing structures control level with a preliminary AGC
(Automatic Gain Control). If you are using a suitable Automatic Gain Control at
the studio (such as an Orban 8200ST OPTIMOD-Studio or 464A Co-Operator), the
AGC in the 2300 should be defeated. This is so that the two AGCs do not “fight”
each other, and so they do not simultaneously increase gain, resulting in in-
creased noise.
A) Press the NEXT button.
B) Set external AGC mode by turning the knob.
a) Set the field to YES if you have a external AGC (such as an Orban 6300,
1100, 1101, Orban 8200ST OPTIMOD-Studio, Orban 464A Co-Operator, or
similar AGC) installed at your studio feeding the studio-to-transmitter link.
This setting appropriately defeats the 2300’s AGC for all presets.
b) Set the field to NO If you do not have a external AGC installed; this setting
enables the 2300 AGC status to be determined by the selected preset.
If you are using an Orban 4000 Transmission Limiter, set field to NO (so
that the AGC function in the 2300 continues to work). The Orban 4000 is
a transmission system overload protection device; it is normally operated
below threshold. It is not designed to perform an AGC or gain-riding
function, and it cannot substitute for the AGC function in the 2300.

8. Select your primary input (analog or digital).

A) Press the NEXT button.

B) If your main input source is digital, turn the knob to select DIGITAL or
DIGITAL+J17. Otherwise, select ANALOG.
DIGITAL, not DIGITAL+J17, is appropriate for almost anyone using the digi-
tal input. The only digital encoding that typically uses J.17 pre-emphasis
(of which we are aware) is NICAM.

9. Set operating levels.

[If you are setting up the 2300 for use as a stand-alone stereo encoder, skip this
step by pressing the NEXT button twice.]
You will set the operating levels of the 2300 to match the input levels it is receiv-
ing so the 2300’s AGC can operate in the range for which it was designed. There
are separate settings for the analog and digital inputs. If you provide both ana-
log and digital inputs to the 2300, optimum adjustment is achieved when the
gain reduction meters show the same amount of processing for both analog and
digital inputs.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-19
This will allow you to switch between analog and digital inputs without
sudden level changes.

A) Press the NEXT button.

B) Feed normal program material to the 2300.
C) Play program material from your studio, peaking at normal program levels
(typically 0VU if your console uses VU meters).
D) [Skip this step if you are not using the analog input.]
Hold down the ANALOG soft button and adjust the knob so that the AGC
meter indicates an average of 10 dB gain reduction.
The procedure does not apply to the 2300’s stand-alone stereo encoder
mode. In this mode, the level indicated on the screen during this step is
the r.m.s. level (in dBu) of a 50 Hz input tone that produces 100% peak
modulation at the 2300’s composite output when the 2300’s COMPOSITE
LIMITER DRIVE control is set to 0 or OFF.
E) [Skip this step if you are not using the digital input.]
Hold down the DIGITAL soft button and adjust the knob so that the AGC
meter indicates an average of 10 dB gain reduction.
The procedure does not apply to the 2300’s stand-alone stereo encoder
mode. In this mode, the level indicated on the screen during this step is
the r.m.s. level (in dBfs) of a 50 Hz input tone that produces 100% peak
modulation at the 2300’s composite output when the 2300’s COMPOSITE
LIMITER DRIVE control is set to 0 or OFF.

10. Set analog output to be flat or pre-emphasized.

A) Press the NEXT button.

B) [Skip this step if you will not be using the analog left/right outputs.]
Turn the knob to choose PRE-E (for pre-emphasis) or FLAT.
If you will use the analog output to drive a stereo encoder, PRE provides
the best performance because the stereo encoder that receives the ana-
log output does not have to restore the pre-emphasis. However, if you
cannot defeat the pre-emphasis in your stereo encoder, or if you will use
the analog output for monitoring, set the output FLAT.
If you are sending the analog output of the 2300 through a digital link
that uses lossy compression (like MPEG, APT-X, or Dolby), set the output
FLAT. Lossy codecs cannot handle pre-emphasized signals.

11. Set digital output to be flat or pre-emphasized.

(See the notes in step 10 above.)

A) Press the NEXT button.
B) [Skip this step if you will not be using the digital output.]
Turn the knob to choose PRE-E (for a 50 or 75µs pre-emphasized output),
J.17 (for a J.17 pre-emphasized output), PRE+J17 (for 50 or 75µs pre-
2-20 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

emphasis cascaded with J.17 pre-emphasis), or FLAT (which applies 50 or

75µs de-emphasis after the processing).
Regardless of the setting of this control, the processing is always inter-
nally pre-emphasized and thus always controls peaks to follow the 50 or
75µs pre-emphasis curve.

12. Set the digital output sample rate.

A) Press the NEXT button.

B) [Skip this step if you will not be using the digital output.]
Turn the knob to set the Digital OUTPUT SAMPLE RATE to 32, 44.1, 48, 88.2,
or 96 kHz.
The internal sample rate converter sets the rate at the 2300’s digital out-
put. This adjustment allows you to set the output sample rate to ensure
compatibility with equipment requiring a fixed sample rate. In all cases,
the 2300’s fundamental sample rate is 32 kHz, ensuring that the output
bandwidth is always strictly limited to 16 kHz and that the processed sig-
nal can be passed through a 32 kHz uncompressed STL without addition
of overshoot.

13. Prepare to set output levels.

A) Press the NEXT button.

You can use either program material or tone to set the output level (and
thus, the on-air modulation).
 To use tone, press the YES button.
You must use tone if you are setting up
the 2300 as a stand-alone stereo encoder.

 To use program material, press the NO button.

14. Set the composite output level.

[Skip this step if you will not be using the composite output(s).]
A) Observe the modulation produced by the 2300’s COMPOSITE OUTPUT 1 on a
modulation monitor or modulation analyzer. Turn the knob to make the
modulation monitor read 100% modulation (usually 75 kHz deviation).
If you are using program material, make sure that the program material
is loud enough to produce peaks of frequent recurrence that hit the
2300’s peak limiting system, thereby defining the maximum peak level
that the 2300 will produce. In the U.S., we recommend using 900s peak
weighting on the peak modulation indicator, as permitted by F.C.C. rules.
This will cause the monitor to ignore very low energy overshoots and will
result in the highest peak modulation permitted by law.
In other countries, use a peak-indicating instrument as specified by the
regulatory authority in your country.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-21
If you are required to obey the multiplex power limits specified by ITU-R
BS412-9, you may seldom see peaks hitting 75 kHz deviation. In this
case, we advise you to set the output level using the 2300’s reference
400Hz tone.

B) Press the NEXT button and repeat for COMPOSITE OUTPUT 2.

15. Set the digital output level.

A) Press the NEXT button.

B) [Skip this step if you are not using the digital output.]
Turn the knob to set the desired digital output level corresponding to
100% modulation, in units of dB below full-scale.
The most accurate way to set this control is by observing a modulation
monitor or analyzer connected to your transmitter.

16. Set the analog output level.

A) Press the NEXT button.

B) [Skip this step if you are not using the analog output.]
Turn the knob to set the desired analog output level corresponding to
100% modulation, in units of dBu (0 dBu = 0.776 Vrms).
The most accurate way to set this control is by observing a modulation
monitor or analyzer connected to your transmitter.

C) Press the NEXT button.

If you activated the modulation setup tone in step (13.A) on page 2-20,
the tone will turn off automatically.
D) Press the NEXT button.
You have now completed the guided Quick Setup procedure and are in
the normal RECALL PRESET screen. However, if your country requires you
to comply with the multiplex power ceiling specified in ITU-R BS412-9,
you will also need to set up the 2300’s Multiplex Power Controller by fol-
lowing the instructions in step 19 on page 2-22.

17. Choose a processing preset.

[If you are setting up the 2300 for use as a stand-alone stereo encoder, skip this
step.]
A) Turn the knob until your desired preset is visible in the lower line of the dis-
play.
B) Press the RECALL NEXT button to put your desired preset on-air.
This step selects the processing to complement the program format of
your station.
After this step, you can always select a different processing preset, pro-
gram the 2300 to automatically change presets on a time / date schedule,
2-22 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

use a GPI input to trigger preset changes, modify presets to customize

your sound, and store these presets as User Presets.
Preset names are just suggestions. Feel free to audition different presets
and to choose the one whose sound you prefer. This preset may have a
very different name than the name of your format. This is OK.
You can easily modify a preset later with the 2300’s one-knob LESS-MORE
feature. Refer to Section 3.
Congratulations! You are now on the air with your initial sound. Feel free to
read the material in Section 3 of this manual, which describes the various presets
and how you can customize them to achieve your desired signature sound.

18. Complete Station ID (optional).

The Station ID is an optional setting that you can provide to associate the 2300
with the station providing the program material (e.g., “Z-100”). The name can be
up to eight characters long. It is used to identify your 2300 to Orban’s PC Remote
application, and appears on the Main Screen when the 2300 is being controlled
by the PC Remote application.
A) Navigate to SETUP / NEXT / TIME DATE AND ID / STATION ID.
B) Use the knob to set the each character in the ID. Use the NEXT and PREV but-
tons to control the cursor position.
C) When finished entering your name, press the SAVE button. If you escape to
the main screen from Setup, you can now see the station name toggle on the
main screen.

19. Activate the 2300’s ITU-R BS412 multiplex power controller (optional).

[Skip this step if ITU-R BS412 is not enforced in your country. At the time of this
writing, it is only enforced in certain European countries. If your country does
not enforce ITU-R BS412, set the ITU412-9 control to OFF.]
[If you are planning to use the 2300 in its stand-alone stereo encoder mode,
make sure that the multiplex power controller is turned off until you have fin-
ished setting up the other stereo encoder parameters. Otherwise, it will interfere
with setting output levels.]
A) Navigate to SETUP / STEREO ENCODER / NEXT / ITU412-9.
B) Set the multiplex power threshold by holding the ITU412-9 button down and
turning the knob so that the display indicates 0.0 dB.
If your transmission system introduces overshoot in the signal path after
the 2300 (including the transmitter), instead set the multiplex power
threshold so that it equals the amount of peak overshoot (in dB) in the
transmission system. If you do not do this, the 2300’s ITU-R BS412-9 con-
troller will set the average multiplex power too low.
The easiest way to measure system overshoot is to turn the multiplex
power controller off temporarily. Then set the 2300’s output level (using
its built-in 400Hz reference tone) so that the transmitter produces 75
kHz deviation. Finally, play program material with lots of high frequency
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-23
energy and bass transients (like bright rock music with heavy kick drum)
and observe the peak deviation produced by the program material. The
overshoot is the amount (in dB) by which the deviation with program
material exceeds 75 kHz deviation.

See the notes on the MPX POWER OFFSET control on page 3-29.

20. Set up modulation reduction to compensate for subcarriers, if needed.

In the United States, F.C.C. Rules permit you to add 0.5% modulation for every
1% increase in subcarrier injection. For example, if your subcarrier injection to-
tals 20%, you can set the total modulation to 110% (82.5 kHz deviation). The
2300 has the ability to reduce audio modulation to compensate for subcarriers.
The advantage of using the modulation reduction function is that the pilot injec-
tion stays constant when the audio modulation is reduced. However, using the
modulation reduction function is slightly inconvenient because it requires pro-
gramming and activating at least one 2300 GPI input. If you have the same sub-
carrier injection at all times, a more convenient alternative is to set the desired
modulation level by using the COMPOSITE LEVEL control(s). Then turn up the pilot
injection control until the injection equals 9% modulation.
If you wish to use the modulation reduction function anyway:
A) Navigate to SETUP / NEXT / MODULATION REDUCTION.
B) Hold down the appropriate MODULATION REDUCTION button and turn the knob
to set the amount of modulation reduction produced by the MODULATION
REDUCTION 1 and MODULATION REDUCTION 2 functions.
You can program these to be activated via any rear-panel GPI input, or by
the 2300’s clock-based automation.
When both modulation reduction functions are active, the modulation
reduction is the sum of their settings.
To comply with FCC Rules, set the modulation reduction to one-half the
injection of the associated subcarrier. For example, if your subcarrier in-
jection totals 20% from two 10% subcarriers, set MODULATION REDUCTION 1
TO “5%” and MODULATION REDUCTION 2 to 5%. This will reduce your audio
modulation to 90% (100% – 5% – 5%). When you add back the 20%
modulation due to the subcarriers, you get the required 110% total
modulation.
The Modulation Reduction function is active as long as signal is applied
to its associated GPI input.
C) Program the GPI input(s).
a) Navigate to SETUP / NEXT / NETWORK&REMOTE / REMOTE INTERFACE.
b) Using the NEXT button, scroll the screen until you see the button
corresponding to the GPI terminal you wish to program.
c) Hold down this button and turn the knob until you see MOD. REDUCTION 1
or MOD. REDUCTION 2 as desired.
2-24 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

To program clock-based automation to activate modulation reduction, follow

the instructions found in “Using Clock-Based Automation” on page 2-35.

Setup for Stand-Alone Stereo Encoder Mode

[Skip this section if you are not going to use your 2300 in stand-alone stereo en-
coder mode.]

In the 2300’s stand-alone stereo encoder mode, several controls that you might
expect to find in I/O SETUP, such as input preemphasis status, are instead in-
cluded in the Factory/User Presets. This allows you to save several setups as User
presets and to recall them by remote control (GPI or PC Remote) or by the 2300’s
internal clock-based automation.

1. Set up your 2300 using the Quick Setup instructions

starting on page 2-17.

This will set the composite output level, preemphasis, and several other functions
correctly.

2. Turn the 2300’s MPX power controller off.

When on, it causes gain reduction that makes it impossible to set the AI and DI
reference level controls correctly with test tones. See step 19 on page 2-22.

3. Recall the ST ENC NO LIM preset.

A) Press the RECALL button on the 2300’s front panel.

B) Turn the knob until ST ENC NO LIMIT is visible in the lower line of the display.
C) Press the RECALL NEXT button.
The 2300 is now in stand-alone stereo encoder mode. The L/R protection
limiting and composite limiter are inactive. This makes it easier to adjust
modulation using a test tone.

4. Adjust the input to accept a flat or preemphasized signal.

Note for users of J.17 preemphasis: If you are using the digital input and
set it to DIGITAL+J17 in step (7.B) on page 2-18, the 2300 will first apply
J.17 deemphasis to the digital input signal. It will then leave it un-
changed or preemphasize it at 50 or 75 µs, following the setting of the
INPUT PRE-EMPH CONTROL, as adjusted in the steps immediately below.
The J.17 option is rarely used; it applies mainly to NICAM links. You can
set most Optimod-FMs to emit a J.17-preemphasized signal with or with-
out additional 50 or 75 µs preemphasis. For example, see step (11.B) on
page 2-19.
A) Navigate to MODIFY / FULL CONTROL.
B) If you do not see the INPUT PRE-EMPH soft button, press the NEXT button until
it appears.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-25
C) While holding down the INPUT PRE-EMPH soft button, rotate the knob to
match the 2300 to the input signal’s preemphasis.
All FM audio processing chains must include a preemphasis limiter to
prevent high frequency overmodulation. Therefore, regardless of
whether you choose FLAT or PRE-EMPH in this step, you must ensure that
the signal driving the 2300 stereo encoder has already received 50 µs or
75 µs preemphasis limiting. (Any Optimod-FM will perform preemphasis
limiting.) You must set the 50 or 75 µs preemphasis in the audio proces-
sor driving the 2300 to be the same as the 2300’s preemphasis setting.
If the signal driving the 2300 has not already received preemphasis limit-
ing, you must run the 2300 in its audio processing mode (not its stand-
alone stereo encoder mode) so that the 2300 can perform the preempha-
sis limiting.

 Choose FLAT if the input signal has no 50 or 75 µs preemphasis.

FLAT causes the 2300 to apply 50 or 75 µs preemphasis to the input signal,
following the preemphasis setting you specified in step 10 in Quick Setup
(page 2-19).

 Choose PRE-EMPH if your input signal has already been pre-emphasized to

50 or 75 µs.
In step 10 in Quick Setup (page 2-19), make sure that you have set the
2300’s preemphasis to match the preemphasis of the input signal. Even
though the 2300 is not applying preemphasis, its L/R overshoot limiter
needs to be aware of the input signal’s preemphasis because the over-
shoot limiter uses different algorithms for 50 and 75 µs. This minimizes
audible limited-induced artifacts.
Usually, the STL adds less peak overshoot to its input signal if its input
and output signals are preemphasized. Doing this eliminates several
stages of deemphasis and preemphasis. However, if the STL uses lossy
digital compression (like MP2), you must run the STL flat and restore pre-
emphasis in the 2300. Studio-Transmitter Link (starting on page 1-13) has
a thorough discussion of these issues.

5. Adjust the input lowpass filter.

A) Navigate to MODIFY / FULL CONTROL.

B) If you do not see the LOWPASS FILTER soft button, press the NEXT button until
it appears.
C) While holding down the LOWPASS FILTER soft button, rotate the knob to set
the cutoff frequency of the phase-linear lowpass filter at the 2300’s input.
It is usually unnecessary to use this filter; you may set it OFF unless you
need to remove out of band noise from a noisy STL.
To minimize filter-induced overshoot, set the cutoff frequency as high as
possible. While this filter introduces no phase distortion, it will add over-
shoot if it removes a significant amount of high frequency energy.
If you are using an Optimod-FM 8000, 8100, or 8500 audio processor to
drive the STL, set the 2300’s LOWPASS FILTER to OFF or 17 KHZ. If you are
using any other Optimod-FM, set the filter to OFF, 16 KHZ or 17 KHZ.
2-26 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

6. Set the analog input reference level.

[Skip this step if you will not be using the analog input.]
A) Navigate to SETUP / IO CALIB / ANLG IN CALIB / INPUT.
B) Set the INPUT to Analog.
The 2300 will automatically switch to analog input if signal lock is un-
available at the AES3 input.
C) Apply a 50 Hz sine wave the 2300’s analog input (usually through an STL) and
set the peak level of the tone to equal the maximum peak output level pro-
duced by the FM audio processor driving the 2300.
All digital Optimod-FM processors have a built-in tone oscillator that can
generate this tone. Set the modulation in the Optimod’s tone generator
to 100%.
Tone alignment does not account for any overshoots that the STL might
generate with program material. Normally, you will use the 2300’s
left/right overshoot limiter and/or composite limiter to eliminate such
overshoots. Do not substitute these limiters for the peak limiters in the
audio processor driving the STL. The 2300’s overshoot limiters should only
be used to eliminate 3 dB or less STL-induced overshoot.
D) Navigate to SETUP / IO CALIB / ANLG IN CALIB / AI REF. Adjust the AI REF control
to produce 100% composite modulation (usually ±75 kHz carrier deviation) as
indicated on a modulation monitor or analyzer connected to your FM trans-
mitter’s output.
If you set the composite output level correctly in step 14 (page 2-20) of
Quick Setup, you should see the 2300’s composite level meter indicate
100% modulation when the AI REF control is set correctly. It is very im-
portant to have set the composite output level correctly in this earlier
step. This will correctly match the 2300’s composite limiter threshold to
the FM carrier deviation produced by the transmitter and will ensure that
the 2300’s headroom is used correctly. If you are not sure whether the
2300’s composite output level was set correctly, refer to step 7 on page 2-
33. Use “tone” method to set modulation. This uses the 2300’s internal
tone oscillator.

7. Set the digital input reference level.

[Skip this step if you will not be using the digital input.]
Refer to the notes in step 6 above.
A) Navigate to SETUP / IO CALIB / DIG IN CALIB / INPUT and set the input to DIGITAL.
B) Apply a 50 Hz sine wave the 2300’s digital input (usually through an STL) and
set the level of the tone to correspond to 100% peak modulation of the com-
posite stereo baseband signal. This level should be the same as the maximum
peak output level produced by the FM audio processor driving the 2300.
C) Navigate to SETUP / IO CALIB / DIG IN CALIB / DI REF. Adjust the DI REF control to
produce 100% composite modulation (usually ±75 kHz carrier deviation) as
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-27
indicated on a modulation monitor or analyzer connected to your FM trans-
mitter’s output.

8. Activate the L/R Peak Limiter (optional)

A) Navigate to MODIFY / FULL CONTROL.

B) If you do not see the L/R PEAK LIMITER soft button, press the NEXT button until
it appears.
C) Set the control to IN.
This activates a peak limiter similar to the one in Orban’s 8218 Stereo En-
coder. The limiter controls peaks with a combination of look-ahead limit-
ing and band-limited clipping. There are two limiters, operating inde-
pendently on the left and right channels. They are intended only to re-
move overshoots caused by the STL. If used for more than 3 dB of peak
reduction, they can cause audible side effects. To minimize audible dis-
tortion, it always better to minimize overshoots in the STL itself instead
of relying on the L/R peak limiter to remove them.

9. Activate the Composite Limiter (optional)

A) Navigate to MODIFY / FULL CONTROL.

B) If you do not see the MPX LIMIT MODE soft button, press the NEXT button until
it appears. Then select either HARD or HALFCOS modes.
When operating as a hard clipper, the composite limiter will produce
maximum brightness in the frequency range from 5 to 15 kHz because,
unlike left/right audio-domain clippers, it can produce square waves in
this frequency range. The downside compared to Half-Cosine mode is
that it can noticeably compromise stereo imaging.
When operating in Half-Cosine mode, the composite limiter produces
somewhat less brightness but does not compromise stereo imaging.
Orban’s factory programmers prefer the sound of the Half-Cosine mode.
In either mode, the baseband output is overshoot compensated and
bandlimited to 53 kHz, unlike conventional composite clippers.
The HARD mode is only available when the 2300 is operated as a stand-
alone stereo encoder. In the 2300’s audio processor mode, its composite
limiter always operates in Half-Cosine mode.

C) If you do not see the MPX LIMIT DRIVE soft button, press the NEXT button until
it appears.
D) Adjust the control as desired.
We recommend setting the control to “0.” This sets the limiter threshold
to be the same as the analog and digital reference levels, which corre-
spond to 100% baseband tone modulation. This setting only removes
overshoots.
Setting the control higher than “0” drives the limiter harder, causing
progressively more limiting action but also more distortion, the texture
of which depends on whether the MPX LIMIT MODE is set to HARD or
2-28 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

HALFCOS. The composite limiter is less forgiving than the L/R Peak Limiter
because it operates more like a pure clipper. In general, it should be used
with less than +1.0 dB of limiting. See MPX LIMIT on page 3-28.

10. Program Silence Sense (optional)

If you are using the 2300 in stereo encoder mode, you can program the 2300 to
switch automatically from its digital input to its analog inputs if the INPUT
SOURCE is set to DIGITAL and the signal at the digital input falls silent.
There are two silence detectors, one for the analog input and one for the
digital input. The silence sense parameters apply to both simultaneously.
Both detectors are available to drive the 2300’s tally outputs but only the
“digital input” silence detector is used for automatic input switching.
(See step 11 below.)
Silence sense will be activated if either channel falls silent, thus also pro-
tecting against “loss-of-one-stereo-channel” faults.
If silence is detected at the analog input as well as the digital input (as in
the case of a studio operational fault), automatic switching will not oc-
cur.
When an active signal is restored to the digital input, the 2300 will
automatically switch back to that input.
This feature is unavailable in the 2300’s audio processing mode.
A) Navigate to MODIFY / FULL CONTROL / SILENCE THRESHOLD and set the Silence
Threshold to the level below which the 2300 will interpret the input as being
silent.
This setting is with respect to the current analog reference level and digi-
tal reference level.

B) Press NEXT as necessary to see the SILENCE DELAY control. Set it to the amount
of time that the input must be below the Silence Threshold before the 2300
automatically switches to the analog input.
C) Press NEXT as necessary to see the ANALOG FALLBACK control. Set it to YES if
you wish the 2300 to switch automatically from the digital to analog input
when silence is detected. Set the control to NO to defeat automatic switching.

11. Program Tally Outputs.

[Skip this step if you do not wish to use the tally outputs.]

See step 7 on page 2-4 for wiring instructions.

You can program the two tally outputs to indicate a number of different opera-
tional and fault conditions.

A) Navigate to MODIFY / FULL CONTROL / TALLY OUT1.

B) Program tally output #1.
To program a given tally output, press and hold the soft button associ-
ated with the output you are programming. As you turn the control
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-29
knob, the functions listed below will appear in the highlighted field.
 Input: Analog: Indicates that the 2300 is processing audio from its analog
input.

 Input: Digital: Indicates that the 2300 is processing audio from its AES3
digital input.

 Analog Input Silent: Indicates that the level at either or both analog in-
put channels is below the threshold set in step 10 on page 2-28.

 AES Input Silent: Indicates that the level at either or both digital input
channels is below the threshold set in step 10 on page 2-28.

 AES Input Error: Indicates that the 2300’s AES input receiver chip has de-
tected a problem with the data being received such that the data is unus-
able. When the chip detects such an error, it automatically switches the in-
put to ANALOG.

 No Function: Tally output is disabled.

C) Program tally output #2 if you wish, following the procedure in step (B) above
with the TALLY OUT2 button.

12. Save your work as a User Preset.

It is important to save your settings as a User Preset to preserve your work. You
can create as many User Presets as you wish, each customized for a particular ap-
plication, although most stand-alone stereo encoder applications will require
only one preset. See To Create or Save a User Preset on page 3-13.

13. If required, activate the MPX Power Controller.

See step 19 on page 2-22.

The following material provides detailed instructions on how to set up the 2300 in
its audio processor mode. If QUICK SETUP does not fully address your setup needs or
if you wish to customize your system beyond those provided with QUICK SETUP,
then you may need the additional information in the sections below. However, for
most users, this material is only for reference because QUICK SETUP has enabled
them to set up the 2300 correctly.

Analog and Digital I/O Setup

For the following adjustments, use the appropriately labeled soft button to choose
the parameter to be adjusted. To change a parameter (like an output level), it is
usually necessary to hold down the soft button while turning the knob.
2-30 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

1. Temporarily set the external AGC mode to “No.”

A) Navigate to SETUP / NEXT / NEXT / EXT AGC and set EXT AGC to NO.
If you are using a external AGC like the Orban 8200ST, you should restore
this setting to YES after the setup procedure is complete.

2. Adjust Input selector.

A) Navigate to SETUP / IO CALIB / ANLG IN CALIB / INPUT.

B) Set the INPUT to Analog.
The 2300 will automatically switch to analog input if signal lock is un-
available at the AES3 input.

3. Adjust Analog Input Reference Level.

[9 dBu to +13 dBu (VU), or –1 to +21 dBu (PPM)] in 0.5 dB steps
The reference level VU and PPM (Peak) settings track each other with an offset
of 8 dB. This compensates for the typical indications with program material of a
VU meter versus the higher indications on a PPM.
This step sets the center of the 2300’s gain reduction range to the level to which
your studio operators peak their program material on the studio meters. This as-
sures that the 2300’s processing presets will operate in their preferred range.
You may adjust this level with a standard reference / line-up level tone from your
studio or with program material.
Note that in this step, you are calibrating to the normal indication of the studio
meters; this is quite different from the actual peak level.
If you know the reference VU or PPM level that will be presented to the 2300, set
the reference level to this level, but please verify it with the steps shown directly
below.
A) Press the RECALL button.
B) Turn the knob until ROCK-MEDIUM appears in the lower line of the display.
C) Press the RECALL NEXT button.
D) Navigate to SETUP / IO CALIB / ANLG IN CALIB / AI REF (VU or PPM, depending on
which metering system you use).
E) Calibrate using Tone.
[Skip to step (F) if you are using Program material to calibrate the 2300 to
your standard studio level.]
a) Verify EXT AGC is set to NO.
Refer to step 1 on page 2-30.
b) Feed a tone at your reference level to the 2300
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-31
If you are not using a studio level controller, feed a tone through your
console at normal program levels (typically 0VU if your console uses VU
meters).
If you are using a studio level controller that performs an AGC function,
such as an Orban 8200ST OPTIMOD-Studio, adjust it for normal opera-
tion.
c) Adjust the AI REF (VU or PPM) control to make the 2300’s AGC meter
indicate 10 dB gain reduction.
d) Skip to step (G).
F) Calibrate using Program.
[Skip this step if you are using Tone to calibrate the 2300 to your stan-
dard studio level—see step (D) above.]
a) Verify EXT AGC is set to NO.
Refer to step 1 on page 2-30.
b) Feed normal program material to the 2300
Play program material from your studio, peaking at the level to which
you normally peak program material (typically 0VU if your console uses
VU meters).

c) Adjust the AI REF (VU or PPM) control to make the 2300’s AGC meters
indicate an average of 10 dB gain reduction when the console’s VU meter
or PPM is peaking at its normal level.
If the AGC gain reduction meter averages less than 10 dB gain reduction
(higher on the meter), re-adjust the AI REF (VU or PPM) to a lower level.
If the AGC gain reduction meter averages more gain reduction (lower on
the meter), re-adjust the AI REF (VU or PPM) to a higher level.
G) When finished, reset EXT AGC to YES, if required (e.g., if that was its setting
prior to setting AI REF (VU or PPM) level).
Refer to step 1 on page 2-30.

4. Adjust Right Channel Balance.

[Skip this step if the channels are already satisfactorily balanced.]

[3 dB to +3 dB] on right channel only, 0.1 dB steps
Adjust the R CH BAL control to achieve correct Left/Right channel balance.
This is not a balance control like those found in consumer audio prod-
ucts. This control changes gain of the right channel only. Use this control
if the right analog input to the 2300 is not at exactly the same level as
the left input. Be certain that the imbalance is not caused by one pro-
gram source, but is instead introduced through distribution between the
console output and 2300 input. This adjustment is best accomplished by
playing program material that is known to be monophonic or by setting
the mixing console into mono mode (if available).
2-32 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

5. Adjust the Digital Input Reference Level and Right Balance controls.

[Skip this step if you will not be using the digital input.]
A) Navigate to SETUP / IO CALIB / DIG IN CALIB / INPUT and set the input to Digital.
B) Repeat steps 1 through 4 (starting on page 2-30), but use the DI REF (VU OR
PPM) and R CH BAL controls for the digital section.

6. Configure Composite Outputs

A) Navigate to SETUP / STEREO ENCODER / NEXT / PRE-EMPH. Set the pre-emphasis

to 50µs or 75µs, depending on your country’s standard.
B) Set PILOT LVL to 9%.
If you have to reduce the setting of the COMPOSITE LEVEL control to ac-
commodate overshoots in the transmission path following the 2300 (in-
cluding the transmitter), you may have to increase the setting of the
PILOT LEVEL so that the pilot still produces 9% modulation.
C) Press the NEXT button. Be sure that MODE is set to STEREO and XTALK TEST is set
to OPERATE. Reset these parameters if necessary.
D) Using the COMP1 LVL and COMP2 LVL controls, adjust the level for each com-
posite output to produce 100% modulation of the FM carrier on modulation
peaks.
Alternately, you can use the 2300’s built-in calibration tone oscillator. To
do this:
a) Navigate to SETUP / TEST.
b) Set the MODE to TONE.
c) Set TONE FREQ to 400 HZ.
d) Set TONE LVL to 100%.
e) Press the NEXT key.
f) Set TONE CHAN to L+R.
g) Verify that PILOT is ON.
h) When you have finished with the tone, set the MODE to OPERATE.
E) If you are required to meet the requirements of ITU-R BS412-9 in your coun-
try, activate the 2300’s ITU-R BS412 controller. See step 19 on page 2-22.
F) You can specify the amount by which the 2300 automatically reduces main
and stereo subchannel modulation to accommodate subcarriers within the
modulation limits specified by the governing authority. See step 20 on page 2-
23.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-33
7. Set analog output and configuration level.

A) Navigate to SETUP / IO CALIB / ANLG OUT CALIB / AO PRE-E. Set the analog out-
put pre-emphasis to PRE-E (for pre-emphasis) or FLAT.
If you will use the analog output to drive a stereo encoder, PRE-E pro-
vides the best performance because the stereo encoder does not have to
restore the pre-emphasis. However, if you cannot defeat the pre-
emphasis in your stereo encoder or if you will use the analog output for
monitoring, set the output FLAT.
If you are sending the analog output of the 2300 through a digital link
that uses lossy compression (like MPEG, APT-X, or Dolby), set the output
Flat. Lossy codecs cannot handle pre-emphasized signals.
B) You can use either program material or tone to set your output level (and
thus, your on-air modulation). If you want to use tone, turn on the 400Hz
calibration tone.
See step (6.D) on page 2-32 for instructions on how to turn on the cali-
bration tone.

C) Using the AO 100% button, set the desired analog output level corresponding
to 100% modulation, using units of dBu (0 dBu = 0.776 Vrms).
The most accurate way to set this control is by observing a modulation
analyzer connected to your transmitter.
If you are using program material, make sure that the program material
is loud enough to produce peaks of frequent recurrence that hit the
2300’s peak limiting system, thereby defining the maximum peak level
that the 2300 will produce. In the U.S., we recommend using 900s peak
weighting on the peak modulation indicator, as permitted by F.C.C. rules.
This will cause the monitor to ignore very low energy overshoots and will
result in the highest peak modulation permitted by law.
In other countries, use a peak-indicating instrument as specified by the
regulatory authority in your country.
If you are required to implement the average modulation limits specified
by ITU-R BS412-9, you may seldom see peaks hitting 75 kHz deviation. In
this case, we advise you to set the output level by using the 2300’s refer-
ence 400Hz tone.
In the United States, F.C.C. Rules permit you to add 0.5% modulation for
every 1% increase in subcarrier injection. For example, if your subcarrier
injection totals 20%, you can set the total modulation to 110% (82.5
kHz deviation). This implies that you must set the 2300’s composite out-
put level for the equivalent of 90% modulation, not counting the subcar-
riers. (90% + 20% = 110%.) The pilot injection will thus be about 8%
modulation instead of the desired 9%. Adjust the SETUP / STEREO
ENCODER / NEXT / PILOT LVL control as necessary to produce 9% modula-
tion (6.75 kHz deviation). This will ordinarily require you to set the
PILOT LVL parameter to “10%.”

8. Set digital output and configuration level.

[Skip this step if you will not be using the digital output.]
2-34 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

[See the notes immediately above.]

A) Navigate to SETUP / IO CALIB / DIG OUT CALIB.
B) Set the DO PRE-E control to PRE-E (for pre-emphasis), PRE+J17, J.17 or FLAT.
C) Set the DO RATE to 32, 44.1, 48, 88.2, or 96 kHz.
The 2300’s fundamental sample rate is always 32 kHz, ensuring that the
output bandwidth is always strictly limited to 16 kHz and that the proc-
essed signal can be passed through a 32 kHz uncompressed STL without
addition of overshoot. However, the internal sample rate converter sets
the rate at the 2300’s digital output. This adjustment allows you to set
the output sample rate to ensure compatibility with equipment requiring
a fixed sample rate.

D) Set the DO SYNC.

You can choose INTERNAL (the output sample rate is synchronized to the
2300’s internal crystal-controlled clock) or EXTERNAL (the output sample
rate is synchronized to the sample rate appearing at the 2300’s AES3 in-
put).

E) Press NEXT. Then set the desired output WORD LEN (word length).
[14], [16], [18], [20], or [24], in bits
The largest valid word length in the 2300 is 24 bits
The 2300 can also truncate its output word length to 20, 18, 16, or 14
bits. The 2300 can add dither for input material that is insufficiently dith-
ered for these lower word lengths (see the next step).
F) Adjust DITHER to IN or OUT, as desired.
[In] or [Out]
When set to In, the 2300 adds “high-pass” dither before any truncation
of the output word. The amount of dither automatically tracks the set-
ting of the WORD LEN control. This is first-order noise shaped dither that
considerably reduces added noise in the midrange by comparison to
white PDF dither. However, unlike extreme noise shaping, it adds a
maximum of 3 dB of excess total noise power when compared to white
PDF dither. Thus, it is a good compromise between white PDF dither and
extreme noise shaping.
If the source material has already been correctly dithered (as is true for
virtually all commercially recorded material), you may set this control to
OUT. However, particularly if you use the Noise Reduction feature, the
processing can sometimes attenuate input dither so that it is insufficient
to dither the output correctly. In this case, you should add dither within
the 2300.

G) Set DIGITAL FORMAT to AES or SPDIF

H) Press the PREV button.
I) Using a modulation monitor or modulation analyzer, adjust the DO 100% con-
trol to make the modulation monitor read 100% modulation (usually 75 kHz
deviation).
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-35
See the notes in step (7.C) on page 2-33.

9. End Analog and Digital I/O setup.

If you are using a external AGC and you temporarily set the EXT AGC to NO in
step 1 on page 2-30, set the EXT AGC to YES.

10. Select a processing preset.

See step 17 on page 2-21.

Automation Using the 2300’s Internal Clock

1. If you have not already done so, set the system clock.

[You can also set the clock automatically via PC Remote or the Internet. See
Synchronizing Optimod to a Network Time Server starting on page 2-44.]
A) Navigate to SETUP / NEXT / TIME DATE AND ID / SET TIME.
a) Set hours and minutes.
b) Enter seconds slightly ahead of the correct time.
c) Wait until the entered time agrees with the correct time. Then press the
ENTER TIME button to set the clock.
B) Press the SET DATE button.
a) Set today’s date, using the days, month, and year buttons.
b) Press the ENTER DATE button.
C) Press the DAYLIGHT TIME button.
a) Using the Daylight Saving (DT MONTH and DT WEEK) buttons, set the month
and week when Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time) begins, or OFF.
b) Using the Standard Time (ST MONTH and ST WEEK) buttons, set the month
and week when Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time) ends.
Note that setting DT MONTH, DT WEEK, ST MONTH, or ST WEEK to OFF will
defeat Daylight Time functionality.
c) Press the Escape key to back out of the daylight saving screen.
D) (Optional) Press the STATION ID button to specify your station’s identifier (call
sign or call letters).
a) Use the knob to select characters. Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to move
the cursor.
b) When you are finished, press SAVE.
2-36 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

2. Navigate to Setup / Next / Automation.

If the AUTOMATION button reads DISABLED, hold it down and turn the knob to en-
able automation.
This button allows you to easily enable or disable all automation events without
having to edit individual automation events.

3. To add an automation event:

A) Push the ADD EVENT button.

B) Choose whether you wish to program an event that occurs only once or an
event that follows a daily or weekly schedule.
C) For events that occur only once:
a) Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to move the cursor over the word “DAILY:”
and turn the knob so that is reads “DATE:” instead.
b) Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to move the cursor to the day, month, and
year when the automation event will occur. Set the desired values with the
knob.
c) Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to move the cursor set the hour, minute,
and second (in 24-hour format) when the automation event is to occur. Set
the desired values with the knob.
D) For events that occur on a daily or weekly schedule:
a) Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to move the cursor the each day of the
week in turn. Then use the rotary encoder to turn the day on or off.
You can program the event to occur on as many days of the week as you
wish.

b) Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to move the cursor set the hour, minute,
and second (in 24-hour format—e.g., 18:00:00 for 6:00 PM) when the
automation event is to occur. Set the desired values with the knob.
Automation events have a “start” time but no “stop” time. The 2300 will
indefinitely remain in the state specified by an existing automation event
until its state is changed by another automation event or by another ac-
tion (such as a user’s interacting with the front panel or PC Remote soft-
ware).
E) For all events:
a) Press the SELECT EVENT button.
b) Turn the knob to set the desired event. The available events are:
 Recall factory preset

 Recall user preset

 stereo mode

 mono-from-left-channel (MONO-L) mode

OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-37
 mono-from right-channel (MONO-R) mode

 mono-from-sum-of-channels (MONO-SUM)

 bypass mode

 exit test (restores the operating preset that was on-air before a test mode was in-
voked)

 mod. reduction 1

 mod. reduction 2

 exit mod. reduction

F) When you have programmed an event to your satisfaction, press the SAVE
EVENT button.
You will return to the automation menu.

4. To edit an existing event:

A) Press the VIEW / EDIT EVENT button.

B) Turn the knob until you see the event you wish to edit.
C) Press the EDIT EVENT button.
D) Edit the event as desired. Use the same technique as adding an event.
See step 3 on page 2-36.

E) Press the SAVE EVENT button to store your edits.

5. To delete an event:

A) Press the DELETE EVENT button.

B) Choose the event to delete with the knob.
You can search by date or by event (i.e., recalling a given preset). Use the
NEXT button to navigate from one type of search to the other type.
C) When you have located the event you want to remove, press the DELETE
EVENT button.
This action will immediately delete the event. There is no “are you sure”
warning message. To abort the deletion, press the ESC button, not the
DELETE EVENT button.

Security and Passcode Programming

[Skip this step if you do not plan to use PC Remote software or do not plan to lock
out the front panel locally.]

The 2300 has several levels of security to prevent unauthorized people from chang-
ing its programming or operating state. Security determines the level of access for
2-38 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

anyone interacting with the 2300 through its front panel or connecting to the 2300
through a direct serial connection, dial-up networking (through modems), or the
2300’s Ethernet port.

The security levels are:

1. All Screens (i.e., administrator level)

2. All Screens except Security
3. All screens except Modify and Security
4. Presets, Modify, Save, Memory, and Automation
5. Presets and Automation
6. Presets
There is no default passcode. The Optimod’s front panel cannot be locked out unless
the Optimod has been assigned at least one All Access passcode.

Your Optimod secures User Presets by encrypting them (using the Advanced Encryp-
tion Standard algorithm with the session passcode as its key) when PC Remote
fetches them. Hence, a packet sniffer cannot intercept User Presets in plaintext form.
PC Remote then writes the fetched User Presets in encrypted form on your hard
drive, where they remain for the duration of your PC Remote session.

If PC Remote exits normally, it will erase these temporary User Preset files
from your computer’s hard disk. If it does not exit normally, these files
will remain in encrypted form. However, the next time that PC Remote
starts up, it will automatically clean up any orphaned files.

To Create a Passcode:
A) Navigate to SETUP / SECURITY / ADD PASSCODES.
If the front panel is already password protected, you can only access this
screen by entering a passcode with All Access privileges.
B) Use the four soft buttons, labeled“1,” “2,” “3,” and “4,” to create a passcode.
Passcodes can be up to eight characters long but can only contain the
characters “1,” “2,” “3,” and “4.” This limitation makes it easy to enter a
passcode using the four available soft buttons.
C) When you have finished entering your new passcode, write it down so you do
not forget it. Then press the NEXT button.
If you wish to discard the passcode you just entered, press the ESC button
instead. Then return to step (B).

D) The PERMISSIONS screen appears. Turn the knob to choose the permission level
for the passcode you just created.
If you wish to discard the passcode you just entered, press the PREV but-
ton to return to the Enter Passcode screen or ESC to return to the Secu-
rity screen.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-39
E) Press the NEXT button to save your new passcode.

To Edit a Passcode:
A) Navigate to SETUP / SECURITY / VIEW-EDIT PASSCODES.
If the front panel is already password protected, you can only access this
screen by entering a passcode with ALL ACCESS privileges.
B) Turn the knob until you see the passcode you want to edit.
C) Press the NEXT button. The Permissions screen appears.
D) Turn the knob to set the desired permission level for the passcode you are ed-
iting.
E) Press the NEXT button to confirm your choice.
Your new permission level is stored and the Security menu appears.

To Delete a Passcode:
A) Navigate to SETUP / SECURITY / DELETE PASSCODES.
If the front panel is already password protected, you can only access this
screen by entering a passcode with All Access privileges.
B) Turn the knob until you see the passcode you want to delete.
C) Press the NEXT button. The Confirm Delete screen appears.
D) Press the YES soft button to delete the passcode. Press the NO or ESCAPE
buttons to abort deleting the passcode.

To Lock the Front Panel Immediately:

After you have adjusted the processor, to maximize security you will often want
to lock it immediately without waiting for the timeout. To do so:
A) Press the SETUP button.
B) Press the LOCK NOW soft button.

To Program local lockout:

A) Navigate to SETUP / SECURITY.
If the front panel is already password protected, you can only access this
screen by entering a passcode with ALL ACCESS privileges.
B) Hold down the AUTOLOCK soft button and turn the knob to set the desired
lockout time (if any).
You can program the lockout delay time (in hours:minutes) from 15 min-
utes to 8 hours, or OFF. This is the time delay between the last access to a
2-40 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

local front panel control and when the front panel automatically locks it-
self out, requiring entering a passcode to obtain front panel control of
the 2300.
Autolock can only be turned on if at least one passcode exists with ALL
ACCESS privileges because an ALL ACCESS passcode is required to fully
unlock the panel or to turn off the Autolock function.

C) Press the ESCAPE button to leave the Security menu.

To Unlock the Front Panel:

A) On the 2300 front panel, operate any button or the knob.
The PASSCODE screen appears.
B) Enter a passcode using the four soft buttons.
The 2300 functionality that you can access depends on the security level
of the passcode that you entered.
After you have finished working, the panel will automatically re-lock af-
ter the time delay you set in SETUP / SECURITY / AUTOLOCK. (You can set a
new delay at any time if you have an ALL ACCESS passcode.)

Dial-up Networking and the Passcode

When you make a Windows Dial-up Networking connection, Windows will ask you
for your passcode. To allow the connection to occur, enter any passcode that you set
at the 2300’s front panel. Once your PC is connected to the 2300, you will be able to
access the 2300 functionality corresponding to the security level of your passcode.

If you have not set a passcode, leave the Windows dialog box blank.

If You Have Forgotten Your Passcode

You can reset factory defaults and wipe out security passcodes (in case you forgot
your ALL ACCESS passcode).

A) Remove power from the 2300.

B) While pressing both the ESCAPE and SETUP buttons, restore power.
The Restore Defaults screen appears.
C) To gain access to the 2300, press the ERASE ALL PASSCODES soft button.
D) Reprogram passcodes as necessary; see To Create a Passcode on page 2-38.
The RESTORE DEFAULTS button (in the Restore Defaults screen) restores
all System Setup and Input/Output parameters to their factory default
settings. It also erases all passcodes. You should never need to use this
button in an existing installation, although it is a convenient way to
make the 2300 “factory fresh” if it is being installed in a different facility.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-41
Remote Control Interface Programming

1. Navigate to SETUP / NEXT / NETWORK & REMOTE / REMOTE INTERFACE.

2. Program one or more remote control interfaces.

A) Navigate to the desired Remote Interface button (1 through 8) by repeatedly

pressing the NEXT button.
B) Hold down the button while turning the knob to select the desired function
for the interface.
Use either button below the appropriate graphics; both work the same.
A momentary pulse of voltage will switch most functions, except as
noted.

 Preset Name: switches the named preset on the air. The control interface
can recall any factory or user preset.

 Input: Analog: selects the analog inputs.

 Input: Digital: selects the digital input and but does not apply de-
emphasis to it.

 Input: Digital+J.17: selects the digital input and applies J.17 de-emphasis
to it.

 Bypass: switches the Bypass Test Mode on the air.

 Tone: switches the Tone Test Mode preset on the air.

 Exit Test: If a test preset is presently on the air, EXIT TEST reverts to the
previous processing preset.

 Stereo: switches the 2300’s stereo encoder on. In conjunction with mono
mode controls (below), iIt also determines the operating mode of the audio
processing (STEREO, MONO-FROM-LEFT, MONO-FROM-RIGHT, or MONO-FROM-
SUM.)

 Mono from Left, Mono from Right, or Mono from Sum: switches the
2300’s stereo encoder off, using the Left, Right, or Sum (L+R) respectively as
the program source. This also determines the feed to the entire processing
chain so that facilities that do not use the 2300’s stereo encoder can change
stereo/mono mode and select the source when in mono mode.

 Mod Reduction 1, or Mod Reduction 2: reduces the program modula-

tion by the percentage programmed in SETUP / NEXT / MODULATION REDUCTION
(see step 20 on page 2-23). When voltage is removed, these functions are
deactivated.

 Reset Clock To Hour: resets the internal clock to the nearest hour. For ex-
2-42 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

ample, 3:03:10 would be reset to 3:00:00, while 3:53:40 would be reset to

4:00:00. Use this function to periodically re-sync the 2300’s internal clock to
your station’s master clock.

 Reset Clock to Midnight: Resets the clock to 0:00:00. You can use this
function to periodically re-sync the 2300’s internal clock to your station’s
master clock.

 No Function: remote input is disabled.

3. End remote control interface programming.

When you are finished programming the remote control interface, press the Es-
cape button to return to higher menu levels.

Networking and Remote Control

[Skip this step if you do not wish to connect to your 2300 remotely, either for
downloading software upgrades or for PC Remote Control.]

The 2300 has a built-in Ethernet connector that can be used with 10 Mbps or 100
Mbps networks using the TCP/IP protocol. You can also connect a PC to the 2300
through the 2300’s RS-232 serial port, either by modem or directly through a null
modem cable.

1. Prepare the 2300 for an Ethernet network connection:

[Skip this step if you will not be using an Ethernet connection.]

 See your network administrator to get the data required in the following
procedure.

 Note that if you wish to do this from the 2300 PC Remote software, then you
must first be able to connect to the 2300. Therefore, you will usually perform
this procedure from the 2300’s front panel to prepare it for connection.

A) Navigate to SETUP / NETWORK & REMOTE / NEXT.

B) Press the SET IP ADDRESS soft button.
The IP Address Screen appears.
a) Use the NEXT and PREV keys to move the cursor in turn to each digit in the
IP address. Use the knob to set the digit to the desired value. Repeat until
you have selected all the numbers in the IP address assigned by your
network administrator
b) Press the SAVE soft button to confirm your setting.
C) Set the Subnet Mask assigned by your network administrator if necessary:
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-43
a) Press the SET SUBNET MASK soft button.
b) Use the NEXT and PREV keys to move the cursor in turn to each digit in the
subnet mask. Use the knob to set the digit to the desired value. Repeat
until you have selected all the numbers in the subnet mask assigned by
your network administrator
c) Press the SAVE soft button to confirm your setting.
D) Set the Gateway Address assigned by your network administrator if necessary:
a) Press the GATEWAY ADDRESS soft button.
b) Use the NEXT and PREV keys to move the cursor in turn to each digit in the
gateway address. Use the knob to set the digit to the desired value. Repeat
until you have selected all the numbers in the gateway address assigned by
your network administrator
c) Press the SAVE soft button to confirm your setting.
E) Set the IP Port assigned by your network administrator if necessary:
a) Press the IP PORT soft button.
b) Use the NEXT and PREV keys to move the cursor in turn to each digit in the
IP port. Use the knob to set the digit to the desired value. Repeat until you
have selected all the numbers in the IP port assigned by your network
administrator
The default port number is 6201.

c) Press the SAVE soft button to confirm your setting.

F) Connect your Ethernet network to the RJ45 jack on the rear panel of your
2300.

 If you are connecting to a hub or router, use a standard Ethernet cable.

 If you are connecting directly to the Ethernet jack on a computer, use a

“crossover” or “reverse” Ethernet cable.

G) Press the NEXT button.

2. Prepare the 2300 for modem connection through the serial port:

[Skip this step if you will not be using a modem connection.]

A) Navigate to SETUP / NETWORK & REMOTE.
B) Hold down the PC CONNECT soft button and turn the knob until you see
MODEM on the display.
C) Press the MODEM INIT soft button.
D) If the string that appears in the display is S0=4, this is correct. Press the
ESCAPE button and skip steps (E) and (F) below.
S0=4 is the 2300 default setting. This activates auto-answer functionality
in the modem.
2-44 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

E) Set the InIT STRING to S0=4. Use the NEXT and PREV KEYs to move the cursor in
turn to each character in the modem initialization string. Use the knob to set
the character to the desired value. Repeat until you have set all the characters
in the initialization string.
F) Press the SAVE soft button to confirm your setting.

3. Modem setup:

You will need two modems and two available phone lines, one of each for your
PC and your 2300. Orban Customer Service supports only the 3Com / U.S. Robot-
ics® 56kbps fax modem EXT on the 2300 side of your connection, although other
56kbps modems will often work OK.
You can use either an internal or an external modem with your PC.
A) Connect the telephone line from the wall phone jack to the wall connection
icon on the back of the modem (modem in).
B) Connect the modem to the 2300’s serial port with a standard (not null) mo-
dem cable.
C) Set the modem to AUTO ANSWER and turn it on.
For 3Com / U.S. Robotics® 56kbps fax modem EXT, set dipswitches 3, 5,
and 8 in the down position to activate the AUTO ANSWER setting. All other
dipswitches should be set to the up position.

4. Prepare the 2300 for direct serial connection through the serial port:

[Skip this step if you will not be using a modem connection.]

A) Navigate to SETUP / NETWORK & REMOTE.
B) Hold down the PC CONNECT soft button and turn the knob until you see
DIRECT on the display.
You are now ready to connect your computer to your 2300 through a null
modem cable connected to your computer’s serial port. Refer to Installing
2300 PC Remote Control Software on page 2-48.

Synchronizing Optimod to a Network Time Server

[Skip this section if you do not wish to automatically synchronize your Optimod’s in-
ternal clock to a network timeserver, which may be part of your local network or lo-
cated on the Internet.]

1. Navigate to SETUP / NEXT / TIME DATE AND ID / NEXT / TIME SYNC.

A) Use the PROTOCOL control to choose either TIME PROT or SNTP.

 Select TIME PROT if the Optimod is behind a firewall that does not pass UPD
packets. TIME PROT selects the Time Protocol as described in the standard
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-45
RFC868. This method uses TCP on port 37.

 Select SNTP if your network timeserver supports the Simple Network Time
Protocol as described in standard RFC1769. This method uses UDP on port
123.

Ask your network administrator which protocols are available. SNTP is

slightly more accurate.
B) Using SYNC PERIOD, choose how often your Optimod will automatically update
its internal clock to the timeserver you selected.
The choices are OFF, 8 HOURS, and 24 HOURS.
If the connection to the timeserver fails (due to network overload or
other problems), your Optimod will try once per hour to synchronize un-
til it is successful.

C) Set the OFFSET to the difference (in hours) between your time zone and Uni-
versal Time (UTC).
UTC is also known as GMT, or Greenwich Mean Time.
 The value can range between –12 and +12 hours. If this value is set to 0,
your Optimod’s time will be the same as UTC.

 You can empirically adjust this value until the correct time for your location
is displayed after you synchronize your Optimod to a timeserver.

2. Choose a timeserver.

http://www.boulder.nist.gov/timefreq/service/time-servers.html provides a cur-

rent list of timeservers available on the Internet. You network may also have a
local timeserver; ask your network administrator.
As of April 2004, NIST’s list was as shown in Table 2-1.

Name IP Address Location

time-a.nist.gov 129.6.15.28 NIST, Gaithersburg, Maryland
time-b.nist.gov 129.6.15.29 NIST, Gaithersburg, Maryland
time-a.timefreq.bldrdoc.gov 132.163.4.101 NIST, Boulder, Colorado
time-b.timefreq.bldrdoc.gov 132.163.4.102 NIST, Boulder, Colorado
time-c.timefreq.bldrdoc.gov 132.163.4.103 NIST, Boulder, Colorado
utcnist.colorado.edu 128.138.140.44 University of Colorado, Boulder
time.nist.gov 192.43.244.18 NCAR, Boulder, Colorado
time-nw.nist.gov 131.107.1.10 Microsoft, Redmond, Washington
nist1.datum.com 66.243.43.21 Datum, San Jose, California
nist1-dc.glassey.com 216.200.93.8 Abovenet, Virginia
nist1-ny.glassey.com 208.184.49.9 Abovenet, New York City
nist1-sj.glassey.com 207.126.98.204 Abovenet, San Jose, California
nist1.aol-ca.truetime.com 207.200.81.113 TrueTime, AOL facility, Sunnyvale, Cali-
fornia
nist1.aol-va.truetime.com 205.188.185.33 TrueTime, AOL facility, Virginia

Table 2-1: NIST-referenced timeservers

2-46 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

3. Press the NEXT button to set up timeserver parameters.

The TIME SERVER button is located on the second page of the TIME SYNC func-
tions. (You can access this function from anywhere in the Optimod menu tree by
navigating to SETUP / NEXT / TIME DATE AND ID / NEXT / TIME SYNC / NEXT.)
You can specify the timeserver either from your Optimod’s front panel or from
its PC Remote software. From the front panel, you can only enter the time-
server’s IP address (for example, 192.43.244.18). If you specify the timeserver
from PC Remote, you can specify either its named address (for example,
time.nist.gov) or its IP address.

4. Specify the time sync parameters from your Optimod’s front panel:

[Skip this step if you wish to specify the timeserver and time sync parameters
from your Windows XP computer.]
A) Press the TIME SERVER button.
The timeserver IP Address Screen appears.
a) Use the NEXT and PREV keys to move the cursor in turn to each digit in the
IP address. Use the knob to set the digit to the desired value. Repeat until
you have selected all the numbers in the desired IP address.
b) Press the SAVE soft button to confirm your setting.
B) Press the SYNC NOW soft button to test your settings. Your Optimod’s display
should indicate that it is connecting to the IP address that you specified. When
the connection is successful, the Optimod’s clock will automatically synchro-
nize to the timeserver.

 If the connection is not successful within five seconds, the display will indi-
cate that the connection failed. This means either that the timeserver is too
busy or that your setup cannot connect to the timeserver. Double-check the
IP address. If you are behind a firewall, make sure that port 123 is open.

 If your connection failed, the gateway address might not be set correctly
on your Optimod. The gateway address for the timeserver connection is the
same gateway address that you set in step (D) on page 2-43. If you do not
know the correct gateway address, you can often discover it by connecting
a Windows computer to the same Ethernet cable that is ordinarily plugged
into your Optimod. Ascertain that the computer can connect to the Inter-
net. At the command prompt, type ipconfig. The computer will return
the “Default Gateway.”

5. Specify the time sync from the Optimod PC Remote software:

[Skip this step if you wish to specify the timeserver and time sync parameters
from your Optimod’s front panel.]
Optimod PC Remote software can automatically set your Optimod’s local time,
OFFSET, and TIME SERVER to reflect the Windows settings in the machine running
PC Remote software.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-47
If you are running Windows 2000, you cannot specify the timeserver from
your computer. However, you can still set your Optimod’s clock and off-
set.
A) In Windows, navigate to the CONTROL PANEL / DATE AND TIME / TIME ZONE tab.
B) Set time zone to correspond to your local time zone.
C) In Windows, navigate to the CONTROL PANEL / DATE AND TIME / INTERNET TIME
tab.
D) If you are running Windows XP:
a) Check “Automatically synchronize with an Internet time server” to set your
Optimod’s SYNC PERIOD to “24.”
b) Set “Server” to the desired timeserver.
c) Click the “Update Now” button to synchronize your computer’s clock to
the selected timeserver. If this is successful, this means that you can connect
to the selected timeserver over your network.
 The INTERNET TIME tab is not available in Windows 2000. If you are running Opti-
mod PC Remote on Windows 2000, you must enter the timeserver from your Op-
timod’s front panel as an IP address (step 4 on page 2-46).

 If the timeserver you selected in Windows is a named address not an IP address

the 2300 will resolve it correctly, but the IP address that appears in your Opti-
mod’s display will be 0.0.0.0.

 To use PC Remote to turn off your Optimod’s automatic synchronization, uncheck

“Automatically synchronize with an Internet time server” on your PC. Then click
the “Update Now” button on PC Remote.

E) Navigate to Optimod PC Remote’s SETUP/ UTILITY tab and click the SET 2300
CLOCK button.
 If you are running Windows XP, PC Remote will download your computer’s cur-
rently specified timeserver into your Optimod.

 PC Remote will adjust your Optimod’s OFFSET setting to correspond to your com-
puter’s time zone setting.

 PC Remote will synchronize your Optimod’s clock with your computer’s clock.

F) It is wise to disconnect from PC Remote and then to press the SYNC NOW but-
ton on your Optimod [step (4.B) on page 2-46]. This is to test the ability of
your Optimod to synchronize to the selected timeserver and to ensure that
your Optimod’s clock is set accurately.
NOTE: Manually setting your Optimod’s clock via Set Time, Set Date, Daylight
Time, and the remote contact closure Reset to Hour and Reset to Midnight will
not work when the automatic synchronization function is active. To inactivate
this function (thereby permitting manual setting to work), set the SYNC PERIOD to
OFF.
2-48 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

Installing 2300 PC Remote Control Software

This section briefly summarizes the procedure for installing 2300 PC Remote soft-
ware on existing 2300s. If required, you will find more detailed instructions in the
.pdf file automatically installed on your computer by Orban’s installer program,
Setup2300_x.x.x.x.exe, where “x.x.x.x” represents the software version you are
installing. (For example, for version 1.0 software, this would be 1.0.0.0.)

The PC Remote software is supplied on a CD shipped with your 2300. You can also
download it from ftp.orban.com/2300.

Instructions for using the PC Remote software are found in Section 3 of this manual.

Installing the Necessary Windows Services

The 2300 PC Remote application uses Windows’ built-in communications and net-
working services to deal with the low-level details necessary to communicate with
the 2300’s serial port. (These services are also used to upgrade your 2300’s firmware
when updates are available from Orban.) The exact process will vary, depending on
how you wish to set up the communications. That is:

 If you want to communicate through a local PC, you will need to establish a con-
nection between a serial (COM) port of the PC and the COM port of your 2300
through a null modem cable. You will then use Windows Direct Serial Connect to
make the basic connection.

 If you want to communicate through a pair of modems, you will use the Win-
dows Dial-Up networking service to make the connection.
You must install the appropriate communications services in Windows (if they
are not already installed) before you can run 2300 Remote software. You may
therefore need to have access to the Windows install disk(s)—or have their im-
age copied onto your computer’s hard drive—before you attempt to use the
2300 PC Remote application.
In all cases, regardless of whether your PC communicates to the 2300
through its serial port or Ethernet connector, it uses the ppp and the
TCP/IP protocols to communicate with the 2300.

Check Hardware Requirements

To connect your PC to your 2300, regardless of the method you choose, you will
need the following:

 Orban 2300 OPTIMOD-FM.

 If connecting by serial cable: a null modem cable (also called a “reverse” cable).
This cable has DB9 female connectors at both ends for connecting the 2300 to
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-49
the serial port on your computer. If your computer has a DB25 connector, you
will need to obtain an adapter.

 If connecting by modem: a 3Com / U.S. Robotics® 56kbps fax modem EXT and
normal (not null) modem cable for the 2300 side of the connection. Note that
Orban Customer Service does not support any other type of modem for connect-
ing to the 2300.

 If connecting by network: a standard Ethernet cable (with RJ45 connectors) to

connect to a network hub or router, or a crossover Ethernet cable to connect di-
rectly to your PC’s Ethernet jack.

 PC running Windows 2000 (SP3 or higher) or XP.

2300 PC Remote will not run on older Windows versions.
Recommended Components
Computer.................................................................... Pentium II or higher
Available Disk Space .......................................................................... 25MB
RAM .................................................................................................. 256MB
Display.................................................................................SVGA or higher
Microsoft Windows ................. 2000 SP3 (or higher) or XP (Home or Pro)
COM Port ...................................................... 16550 (or compatible) UART

WARNING!
When connecting your 2300, use shielded cable to protect the pins in the RS-232
connector from electrostatic discharge.

The following subsections provide steps for connecting to your 2300 OPTIMOD-FM
software using the Windows 2000 / XP Direct Cable Connect or via modem connec-
tion.

Running the Orban Installer Program

Insert the installer CD into your computer’s CD drive.

The installer should start up and ask you if you wish to install the PC Remote appli-
cation on your computer. If it fails to do so, navigate to Start \ Run on your com-
puter, and type X:setup (where “X” is the drive letter of your CD drive).

Follow the prompts on your screen to install the PC Remote software automatically
on your computer.

 You might have obtained the automatic installer application from some other
source than Orban’s CD, like Orban’s ftp site or another computer on your
network. If so, just run the application and follow the on-screen instructions.

 This program installs the necessary files and adds an Orban / Optimod 2300
2-50 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

folder to your computer’s Start Menu. This folder contains shortcuts to the PC
Remote application and to the documentation. If you accepted the option
during installation, there is also a shortcut to the PC Remote application on
your desktop.

You have now installed all files necessary to use the PC Remote software. If you are
using a direct serial or a modem connection, the next step is to install and configure
the Windows communications services that allow your computer to communicate
with your 2300. Appendix: Setting up Serial Communications on page 2-51 provides
details.

Setting Up Ethernet, LAN, and VPN Connections

If you are using an Ethernet connection and your computer can successfully connect
to the Internet through its Ethernet port, it already has the correct (TCP/IP) network-
ing set up to communicate with the 2300. In most cases, all you need is your 2300’s
IP address, Subnet Mask, Port, and Gateway number, as set in step 1 on page 2-42.
You will enter these when you create a “connection” to your 2300 from the 2300 PC
Remote application—see step (E) on page 3-39. If your computer does not have a
working Ethernet port, you will need to add one and then following the instructions
provided by Microsoft to set it up to enable TCP/IP networking.

If you wish to connect to your 2300 through your LAN or VPN (through a WAN or
the Internet), consult your network administrator. Note that to cross subnets, you
must specify a gateway. If the PC and 2300 are on the same subnet, then it is unnec-
essary to specify a gateway.

If you are behind a firewall, you must open the port you specified in step (1.E) on
page 2-43. If the gateway and firewall (if used) are configured correctly, it is possible
to connect 2300 PC Remote to a 2300 via a VPN.

Conclusion
By carefully following the instructions in the Appendix, you should have successfully
installed the necessary Windows services and connected to your 2300. However, if
you experience any problems with this process, or have any other 2300 questions,
please contact Orban Customer Service:

phone: +1 510 351-3500

email: [email protected]

For details on your new 2300 software, from new features to operational sugges-
tions, refer to our FTP site (ftp.orban.com/2300).
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-51
Appendix: Setting up Serial Communications
This appendix provides instructions for setting up both direct serial and modem
connections from your 2300 to your PC. You must do this when you define a new
connection from the 2300 PC Remote application. The appendix provides procedures
for both the Windows 2000 and Windows XP operating systems.

Please note that the screen shots were originally prepared for the Opti-
mod-FM 8300 manual and refer to that product. However, this does not
affect the setup procedure.

Preparing for Communication through Null Modem Cable

1. Configure your 2300.

A) On your 2300’s front panel, navigate to SETUP / NETWORK & REMOTE.

B) Hold down the PC CONNECT soft button and turn the knob until you see
DIRECT on the display.

2. Connect the cable.

A) Connect one end of a null modem cable to the DB9 serial connector on the
2300’s rear panel.
Be sure to use a null modem cable. A normal serial cable will not work.
B) Connect the other end of the cable to your computer’s COM port.

Connecting Using Windows 2000 Direct Serial Connection:

Ordinarily, a direct serial connection through a null modem cable is used only when
you are controlling one 2300 per available COM port on your computer. If you wish
to control multiple local 2300s, it is better to use an Ethernet network connection.
However, in principle you could control multiple 2300s serially from one COM port,
using a hardware serial switch to select the 2300 you wish to control. In this case,
you should set up a separate 2300 “connection” for each 2300 to be controlled, fol-
lowing the instructions below. All connections should reference the same COM port.

This connection is used both for upgrading your 2300 and for connecting the 2300
PC Remote application to your 2300.

Important: The Direct Serial Connection must have exclusive access to the PC COM
port that connects to your 2300. Make sure than any software that monitors this
COM port (such as HotSync manager, etc.) is disabled before running Direct Serial
Connection.

If you have already configured your direct serial cable connection, skip to step 2 on
page 2-56.
2-52 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

If you cannot access the Internet after making a Direct or Modem connection, you
will have to reconfigure certain networking parameters in Windows. Please see You
Cannot Access the Internet After Making a Direct or Modem Connection to the 2300
on page 5-8.

1. Add and configure a Direct Connection for Windows 2000:

A) Create a New Windows

2000 Direct Connection:
a) Launch 2300 PC
Remote.
b) Choose “Connect / New
2300”

c) Give your 2300 a name

(e.g., “KABC”) by en-
tering this name in the
“2300 Alias” field.
d) If you wish to have
2300 PC Remote
remember the
password for this
Optimod, enter the
pass-word in the
“Password“ field.
e) Select “Serial Connec-
tion.”
f) Click “Add.”

g) Select “Connect Directly

to another computer.”
h) Click “Next.”
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-53
i) In the drop-down box, select the serial
port you will be using to make the
connection.
j) Click “Next.”

k) Select either “For all users” or “Only

for myself.”
The correct setting depends on
how your network and security
are configured.
Your wizard may not display this
field if your computer is set up
for a single user only.
l) Click “Next.”

m)Enter a name for your Connection such

as: “Connection to 2300.”
n) Click “Finish.”
2-54 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

o) Click “Yes.”

B) Edit your new Direct

Connection properties:
a) Click “Settings.”

b) Click the “General”

tab.
c) Select the device you
set up in step (i) on
page 2-53. This will
usually be “Com-
munications cable
between two
computers (COM1).”
d) Click “Configure.”
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-55
e) Set “Maximum speed (bps)” to
“115200.”
f) Check “Enable hardware flow con-
trol.”
g) Make sure that all other boxes are
not checked.
h) Click “OK.”

i) Select the Networking tab.

j) Make sure that “PPP: Windows 95 /
98 / NT 4 / 2000, Internet” appears in
the “Type of dial-up server I am
calling” field.
k) Make sure that “Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) is checked.
You may leave “File and Printer
Sharing for Microsoft Networks”
and “Client for Microsoft Net-
works” checked if you like.

l) Click “OK.”
m)When the “Connection properties”
window appears, click “OK.”
2-56 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

2. Launch an existing Windows 2000 Direct connection.

Once you have set up a “connection” specifying Direct Connect in the 2300 PC
Remote application (see To set up a new connection on page 3-39), choosing this
connection from 2300 PC Remote automatically opens a Windows Direct Connec-
tion to your 2300.

You can connect by selecting

the desired connection from
the drop-down list in the
CONNECT menu.
You can also connect by dou-
ble-clicking the connection in
the “Connection List” window.
A dialog bubble will appear
on the bottom right hand cor-
ner of the screen verifying
your connection if the connec-
tion is successful.

If you have trouble making a connection, refer to OS Specific Troubleshooting

Advice: Troubleshooting Windows 2000 Direct Connect on page 5-8. If you have
trouble the first time after creating a connection according to the instructions
above, try restarting your computer to clear its serial port.

3. To change the properties of an existing connection:

Right-click the connection in the “connection List” window and choose “Proper-
ties.” The “Connection properties” window opens (see page 2-52).

Connecting Using Windows XP Direct Serial Connection

If you have already configured your direct serial cable connection, skip to step 2 on
page 2-60.

If you cannot access the Internet after making a Direct or Modem con-
nection, you will have to reconfigure certain networking parameters in
Windows. Please see You Cannot Access the Internet After
Making a Direct or Modem Connection to the 2300 on page 5-8.

1. Add and configure a Direct Connection for Windows XP:

A) Create a New Windows XP Direct Con-

nection:
a) Launch 2300 PC Remote.
b) Choose “Connect / New 2300”
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-57
c) Give your 2300 a name (e.g., “KABC”)
by entering this name in the “2300
Alias” field.
d) If you wish to have 2300 PC Remote
remember the password for this
Optimod, enter the password in the
“Password“ field.
e) Select “Serial Connection.”
f) Click the “Add” button.

g) Choose “Connect directly to another

computer.”
h) Click “Next.”

i) In the drop-down box, select the serial

port you will be using to make the
connection.
j) Click “Next.”
2-58 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

k) Type in a name for your

Connection such as:
“Connection to 2300.”
l) Click “Finish.”

m)Click “Yes.”

B) Edit your new Direct

Connection properties:
a) Click “Settings.”
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-59
b) Click the “General” tab.
c) Select the device you set up in step (i)
on page 2-57. This will usually be
“Communications cable between two
computers (COM1).”
d) Click “Configure.”

e) Set the “Maximum Speed (bps)” to

115200.
f) Check “Enable hardware flow con-
trol.”
g) Make sure all other hardware features
are unchecked.
h) Click “OK.”
2-60 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

i) Select the Networking tab.

j) Make sure that “PPP:
Windows 95 / 98 / NT 4 /
2000, Internet” appears in
the “Type of dial-up server I
am calling” field.
k) Make sure that “Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP) is checked.
You may leave “File and
Printer Sharing for Mi-
crosoft Networks” and
“Client for Microsoft
Networks” checked if
you like
l) Click “OK.”
m)When the “Connection
properties” window
appears, click “OK.”

2. Launch an existing Windows XP Direct connection.

Once you have set up a “connection” specifying Direct Connect in the 2300 PC
Remote application (see To set up a new connection on page 3-39), choosing this
connection from 2300 PC Remote automatically opens a Windows Direct Connec-
tion to your 2300.

You can connect by selecting the

desired connection from the drop-
down list in the CONNECT menu.
You can also connect by double-
clicking the connection in the
“Connection List” window.
A dialog bubble will appear on the
bottom right hand corner of the
screen verifying your connection if
the connection is successful.

If you have trouble making a connection, refer to Troubleshooting Windows XP

Direct Connect on page 5-11. If you have trouble the first time after creating a
connection according to the instructions above, try restarting your computer to
clear its serial port.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-61
3. To change the properties of an existing connection:

Right-click the connection in the “connection List” window and choose “Proper-
ties.” The “Connection properties” window opens (see page 2-52).

Preparing for Communication through Modems

1. Prepare your 2300 for a modem connection through the serial port.

See step 2 on page 2-43.

2. If you have not already done so, create a 2300 passcode.

See To Create a Passcode on page 2-38.

3. Modem setup:

You will need two modems and two available phone lines, one of each for your
PC and your 2300.
Reminder: Orban supports only the 3Com / U.S. Robotics® 56kbps fax
modem EXT on the 2300 side (although other 56kbps modems will often
work OK).
Connect the modem to the 2300’s serial port with a standard (not null) modem
cable.
You can use either an internal or an external modem with your PC.
A) Connect the telephone line from the wall phone jack to the wall connection
icon on the back of the modem (modem in).
B) Connect the modem cable from the modem to the serial port of the 2300.
C) Set the modem to AUTO ANSWER and turn it on.
For 3Com / U.S. Robotics® 56kbps fax modem EXT, set dipswitches 3, 5,
and 8 in the down position to activate the AUTO ANSWER setting. All
other dipswitches should be set to the up position.

Connecting Using Windows 2000 Modem Connection

This connection is used both for upgrading your 2300 and for connecting the 2300
PC Remote application to your 2300.

1. Add and configure modem for Windows 2000:

If your modem is already installed, skip to Launch a Windows 2000 Modem connec-
tion on page 2-67.

A) Install Windows 2000 modem:

2-62 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

Use either an internal modem or external modem with your computer.

a) If you are using an external modem, connect the modem to a serial port on
your PC and make sure the modem is connected to a working phone line.
b) On your PC, click “Start / Settings / Control Panel / Phone and Modem
Options.”
c) Click the “Modems” tab.
d) Verify that your modem appears in the list available under “The following
Modems are installed.”
e) Verify that your modem is “Attached to” the correct port.
If your modem is unavailable or not attached to the correct port, you will
need to Add it. See your Windows documentation.
f) If your modem is available in the list available under “The following
Modems are installed” and it is attached to the correct port, then click
“Properties” for that modem.
g) Make sure the port speed is set at 115200.
h) Click “OK.”
B) Create a New Windows 2000 Dial-Up Connection:
a) Click “Start / Settings / Network and Dial-up Connections / Make New
Connection.”
b) Once the New Connection Wizard has opened, Click “Next.”

C) Create a New Windows 2000 Direct

Connection:
a) Launch 2300 PC Remote.
b) Choose “Connect / New 2300”
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-63
c) Give your 2300 a name (e.g., “KABC”)
by entering this name in the “2300
Alias” field.
d) If you wish to have 2300 PC Remote
remember the password for this
Optimod, enter the password in the
“Password“ field.
e) Select “Serial Connection.”
f) Click the “Add” button.

g) Select “Dial-up to private network.”

h) Click “Next.”

i) Enter the phone number of the mo-

dem connected to the 2300 that you
are setting up.
j) Click the “Next” button.
2-64 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

k) Select either “For all

users” or “Only for
myself.”
The correct setting
depends on how your
network and security
are configured.
This screen may not
appear in computers
set up for single users.

l) Click the “Next” button.

m)Type in a name for your
Connection such as: “Con-
nection to 2300–Modem.”
n) Click the “Finish” button.

o) Click “Yes.”
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-65
D) Edit your new Direct Connection prop-
erties:
a) Click “Settings.”

b) Click the “General” tab.

c) In the “Connect using” field, select
the modem you will be using to make
the connection on the PC side.
d) Click “Configure.”
2-66 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

e) Set “Maximum speed

(bps)” to “115200.”
f) Check “Enable hard-
ware flow control.”
g) Check “Enable mo-
dem error control.”
h) Check “Enable mc-
dem compression.”
i) Make sure that all
other boxes are not
checked.

(Set “Enable Modem

Speaker” according to
your preference.)
j) Click “OK.”

k) Select the Networking

tab.
l) Make sure that “PPP:
Windows 95 / 98 / NT
4 / 2000, Internet”
appears in the “Type
of dial-up server I am
calling” field.
m)Make sure that
“Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) is checked.
You may leave
“Client for Mi-
crosoft Neworks”
checked if you
like.
n) Click “OK.”
o) When the “Connec-
tion properties” win-
dow appears, click
“OK.”
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-67
2. Launch a Windows 2000 Modem connection.

Once you have set up a “connection” specifying a modem connection in the 2300
PC Remote application (see To set up a new connection on page 3-39), choosing
this connection from 2300 PC Remote automatically opens a Windows modem
connection to your 2300.

You can connect by selecting the desired connection from

the drop-down list in the CONNECT menu.
You can also connect by double-clicking the connection in
the “Connection List” window.
If the connection is successful, a dialog bubble will appear
on the bottom right hand corner of the screen verifying
your connection.

If you have trouble making a connection, refer to OS Specific Troubleshooting

Advice: Troubleshooting Windows 2000 Modem Connect on page 5-10. If you
have trouble the first time after creating a connection according to the instruc-
tions above, try restarting your computer to clear its serial port.

3. To change the properties of an existing connection:

Right-click the connection in the “connection List” window and choose “Proper-
ties.” The “Connection properties” window opens (see page 2-63).

Connecting using Windows XP Modem Connection

1. Add and configure modem for Windows XP:

Skip this step if your modem is already configured and working.

A) Configure the Windows XP PC ports:
Use either an internal modem or external modem with your computer.
a) If you are using an external modem, connect the modem to a serial port on
your PC.
b) Make sure the modem is connected to a working phone line.
c) Click “Start / Control Panel / Systems.”
d) Go to the “Hardware” tab and click “Device Manager.”
e) In the Device Manager dialog box click the “+” next to the “Ports (COM
and LPT)” icon.
A list will branch off, showing your available ports.
f) Double-click “Communications Port (COM1) or (COM2),” depending on
how you set up your system.
The “Communications Port (Comx) Properties” dialog box opens.
2-68 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

Not all PCs have a COM2.

IMPORTANT: The COM port you choose at this point must match the
COM port to which you connected your modem.
g) From the tabs at the top, choose “Port Settings” and configure the settings
to match your PC modem.
If you are using a U.S. Robotics® external modem, the settings will be:
Bits per second= 115200, Data bits = 8, Parity = None, Stop bits = 1, Flow
Control = None.

h) When you are finished, click the OK button to close the “Communications
Port (Comx) Properties” dialog box.
i) Click the OK button in the “Systems Properties” dialog window.
j) Close the “Control Panel” window.
If your modem is already installed, skip to Launch an existing Windows XP modem
connection on page 2-72.

B) Install the Windows XP modem:

a) Use either an internal modem or external modem with your computer.
If you are using an external modem, connect the modem to a serial port
on your PC and make sure the modem is connected to a working phone
line.
b) On your PC, click “Start / Settings / Control Panel / Phone and Modem
Options.”
c) Click the “Modems” tab.
d) Verify that your modem appears in the list available under “The following
Modems are installed.”
e) Verify that your modem is “Attached to” the correct port.
If your modem is unavailable or not attached to the correct port, you will
need to Add it. See your Windows documentation.
f) If your modem is available in the list available under “The following
Modems are installed” and it is attached to the correct port, then click
“Properties” for that modem.
g) Make sure the port speed is set at 115200.
h) Click “OK.”
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-69
C) Create a new Windows XP modem connec-
tion:
a) Launch 2300 PC Remote.
b) Choose “Connect / New 2300.”
The Connection Properties win-
dow opens.

c) Give your 2300 a name (e.g., “KABC”) by

entering this name in the “2300 Alias”
field.
d) If you wish to have 2300 PC Remote
remember the password for this
Optimod, enter the password in the
“Password“ field.
You must enter a valid password
to connect. This means that at
least one 2300 passcode must have
been assigned via the 2300’s front
panel. (See To Create a Passcode
on page 2-38.)

e) Click “Add.”
The Windows New Connection
Wizard starts up.
f) Select “Serial Connection.”
g) Click the “Add” button.
h) Select “Dial-up to private network.”
i) Click “Next.”
2-70 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

j) Enter the phone

number of the modem
connected to the 2300
you are setting up.
k) Click “Next.”

l) Type in a name for

your Connection such
as: “Connection to
2300 – Modem”
m)Click the “Finish”
button.

n) Click “Yes.”
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-71
D) Edit your new Direct Connection proper-
ties:
a) Click “Settings.”

b) Click the “General” tab.

c) Select the modem you will be using to
make the connection on the PC side.
d) Click “Configure.”
2-72 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

e) Set “Maximum speed

(bps)” to “115200.”
f) Check “Enable hardware
flow control.”
g) Check “Enable modem
error control.”
h) Check “Enable mcdem
compression.”
i) Make sure that no other
box is checked.
(Set “Enable Modem
Speaker” according to
your preference.)
j) Click “OK.”

k) Select the Networking

tab.
l) Make sure that “PPP:
Windows 95 / 98 / NT4 /
2000, Internet” ap–
pears in the “Type of
dial-up server I am
calling” field.
m)Make sure that “Inter-
net Protocol (TCP/IP) is
checked.
You may leave “Cli-
ent for Microsoft
Networks” checked
if you like.
n) Click “OK.”
o) When the “Connection
properties” window ap-
pears, click “OK.”

2. Launch an existing Windows XP modem connection.

Once you have set up a “connection” specifying a modem connection in the 2300
PC Remote application (see To set up a new connection on page 3-39), choosing
this connection from 2300 PC Remote automatically opens a Windows modem
connection to your 2300.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL INSTALLATION 2-73
You can connect by selecting the desired connection from
the drop-down list in the CONNECT menu.
You can also connect by double-clicking the connection in
the “Connection List” window.
If the connection is successful, a dialog bubble will appear
on the bottom right hand corner of the screen verifying
your connection.

If you have trouble making a connection, refer to Troubleshooting Windows XP

Modem Connect on page 5-12. If you have trouble the first time after creating a
connection according to the instructions above, try restarting your computer to
clear its serial port.

3. To change the properties of an existing connection:

Right-click the connection in the “connection List” window and choose “Proper-
ties.” The “Connection properties” window opens (see page 2-63).

Updating your 2300’s Software

The software version number of PC Remote must be the same as the version number
of the software running within your 2300. If the software version of PC Remote is
higher than the version running in your 2300, PC Remote will automatically detect
this and will offer to update your 2300’s software automatically.

1. If you have not already done so, prepare your computer and the 2300
for a direct serial, modem, or Ethernet connection.

See Networking and Remote Control starting on page 2-42.

2. Install the latest version of 2300 PC Remote software on your computer.

This is available from

ftp://orban.com/2300
See Installing 2300 PC Remote Control Software on page 2-48.
See the readme2300_x.x.x.x.htm file (where x.x.x.x is the version number) for de-
tails about the upgrade not given in this manual. The PC Remote installer will in-
stall this file on your computer’s hard drive.

3. If you have not previously done so, start 2300 PC Remote and set up a
“connection” to the 2300 you will be updating.

See To set up a new connection on page 3-39.

2-74 INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

4. Update your 2300.

A) Attempt to initiate communication to your 2300 via your connection.

See To initiate communication on page 3-39.
2300 PC Remote will automatically detect that the 2300 software version
on your 2300 is not the same as the version of 2300 PC Remote. PC Re-
mote will then offer to update your 2300 automatically.
This procedure will only work for a connection using an “all-screens”
(administrator) passcode.
B) Choose YES and wait for the update to complete. Note that this will cause an
interruption in the audio of approximately 3 seconds when your 2300 auto-
matically reboots after the update is complete. If you cannot tolerate such an
interruption, choose NO or CANCEL to abort the update.
Please be patient; this will take several minutes. (The exact time will de-
pend on whether the 2300 has to do any “housekeeping” to its flash
memory as part of the update.)
Completion will be indicated by the updater’s command-line window’s
closing automatically and your 2300’s rebooting.
Your 2300 will continue to pass audio normally while the update is occur-
ring. However, the audio will be interrupted for approximately 3 seconds
when your 2300 reboots.
Do not interrupt power to your 2300 or your computer, close PC Remote
or the update application’s command-line window, or reboot your com-
puter during this time. While doing any of these things is unlikely to
damage your 2300 (because of extensive backup and error-checking pro-
visions in your 2300), they will certainly cause the update to fail.
C) When the 2300 screen display returns after its automatic reboot, the 2300 will
be running with the updated software.
If the update fails for some reason, try repeating the procedure in steps
(A) through (C) again.
D) If the 2300 screen remains blank for more than one minute after the update
has completed, manually reboot the 2300 by removing AC power from the
2300 for at least ten seconds and then powering the 2300 back up.
E) The 2300 software update is now complete. You should now be able to con-
nect to your 2300 via PC Remote.
NOTE: If you cannot make a connection after a software upgrade, manu-
ally reboot the 2300 with a normal “power-off/power-on” sequence.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL OPERATION 3-1

Section 3
Operation
2300 Front Panel
 Screen Display labels the four soft buttons and provides control-setting infor-
mation.

 Screen Contrast button adjusts the optimum viewing angle of the screen dis-
play.

 Four Soft buttons provide access to all 2300 functions and controls. The func-
tions of the soft buttons change with each screen, according to the labels at the
bottom of each screen

 Next and Prev ( and ) buttons scroll the screen horizontally to accommo-
date menus that cannot fit in the available space. They also allow you to move
from one character to the next when you enter data into your 2300.

These buttons flash when a scrolling menu is in use. Otherwise, they are
dark.

 Control Knob changes the setting that is selected by the soft buttons. To
change a value, you usually have to hold down a soft button while you are turn-
ing the control knob.

 Recall button allows you to recall a Factory or User Preset.

Selecting the RECALL button does not immediately recall a preset. See
step 17 on page 2-21 for instructions on recalling a preset.

 Modify button brings you to list of controls that you can use to edit a Factory or
User Preset.

If you edit a Factory Preset, you must save it as a new User Preset to re-
tain your edit.

 Setup button accesses the technical parameters necessary to match the 2300 to
your transmission system.
3-2 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

 Escape button provides an escape from current screen and returns user to the
next higher-level screen. Repeatedly pressing Escape will always return you to
the Idle screen, which is at the top level of the screen hierarchy.

 Input meters show the peak input level applied to the 2300’s analog or digital
inputs with reference to 0 = digital full-scale. If the input meter’s red segment
lights up, you are overdriving the 2300’s analog to digital converter, which is a
very common cause of audible distortion.

 AGC meters show the gain reduction of the Master and Bass bands of the slow,
two-band AGC processing that precedes the multi-band compressor. Full-scale is
25 dB gain reduction.

 Gain Reduction meters show the gain reduction in the Master and Bass bands
of the two-band compressor when the 2300 is in audio processor mode. Full-
scale is 25 dB gain reduction.

When the 2300 is in stand-alone stereo encoder mode, these meters show the
gain reduction in the left/right overshoot limiter meters. Full scale is 5 dB gain
reduction. If the overshoot limiter is turned off, these meters will not illuminate.

 Left/Right Output meters operate only when the 2300 is in stand-alone stereo
encoder mode. These meters use the same LED arrays as the HF ENHANCE and HF
LIMITER meters.

The following meters and indicators do not operate when the 2300 is in stand-alone
stereo encoder mode:

 Gate LED indicates gate activity, lighting when the input audio falls below the
threshold set by the multiband gate threshold control (with the Full Modify
screen’s 2B GATE control). When this happens, the multiband compressor’s recov-
ery time slows drastically to prevent noise rush-up during low-level passages.

 AGC meters show the gain reduction in the Master and Bass bands of the slow
two-band AGC processing that precedes the two-band compressor. Full-scale is
25 dB gain reduction.

 HF Enhance meter indicates the amount of HF boost provided by the dynamic,

program-adaptive high frequency enhancer located in the Equalization section.
Calibration is in relative units because the amount of enhancement (in dB) de-
pends on frequency.

When the 2300 is in stand-alone stereo encoder mode, this LED array is
repurposed to indicate the peak left channel drive level to the stereo en-
coder modulator, which follows all lowpass filtering and overshoot limit-
ing. It uses the same scale as the COMPOSITE meter.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL OPERATION 3-3
 HF Limiter meter indicates the amount of HF limiting. Because the left and
right HF limiters are independent, we have programmed this meter so that it
reads the higher of the left and right gain reductions.

When the 2300 is in stand-alone stereo encoder mode, this LED array is
repurposed to indicate the right channel level.

Introduction to Processing
Some Audio Processing Concepts
Reducing the peak-to-average ratio of the audio increases loudness. If peaks are re-
duced, the average level can be increased within the permitted modulation limits.
The effectiveness with which this can be accomplished without introducing objec-
tionable side effects (such as pumping or intermodulation distortion) is the single
best measure of audio processing effectiveness.

Compression reduces the difference in level between the soft and loud sounds to
make more efficient use of permitted peak level limits, resulting in a subjective in-
crease in the loudness of soft sounds. It cannot make loud sounds seem louder.
Compression reduces dynamic range relatively slowly in a manner similar to riding
the gain: Limiting and clipping, on the other hand, reduce the short-term peak-to-
average ratio of the audio.

Limiting increases audio density. Increasing density can make loud sounds seem
louder, but can also result in an unattractive busier, flatter, or denser sound. It is im-
portant to be aware of the many negative subjective side effects of excessive density
when setting controls that affect the density of the processed sound.

Clipping sharp peaks does not produce any audible side effects when done moder-
ately. Listeners will perceive excessive clipping as audible distortion.

Look-ahead limiting is limiting that prevents overshoots by examining a few milli-

seconds of the unprocessed sound before it is limited. This way the limiter can an-
ticipate peaks that are coming up.

The 2300 uses look-ahead techniques in several parts of the processing to minimize
overshoot for a given level of processing artifacts (among other things).

Distortion in Processing
In a competently designed processor, distortion occurs only when the processor is
controlling peaks to prevent the audio from exceeding the peak modulation limits
of the transmission channel. The less peak control that occurs, the less likely that the
listener will hear distortion. However, to reduce the amount of peak control, you
must decrease the drive level to the peak limiter, which causes the average level
(and thus, the loudness) to decrease proportionally.
3-4 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

Loudness and Distortion

In FM processing, there is a direct trade-off between loudness, brightness, and dis-
tortion. You can improve one only at the expense of one or both of the others.
Thanks to Orban’s psychoacoustically optimized designs, this is less true of Orban
processors than of any others. Nevertheless, all intelligent processor designers must
acknowledge and work within the laws of physics as they apply to this trade-off.

Perhaps the most difficult part of adjusting a processor is determining the best
trade-off for a given situation. We feel that it is usually wiser to give up ultimate
loudness to achieve low distortion. A listener can compensate for loudness by simply
adjusting the volume control. However, there is nothing the listener can do to make
an excessively compressed or peak-limited signal sound clean again.

If processing for high quality is done carefully, the sound will also be excellent on
small radios. Although such a signal might fall slightly short of ultimate loudness, it
will tend to compensate with an openness, depth, and punch (even on small radios)
that cannot be obtained when the signal is excessively squashed.

If women form a significant portion of the station’s audience, bear in mind that
women are more sensitive to distortion and listening fatigue than men are. In any
format requiring long-term listening to achieve market share, great care should be
taken not to alienate women by excessive stridency, harshness, or distortion.

OPTIMOD-FM—from Bach to Rock

OPTIMOD-FM can be adjusted so that the output sounds:

 as close as possible to the input at all times (by setting the AGC and Two-Band
Compressor crossovers to LINEAR and operating with a slow release time and
large amounts of bass coupling)

 open but more uniform in frequency balance (and often more dramatic) than
the input (by setting the AGC and Two-Band Compressor crossovers to LINEAR
and operating with a medium release time and small amounts of bass coupling)

 dense, quite squashed, and loud (by setting the AGC and Two-Band Compressor
crossovers to ALLPASS and operating with a fast release time and no bass cou-
pling).

Note that even this setting will not be as loud as an Orban five-band FM
processor like the 8300 or 8400.
The dense, loud setup will make the audio seem to jump out of car and table radios,
but may be fatiguing and invite tune-outs on higher quality home receivers. The
loudness / distortion trade-off explained above applies to any of these setups.

You will achieve best results if Engineering, Programming, and Management go out
of their way to communicate and cooperate with each other. It is important that
Engineering understand the sound that Programming desires, and that Manage-
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL OPERATION 3-5
ment fully understands the trade-offs involved in optimizing one parameter (such as
loudness) at the expense of others (such as distortion or excessive density).

Never lose sight of the fact that, while the listener can easily control loudness, he or
she cannot make a distorted signal clean again. If such excessive processing is per-
mitted to audibly degrade the sound of the original program material, the signal is
irrevocably contaminated and the original quality can never be recovered.

Fundamental Requirements:
High-Quality Source Material and Accurate Monitoring
A major potential cause of distortion is excess peak limiting. Another cause is poor-
quality source material, including the effects of the station’s playback machines,
electronics, and studio-to-transmitter link. If the source material is even slightly dis-
torted, that distortion can be greatly exaggerated by OPTIMOD-FM—particularly if a
large amount of gain reduction is used. Very clean audio can be processed harder
without producing objectionable distortion. A high-quality monitor system is essen-
tial. To modify your air sound effectively, you must be able to hear the results of
your adjustments. In too many stations, the best monitor is significantly inferior to
the receivers found in many listeners’ homes!

At this writing, there has been a very disturbing trend in CD mastering to apply lev-
els of audio processing to CDs formerly only used by “aggressively-processed” radio
stations. These CDs are audibly distorted (sometimes blatantly so) before any further
OPTIMOD processing. The result of 2300 processing can be to exaggerate this distor-
tion and make these recordings noticeably unpleasant to listen to over the air.

There is very little that a radio station can do with these CDs other than to use con-
servative 2300 presets, which will cause loudness loss that may be undesired in com-
petitive markets. There is a myth in the record industry that applying “radio-style”
processing to CDs in mastering will cause them to be louder or will reduce the audi-
ble effects of on-air processing. In fact, the opposite is true: these CDs will not be
louder on air, but they will be audibly distorted and unpleasant to listen to, lacking
punch and clarity.

Another unfortunate trend is the tendency to put so much high frequency energy
on the CDs that this energy cannot possibly survive the FM pre-emphasis / de-
emphasis process. Although the 2300 has excellent high frequency limiting and clip-
ping technology, it is nevertheless no match for CDs that are mastered so bright that
they will curl the vinyl off car dashboards.

We hope that the record industry will come to its senses when it hears the conse-
quences of these practices on the air.
3-6 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

About the 2300’s Signal Processing Features

Signal Flow
When the 2300’s is in audio processor mode, the signal flows through the 2300
through the following blocks (see page 6-64):

 Input Conditioning, including sample rate conversion, defeatable 30Hz high-

pass filtering, and defeatable phase rotation

 Stereo Enhancement

 Two-Band Gated AGC, with target-zone window gating and silence gating

 Equalization, including high-frequency enhancement

 Two-Band Compression with embedded HF clipping and additional HF limiter

 Distortion-Cancelled Clipping

 Overshoot Compensation

 DSP-derived Stereo Encoder (stereo generator)

 Composite Level Control Processor

Input Conditioning: The 2300 operates at 32 kHz sample rate and power-of-two
multiples thereof (up to 512 kHz in the stereo encoder). No commercial A/D con-
verters or sample rate converter chips convert to 32 kHz while maintaining the stan-
dards we demanded for this product. Therefore, to ensure high quality A/D and
sample rate conversion, we operate both the SRC and A/D chips at 64 kHz-output
sample rate and then downsample to 32 kHz in DSP. By designing and implementing
our own downsampler, we can ensure full frequency response to 15 kHz with very
low spurious images.

Despite myths circulating in the marketplace regarding the alleged superiority of

higher sample rates in FM stereo processors, 32 kHz is, in fact, preferable to higher
rates as a basic sample rate for these devices. 32 kHz allows us to use DSP horse-
power more efficiently, adding features that really improve the sound. By strictly
limiting the output bandwidth to 16 kHz, it also makes it easier to protect the stereo
pilot tone and RDS subcarriers spectrally. Although a 16 kHz bandwidth limitation is
more than is strictly needed to protect the pilot tone, the RDS requires protection
over a substantially wider bandwidth (±2 kHz), and 16 kHz provides this protection.

The 2300’s output spectral control is immaculate, ensuring maximum stereo and RDS
coverage. Moreover, the 2300’s digital output will pass through any uncompressed
digital STL (including those operating at 32 kHz sample rate) without added over-
shoot and without the need for distortion-producing overshoot compensation
schemes.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL OPERATION 3-7
A defeatable 30Hz 18 dB/octave highpass filter and a defeatable phase rotator com-
plete the input-conditioning block. These have both been features in Orban FM
processors for many years. Most users will defeat the 30Hz filter and leave the phase
rotator in-circuit, although the choice is always yours.

Stereo Enhancement: The 2300 provides a stereo enhancement algorithm based

on Orban’s patented analog 222 Stereo Enhancer, which increases the energy in the
stereo difference signal (L–R) whenever a transient is detected in the stereo sum sig-
nal (L+R). By operating only on transients, the 222 increases width, brightness, and
punch without unnaturally increasing reverb (which is usually predominantly in the
L–R channel).

Gating circuitry detects “mono” material with slight channel or phase imbalances
and suppresses enhancement so this built-in imbalance is not exaggerated. It also
allows you to set a “width limit” to prevent over-enhancement of material with sig-
nificant stereo content, and will always limit the ratio of L–R / L+R to unity or less.

Two-Band Gated AGC: The AGC is a two-band device, using Orban’s patented
“master / bass” band coupling. It has an additional important feature: target-zone
gating. If the input program material’s level falls within a user-settable window
(typically 3 dB), then the release time slows to a user-determined level. It can be
slow enough (0.5 dB/second) to effectively freeze the operation of the AGC. This
prevents the AGC from applying additional, audible gain control to material that is
already well controlled. It also lets you run the AGC with fast release times without
adding excessive density to material that is already dense.

The AGC contains a compression ratio control that allows you to vary to ratio be-
tween 2:1 and essentially :1. Lower ratios can make gain riding subtler on critical
formats like classical and jazz.

The AGC has its own silence-gating detector whose threshold can be set independ-
ently of the silence gating applied to the multiband compressor.

Equalization: The 2300 has steep-slope bass shelving equalizer and three bands of
fully parametric bell-shaped EQ.

You can set the slope of the bass shelving EQ to 6, 12, or 18 dB/octave and adjust the
shelving frequency.

The 2300’s bass, midrange, and high frequency parametric equalizers have curves
that were modeled on the curves of Orban’s classic analog parametrics (like the
622B), using a sophisticated and proprietary optimization program. The curves are
matched to better than 0.15 dB. This means that their sound is very close to the
sound of an Orban analog parametric. They also use very high quality filter algo-
rithms to ensure low noise and distortion.

The 2300 HF Enhancer is a program-controlled HF shelving equalizer that was origi-

nally introduced in Orban’s 2200 OPTIMOD-FM. It intelligently and continuously ana-
lyzes the ratio between broadband and HF energy in the input program material,
and can equalize excessively dull material without over-enhancing bright material. It
3-8 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

interacts synergistically with the two-band compressor to produce sound that is

bright and present without being excessively shrill.

Two-Band Compression: The two-band compressor uses Orban’s “master / bass”

band coupling.

Pre-Emphasis Control: In addition to using an effective high-frequency limiter, we

control high frequencies with distortion-canceled clipping. The clipper in the 2300
operates at 256 kHz-sample rate and is full anti-aliased.

A clipper, embedded in the crossover, protects bands 1 and 2 from transient over-
shoot. This clipper has a shape control, allowing you to vary the “knee” of its In-
put/Output transfer curve from hard (0) to soft (10).

DSP-derived Stereo Encoder: The 2300’s stereo encoder is derived from algo-
rithms first developed for the high-performance Orban 8218 stand-alone encoder.
The 2300’s stereo encoder operates at 512 kHz-sample rate to ease the performance
requirements of the D/A converter’s reconstruction filter, making it possible to
achieve excellent stereo separation that is stable over time and temperature.

The 2300 has two independent composite outputs, whose levels are both software-
settable. The second output can be configured to provide a 19 kHz-reference output
for subcarrier generators that need it. For convenience, two SCA inputs sum into the
2300’s analog composite output amplifier.

The 2300 does not digitize SCAs.

Composite Limiter/Clipper: Orban has traditionally opposed composite clipping
because of its tendency to interfere with the stereo pilot tone and with subcarriers,
and because it causes inharmonic aliasing distortion, particularly between the stereo
main and subchannels. Protecting the pilot tone and subcarrier regions is particu-
larly difficult with a conventional composite clipper because appropriate filters will
not only add overshoot but also compromise stereo separation—filtering causes the
single-channel composite waveform to “lift off the baseline.”

Nevertheless, we are aware that many engineers are fond of composite clipping. We
therefore undertook a research project to find a way to peak-control the composite
waveform without significantly compromising separation, pilot protection, or sub-
carrier protection and without adding the pumping typical of simple gain-control
“look-ahead” solutions.

We succeeded in our effort. The 2300 offers a patented “Half-Cosine Interpolation”

composite limiter that provides excellent spectral protection of the pilot tone and
SCAs (including RDS), while still providing approximately 60 dB of separation when a
single-channel composite waveform is clipped to 3 dB depth. To ensure accurate
peak control, the limiter operates at 512 kHz sample rate.

For those who prefer the sound of conventional composite clipping, we also offer a
defeatable composite clipper, which is available only when the 2300 is in stand-
alone stereo encoder mode. This also provides excellent spectral protection for the
pilot tone and subcarriers. The composite clipper drives the “Half-Cosine Interpola-
tion” composite limiter, which serves as an overshoot compensator for the compos-
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL OPERATION 3-9
ite clipper when it is active. (Overshoot compensation necessary to remove over-
shoots introduced by the pilot- and SCA-protection filters following the composite
clipper.)

Like conventional composite clipping, the “Half-Cosine Interpolation” composite

limiter can still cause aliasing distortion between the stereo main and subchannels.
However, this is the inevitable cost of increasing the power-handling capability be-
yond 100% modulation above 5 kHz—the characteristic that makes some people
like composite clipping. This exploits the fact that the fundamental frequency in a
square wave has a higher peak level than the square wave itself. However, any proc-
ess that makes squared-off waveforms above 5 kHz creates higher harmonics that
end up in the stereo subchannel region (23-53 kHz). The receiver then decodes these
harmonics as if they were L–R information and the decoded harmonics appear at
new frequencies not harmonically related to the original frequency that generated
them.

While the processing never clips the pilot tone, the extra spectrum generated by the
processing can fall into the 19 kHz region, compromising the ability of receivers to
recover the pilot tone cleanly. Therefore, the 2300’s composite processor has a 19
kHz notch filter to protect the pilot tone. This filter does not compromise stereo
separation in any way.

We still prefer to use the 2300’s main clipping system to do the vast majority of the
work because of its sophisticated distortion-controlling mechanisms. This means that
the 2300 does not rely on composite processing to get loud. Consequently, broad-
casters using its left/right-domain AES3 digital output can enjoy the loudness bene-
fits of the 2300’s processing—the 2300 gets competitively loud without composite
clipping. However, it is also possible to reduce the drive level to the 2300’s left/right
domain overshoot compensators and to increase the composite limiter drive by a
corresponding amount. This arrangement uses the overall composite limiter (with or
without the composite clipper’s being active) to provide overshoot compensation. It
has a different sound than using the left/right domain overshoot compensators—the
sound is brighter but has more aliasing distortion (as discussed above). If the com-
posite clipper is active, stereo separation will decrease.

Stand-Alone Stereo Encoder Mode

When the 2300’s is in stereo encoder mode, the signal flows through the 2300
through the following blocks:

 Input Conditioning, including sample rate conversion to 64 kHz, defeatable

15, 16, or 17 kHz lowpass filtering, and the requisite preemphasis and deempha-
sis filters to allow the 2300 to accept, flat, preemphasized, or flat+J17 preem-
phasized audio.

 Left/Right Overshoot Limiter. This is intended to remove overshoots in stu-

dio/transmitter links caused by lossy digital audio compression (like MP2) or by
unflat frequency response and group delay distortion. This is a very fast limiter
using look-ahead and anti-aliased clipper technology. We recommend using no
more than 3 dB of gain reduction.
3-10 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

 DSP-derived Core Stereo Encoder (stereo generator)

 Composite Limiter/Clipper.

ITU-R BS412 Compliance

ITU-R BS412 requires the integrated multiplex power over a sliding 60-second win-
dow to be limited to a standard value. The 2300 contains a patented, defeatable
feedback multiplex power limiter that constantly monitors the multiplex power ac-
cording to ITU-R BS412 standards. The power controller automatically reduces the
average modulation to ensure compliance. It allows you to set the “texture” of the
processing freely, using any preset. If a given processing setting would otherwise ex-
ceed the multiplex power limit, the power controller automatically reduces the drive
to the peak limiting system by increasing the amount of two-band compression. This
action retains the processing texture but reduces distortion while controlling multi-
plex power.

The 2300 gives you control over the multiplex power threshold. This allows you to
compensate for overshoots in the signal path upstream from the 2300, preventing
excessive reduction of the multiplex power.

The ITU412 control is found in the Modify / Stereo Encoder screen.

Power control is applied to all outputs, not just the composite output.

Two-Band Purist Processing

In addition to two-band presets that are suitable for pop music and talk formats, the
2300 offers very high-quality two-band presets. These are phase-linear.

We believe that this is the ideal processing for classical music because it does not dy-
namically re-equalize high frequencies; the subtle HF limiter only acts to reduce high
frequency energy when it would otherwise cause overload because of the FM pre-
emphasis curve. We have heard four-band, allegedly “purist” processing that caused
dynamic HF lift. This created a strident, unnatural sound in strings and brass. In con-
trast, the 2300’s two-band phase-linear structure keeps the musical spectrum coher-
ent and natural.

Customizing the 2300’s Sound

The subjective setup controls on the 2300 give you the flexibility to customize your
station’s sound. Nevertheless, as with any audio processing system, proper adjust-
ment of these controls consists of balancing the trade-offs between loudness, den-
sity, and audible distortion. The following pages provide the information you need
to adjust the 2300 controls to suit your format, taste, and competitive situation.

When you start with one of our Factory Presets, there are three levels of subjective
adjustment available to you to let you customize the Factory Preset to your re-
quirements: Basic Modify, Full Modify, and Advanced Modify.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL OPERATION 3-11
See page 6-64 for a block diagram of the processing.

Basic Modify
BASIC MODIFY allows you to control three important elements of 2300 processing:
the stereo enhancer, the equalizer, and the dynamics section (two-band compres-
sion, limiting, and clipping). At this level, there is only one control for the dynamics
section: LESS-MORE, which changes several different subjective setup control settings
simultaneously according to a table that we have created in the 2300’s permanent
ROM (Read-Only Memory). In this table are sets of subjective setup control settings
that provide, in our opinion, the most favorable trade-off between loudness, den-
sity, and audible distortion for a given amount of dynamics processing. We believe
that most 2300 users will never need to go beyond the Basic level of control. The
combinations of subjective setup control settings produced by this control have been
optimized by Orban’s audio processing experts on the basis of years of experience
designing audio processing, and upon hundred of hours of listening tests.

As you increase the setting of the LESS-MORE control, the air sound will become
louder, but (as with any processor) processing artifacts will increase. Please note that
the highest LESS-MORE setting is purposely designed to cause unpleasant distortion
and processing artifacts! This helps assure you that you have chosen the optimum
setting of the LESS-MORE control, because turning the control up to this point will
cause the sound quality to become obviously unacceptable.

You need not (in fact, cannot) create a sound entirely from scratch. All User Presets
are created by modifying Factory Presets, or by further modifying Factory Presets
that have been previously modified with a LESS-MORE adjustment. It is wise to set
the LESS-MORE control to achieve a sound as close as possible to your desired sound
before you make further modifications at the Advanced Modify level. This is because
the LESS-MORE control gets you close to an optimum trade-off between loudness
and artifacts, so any changes you make are likely to be smaller and to require reset-
ting fewer controls.

In the 2300, LESS-MORE affects only the dynamics processing (compression, limiting,
and clipping)—the 2300’s equalization and stereo enhancement are decoupled from
LESS-MORE. You can therefore change EQ or stereo enhancement and not lose the
ability to use LESS-MORE. When you create a user preset, the 2300 will automatically
save your EQ and stereo enhancement settings along with your LESS-MORE setting.
When you recall the user preset, you will still be able to edit your LESS-MORE setting
if you wish.

Full Modify
Full Modify allows you to adjust the dynamics section at approximately the level of
“full control” available in Orban’s 2200 processor. Like the 2200’s Full Control, the
2300’s Full Modify can get inexperienced on-air sound designers into trouble by al-
lowing them to create presets that sound good on some material while producing
objectionable distortion on other material.
3-12 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

Note: Full Modify does not provide LESS-MORE control. Furthermore,

once you have edited a preset’s dynamics parameters in Full Modify,
LESS-MORE control is no longer available in Basic Modify and will be
grayed-out if you access its screen. As noted above, we recommend using
the Basic Modify LESS-MORE control to achieve a sound as close as possi-
ble to your desired sound before you make further modifications at the
Full Modify level.

Advanced Modify
If you want to create a signature sound for your station that is far out of the ordi-
nary or if your taste differs from the people who programmed the LESS-MORE ta-
bles, Advanced Modify is available to you. At this level, you can customize or modify
any subjective setup control setting to create a sound exactly to your taste. You can
then save the settings in a User Preset and recall it whenever you wish.

Compressor attack times and thresholds are controllable. Even more so than the
controls in Full Modify, these controls can be exceedingly dangerous in inexperi-
enced hands, leading you to create presets that sound great on some program ma-
terial, yet fall apart embarrassingly on other material because of excessive clipping
that causes objectionable distortion. We therefore recommend that you create cus-
tom presets at the Advanced Modify level only if you are experienced with on-air
sound design, and if you are willing to take the time to double-check your work on
many different types of program material.

The PC Remote software organizes its controls in tabbed screens. The first three tabs
(EQUALIZATION, STEREO ENHANCER, and LESS-MORE) access the Basic Modify controls.
The remaining tabs combine the Full Modify and Advanced Modify controls, logi-
cally organized by functionality.

If you are tuning a user preset from the front panel, note that the Advanced Con-
trols are hidden by default and only appear if you press the SHOW ADVANCED button,
located on the last page of the Modify pages. When you press this button, its func-
tionality toggles so that it is labeled HIDE ADVANCED.

Important Note: Once you have edited a preset’s dynamics parameters

in Full or Advanced Modify, LESS-MORE control is no longer available in
Basic Modify. As noted above, we strongly recommend using the LESS-
MORE control to achieve a sound as close as possible to your desired
sound before you make further modifications at the Full or Advanced
Modify levels.

Gain Reduction Metering

Unlike the metering on some processors, when any OPTIMOD-FM gain reduction
meter indicates full-scale (at its bottom), it means that its associated compressor has
run out of gain reduction range, that the circuitry is being overloaded, and that
various nastinesses are likely to commence.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL OPERATION 3-13
Because the various compressors have 25 dB of gain reduction range, the meter
should never come close to 25 dB gain reduction if OPTIMOD-FM has been set up for
a sane amount of gain reduction under ordinary program conditions.

Further, be aware of the different peak factors on voice and music—if voice and mu-
sic are peaked identically on a VU meter, voice may cause up to 10 dB more peak
gain reduction than does music! (A PPM will indicate relative peak levels much more
accurately.)

To Create or Save a User Preset

Once you have edited a preset, you can save it as a user preset. The 2300 can
store an indefinite number of user presets, limited only by available memory.
The 2300 will offer to save any edited, unsaved preset when the main screen is
visible. To save a preset:

A) Press the ESC button repeatedly until you see the main screen, which shows
the current time and the preset presently on air.
If there is an unsaved preset on air, the rightmost button will be labeled
SAVE PRESET.
B) Press the SAVE PRESET button.
The Save Preset screen appears.
C) Choose a name for your preset.
Some non-alphanumeric characters (such as < and >) are reserved and
cannot be used in preset names.

D) Use the knob to set the each character in the preset name. Use the NEXT and
PREV buttons to control the cursor position.
E) Press the SAVE CHANGES button.

 If the name that you have selected duplicates the name of a factory preset,
the 2300 will suggest an alternate name.
You cannot give a user preset the same name as a factory preset.

 If the name you have selected duplicates the name of an existing user pre-
set, the 2300 warns you that you are about to overwrite that preset. An-
swer YES if you wish to overwrite the preset and NO otherwise. If you an-
swer NO, the 2300 will give you an opportunity to choose a new name for
the preset you are saving.

You can save user presets from the 2300 PC Remote application. (See
Using the 2300 PC Remote Control Software on page 3-38.) Please note
that when you save presets from the PC Remote application, you save
them in the 2300’s memory (as if you had saved them from the 2300’s
front panel). The PC Remote application also allows you to archive pre-
sets to your computer’s hard drive (or other storage device) and to re-
store them. However, archiving a preset is not the same as saving it. Ar-
3-14 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

chived presets reside on a storage medium supported by your computer,

while saved presets reside in the 2300’s local non-volatile memory. You
cannot archive a preset until you have saved it. (See To back up user pre-
sets, system files, and automation files onto your computer’s hard drive
on page 3-41.)
Note that if, for some reason, you wish to save an unmodified preset (ei-
ther Factory or user) under a new name, you must temporarily make an
arbitrary edit to that preset in order to make the SAVE PRESET button ap-
pear. After you have saved the preset, reverse the edit and save the pre-
set again.

Factory Programming Presets

Factory Programming Presets are our “factory recommended settings” for various
program formats or types. The Factory Programming Presets are starting points to
help you get on the air quickly without having to understand anything about ad-
justing the 2300’s sound. You can edit any of these presets with the LESS-MORE con-
trol to optimize the trade-off between loudness and distortion according to the
needs of your format. Because it is so easy to fine-tune the sound at the LESS-MORE
level, we believe that many users will quickly want to customize their chosen preset
to complement their market and competitive position after they had time to famil-
iarize themselves with the 2300’s programming facilities.

It is OK to use unmodified factory presets on the air. These represent the best efforts
of some very experienced on-air sound designers. We are sometimes asked about
unpublished “programming secrets” for Optimods. In fact, there are no “secrets”
that we withhold from users. Our “secrets” are revealed in this manual and the pre-
sets embody all of our craft as processing experts. The presets are editable because
other sound designers may have different preferences from ours, not because the
presets are somehow mediocre or improvable by those with special, arcane knowl-
edge that we withhold from most of our customers.

Start with one of these presets. Spend some time listening critically to your on-air
sound. Listen to a wide range of program material typical of your format, and listen
on several types of radios (not just on your studio monitors). Then, if you wish, cus-
tomize your sound using the information that follows.

Each Orban factory preset has full LESS-MORE capability. The table shows the presets,
including the source presets from which they were taken and the nominal LESS-
MORE setting of each preset. Some of the presets appear several times under differ-
ent names because we felt that these presets were appropriate for more than one
format; these can be identified by a shared source preset name.

Some of the presets come in several “flavors,” like “medium” and “open.” These re-
fer to the density produced by the processing. “Open” uses a slow two-band release
time and “Medium” uses a medium-slow release. Only the NEWS-TALK and
SPORTS presets use fast release.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL OPERATION 3-15
Important! If you are dissatisfied with the sound available from the fac-
tory presets, please understand that each named preset is actually 19 pre-
sets that can be accessed via the LESS-MORE control. Try using this control
to trade off loudness against processing artifacts and side effects. Once
you have used LESS-MORE, save your edited preset as a User Preset.
Do not be afraid to choose a preset other than the one named for your format if
you believe this other preset has a more appropriate sound. Also, if you want to
fine-tune the frequency balance of the programming, feel free to use Basic Modify
and make small changes to the Bass, Mid EQ, and HF EQ controls. Unlike some ear-
lier Orban’s processors, the 2300 lets you make changes in EQ (and stereo enhance-
ment) without losing the ability to use LESS-MORE settings.

Of course, LESS-MORE is still available for the unedited preset if you want
to go back to it. There is no way you can erase or otherwise damage the
Factory Presets. So, feel free to experiment.

Except for the CLASSICAL presets, all presets use phase rotation to
minimize clipping distortion and maximize loudness.
CLASSICAL: As their names imply, the CLASSICA and CLASSICAL+AGC presets are
optimized for classical music, gracefully handling recordings with very wide dynamic
range and sudden shifts in dynamics. These presets are phase-linear and preserve
the spectral balance of the original material as much as possible.

Classical music is traditionally broadcast with a wide dynamic range. However, with
many recordings and live performances, the dynamic range is so great that the quiet
passages disappear into the noise on most car, portable, and table radios. Conse-
quently, the listener either hears nothing, or must turn up the volume control to
hear all the music. Then, when the music gets loud, the radio blasts and distorts,
making listening unpleasant.

The 2300’s signal processing is well suited for classical formats during daytime hours
when most people in the audience are likely to be listening in autos or to be using
the station for background music. This audience is best served when the dynamic
range of the program material is reduced by 10-15 dB so that quiet passages in the
music never fade into inaudibility under these less-favorable listening conditions.
OPTIMOD-FM controls the level of the music in ways that are, for all practical pur-
poses, inaudible to the listener. Low-level passages are increased in level by up to 10

FACTORY PROGRAMMING PRESETS

Preset Names Normal Less-More
CLASSICAL 7.0
CLASSICAL+AGC 7.0
GENERAL PURPOSE 7.0
TALK 7.0
MUSIC-LIGHT 7.0
MUSIC-MEDIUM 7.0
MUSIC-HEAVY 7.0
MUSIC+BASS MEDIUM 7.0
MUSIC+BASS HEAVY 7.0
Table 3-1: Factory Programming Presets
3-16 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

dB, while the dynamics of crescendos are maintained.

The CLASSICAL preset is a two-band preset with the AGC turned off. It uses consid-
erable bass coupling to preserve the spectral balance of the input as well as possible.
Its LESS-MORE control primarily affects the amount of compression, rather than
maximum loudness. It is also appropriate for “colorless” protection limiting.

CLASSICAL+AGC USES the AGC set for 2:1 compression ratio. Because of the AGC, it
affects more of the total dynamic range of the recording that does the CLASSICAL
preset. However, the AGC provides extremely smooth and unobtrusive compression
because of the gentle ratio and window gating. In this preset, the Two-Band com-
pressor is used very lightly with a fast release time as a peak limiter. The AGC does
almost of the compression.

During the evening hours when the audience is more likely to listen critically, a clas-
sical station may wish to switch to a custom preset (derived from the CLASSICAL
preset) that performs less gain reduction. You can create such a preset by modifying
the CLASSICAL preset with the LESS-MORE control—turn it down to taste.

2B GENERAL PURPOSE provides an average amount of processing and is useful (al-

though not necessarily optimum) for almost any format except fine arts and classi-
cal. It is particularly useful for mixed-format stations that do not wish to change pre-
sets when they change program material.

TALK provides processing for Talk format stations that primarily feature news, call-in
shows, interviews, and other voice material. TALK keeps the levels of announcers
and guests consistent, and keeps a proper balance between voice and commercials.

MUSIC-LIGHT produces a very open, unprocessed sound for popular music formats.
This sound is easily listenable for many hours without fatiguing listeners. It is appro-
priate for light rock, smooth jazz and similar formats.

MUSIC-MEDIUM provides processing that is between Music-Light and Music-Heavy.

It is appropriate for formats like adult-oriented rock.

MUSIC-HEAVY provides aggressive processing for stations that want to maximize

on-air loudness and that do not assume that a listener will listen to the station for
hours at a time. It is appropriate for “contemporary hit radio” and similar formats.

MUSIC+BASS MEDIUM produces a very punchy, clean, open sound. It is appropri-

ate for light urban and R&B formats.

MUSIC+BASS HEAVY provides aggressive processing with additional bass punch. It

is appropriate for urban, rap, and contemporary hit radio formats.

The 2300’s Audio Processing Controls Described

If you want to create your own User Presets, the following detailed discussion is im-
portant to understand. If you only use Factory Presets, or if you only modify them
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL OPERATION 3-17
with LESS-MORE, then you may still find the material interesting, but you do not
need to understand it to get excellent sound from the 2300.

Each Factory Preset has a LESS-MORE control (located in the Basic Modify screen)
that adjusts on-air loudness. LESS-MORE simultaneously adjusts all of the processing
controls to optimize the trade-offs between unwanted side effects as processing
levels are decreased or increased.

If you wish, you may adjust the Modify parameters to your own taste. Always start
with LESS-MORE to get as close to your desired sound as possible. Then edit the Mod-
ify parameters using the Basic, Intermediate or Advanced Modify screen, and save
those edits to a User Preset. See Customizing the 2300’s Sound on page 3-10 for a
more detailed discussion of the various modification levels.

Equalizer Controls
The table summarizes the equalization controls. The equalizer is located between
the AGC and multiband compressor sections of both structures.

Any equalization that you set will be automatically stored in any User Preset that
you create and save. For example, you can use a User Preset to combine an unmodi-
fied Factory Programming Preset with your custom equalization. Of course, you can
also modify the Factory Preset (with Basic Modify, Full Modify, or Advanced Modify)
before you create your User Preset.

In general, you should be conservative when equalizing modern, well-recorded pro-

gram material.

Except for BASS GAIN, most of the factory presets use less than 3 dB of equalization.

Bass Shelf Controls, the low bass equalization controls, are designed to add punch
and slam to rock and urban music. They provide a parametric shelving equalizer
with control over gain, hinge frequency, and slope (in dB/octave).

BASS FREQ sets the frequency where shelving starts to take effect.
BASS GAIN sets the amount of bass boost (dB) at the top of the shelf.
BASS SLOPE sets the slope (dB/octave) of the transition between the top
and bottom of the shelf.
Because the HF Enhancer often increases the brightness of program material, some
bass boost is usually desirable to keep the sound spectrally well balanced. Bass
equalization settings must be determined by individual taste and by the require-
ments of your format. Be sure to listen on a wide variety of radios—it is possible to
create severe distortion on poor quality speakers by over-equalizing the bass. Be
careful!
3-18 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

The moderate-slope (12 dB/octave) shelving boost achieves a bass boost that is more
audible on smaller radios, but which can sound boomier on high-quality receivers.
The steep-slope (18 dB/octave) shelving boost creates a solid, punchy bass from the
better consumer radios with decent bass response. The 6 dB/octave shelving boost is
like a conventional tone control and creates the most mid-bass boost, yielding a
“warmer” sound. Because it affects the mid-bass frequency range, where the ear is
more sensitive than it is to very low bass, the 6 dB/octave slope can create more ap-
parent bass level at the cost of bass “punch.”

There are no easy choices here; you must choose the characteristic you want by
identifying your target audience and the receivers they are most likely to be using.
Regardless of which curve you use, we recommend a +2 to +5 dB boost for most
formats. Larger amounts of boost will increase the gain reduction in the lowest
band of the multiband compressor, which may have the effect of reducing some fre-
quencies. So be aware the large fixed bass boosts may have a different effect than
you expect because of the way that they interact with the multiband compressor.

Low Frequency Parametric Equalizer is a parametric equalizer whose bell-shaped

boost and cut curves closely emulate those of a classic Orban analog parametric
equalizer with conventional (within 0.15 dB worst-case). This provides warm,

Equalizer Controls
Group Basic / Advanced Range
Full Modify Name
Name
Bass Shelf BASS FREQ Bass Frequency 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 105, 110,
115, 120, 125, 130, 135, 140,
145, 150, 160, 170, 180, 190,
200, 210, 220, 230, 240, 250,
270, 290, 310, 330, 350, 380,
410, 440, 470, 500Hz
BASS GAIN Bass Gain 0 … 12 dB
BASS SLOPE Bass Slope 6,12,18 dB / Oct
Low LF FREQ Low Frequency 20 ... 500 Hz
LF GAIN Low Gain –10.0 … +10.0 dB
LF WIDT Low Width 0.8 ... 4 octaves
Mid MID FREQ Mid Frequency 250 ... 6000 Hz
MID GAIN Mid Gain –10.0 … +10.0 dB
MID WIDTH Mid Width 0.8 ... 4 octaves
High HIGH FREQ High Frequency 1.0 … 15.0 kHz
HIGH GAIN High Gain –10.0 … +10.0 dB
HIGH WIDTH High Width 0.8 ... 4 octaves
HF Enhancer HF ENH High Frequency 0 … 15
Enhancer
HP Filter 30HZ HPF 30 Hz High Pass Off/On
Filter
Phase Rotate PH-ROTATE Phase Rotator Out/In

Table 3-2: Equalizer Controls

OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL OPERATION 3-19
smooth, “analog-sounding” equalization.

LF FREQ determines the center frequency of the equalization, in Hertz.

Range is 20-500Hz.
LF GAIN determines the amount of peak boost or cut (in dB) over a 10
dB range.
LF WIDTH determines the bandwidth of the equalization, in octaves. The
range is 0.8-4.0 octaves. If you are unfamiliar with using a parametric
equalizer, 1.5 octaves is a good starting point. These curves are relatively
broad because they are designed to provide overall tonal coloration,
rather than to notch out small areas of the spectrum.
The LF parametric can be used in the mid-bass region (100-300Hz) to add “warmth”
and “mellowness” to the sound when boosting. When cutting, it can remove a
“woody” or “boxy” sound. In our presets, we tend to use it very sparingly (in the
order of 1 dB boost) to add a bit of extra bass warmth.

One formula for producing a very “big” bass sound on the air is to use a peaking
boost at 100Hz in combination with a Bass Shelf boost at 6 dB/octave.

The equalizer, like the classic Orban analog parametrics such as the 622B, has con-
stant “Q” curves. This means that the cut curves are narrower than the boost curves.
The width (in octaves) is calibrated with reference to 10 dB boost. As you decrease
the amount of EQ gain (or start to cut), the width in octaves will decrease. However,
the “Q” will stay constant.

“Q” is a mathematical parameter that relates to how fast ringing damps out. (Tech-
nically, we are referring to the “Q” of the poles of the equalizer transfer function,
which does not change as you adjust the amount of boost or cut.)

The curves in the 2300’s equalizer were created by a so-called “minimax” (“minimize
the maximum error,” or “equal-ripple”) IIR digital approximation to the curves pro-
vided by the Orban 622B analog parametric equalizer. Therefore, unlike less sophis-
ticated digital equalizers that use the “bilinear transformation” to generate EQ
curves, the shapes of the 2300’s curves are not distorted at high frequencies.

Midrange Parametric Equalizer is a parametric equalizer whose bell-shaped

boost and cut curves closely emulate those of an analog parametric equalizer.

MID FREQ determines the center frequency of the equalization, in Hertz.

Range is 250-6000Hz.
MID GAIN determines the amount of peak boost or cut (in dB) over a
10 dB range.
MID WIDTH determines the bandwidth of the equalization, in octaves.
The range is 0.8-4.0 octaves. If you are unfamiliar with using a parametric
equalizer, 1 octave is a good starting point.
Use the mid frequency equalizer with caution. Excessive presence boost tends to be
audibly strident and fatiguing. Moreover, the sound quality, although loud, can be
very irritating. We suggest a maximum of 3 dB boost, although 10 dB is achievable.
3-20 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

High Frequency Parametric Equalizer is a parametric equalizer whose bell-

shaped boost and cut curves closely emulate those of an analog parametric equal-
izer.

HIGH FREQ determines the center frequency of the equalization, in

Hertz. The range is 1-15 kHz
HIGH GAIN determines the amount of peak boost or cut over a 10 dB
range.
HIGH WIDTH determines the bandwidth of the equalization, in octaves.
The range is 0.8-4.0 octaves. If you are unfamiliar with using a parametric
equalizer, one octave is a good starting point.
Excessive high frequency boost can exaggerate tape hiss and distortion in program
material that is less than perfectly clean. We suggest no more than 4 dB boost as a
practical maximum, unless source material is primarily from compact discs of recently
recorded material.

HF ENH (“High Frequency Enhancer”) is a program-adaptive, 6 dB/octave shelving

equalizer with a 4 kHz turnover frequency. It constantly monitors the ratio between
high frequency and broadband energy and adjusts the amount of equalization in an
attempt to make this ratio constant as the program material changes. It can there-
fore create a bright, present sound without over-equalizing material that is already
bright.

30HZ HPF (“30 Hz High Pass Filter”) determines if a 30Hz 18 dB/octave highpass fil-
ter is placed in-circuit before other processing.

PH-ROTATE (“Phase Rotator”) determines if the phase rotator will be in-circuit. The
purpose of the phase rotator is to make voice waveforms more symmetrical. This can
substantially reduce distortion when they are peak limited by the 2300’s back end
processing.

Stereo Enhancer Controls

The stereo enhancer emulates the Orban 222 analog stereo enhancer. The enhancer
has gating that operates under two conditions:

 The two stereo channels are close to identical in magnitude and phase.

In this case, the enhancer assumes that the program material is actually
mono and suppresses enhancement to prevent the enhancement from
exaggerating the undesired channel imbalance.
Stereo Enhancer Controls
Basic / Full Modify Name Advanced Name Range
ENH AMT Stereo Enhancer Amount 0.0 ... 10.0
RATIO LMT L–R / L+R Ratio Limit 70 … 100%
Table 3-3: Stereo Enhancer Controls
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL OPERATION 3-21
 The ratio of L–R / L+R of the enhanced signal tries to exceed the threshold set by
the L-R / L+R Ratio Limit control.

In this case, the enhancer prevents further enhancement in order to pre-

vent excess L–R energy, which can increase multipath distortion.
The stereo enhancer page has the following controls:

ENH AMT (“Stereo Enhancer Amount”) sets the maximum spatial enhancement.
When set to OUT, it bypasses the stereo enhancer.

RATIO LMT (“L–R / L+R Ratio Limit”) sets the maximum amount of enhancement to
prevent multipath distortion. However, if the original program material exceeds this
limit with no enhancement, the enhancer will not reduce it.

In most cases, we recommend that the phase rotator be left active. However, be-
cause it can slightly reduce the clarity and definition of program material, you can
defeat it if you are operating the 2300 conservatively and not attempting to achieve
very high on-air loudness.

AGC Controls

Five of the AGC controls are common to the Full Modify and Advanced Modify
screens, with additional AGC controls available in the Advance Modify screen, as
noted in the following table.

These controls are explained in detail below.

Each Factory Preset has a LESS-MORE control that adjusts on-air loudness by altering
the amount of processing. LESS-MORE simultaneously adjusts all of the processing
controls to optimize the trade-offs between unwanted side effects.

If you wish, you may adjust the Advanced Modify parameters to your own taste. Al-
ways start with LESS-MORE to get as close to your desired sound as possible. Then
edit the Advanced Modify parameters using the Advanced Modify screens and save
those edits to a User Preset.

AGC (“AGC Off / On”) control activates or defeats the AGC.

It is usually used to defeat the AGC when you want to create a preset with minimal
processing (such as a CLASSICAL preset). The AGC is also ordinarily defeated if you
are using a studio level controller (like Orban’s 8200ST). However, in this case it is
better to defeat the AGC globally in SYSTEM SETUP.

To do this, set EXTERNAL AGC to ON.)

AGC DRIVE control adjusts signal level going into the slow dual-band AGC, and
therefore determines the amount of gain reduction in the AGC. This also adjusts the
“idle gain”—the amount of gain reduction in the AGC section when the structure is
3-22 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

gated. (It gates whenever the input level to the structure is below the threshold of
gating.)

The total amount of gain reduction in the 2300 is the sum of the gain reduction in
the AGC and the gain reduction in the two-band compressor. The total system gain
reduction determines how much the loudness of quiet passages will be increased
(and, therefore, how consistent overall loudness will be). It is determined by the set-
ting of the AGC DRIVE control, by the level at which the console VU meter or PPM is
peaked, and by the setting of the MULTIBAND DRIVE (compressor) control.

AGC REL (“AGC Master Release”) control provides an adjustable range from 0.5
dB/second (slow) to 20 dB/second (fast). The increase in density caused by setting the
AGC RELEASE control to fast settings sounds different from the increase in density
caused by setting the TWO-BAND RELEASE control to FAST, and you can trade the two
off to produce different effects.

Unless it is purposely speeded-up (with the AGC RELEASE control), the automatic
gain control (AGC) that occurs in the AGC prior to the multiband compressor makes
audio levels more consistent without significantly altering texture. Then the two-
band compression and associated multiband clipper audibly change the density of
the sound and dynamically re-equalize it as necessary (booming bass is tightened;
weak, thin bass is brought up; highs are always present and consistent in level).

The various combinations of AGC and compression offer great flexibility:

 Light AGC + light compression yields a wide sense of dynamics, with a small
amount of automatic re-equalization.

 Moderate AGC + light compression produces an open, natural quality with

automatic re-equalization and increased consistency of frequency balance.

AGC Controls
Full Modify Name Advanced Name Range
AGC AGC Off / On Off / On
AGC DRIVE AGC Drive –10 ... 25 dB
AGC REL AGC Master Release 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2 … 20 dB / S
AGC GATE AGC Gate Threshold Off, –44 ... –15 dB
AGC B CPL AGC Bass Coupling 0-100 %
WIN. SIZE AGC Window Size –25 … 0 dB
WIN. REL AGC Window Release 0.5 … 20 dB
AGC RATIO AGC Ratio :1, 4:1, 3:1, 2:1
AGC B-THR AGC Bass Threshold –12.0 … 2.5 dB
IDLE GAIN AGC Idle Gain –10 … +10 dB
AGC B-ATK AGC Bass Attack 1 … 10
AGC M-ATK AGC Master Attack 0.2 … 6
AGC B-REL AGC Bass Release 1 … 10 dB / sec
AGC XOVER AGC Crossover Allpass, LinearNoDelay,
Linear
Table 3-4: AGC Controls
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL OPERATION 3-23
 Moderate AGC + moderate compression gives a more dense sound, particularly
as the release time of the two-band compressor is sped up.

 Moderate AGC + heavy compression (particularly with a FAST two-band release

time) results in a “wall of sound” effect, which may cause listener fatigue.

 Adjust the AGC (with the AGC DRIVE control) to produce the desired amount of
AGC action, and then fine-tune the compression and clipping with the Two-
Band controls.

AGC GATE (“AGC Gate Threshold”) control determines the lowest input level that
will be recognized as program by OPTIMOD-FM; lower levels are considered to be
noise or background sounds and cause the AGC or two-band compressor to gate, ef-
fectively freezing gain to prevent noise breathing.

There are two independent gating circuits in the 2300. The first affects the AGC and
the second affects the two-band compressor. Each has its own threshold control.

The two-band compressor gate causes the gain reduction in bands 2 and 3 of the
two-band compressor to move quickly to the average gain reduction occurring in
those bands when the gate first turns on. This prevents obvious midrange coloration
under gated conditions, because bands 2 and 3 have the same gain.

The gate also independently freezes the gain of the two highest frequency bands
(forcing the gain of the highest frequency band to be identical to its lower
neighbor), and independently sets the gain of the lowest frequency band according
to the setting of the DJ BASS boost control (in the Equalization screen). Thus, with-
out introducing obvious coloration, the gating smoothly preserves the average
overall frequency response “tilt” of the two-band compressor, broadly maintaining
the “automatic equalization” curve it generates for a given piece of program mate-
rial.

If the MB GATE THR (Gate Threshold) control is turned OFF, the DJ BASS
control is disabled.
AGC B CPL (“AGC Bass Coupling”) control sets the balance provided in the AGC be-
tween bass and the rest of the frequency spectrum.

The AGC processes audio in a master band for all audio above approximately 200Hz,
and a bass band for audio below approximately 200Hz. The AGC B CPL control de-
termines how closely the on-air balance of material below 200Hz matches that of
the program material above 200Hz.

Settings toward 100% (wideband) make the output sound most like the input. Be-
cause setting the AGC B CPL control at 100% will sometimes cause bass loss, setting
this control between 70% and 90% will often create the most accurate frequency
balance. The optimal setting depends on the amount of gain reduction applied and
on the AGC release time. Usually, you will adjust the AGC B CPL control until the
Master AGC and Bass AGC Gain Reduction meters track as closely as possible unless
you want the AGC to provide some gentle automatic re-equalization of the input
material.
3-24 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

With the AGC MASTER RELEASE control set to 2 dB/second, setting the AGC B CPL
control toward 0% (independent) will produce a sound that is very open, natural,
and non-fatiguing, even with large amounts of gain reduction. Such settings will
provide a bass boost on some program material that lacks bass.

With fast release times, settings of the AGC B CPL toward 100% (wideband) do not
sound good. Instead, set the AGC B CPL control toward 0% (independent). This
combination of fast release and independent operation of the bands provides the
maximum loudness and density on small radios.

Advanced AGC Controls

WIN SIZE (“AGC Window Size”) determines the size of the “target zone” window in
the AGC. If the input level falls within this target zone, the AGC release time is set to
the number specified by the AGC WINDOW RELEASE control. This is usually much
slower than the normal AGC release, and essentially freezes the AGC gain. This pre-
vents the AGC from building up density in material whose level is already well con-
trolled. If the level goes outside the window, then the AGC switches to the release
rate specified by AGC MASTER RELEASE, so the AGC can still correct large gain varia-
tions quickly.

The normal setting for the AGC WINDOW SIZE is 3 dB.

WIN. REL (“AGC Window Release”; see AGC WINDOW SIZE above.)

AGC RATIO determines the compression ratio of the AGC. The compression ratio is
the ratio between the change in input level and the resulting change in output
level, both measured in units of dB.

Previous Orban AGCs had compression ratios very close to :1, which produces the
most consistent and uniform sound. However, the 2300 compressor can reduce this
ratio to as low as 2:1. This can add a sense of dynamic range and is mostly useful for
subtle formats like classical and jazz.

This control reduces the available range of AGC gain reduction because it acts by at-
tenuating the gain control signal produced by the AGC sidechain. The range is 25 dB
at :1 and 12 dB at 2:1. However, the range of input levels that the AGC can handle
is unaffected, remaining at 25 dB.

AGC B-THR (“AGC Bass Threshold”) determines the compression threshold of the
bass band in the AGC. You can use it to set the target spectral balance of the AGC.

As the AGC B CPL control is moved towards “100%,” the AGC BASS THRESHOLD con-
trol affects the sound less and less.

The interaction between the AGC BASS THRESHOLD control and the AGC B CPL con-
trol is a bit complex, so we recommend leaving the AGC BASS THRESHOLD control at
its factory setting unless you have a good reason for readjusting it.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL OPERATION 3-25
IDLE GAIN. (“AGC Idle Gain”) The “idle gain” is the target gain of the AGC when
the silence gate is active. Whenever the silence gate turns on, the gain of the AGC
slowly moves towards the idle gain.

The idle gain is primarily determined by the AGC DRIVE setting—a setting of 10 dB
will ordinarily produce an idle gain of –10 dB (i.e., 10 dB of gain reduction). How-
ever, sometimes you may not want the idle gain to be the same as the AGC DRIVE
setting. The AGC IDLE GAIN control allows you to add or subtract gain from the idle
gain setting determined by the AGC DRIVE setting.

You might want to do this if you make a custom preset that otherwise causes the
gain to increase or decrease unnaturally when the AGC is gated.

For example, to make the idle gain track the setting of the AGC DRIVE control, set
the AGC IDLE GAIN control to zero. To make the idle gain 2 dB lower than the setting
of the AGC DRIVE control, set the AGC IDLE GAIN control to –2.

AGC B-ATK (“AGC Bass Attack”) sets the attack time of the AGC bass compressor
(below 200Hz).

AGC M-ATK (“AGC Master Attack”) sets the attack time of the AGC master com-
pressor (above 200Hz).

AGC B-REL (“AGC Bass Release”) sets the release time of the AGC bass compressor.

AGC XOVER (“AGC Crossover”) allows you to choose ALLPASS, LINEARNODELAY, or

LINEAR modes.

 ALLPASS is a phase-rotating crossover like the one used in the Optimod-FM

8200’s two-band AGC. It introduces one pole of phase rotation at 200 Hz. The
overall frequency response remains smooth as the two bands take different de-
grees of gain reduction—the response is a smooth shelf without extra peaks or
dips around the crossover frequency. The two bands are down 3 dB at the cross-
over frequency.
ALLPASS has a smooth, shelving behavior and low delay. Its allpass charac-
teristic complements the existing phase rotator that reduces voice distor-
tion. If you set the 2B CROSSOVER control to ALLPASS, please note that
there is little or nothing to be gained by using a phase-linear crossover in
the AGC.

 LINEARNODELAY (Linear-Phase; no delay) is a phase-linear crossover whose upper

band is derived by subtracting its lower band from the crossover’s input. When
the upper and lower bands have the same gain, their sum is perfectly flat with
no phase rotation. However, when the upper and lower bands have different
gains, peaks and dips appear in the frequency response close to the crossover
frequency.
This crossover adds no extra delay to the signal path. LINEARNODELAY is
thus useful if you need a crossover with low delay and no phase distor-
tion when flat. Its downside is the possibility of coloration when the
gains of the two bands are widely disparate.
3-26 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

 LINEAR is a phase-linear crossover whose upper band is derived by subtracting its

lower band from the crossover’s input, as passed through a delay equal to the
group delay of the lowpass crossover filter. The overall frequency response re-
mains smooth as the two bands take different degrees of gain reduction—the
response is a smooth shelf without extra peaks or dips around the crossover fre-
quency. The two bands are each down 6 dB at the crossover frequency. This
crossover has constant delay even when the two bands have unequal gains.
While LINEAR has the ideal combination of no phase distortion (even
when non-flat) and smooth shelving behavior, it adds about 4 ms to the
overall delay (compared to ALLPASS and LINEARNODELAY), so it is not a
good choice if you need to drive talent headphones.

Clipper Controls

All of the clipper controls are common to the Full Modify and Advanced Modify, ex-
cept OVERSHOOT COMPENSATOR DRIVE, which is only available in the Advanced Modify
screen.

BASS CLIP (“Bass Clip Threshold”) sets the threshold of Orban’s patented embed-
ded bass clipper with reference to the final clipper. The bass clipper is embedded af-
ter the bass band in the two-band crossover so that any distortion created by clip-
ping is rolled off by part of the crossover filters. The threshold of this clipper is usu-
ally set between 2 dB and 5 dB below the threshold of the final limiter in the proc-
essing chain, depending on the setting of the LESS-MORE control in the parent pre-
set on which you are basing your Modify adjustments. This provides headroom for
contributions from the other three bands so that bass transients don’t smash against
the back-end clipping system, causing overt intermodulation distortion between the
bass and higher frequency program material.

Some 2300 users feel that the bass clipper unnecessarily reduces bass punch at its
factory settings. Therefore, we made the threshold of the bass clipper user-
adjustable. The range (with reference to the final clipper threshold) is 0 to –6 dB. As
you raise the threshold of the clipper, you will get more bass but also more distor-
tion and pumping. Be careful when setting this control; do not adjust it casually. Lis-
ten to program material with heavy bass combined with spectrally sparse midrange
material (like a singer accompanied by a bass guitar) and listen for IM distortion in-
duced by the bass’ pushing the midrange into the clipping system. In general, unless
you have a very good reason to set the control elsewhere, we recommend leaving it
at the factory settings, which were determined following extensive listening tests
with many types of critical program material.

SP B-CL THR (“Speech Bass Clip Threshold”) set the threshold of the bass clipper
when the 2300 detects the presence of pure speech (i.e., speech centered in the ste-
reo soundstage and without any significant background sounds). The control is usu-
ally set to “0” to prevent the bass clipper from adding distortion on speech.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL OPERATION 3-27
2B CLIP (“2B Clipping”) is a compression threshold control that equally affects the
bass and master bands. It sets the drive level to the high frequency limiting and mul-
tiband distortion-controlling processing that precedes the final clipping section. The
distortion-controlling section uses a combination of distortion-cancelled clipping
and look-ahead processing to anticipate and prevent excessive clipping distortion in
the final clipper.

SP 2B CL (“Speech 2B Clipping”) has the same function as the 2B CLIP control, ex-
cept that the 2300 uses the setting of this control instead of the 2B CLIP control
whenever the 2300 detects the presence of speech. It is usually set substantially
lower than the 2B CLIP control to reduce clipping distortion on speech.

B-CL SHAPE (“Bass Clip Shape”) allows you to change shape of the knee of the In-
put/Output gain curve of the bass clipper. The “knee” is the transition between no
clipping and flat topping. A setting of “0” provides the hardest knee. “10” is the
softest knee, where the transition starts 6 dB below BASS CLIP THRESHOLD setting and
occurs gradually. The factory default setting is “7.6.”

2B HF CLIP THRESHOLD sets the threshold of the multiband, distortion-cancelled

clipper in the Two-Band structure’s high frequency limiter. Higher numbers yield
more brightness, but also cause more high frequency distortion. The setting of this
control is quite critical to prevent objectionable distortion on program elements like
bell trees and metallic percussion.

The relationship and interaction between 2B CLIP, 2B HIGH FREQUENCY

LIMITING, 2B 6-15 KHZ FREQUENCY LIMITER, and 2B HIGH FREQUENCY CLIP
THRESHOLD is complicated and is best appreciated by listening and ex-
perimenting:
FINAL CLIP (“Final Clip Drive”) adjusts the level of the audio driving the back end
clipping system that OPTIMOD-FM uses to control fast peaks. This control primarily
determines the loudness / distortion trade-off.

Turning up the FINAL CLIP control drives the final clipper and overshoot compensator
harder, reducing the peak-to-average ratio and increasing the loudness on the air.
When the amount of clipping is increased, the audible distortion caused by clipping

Clipper Controls
Full Modify Name Advanced Name Range
BASS CLIP Bass Clip Threshold –6.0 … 0.00
B-CLIP SHP Bass Clip Shape 0 … 10
SP B-C THR Speech Bass Clip Thresh –6.0 … 0.00
2B CLIP 2B Clipping –4 … +5
SP 2B CLIP Speech 2B Clipping –4 … +5
HF CLIP High Frequency Clipping –30 … –10 dB
FINAL CLIP Final Clip Drive –3.0 … +5.0
MPX LIMIT Composite Limiter Drive Off, 0 ... 3 dB
OSHOOT COMP Overshoot Compensator –2.0 … +2.0
Drive
Table 3-5: Clipper Controls
3-28 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

also increases. Although lower settings of the FINAL CLIP control reduce loudness,
they make the sound cleaner.

If the RELEASE control is set to its faster settings, the distortion produced by the
back-end clipping system will increase as the TWO-BAND DRIVE control is advanced.
The FINAL CLIP DRIVE and / or the 2B CLIP controls may have to be turned down to
compensate. To best understand how to make loudness / distortion trade-offs, per-
haps the wisest thing to do is to recall a factory preset, and then to adjust the LESS-
MORE control to several settings throughout its range. At each setting of the LESS-
MORE control, examine the settings of the 2B MASTER COMPRESSION THRESHOLD, 2B
BASS COMPRESSION THRESHOLD, 2B CLIP, BASS CLIP THRESHOLD, and FINAL CLIP controls.
This way, you can see how the factory programmers made the trade-offs between
the settings of the various distortion-determining controls at various levels of proc-
essing.

MPX LIMIT (“Composite Limiter Drive”) sets the drive level, in dB, into the 2300’s
composite limiter.

This control has no effect on the 2300’s left and right analog or digital outputs.

The MPX LIMIT control is set to “0 dB” for most factory presets. At this set-
ting, it removes a few tenths of a dB of residual overshoot from the au-
dio processing without affecting audio quality. We prefer to use the au-
dio-domain overshoot compensation to do most of the work because it
operates at a 256 kHz sample rate and is fully anti-aliased, whereas the
composite limiter will inevitably introduce aliasing around 38 kHz upon
demodulation in the receiver. This is because it introduces spectrum in
the stereo subchannel area when it clips material in the 0 to 15 kHz area.
The receiver will “see” this as stereo material, and will demodulate it as if
it were part of the stereo subchannel. Accordingly, harmonics of L+R ma-
terial will be frequency-shifted upon demodulation, and will no longer
bear a harmonic relationship to the material that produced them.
Mathematically, these harmonics will be located at the same frequencies
as harmonics caused by clipping in a simple digital-domain clipper (with
no anti-aliasing) operating at 38 kHz sample rate.
If you want to use the composite limiter more heavily, one option is to
trade off composite limiting against Left/Right domain overshoot com-
pensation. To do this, reduce the OVERSHOOT COMPENSATOR DRIVE control
and increase the MPX LIMIT control setting proportionately.
OSHOOT COMP (“Overshoot Compensator Drive”) sets the drive level into the over-
shoot compensator with reference to the final clip threshold, in units of dB. The
normal setting is “0 dB.”

The overshoot compensator is not distortion-canceled because distortion cancella-

tion introduces overshoots, which would defeat the purpose of this processing.
Therefore, the overshoot compensator can produce audible distortion on material
with strong high frequency content (like bell trees), and this control lets you trade
off this distortion against loudness. (Such material can cause strong overshoots, forc-
ing the overshoot compensator to work hard to eliminate them.) We do not recom-
mend operating this control above “0” because this would reduce the effectiveness
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL OPERATION 3-29
of the distortion cancellation used in earlier processing. However, you can reduce it
below “0” if you value the last bit of high frequency cleanliness over loudness.

The overshoot compensator works at 256 kHz sample rate and is fully anti-aliased.

MPX POWER OFFSET operates only when the ITU-412 multiplex power controller is
activated (and is thus irrelevant to users in countries that do not enforce this stan-
dard). The control introduces a fixed loss before the FM analog peak limiting chain.
If the MULTIPLEX POWER THRESHOLD control (in the INPUT/OUTPUT / UTILITIES screen) is
set to 0, the MPX POWER OFFSET control produces the same amount of loss (in dB) as
this control’s setting. Resetting the MULTIPLEX POWER THRESHOLD control away from 0
will change the loss. (For example, setting the MULTIPLEX POWER THRESHOLD control
to +3 will cause the loss to decrease by 3 dB.)

The MULTIPLEX POWER THRESHOLD control can only introduce loss, never gain.

Regardless of the setting of the MULTIPLEX POWER THRESHOLD and

MPX POWER OFFSET controls, the resulting gain offset can never be lar-
ger than 0 dB.

The MPX POWER OFFSET control’s purpose is to reduce unnatural loudness variations
that the multiplex power controller might produce. These can occur because the ITU
specification does not call for psychoacoustic weighting. The Optimod does not
force the multiplex power controller to dynamically produce all of the required gain
reduction (which could vary widely, depending on the program material). Instead,
the MPX POWER OFFSET control produces most of the gain reduction. The gain re-
duction produced by the control is, of course, unchanging and cannot introduce au-
dible artifacts.

The ideal dynamic gain reduction for the multiplex power controller is 2 to 3 dB
with typical program material. However, the actual gain reduction will vary widely
depending on whether the underlying processing preset is “loud” or “quiet.” There-
fore, the appropriate setting of the MPX POWER OFFSET control depends strongly on
what preset is in use. Accordingly, each preset has its own setting of the MPX POWER
OFFSET, which is a processing parameter like any other in a given preset. Hence, ad-
justments that affect the multiplex power controller appear in two independent
places in the Optimod: The MULTIPLEX POWER THRESHOLD control is a system setup
control, while the MPX POWER OFFSET is part of the on-air preset.

Depending on the preset, the MPX POWER OFFSET control’s setting can vary from 0
dB (no effect) to as much as –9 dB. If you customize a preset in any way (including
using LESS-MORE), you may wish to trim the MPX POWER OFFSET for that preset so
that the multiplex power controller produces 2-3 dB of indicated gain reduction
with typical program material. This will achieve the maximum on-air loudness that
complies with the ITU standard while minimizing the potential for unnatural and
audibly disturbing loudness inconsistencies caused by the operation of the multiplex
power controller.
3-30 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

Two-Band Controls

The tables below show a summary of the controls in the two-band compressor sec-
tion.

2B DRIVE control adjusts signal level going into the two-band compressor. It there-
fore controls the density of output audio by determining the amount of gain reduc-
tion in the two-band compressor. The resulting sound texture can be open and
transparent, solid and dense, or somewhere in between. The range is 0-25 dB.

Regardless of the release time setting, we feel that the optimal amount of gain re-
duction in the two-band compressor for popular music and talk formats is 10-15 dB.
If less gain reduction is used, loudness can be lost. For classical formats, operating
with 0-10 dB of gain reduction (with the gain riding AGC set to OFF) maintains a
sense of dynamic range while still controlling levels effectively. Because two-band-
induced density gently increases between 0 and 10 dB of compression, 10 dB of
compression sounds very natural, even on classical music.

2B REL (“2B Release”) control determines how fast the two-band compressor re-
leases (and therefore how quickly loudness increases) when the level of the program
material decreases. This release time only applies when the silence gate does not
gate the Two-Band Compressor.

The control can be adjusted from 0.5 dB/second (slow) to 20 dB/second (fast). Set-
tings toward 20 dB/second result in a more consistently loud output, while settings
toward 0.5 dB/second allow a wider variation of dynamic range. Both the setting of
the 2B REL control and the dynamics and level of the program material determine
the actual release time of the compressor. In general, you should use faster release
times for mass-appeal pop or rock formats oriented toward younger audiences, and

Two-Band Controls
Full Modify Name Advanced Name Range
2B DRIVE 2B Drive –10 … 25 dB
2B REL 2B Release 0.5 … 20 dB / S
2B GATE 2B Gate Threshold Off, –44 … –15 dB
BASS CPL 2B Bass Coupling 0 … 100 %
HF LIMIT 2B High Frequency Limiting –4.0 … +2.0
6K+HF LIM 2B 6-15kHz HF Limiter Off, –23.8 ... 0.0 dB
PARENT PRESET [read-only]
LESS-MORE Less-More Index [read-only]; 1.0 … 10.0
2B M-THR 2B Master Compression –15 … 0, Off
Threshold
2B B-THR 2B Bass Compression -10.0 … 5.0 dB, Off
Threshold
2B M-ATK 2B Master Attack 4 … 50, Off
2B B-ATK 2B Bass Attack 4 … 50, Off
2B XOVER 2B Crossover Allpass, LinearNoDelay,
Linear

Table 3-6: Two-Band Controls

OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL OPERATION 3-31
slower release times for more conservative, adult-oriented formats (particularly if
women are an important part of your target audience).

The action of the 2B REL control has been optimized for resolution and adjustability.
But its setting is critical to sound quality—listen carefully as you adjust it. There is a
point beyond which increasing density (with faster settings of the 2B REL control)
will no longer yield more loudness, and will simply degrade the punch and defini-
tion of the sound.

When the 2B REL control is set between 8 and 1 dB/second (the slowest settings), the
amount of gain reduction is surprisingly non-critical. Gating prevents noise from be-
ing brought up during short pauses and pumping does not occur at high levels of
gain reduction. Therefore, the primary danger of using large amounts of gain reduc-
tion is that it may unnaturally increase the level of quiet passages in input material
with wide dynamic range. Accordingly, when you operate the 2B REL control be-
tween 8 and 2 dB/second, it may be wise to defeat the gain-riding AGC and to per-
mit the two-band compressor to perform all of the gain riding. This will prevent ex-
cessive reduction of dynamic range, and will produce the most natural sound
achievable from the Two-Band structures.

With faster 2B REL control settings (above 8 dB/second), the sound will change sub-
stantially with the amount of gain reduction in the two-band compressor. This
means that you should activate the gain-riding AGC to ensure that the two-band
compressor is always being driven at the level that produces the amount of gain re-
duction desired. Decide based on listening tests how much gain reduction gives you
the density that you want without creating a feeling of over-compression and fa-
tigue.

Release in the two-band compressor automatically becomes faster as more gain re-
duction is applied (up to about 10 dB). This makes the program progressively denser,
creating a sense of increasing loudness although peaks are not actually increasing. If
the gain-riding AGC is defeated (with the AGC ON / OFF control), you can use this
characteristic to preserve some feeling of dynamic range. Once 10 dB of gain reduc-
tion is exceeded, full loudness is achieved—no further increase in short-term density
occurs as more gain reduction is applied. This avoids the unnatural, fatiguing sound
often produced by processors at high gain reduction levels, and makes OPTIMOD-FM
remarkably resistant to operator gain-riding errors.

2B GATE (“2B Gate Threshold”) threshold control determines the lowest input level
that will be recognized as program by OPTIMOD-FM; lower levels are considered to
be noise or background sounds and will cause the AGC or two-band compressor to
gate, effectively freezing gain to prevent noise breathing.

There are two independent gating circuits in the 2300 Two-Band structure. The first
affects the AGC and the second affects the two-band compressor. Each has its own
threshold control. However, only the action of the two-band gate can be seen on
the 2300’s front-panel GATE LED.

The 2300 PC Remote application displays the actions of both the AGC
gate and the two-band gate.
3-32 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

The two-band gain reduction will eventually recover to 0 dB and the AGC gain re-
duction will eventually recover to –10 dB even when the compressor gate is gated.
However, recovery is slow enough to be imperceptible. This avoids OPTIMOD-FM’s
getting stuck with a large amount of gain reduction on a long, low-level musical
passage immediately following a loud passage.

It is common to set the 2B GATE control to –40. Higher settings are primarily useful
for radio drama, outside sports broadcasts, and other non-musical programming
that contain ambiance, low-level crowd noise and the like. Slightly higher settings
may increase the musicality of the compression by slowing down recovery on mod-
erate-level to low-level musical passages. When such passages cause the gate to cy-
cle on and off, recovery time will be slowed down by the ratio of the “on-time” to
the “off time.” This effectively slows down the release time as the input gets quieter
and quieter, thus preserving musical values in material with wide dynamic range
(classical music for example).

BASS CPL (“2B Bass Coupling”) is used to set the balance between bass and the rest
of the frequency spectrum.

The two-band compressor processes audio in a master band for all audio above ap-
proximately 200Hz, and a bass band for audio below approximately 200Hz. The
BASS CPL control determines how closely the on-air balance of material below 200Hz
matches that of the program material above 200Hz.

Settings toward 100% (wideband) make the output sound most like the input. Be-
cause setting the BASS CPL control at 100% will sometimes cause bass loss, the most
accurate frequency balance will often be obtained with this control between 70%
and 90%. The optimal setting depends on the amount of gain reduction applied.
Adjust the BASS CPL control until the band 1 and band 2 Gain Reduction meters
track as closely as possible.

With the 2B REL (2B Release) control set to 2 dB/second, setting the BASS CPL control
toward 0% (independent) will produce a sound that is very open, natural, and non-
fatiguing, even with large amounts of gain reduction. Such settings will provide a
bass boost on some program material that lacks bass.

With fast release times, settings of the BASS CPL toward 100% (wideband) do not
sound good. Instead, set the BASS CPL control toward 0% (independent). This com-
bination of fast release and independent operation of the bands provides the
maximum loudness and density on small radios achievable by the 2300. However,
such processing may fatigue listeners with high-quality receivers, and requires you
to activate the AGC to control the average drive level into the two-band compressor,
preventing uncontrolled build-up of program density.

HF LIMIT (“2B High Frequency Limiting”) sets the threshold of the high frequency
limiter in the Two-Band structure. When this control is set lower, gain reduction does
more high frequency limiting. When this control is set higher, distortion-cancelled
clipping does more high frequency limiting. This control controls the tradeoff be-
tween loss of high frequencies (due to high frequency limiting) and excessive distor-
tion (due to clipping).
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL OPERATION 3-33
PARENT PRESET and LESS-MORE INDEX are read-only fields.

PARENT PRESET shows the preset that was edited to produce the current User Preset.

The LESS-MORE INDEX shows the Parent Preset’s Less-More setting when it was ed-
ited.

Advanced Two-Band Controls

2B M-THR (“2B Master Compression Threshold”) sets the level where gain reduction
starts to occur in the Master (above 200Hz) band of the Two-Band Compressor.

Because the 2B CLIP control also affects this threshold, it is usually unwise to adjust
the 2B MASTER COMPRESSION THRESHOLD control away from the setting provided in
the parent factory preset. Instead, use the 2B CLIP control to adjust the loudness /
distortion tradeoff. The 2B CLIP control also affects the threshold of the bass com-
pressor, so adjusting the 2B CLIP control allows you to affect the loudness / distortion
tradeoff without changing the spectral balance between the master and bass bands.

The only situation where you might wish to adjust the 2B MASTER COMPRESSION
THRESHOLD is if you have readjusted the 2B MASTER ATTACK control and this has
caused the average master gain reduction to change. The 2B MASTER ATTACK control
can then be adjusted to restore the original amount of average master gain reduc-
tion.

2B B-THR (“2B Bass Compression Threshold”) determines the compression threshold

of the bass band in the Two-Band Compressor. It can be used to set the target spec-
tral balance of the Two-Band Compressor. Setting it to more positive numbers in-
creases bass.

As the Two-Band Compressor BASS CPL control is moved towards “100%,” the 2B
BASS THRESHOLD control has progressively less effect on the sound.

2B M-ATK (“2B Master Attack”) sets the attack time of the Two-Band Compressor
master compressor (above 200Hz).

2B B-ATK (“2B Bass Attack”) sets the attack time of the Two-Band Compressor bass
compressor (below 200Hz).

6K+HF LIM (“2B 6-15 kHz HF Limiter”) sets the amount of additional gain reduction
occurring in 6-15 kHz band of the 2-band high frequency limiter. This extra gain re-
duction is triggered whenever high frequency energy would otherwise cause exces-
sive distortion in the final clipper. The algorithm uses an analysis of the activity in
the final clipper to make this determination.

Functionally, this control is a mix control that adds a HF limiter gain reduction signal
to higher of the two bands of the 2-band high frequency limiter. Higher settings
produce more extra HF limiting in this band. The control therefore allows you to
trade off reduced high frequency distortion against HF loss.
3-34 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

2B CROSSOVER sets the structure of the two-band crossover to Linear, Linear with
No Delay, or Allpass. See AGC CROSSOVER on page 3-25 for more information about
these modes.

ITU-R Multiplex Power Controller

The ITU-R recommends that the power in the composite baseband signal (including
the pilot tone), integrated over any 60-second interval, not exceed the power in a
sinewave that modulates the FM carrier to 19 kHz (25.3% modulation re ±75 kHz
deviation). Many European countries are now enforcing this recommendation. (See
ITU-R 412 Compliance on page 3-10 for more information.)

Multiplex Power Threshold

Your Optimod provides a means to limit the integrated multiplex power to the ITU
standard by a closed-loop technique that allows you to use any preset and to create
customized presets freely. The multiplex power controller is adjusted via the ITU412-
9 control (see step 19 on page 2-22). Set it OFF if your country does not enforce the
standard.

Figure 3-1: Multiplex Power over 15 Minute Observation Interval

with MPX Power Controller Active, measured at Optimod’s Composite Output
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL OPERATION 3-35
The control is located in the SETUP / STEREO ENCODER screen because the regulation
applies to all operation of the processor in a given installation.

If your country enforces the standard, you should set the control to complement the
amount of peak overshoot in the transmission system following your Optimod. Set-
ting the control at “0” will correctly control the multiplex power when there is no
overshoot after the 2300. This will typically be true when you are using your Opti-
mod’s built-in stereo encoder to drive the transmitter directly.

Section 1 of this manual has an extensive discussion of overshoot in transmission

paths. See page 1-13 and following pages.

Many paths have overshoot, and this forces you to reduce the average modulation
to avoid overmodulating the transmitter. This would reduce the multiplex power by
the same amount, forcing the multiplex power below the ITU requirement.

To compensate for this, match the ITU412-9 control to the peak overshoot of the
transmission system following the 2300. For example, if RF peak deviation exceeds
the peak deviation produced by the 2300’s sinewave oscillator (set for 100% modu-
lation) by 3 dB, set the MULTIPLEX POWER THRESHOLD to “+3.”

Audio Processing and the Multiplex Power Threshold Control

The multiplex power controller reduces multiplex power by applying gain reduction
before the Optimod’s FM peak limiting, thereby reducing the drive into the clippers.

With no power control, some of the louder 2300 presets can exceed the ITU stan-
dard by as much as 9 dB. This means that the clipper drive must be reduced by as
much as 9 dB, and this will vary according to the dynamics and spectral content of
the input program material. To prevent unnatural loudness variations, your Optimod
applies a static loss (set by the MPX POWER OFFSET control) when the multiplex
power controller is activated. This complements the dynamic gain reduction pro-
duced by the multiplex power controller. See the notes on the MPX POWER OFFSET
control on page 3-29.

The multiplex power controller is operational with all of the Two-Band and Five-
Band processing structures. It is not operational in Test mode and will not prevent
the 2300’s test oscillator from producing illegal modulation. It is the responsibility of
the operator to make sure that the test oscillator does not violate the ITU require-
ments. (To ensure this, never modulate the carrier with a single L+R tone that pro-
duces total carrier modulation, including pilot tone, of more than 24%.)

Multiplex Power Control in Stand-Alone Stereo Encoder Mode

When you use the 2300 in stand-alone stereo encoder mode, we recommend setting
up your transmission system to produce approximately 3 dB of average MPX power
control. This avoids unnatural loudness variations.

To achieve this goal when an Optimod-FM drives the 2300 stereo encoder, reduce
the drive into the Optimod’s peak limiters by turning down the MULTIBAND CLIPPING
control in the on-air preset until the MPX Power gain reduction meter on the 2300
indicates an average of 3 dB of gain reduction. Save the result as a User Preset.
3-36 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

Do not reduce the drive level to the 2300 by turning down the driving Optimod’s
output level control because this does not decrease distortion in the Optimod’s peak
limiter, unlike turning down the MULTIBAND CLIPPING control.

Test Modes
The Test Modes screen allows you to switch between OPERATE, BYPASS, and TONE.
When you switch to BYPASS or TONE, the preset you have on air is saved and will be
restored when you switch back to OPERATE.

Table 3-7: Test Modes on page 3-36 shows the facilities available, which should be
self-explanatory.

Setup: Test
Parameter Units Default Range (CCW to CW) Step
Labels
MODE --- Operate Operate, Bypass, Tone ---
BYPASS GAIN dB 0.0 18 … +25 1
TONE FREQ Hz 400 16, 20, 25, 31.5, 40, 50, LOG
63, 80, 100, 125, 160,
200, 250, 315, 400, 500,
630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600,
2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000,
6300, 8000, 9500, 10000,
12500, 13586.76, 15000
TONE LVL % 91 0 … 121 1
TONE CHAN --- L+R L+R, LR, LEFT; RIGHT ---
PILOT --- ON ON, OFF ---
Table 3-7: Test Modes

Getting the Bass Sound You Want

Probably the most frequently asked question we get regarding FM audio processor
setup is “How do I get a (such-and-such) bass sound?” It seems that individual pref-
erence varies in this area more than it does anywhere else.

There are no magic formulas. The 2300 has versatile controls affecting bass sound,
and will allow you to get almost any sound you want as long as that sound respects
the laws of physics—or, in this case, the laws of psychoacoustics.

The ear is far less sensitive to bass than to midrange sounds. You can see this for
yourself by examining the classic Fletcher-Munson “equal-loudness” curves. This
means that if you want effusive bass, it is going to take up a great deal of room in
your modulation waveform. This room could otherwise be used for midrange, where
far smaller amounts of energy yield the same amount of loudness. Accordingly,
there is an important tradeoff between loudness and bass—if you want more bass,
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL OPERATION 3-37
you will have to accept either less loudness or noticeably more distortion, the distor-
tion occurring when the bass waveforms push the midrange and high frequency ma-
terial into the 2300’s final clipper.

There is one psychoacoustic trick you can exploit to create more apparent bass while
efficiently using modulation headroom. For hundreds of years, pipe organ makers
have tricked the ear into hearing non-existent fundamental tones (which would re-
quire huge, expensive pipes) by replacing them with several, smaller pipes tuned to
the lower harmonics of the missing fundamental. In the 2300, you can use the bass
clipper to make harmonic distortion for this purpose. (The B-CL SHAPE control de-
termines the shape of the harmonic spectrum that is introduced by this gambit.)

Further, the bass clipper is particularly effective in increasing bass punch because it
flattops bass transients, and this allows the waveform to accommodate fundamen-
tals that have a larger peak level (by up to 2 dB) than the peak level of the flattop.
(The fundamental of a square wave has a peak level 2.1 dB higher than the peak
level of the square wave.) Bass fundamentals can thus exceed 100% modulation
even if the composite stereo waveform does not exceed this level.

The attack time of the bass two-band compressor also affects bass punch by deter-
mining the amount of bass transient that is allowed to pass through the compressor
before the attack clamps down on the rest of the waveform. Any transient that
passes through the bass two-band compressor will hit the bass clipper, so slower at-
tack times on band 1 will increase bass punch at the expense of distortion (particu-
larly on voice). The 2B BASS ATTACK TIME settings in the factory presets have been ad-
justed with this tradeoff in mind, but you might like to make a different one. Fur-
ther, the SPEECH BASS CLIPPER THRESHOLD control exploits the 2300’s speech / music
detector to allow the bass clipper threshold to be raised during speech, minimizing
clipper-induced speech distortion.

The threshold of the bass two-band compressor also affects bass punch. We recom-
mend that you carefully study the setting of this control (and the 2B BASS ATTACK
TIME control) in the various 2300 factory presets before making your own adjust-
ments, so you can get a feel for how we made the tradeoff between punch and dis-
tortion at the factory. If you set the threshold much above –6 dB, you will typically
get some distortion even on steady-state waveforms, depending on where you have
set the BASS CLIP control. This control is the primary means of trading off bass punch
against IM distortion caused the bass’ pushing non-bass material into the final clip-
pers. Set it more negative for less punch but less IM distortion.

There are two bass equalizer sections—the low bass shelving equalizer and the bass
parametric equalizer. The main thing to remember about these sections is that they
are fixed tone controls that apply coloration equally to all program material going
into the main dynamics processing section of the 2300. (They do not affect the AGC
section because they are located after it in the signal flow.) Accordingly, the two-
band compressor in the 2300 will attempt to undo any coloration added in the
equalizer setting and will automatically re-equalize the sound to the standard estab-
lished by the band threshold controls.

Therefore, to get bass to survive the dynamics processing in the 2300, it is usually
necessary to apply substantial bass boost to the input by using the equalizer con-
3-38 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

trols. (A small amount of boost will just be “automatically re-equalized” away; check
the factory presets to see what we mean by “substantial.”) Bear in mind that using
large amounts of shelving bass boost (particularly with 12- or 18 dB/octave slopes)
can cause an effective loss of loudness because the master compressor will be forced
to produce additional gain reduction.

To summarize: Bass is a matter of preference, but the canny broadcast engineer will
be aware of the variability of radios out there and will not apply excessive bass
boost that can sound awful on “boom-boxes” and other consumer radios with bass
boost already built-in. It is usually wise to emulate the bass balance of hit CDs, be-
cause very experienced mastering engineers, who make these trade-offs every day,
have mastered these CDs.

The 2300 provides considerable flexibility to get the bass sound you want, but this
flexibility comes at a price—you have to familiarize yourself with the relevant con-
trols and truly understand what you are doing. This manual is there to help, and it is
worthwhile to reserve some time with if you want to become a 2300 bass expert.

Using the 2300 PC Remote Control Software

2300 PC Remote control software allows you to access any front-panel 2300 control.
The software also gives you the ability to backup user presets, system files, and
automation files on your computer’s storage devices (hard drives, floppy drives, etc.)
and to restore them later to your 2300.

The 2300 PC Remote software can connect to your 2300 via modem, direct serial ca-
ble connection, or Ethernet network. It communicates with your 2300 via the TCP/IP
protocol, regardless of how it is connected to your 2300.

PC Remote works best on displays of 1024x768 pel or higher. Scroll bars

will appear when using lower resolutions.
Before running 2300 PC Remote, you must have installed the appropriate Windows
communications services on your computer. By default, the installer installs a short-
cut to 2300_PC.exe on your desktop and in your Start Menu under Orban\Optimod
2300.

2300 PC Remote can control only one 2300 at a time, but it can readily switch be-
tween several 2300s. 2300 PC Remote has a built-in “address book” that allows it to
select and connect to:

 any 2300 on the same network as the PC,

 an 2300 that can be accessed through a modem connected to the PC via dial-up
networking, and,

 any 2300 that is connected directly to one of your PC’s serial ports.

Before your PC can communicate with a given 2300, you must first set up a “connec-
tion,” which is information that allows PC Remote to locate and communicate with
the 2300.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL OPERATION 3-39

To set up a new connection:

A) Launch 2300_PC.exe.
B) Create a new 2300 connection by choosing NEW 2300 from the CONNECT file
menu or by right-clicking on the ALL CONNECTIONS icon in the Connections List
and selecting NEW 2300.
The Connection Properties dialog box opens.
C) Enter an Alias name for your 2300 (like “KABC”).
D) Leave the password field blank to prompt the user to enter a password when
initiating a connection.
Refer to Security and Passcode Programming on page 2-37.
Otherwise, enter a password to allow PC Remote to connect to your 2300
without requiring a password when the connection is initiated.
To ensure a successful connection, a password must have already been
entered into your 2300 unit.
E) If you are communicating with your 2300 through a network, select the
Ethernet radio button and enter the appropriate IP address, subnet mask,
port, and gateway data. These must agree with the values you set in step 1 on
page 2-42. See also Setting Up Ethernet, LAN, and VPN Connections on page
2-50.
If you are communicating via a direct serial cable connection or a modem
connection, follow the appropriate procedure described in Appendix:
Setting up Serial Communications, starting on page 2-51.
F) Click OK after entering all required information.

To initiate communication:
Initiate communication by double-clicking on
the desired 2300 alias in the Connections List, or
by selecting the desired 2300 alias from the
CONNECT drop down menu.
If the connection is successful, a dialog bubble
will appear on the bottom right hand corner of
the screen verifying your connection.

 If a warning message appears stating: “No password is set at the 2300…” go

to your 2300 unit and enter a passcode.

 If an Enter Passcode dialog box appears, enter a valid passcode and the 2300
PC Remote software will initiate a connection to the 2300 unit.

A window will appear saying, “Connecting to the 2300, please wait.” A few mo-
ments later, a new message will appear: “Loading system files, please wait.”
3-40 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

When run, the Orban PC Remote software installer makes copies of all
2300 factory preset files on your local hard drive. The PC Remote soft-
ware reads these files to speed up its initialization. If any of these files
have been deleted or damaged, the PC Remote software will refresh
them by downloading them from the 2300. If the PC Remote software
needs to do this, it can substantially increase the time required for the
software to initialize, particularly through a slow modem connection.
When this download is finished, the main meters will appear.

 A wheel mouse is the quickest and easiest interface to use—you will rarely (if
ever) have to use the keyboard.

 The help box at the bottom of the screen always presents a short help mes-
sage for the function you have selected.

To modify a control setting:

A) Choose PROCESSING PARAMETERS from the EDIT menu.
B) Select menu tabs (coded green) for Less-More, Stereo Enhancer, and EQ to ac-
cess Basic Modify controls. All other menu tabs (coded red) contain Full or Ad-
vanced Modify controls.
You can reset any Basic Modify Control without losing LESS-MORE func-
tionality; Full and Advanced modify control adjustments will cause LESS-
MORE to be grayed-out.
To set a control, click it (it will become highlighted) and then adjust it by
dragging it with the mouse or moving the wheel on the mouse.
You can also use the + and – keys on the numeric keypad to adjust any
control.

To recall a preset:
A) Choose RECALL PRESET from the FILE menu to bring up the OPEN PRESET FILE
dialog box.
B) Click the desired preset within the dialog box to select it.
C) Double-click the desired preset or select it and click the RECALL PRESET button
to put it on-air.
Repeatedly clicking the RECALL PRESET button will toggle between the
current and previous on-air presets.

D) Click DONE to dismiss the OPEN PRESET FILE dialog box.

The folder on your hard drive containing the preset files (both Factory
and User) is automatically synchronized to the contents of its associated
2300’s memory each time 2300 PC Remote connects to that 2300. The
2300’s memory is the “master.” This means that if you delete a user pre-
set from the 2300’s memory (whether locally via its front panel or via
2300 PC Remote), 2300 PC Remote will automatically erase this preset
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL OPERATION 3-41
from this folder on your computer. To archive a preset permanently, you
must use the Backup function. (See page 3- 41.)

To save a user preset you have created:

A) Select SAVE PRESET AS from the FILE menu to bring up the SAVE AS Dialog Box.
The current preset name will appear in the File Name field.
B) Click in the field, and edit it.
C) Click SAVE to save the preset to the 2300 as a User Preset.
If you have made edits to a previously existing user preset, you can select
SAVE PRESET from the FILE menu to overwrite the pre-existing user preset
automatically.

To back up User Presets, system files, and automation files onto

your computer’s hard drive:
A) Select BACKUP TO PC from the FILE Menu.
B) Click OK.
PC Remote will offer three options:
 Save User Presets, system files, and automation in plain text.
This allows the presets and files to be read with any text editor program
and to be readily exchanged between Optimod users.

 Save User Presets, system files, and automation files using the session pass-
code to encrypt them.

 Save User Presets, system files, and automation files using the password of
your choice to encrypt them.
The encryption options prevent archived presets, system files, and auto-
mation files from being restored if the user does not have the password
used for the encryption. There is no “back door”— Orban cannot help
you to decrypt a preset whose password is unknown.
All User Preset, system, and automation files are copied from your Opti-
mod’s internal memory to a folder called “backup” on your PC. This
folder is a subfolder of the folder named the same as the alias of the Op-
timod that you are backing up.
This folder name (“backup”) and location are hard-coded into the soft-
ware. If you wish to move the backup files somewhere else later, use a
file manager (like Explorer) on your computer.
To make more than one backup archive, rename the current backup
folder (for example, to “Backup1”). 2300 PC Remote will create a new
backup folder the next time you do a backup, leaving your renamed
backup folder untouched. Later, you will be able to restore from any
folder—the Restore dialog box allows you to choose the folder contain-
ing the files to be restored
3-42 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

If you attempt to back up a preset with the same name as a preset exist-
ing in the Backup folder, but with a different date, 2300 PC Remote will
warn you and will allow you to overwrite the preset in the Backup folder
or to cancel the operation. If you wish to keep the existing archived pre-
set, you can first use a file manager to move the existing user preset in
the Backup folder to another folder and then repeat the backup opera-
tion.

To restore archived presets, system files, and automation files:

In addition to restoring an archived preset to its original Optimod, you can also
copy archived presets from one Optimod to another. The Optimod whose con-
nection is active will receive the preset.
If the preset, system file, or automation file was encrypted when it was originally
saved, PC Remote will request the password under which it was encrypted.
All User Presets are compatible with all 2300 software versions. If Orban
adds new controls to a software version, the new software will assign a
reasonable default value to any control missing in an old User Preset. If
you archive such a User Preset after restoring it, the newly written ar-
chive file will now include the new controls (with the default values as-
signed, unless you edit any of these values before you re-archive the pre-
set).

A) Select RESTORE FROM PC from the FILE menu.

A standard Windows dialog box will open.
B) Select the type of files you want to restore using the FILES OF TYPE field at
the bottom of the dialog box.
You can elect to restore 2300 user presets (*.orb23user), system files
(*.orb23setup), and automation files (*.orb23autom).
If you want to restore files from a different directory (i.e., that might
have been created on a different 2300), navigate to that directory from
within the dialog box.
C) To restore a single user preset:
a) Set the FILES OF TYPE field to a user preset file type (*.orb23user, *.orbu).
b) Select the desired preset in the dialog box.
c) Click the RESTORE button.
D) To restore all the user presets from a specific location:
a) Set the FILES OF TYPE field to a user preset file type (*.orb23user, *.orbu)
b) Highlight all the user presets in the dialog window
c) Click the RESTORE button.
E) To restore a system file:
a) Set the FILES OF TYPE field to the System Setup file type (*.orb23setup).
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL OPERATION 3-43
b) Select the desired system file in the dialog box.
c) Click the RESTORE button.
F) To restore an automation file:
a) Set the FILES OF TYPE field to the Automation file type (*.orb23autom)
b) Select the desired automation file in the dialog box
c) Click the RESTORE button.
G) Click DONE to dismiss the RESTORE dialog box.
To share an archived User Preset between 2300s:

A) Navigate to the directory containing the desired User Preset from within the
RESTORE FROM PC dialog box
B) Click the RESTORE button.
This User Preset will be downloaded to the 2300 to which 2300 PC Re-
mote is currently connected.
If the User Preset is encrypted, PC Remote will request its password.

To modify INPUT/OUTPUT and SYSTEM SETUP:

Choose SETUP from the TOOLS menu.
To set a control, click it (it will become highlighted) and then use the wheel on
the mouse to adjust it. You can also use the + and – keys on the numeric keypad
to adjust any control.

To modify AUTOMATION:
A) Choose AUTOMATION from the TOOLS menu.
An Automation Dialog box will open.
B) Click the NEW EVENT to create a new event
Controls to set the event type and time are available on the right hand
side of the dialog box.
C) Check the ENABLE AUTOMATION check box at the top of the dialog box to en-
able automation.

To group multiple 2300s:

Right-click ALL CONNECTIONS in the Connections List and select NEW GROUP.

You can add multiple 2300 to a single group to help organize a network of 2300.
However, only one 2300 from within a group can be connected to 2300 PC Remote
at any one time.
3-44 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

Operation Using the Keyboard

In general, PC Remote uses standard Windows conventions for navigation.

Navigate around the screens using the TAB key. Use CTRL-TAB to move to the next
tabbed screen in PC Remote.

Use the + and – keys or the left and right arrow keys on the numeric keypad to ad-
just control settings.

To Quit the Program

Use standard Windows conventions: Press ALT-F4 on the keyboard, or click the X on
the upper right corner with the mouse.

Also, please note the following behavior:

 If you close the PC Remote connection from the PC, you will be given the choice
of staying connected through the ppp or disconnecting.

 If you close the connection from PC Remote but choose not to close the ppp
connection, the END PC REMOTE button will remain displayed on the 2300’s front
panel. If you then select that button, the ppp connection will close.
This behavior ensures that a user can tell from the 2300’s front panel if a
remote connection is active. A user can disconnect the PC connection at
the 2300 if he or she wishes. This minimizes the likelihood of someone’s
leaving a connection open while someone else tries to access that 2300.

About Aliases created by Optimod 2300 PC Remote Software

When you ADD A NEW 2300 using Optimod 2300 PC Remote, your 2300 is automati-
cally given a 2300 Alias name to differentiate it from other 2300s. You can change
the name anytime in the 2300 Properties window inside 2300 PC Remote.

When you add a new 2300 or change the name of an existing 2300 Alias, an Alias
folder is created in the same location as the executable for Optimod 2300 PC Re-
mote (usually \Program Files\Orban\Optimod 2300). The folder has the same name as
the Alias name. Once you establish the initial connection to the 2300, all presets for
that 2300 are automatically copied to the Alias folder; thus, the folder contains all
the preset files for that 2300, both Factory and User. If you have backed up the 2300
using 2300 PC Remote, there will also be a “backup” subfolder located within the
Alias folder.

Archived user preset files are text files and can be opened in a text editor
(like Notepad) if you want to examine their contents.
Alias folders and their associated backup subfolders are registered in your PC’s Reg-
istry. This prevents folders from being accidentally deleted or moved. If you move or
delete Alias folders from the PC, the Alias folders recreate themselves in the previ-
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL OPERATION 3-45
ous location and restore their contents by copying it from their associated 2300s
when 2300 PC Remote connects to such a 2300.

Multiple Installations of Optimod 2300 PC Remote

Rarely, you may want to have more than one installation of 2300 PC Remote on your
computer. There are a few extra things to know if you have multiple installations.

If you install a new version of the Optimod 2300 PC Remote software on your PC,
any Alias folders and backup subfolders created in an earlier software version still
remain in their original location on your PC (and in its registry).

The version of 2300 PC Remote must match the version of the software in the 2300
controlled by it. Therefore, you will only need multiple installations of PC Remote
(having separate version numbers) if:

 you are controlling multiple 2300s, and

 not all of your 2300s are running the same version of 2300 software, and

 you do not want to upgrade at least one controlled 2300 to the latest version of
2300 PC Remote software.

Each version of 2300 PC Remote has its own top-level folder, normally under
\Program Files\Orban. (The default folder is \Program Files\Orban\Optimod 2300.)
When you install a new version of 2300 PC Remote, the default behavior is to over-
write the old version, which is usually the desired behavior. To prevent the installer
from overwriting the old version, you must specify a different installation folder
when you install the new version (for example, \Program Files\Orban\Optimod
2300v2).

Each version of 2300 PC Remote will display all 2300 Aliases, even those pointing to
2300s with incompatible version numbers. If you attempt to connect to an older ver-
sion of 2300 from a newer version of 2300 PC Remote, 2300 PC Remote will offer to
upgrade the software in the target 2300 so that the software corresponds to the
version of 2300 PC Remote that is active. If you attempt to connect to newer version
of 2300 from an older version of 2300 PC Remote, it will refuse to connect and will
emit an error message regarding incompatible versions.

To Move Alias Folders:

If you decide to install the new software to a different location on your PC, new Ali-
ases created using the new software will not be located in the same place as the old
Aliases.

Even though each version of 2300 PC Remote can see all aliases, you may wish to
move the corresponding folders so they are under the folder corresponding to the
highest version of 2300 PC Remote that is currently installed on your computer (al-
though this is not required). If your Alias folders reside in different locations, you
can move all the Alias folders to the same location by using the PC Remote software.
3-46 OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 2300

Do not use an external file manager to do this. The old Alias folders need to be re-
created under the Optimod 2300 PC Remote software you wish to use (so that the
registry entries can be correctly updated). You can do this two different ways.

 Rename the Alias (preferred): Start the Optimod 2300 PC Remote executable
you wish to use and rename your old Aliases with a slightly different name. A
new Alias folder with the new name will be created in the same location as the
Optimod 2300 PC Remote executable.

 Delete and Recreate the Alias: Start the Optimod 2300 PC Remote executable
you wish to use. Delete the old 2300 Aliases and create new ones to replace
them. New Alias folders will be created in the same location as the Optimod
2300 PC Remote executable.

Important: The deletion process will automatically erase its associated

folder, including the Backup directory. If you have anything in the
Backup directory that you wish to keep, you should therefore move that
directory elsewhere (or transfer the desired files to another, active
backup directory).
Ordinarily, the erasure process will move the Backup directory to your
computer’s Recycle Bin, so you can recover a Backup directory that you
have accidentally deleted in this way.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL MAINTENANCE 4-1

Section 4
Maintenance
Routine Maintenance
The 2300 OPTIMOD-FM Audio Processor uses highly stable analog and digital cir-
cuitry throughout. Recommended routine maintenance is minimal.

1. Periodically check audio level and gain reduction meter readings.

Become familiar with normal audio level meter readings, and with the normal
performance of the G/R metering. If any meter reading is abnormal, see Section 5
for troubleshooting information.

2. Listen to the 2300's output.

A good ear will pick up many faults. Familiarize yourself with the “sound” of the
2300 as you have set it up, and be sensitive to changes or deterioration. How-
ever, if problems arise, please do not jump to the conclusion that the 2300 is at
fault. The troubleshooting information in Section 5 will help you determine if
the problem is with OPTIMOD-FM or is somewhere else in the station's equip-
ment.

3. Periodically check for corrosion.

Particularly in humid or salt-spray environments, check for corrosion at the input

and output connectors and at those places where the 2300 chassis contacts the
rack.

4. Periodically check for loss of grounding.

Check for loss of grounding due to corrosion or loosening of rack mounting

screws.

5. Clean the front panel when it is soiled.

Wash the front panel with a mild household detergent and a damp cloth. Do not
use stronger solvents; they may damage plastic parts, paint, or the silk-screened
lettering. Do not use paper-based cleaning towels, or use cleaning agents con-
taining ammonia, or alcohol. An acceptable cleaning product is “Glass Plus.” For
best results when cleaning the lens, use a clean, lint-free cloth.
4-2 MAINTENANCE ORBAN MODEL 2300

Subassembly Removal and Replacement

See page 6-29 for the Circuit Board Locator and Basic Interconnections diagram.

1. Removing the Top Cover:

To access any internal board (including the display assembly), you must remove
the top cover.
A) Disconnect the 2300 and remove it from the rack.
Be sure power is disconnected before removing the cover.
Warning: Hazardous voltage is exposed with the unit open and the
power ON.
B) Set the unit upright on a padded surface with the front panel facing you.
C) Remove all screws holding the top cover in place, and lift the top cover off.
Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver.

2. Removing the Front Panel Assembly:

A) Detach the four cables that connect the display board assembly to the base
board. Note the lead dress so you can reassemble the unit correctly.
B) Detach the front panel from the unit.
a) On each side of the chassis, remove the three screws close to the front
panel.
b) Remove the front panel by sliding it out.
C) Set the front panel, face down, on a soft cloth to prevent scratches.
D) Using a 3/16-inch hex nut driver, remove the four hex nuts holding the two
side brackets and central shield to the front panel. Remove the brackets and
shield and set them aside.
E) Using a #1 Philips screwdriver, remove and reserve the eight screws and spac-
ers that fasten the display board assembly to the front panel.
F) Lift the display board assembly off its supporting standoffs.
G) Separate the two boards in the display board assembly by carefully unplug-
ging the top board from the bottom board. Note that there are four plugs
and jacks.

3. Removing the RS-232 Connector Board:

A) If you have not done so yet, remove the top cover (step 1, above).
B) Using a 3/16-inch hex nut driver, remove the two hex nuts holding the RS-232
connector to the chassis.
C) Unplug the RS-232 interface assembly from the base board.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL MAINTENANCE 4-3
4. Removing the CPU Module:

A) Remove the four screws holding the CPU module to the standoffs that sup-
port it on the base board.
B) Applying gentle upward pressure, unplug the CPU module from the base
board.

5. Removing the Base Board:

A) If you have not done so yet, remove the top cover (step 1, above).
B) If you have not done so yet, remove the CPU module (step 3.C), above).
C) Using a 3/16-inch hex nut driver, remove the two hex nuts holding the DB-25
connector to the rear panel of the chassis.
D) If you have not done so yet, remove the RS-232 connector board (step 3,
above).
E) If you have not done so yet, remove the five cables that connect the display
assembly to the base board (step 3 on page 4-2).
F) If you have not yet done so, remove the RS-232 interface assembly from the
base board.
G) Disconnect the ribbon cable connecting the base board to the I/O board.
H) Disconnect the ribbon cable connecting the base board to the DSP board.
I) Disconnect the ribbon cable connecting the power supply to the base board.
J) Using a #1 Philips screwdriver, remove the four corner screws holding the base
board to the chassis standoffs.
K) Using a 3/16-inch hex nut driver, remove the four hex standoffs on which the
CPU module was mounted
L) The base board is now free and can be removed from the chassis.

6. Removing the I/O (Input/Output) Board:

A) If you have not done so yet, remove the top cover (step 1, above).
B) Unlock all six XLR connectors, using a jeweler's screwdriver: engage the lock-
ing mechanism (in the center of the triangle formed by the three contact pins)
and turn counterclockwise until the XLR connector is no longer attached.
C) Using a deep hex nut driver (preferred), a small crescent wrench, or a pair of
slip-joint pliers (in an emergency), remove the four nuts and lockwashers fas-
tening the four BNC connectors to the chassis.
Use great care not to scrape the paint, particularly if you are using pliers.
D) Remove the ribbon cable that connects the I/O board to the base board.
E) Remove the ribbon cable that connects the I/O board to the DSP board.
F) Disconnect the ribbon cable connecting the power supply to the base board.
4-4 MAINTENANCE ORBAN MODEL 2300

G) Remove the three #1 Phillips screws (and their washers) that connect the I/O
board to the chassis.
H) Carefully pull the I/O board forward to clear the XLRs from their housings.
Then lift the board out of the chassis.

7. Removing the DSP Board:

A) If you have not done so yet, remove the top cover (step 1, above).
B) Remove the ribbon cable that connects the I/O board to the DSP board.
C) Remove the ribbon cable that connects the base board to the DSP board.
D) Remove the plug connecting the power supply wiring harness to the DSP
board.
E) Remove the five #1 Phillips screws (and their washers) that connect the DSP
board to the chassis.
F) Lift the DSP board out of the chassis.

8. Removing the Power Supply Board:

A) If you have not done so yet, remove the top cover (step 1, above).
B) Remove the two plugs that connect the power supply board to the power
transformer.
If present, remove the white fasteners that tie the two cables to the
power supply board.
C) Remove the ribbon cables connecting the power supply to the base board,
DSP board, and I/O board.
D) Remove the nine #1 Phillips screws (and their washers) fastening the heat sink
to the side of the chassis.
E) Remove the nut and star washer from the ground wire with a ¼-inch nut
driver.
F) Remove the two Phillips screws (and matching washers) that hold the IEC (line
cord) connector to the chassis.
G) Remove the three Phillips screws holding the power supply board to the main
chassis.
Note that one screw is located under the safety cover close to the line
voltage selector switch. Lift the cover up to expose the screw.
H) Carefully lift the power supply board up.

9. Reattaching the Power Supply Board:

A) Set power supply board into main chassis, so that it aligns with its mounting
holes.
B) Replace the two Phillips screws that hold the IEC connector.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL MAINTENANCE 4-5
C) Replace the nine #1 Phillips screws that hold the heat sink to the side of the
chassis. If necessary, add additional heat sink compound to ensure a reliable
thermal connection between the heat sink and the chassis.
D) Replace the ground wire nut.
E) Replace the three Phillips screws that hold the power supply board to the
main chassis.
F) Reattach the two plugs that connect the power supply board to the trans-
former.
G) Reattach the two plugs for the power distribution wiring harnesses.

10. Replacing the Base Board, I/O Board, and DSP board:

Referring to steps 5 – 7, follow the instructions in reverse.

Note that you cannot replace the RS-232 board and the CPU board until you
have replaced the base board.

11. Replacing the CPU Board:

Referring to step 4, follow the instructions in reverse.

12. Replacing the RS-232 Board:

Referring to step 3, follow the instructions in reverse.

13. Replacing the Front Panel Assembly:

A) Set the front panel, face down, on a soft cloth to prevent scratches.
B) Lightly reattach the bottom and top circuit boards by mating the four plugs
and jacks. Use care to align the pins with the jacks so that all pins are correctly
aligned and no pins are bent. Do not push the pins all the way into the jacks
yet; leave room between the upper and lower boards for spacers.
C) Reattach the board assembly to the front panel using the eight #1 Philips-
head screws and spacers removed in step (2.E) on page 4-2:
a) Thread each screw through a spacer placed between the upper and lower
circuit boards.
b) Push down the top board until it rests on the spacers.
c) Align the screws with the threaded standoffs on the front panel.
d) Evenly tighten all eight screws to reattach the board assembly to the panel.
D) Place the two side brackets over the captive screws located on each side of the
front panel. Be sure that the large side of each bracket is oriented toward the
rack-screw cutouts in the panel.
E) Place the metal shield over the captive screws on each side of the front panel.
Align the shield so that its cutouts are aligned with the cables attached to the
4-6 MAINTENANCE ORBAN MODEL 2300

circuit board assembly. Using a 3/16” nut driver, screw four hex nuts onto the
captive screws.
F) Attach the front panel assembly to the unit:
a) Verify that all cables are dressed through cutouts in the shield.
b) Slide the front panel assembly into the front of the chassis so that the three
threaded holes in the side brackets line up with the holes in the sides of the
chassis.
c) Attack the front panel assembly by screwing the six screws removed in step
2.B)a) on page 4-2 into the holes in the sides of the chassis.
G) Reattach the four cables that connect the display board to the base board.
Each cable has a different type or size of connector, so it is obvious which ca-
ble mates with which jack on the base board.
Carefully align the cables and connectors to avoid bending the pins.

14. Replacing the Top Cover:

Place the top on unit and reattach the Phillips screws. (Be careful not to pinch
any cables.)

Field Audit of Performance

Required Equipment:

 Ultra-low distortion sine-wave oscillator / THD analyzer / audio voltmeter

(With verified residual distortion below 0.01%. Sound Technology 1710B;

Audio Precision System One, or similar high-performance system.)
(The NAB Broadcast and Audio System Test CD is an excellent source of
test signals when used with a high-quality CD player.)
 Spectrum analyzer with tracking generator

(Stanford Research Systems SR760 or equivalent. Alternatively, a sweep

generator with 50-15,000 Hz logarithmic sweep can be used with an oscil-
loscope in X / Y mode, or you can use a computer-controlled test set like
the Audio Precision System One. )
 Digital voltmeter

Accurate to ±0.1%.
 Oscilloscope

DC-coupled, triggered sweep, with 5M Hz or greater vertical bandwidth.

 Two 620 ±5% resistors.

 Optional: Audio Precision System 1 (without digital option) or System 2 (for digi-
tal tests).
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL MAINTENANCE 4-7
It is assumed that the technician is thoroughly familiar with the operation of this
equipment.

This procedure is useful for detecting and diagnosing problems with the 2300's per-
formance. It includes checks of frequency response, noise and distortion perform-
ance, and output level capability.

This performance audit assesses the performance of the analog-to-digital and digi-
tal-to-analog converters and verifies that the digital signal processing section (DSP)
is passing signal correctly. Ordinarily, there is a high probability that the DSP is per-
forming the dynamic signal processing correctly. There is therefore no need to
measure such things as attack and release times—these are defined by software and
will automatically be correct if the DSP is otherwise operating normally.

It is often more convenient to make measurements on the bench away from high RF
fields which could affect results. For example, in a high RF field it is very difficult to
accurately measure the very low THD produced by a properly operating 2300 at
most frequencies. However, in an emergency it is usually possible to detect many of
the more severe faults that could develop in the 2300 circuitry even in high-RF envi-
ronments.

See the assembly drawings in Section 6 for component locations.

Be sure to turn the power off before removing or installing circuit boards.

Follow these instructions in order without skipping steps.

Note: To obtain an unbalanced output, jumper pin 1 (ground) to pin 3, and measure
between pin 1 (ground) and pin 2 (hot).

Note: All analog output measurements are taken with a 620 ±5% resistor tied be-
tween pin 2 and 3 of the XLR connector.

1. Prepare the unit.

A) Set the GND LIFT switch to the earth ground symbol setting (left position) to
connect chassis ground to circuit ground.
B) Use the front panel controls to set the 2300's software controls to their de-
fault settings, as follows:
a) Navigate to SETUP / IO CALIB / ANLG IN CALIB. After writing down the old
settings (so you can restore them later), set controls as follows:
Input ............................................................................................. analog
AI Ref VU ................................................................................... +4.0 dBu
R CH BAL.........................................................................................0.0 dB

b) Navigate to SETUP / IO CALIB / DIG IN CALIB. Set controls as in the table below:
DI Ref VU ................................................................................ –15.0 dBFS
R CH BAL.........................................................................................0.0 dB
4-8 MAINTENANCE ORBAN MODEL 2300

c) Navigate to Setup / Io Calib / Anlg Out Calib. Set controls as follows:

AO 100% ................................................................................. +10.0 dBu
AO Pre-E .............................................................................................Flat

d) Navigate to SETUP / IO CALIB / DIG OUT CALIB. Set controls as follows:

DO 100% .................................................................................. –2.8 dBFS
DO Pre-E ............................................................................................. flat
DO RATE........................................................................................32 kHz
DO SYNC......................................................................................internal

e) Press the NEXT button. Set controls as follows:

Word Len.............................................................................................. 20
Dither..................................................................................................Out
FORMAT ...........................................................................................AES3

f) Navigate to SETUP / STEREO ENCODER. Set the ITU412-9 control to OFF.

g) Navigate to SETUP / TEST. Set controls as follows:
MODE ........................................................................................... Bypass
NOTE: Bypass defeats all compression, limiting, and program equaliza-
tion, but retains the selected pre-emphasis (either 50s or 75s).
BYPASS GAIN ....................................................................................0 dB
TONE FREQ....................................................................................400 Hz
TONE LVL........................................................................................ 100%

h) Press the NEXT button.

i) Set controls as follows:
TONE CHAN........................................................................................ L+R
PILOT....................................................................................................ON
2. Test the power supply

A) If the power supply is entirely dead and the fuse is not blown, verify that the
primary winding of the power transformer is intact by measuring the resis-
tance of the power supply at the IEC AC line connector.
For 115-volt operation, the resistance should be approximately 7.6.
For 230-volt operation, the resistance should be approximately 27.
Number of Red Flashes Problem With
1 + unregulated supply
2 +15V or –15V
3 +5V or –5V
4 +5V Digital
5 Analog  Digital ground connection broken
6 DSP A +3.3V supply
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL MAINTENANCE 4-9
Number of Red Flashes Problem With
7 DSP B +3.3V supply
8 CPU +3.3V supply
9 CPU +2.5V supply
Table 4-1: Decoder Chart for Power Supervisor
B) The green LED power indicator on the lower left of the front panel monitors
the DC power supply outputs. If one or more power supply voltages are out of
tolerance, red flashes will report them according to Table 4-1. If there are
multiple values out of tolerance, they are reported one after another in a
continuous loop, with one green flash indicating the beginning of each count.
You can monitor power supply voltages at connector J7 on the power
supply board (see Section 6 for schematic and parts locator drawing).
When one faces the connector, the voltages can be found on the pins in
the following pattern:
(1) + unreg. (3) digital gnd (5) +15V (7) +5 V digital (9) –5V analog
(2) - unreg (4) chassis gnd (6) -15V (8) +5V analog (10) NC
Table 4-2: Layout Diagram of J7, with expected voltages on each pin
The +3.3V and +2.5V supplies are locally regulated on the DSP and base
boards (see Section 6).
C) Measure the regulated voltages at J7 with the DVM and observe the ripple
with an oscilloscope, AC-coupled. The following results are typical:
Power Supply Rail DC Voltage (volts) AC Ripple (mV p-p)
+15VDC +15  0.5 <20
–15VDC –15  0.5 <20
+5VDC +5  0.25 <20
–5VDC –5  0.25 <20
Digital +5VDC +5  0.25 [Obscured by noise]
Table 4-3: Typical Power Supply Voltages and AC Ripple

3. Adjust Analog Output Level Trim.

A) Verify 2300 software controls are set to their default settings. [Refer to step
(1.B) on page 4-7.]
B) Feed the 2300 output with the built-in 400 Hz test tone:
a) Navigate to SETUP / TEST.
b) Set the MODE to TONE.
C) Connect the audio voltmeter to the Left Analog Output.
D) Adjust output trim VR200 to make the meter read +10.0 dBu. (0 dBu = 0.775V
rms.) Verify a frequency reading of 400 Hz.
E) Verify THD+N reading of <0.05% (0.02% typical) using a 22 kHz low pass filter
in the distortion analyzer.
4-10 MAINTENANCE ORBAN MODEL 2300

F) Set the MODE to BYPASS.

BYPASS defeats all compression, limiting, and program equalization but
retains pre-emphasis.
G) Verify a reading (noise) of <–80 dBu at the output of the unit.
H) Using VR201, repeat steps (C) through (G) for the Right Analog Output.

4. Check frequency response of Analog I/O.

A) Verify 2300 software controls are set to their default settings. [Refer to step
(1.B) on page 4-7.]
B) Be sure you are still in BYPASS mode [see step (3.F)].
C) Connect the oscillator to the Left Analog Input XLR connector.
D) Inject the Analog Input XLR connector with a level of 0 dBu with the oscillator
set to 100 Hz.
This is 20 dB below the clip level, which allows headroom for pre-
emphasis. (75s pre-emphasis will cause 17 dB of boost at 15 kHz.)
E) Connect the audio analyzer to the 2300's Left Analog Output XLR connector.
F) Verify a level of 0 dBu ±1 dB. Use this level as the reference level.
G) Verify that frequency response at 50 Hz, 100 Hz, 400 Hz, 5 kHz, and 15 kHz is
within ±0.1 dB of the reference level.
This procedure tests the analog input circuitry, the A/D converter, the
DSP, the DAC, and the analog output circuitry.
H) Repeat steps (C) through (G) for the right channel.

5. Check distortion performance of Analog I/O.

A) Verify 2300 software controls are set to their default settings. ([Refer to step
(1.B) on page 4-7.]
B) Be sure you are still in BYPASS mode [see step (3.F)].
C) Connect a THD analyzer to the Left Analog Output XLR connector. Set the
THD analyzer's bandwidth to 22 kHz.
D) Connect the oscillator to the Left Analog Input XLR connector.
E) For each frequency used to measure THD, adjust the output level of the oscil-
lator to make the COMP meter on the 2300 read 100.
You will have to reduce the output level of the oscillator at higher fre-
quencies to compensate for the pre-emphasis boost in the 2300.
F) Measure the THD+N at the frequency levels listed below.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL MAINTENANCE 4-11
Frequency THD+N Typical THD+N Maximum
50 Hz 0.015% 0.03%
100 Hz 0.015% 0.03%
400 Hz 0.015% 0.03%
1 kHz 0.015% 0.03%
2.5 kHz 0.015% 0.03%
5 kHz 0.015% 0.03%
7.5 kHz 0.015% 0.03%
10 kHz 0.015% 0.03%
15 kHz 0.015% 0.03%

G) Repeat the above measurements for the right channel. Connect the oscillator
to the right analog input and the distortion analyzer to the right analog out-
put.
H) Disconnect the oscillator and THD analyzer from the 2300.

6. Test Digital Sample Rate Converter (Receiver).

A) Verify 2300 software controls are set to their default settings. (Refer to page
4-7.)
B) Be sure you are still in BYPASS mode [see step (3.F)].
C) Navigate to SETUP / DIG IN CALIB.
D) Set the INPUT to DIGITAL.
E) Connect the digital source generator to the AES3 Digital Input XLR connector
of the 2300.
F) Set the frequency of the digital source generator to 400 Hz and its output
level to 6 dB below full scale.
G) Inject the Digital Input with a sample rate of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2
kHz, and 96 kHz. Use 24-bit words.
H) Listen to the analog outputs of the 2300 and verify that the output sounds
clean and glitch-free regardless of the input sample rate.
I) Leave the digital source generator connected to the 2300.

7. Test Digital Sample Rate Converter (Transmitter).

A) Connect an AES3 analyzer (like the Audio Precision System 2) to the 2300’s
AES3 digital output.
B) Set the sample rate of the digital source generator to 48 kHz.
C) Navigate to SETUP / DIG OUT CALIB.
D) Change the DO RATE to 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz, and
verify that the frequencies measured at the 2300’s AES3 output follow the
values in the chart below within given tolerances:
4-12 MAINTENANCE ORBAN MODEL 2300

Sample Rate Tolerance (PPM) Tolerance ( Hz)

32.0 kHz 100 PPM ±1.60 Hz
44.1 kHz 100 PPM ±4.41 Hz
48.0 kHz 100 PPM ±2.40 Hz
88.2 kHz 100 PPM ±8.82 Hz
96.0 kHz 100 PPM ±4.80 Hz

E) Disconnect the digital source generator from the 2300.

8. Test the 2300’s stereo encoder.

A) Connect an accurate stereo monitor like the Belar FMMS-1 (“Wizard”) stereo
demodulator to the 2300’s COMPOSITE OUTPUT 1.
This is labeled COMPOSITE OUT and appears on a BNC connector on the
2300’s rear panel.
NOTE: The recommended Belar monitor is the only instrument we have
encountered that can accurately measure the performance of the 2300’s
stereo encoder. With most older-technology monitors, you will be meas-
uring the performance of the monitor, not the 2300’s encoder. (Of
course, we have not evaluated every monitor on the market.)

B) On the 2300, navigate to SETUP / TEST.

C) Set the MODE to TONE.
D) Set the test tone parameters as follows:
Tone Freq...........................................................................................400 Hz
Tone Lvl................................................................................................. 91%
Tone Chan .............................................................................................. L+R
Pilot .......................................................................................................... On
You will have to press the NEXT button to access all of these parameters.
E) Navigate to SETUP / STEREO ENCODER.
F) Set the COMP1 LVL control to make the stereo monitor read 100% total modu-
lation.
G) Navigate to SETUP / TEST to access the 2300’s tone oscillator parameters.
H) Measure the L–R level on the stereo monitor at several frequencies, in units of
dB below 100% modulation. This is the main channel to subchannel crosstalk.
It should not exceed –70 dB, 50-15,000 Hz.
I) Set the TONE CHAN to L–R. (You will have to press the NEXT button to access
this setting and then the PREV button to return to the TONE FREQ control.)
Measure the L+R level on the stereo monitor at several frequencies, in units of
dB below 100% modulation. This is the subchannel to main channel crosstalk.
It should not exceed –70 dB, 50-15,000 Hz.
J) Set the TONE CHAN to LEFT. Measure the Right level on the stereo monitor at
several frequencies, in units of dB below 100% modulation. This is left-into-
right stereo separation. It should not exceed –55 dB, 50-15,000 Hz.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL MAINTENANCE 4-13
K) Set the TONE CHAN to RIGHT. Measure the Left level on the stereo monitor at
several frequencies, in units of dB below 100% modulation. This is right-into-
left stereo separation. It should not exceed –55 dB, 50-15,000 Hz.
L) Set the TONE CHAN to L–R and the TONE FREQ to 5000.0 HZ. Measure the 38
kHz subcarrier suppression on the stereo monitor. It should not exceed –60
dB.
M) Measure the Pilot Modulation on the stereo monitor. It should read 0%.
N) Set SETUP / STEREO ENCODER / COMP1 LVL to 0.0%. Measure the de-emphasized
noise at the left and right outputs of the stereo monitor. It should not exceed
–80 dB below 100% modulation.
O) Repeat steps (D) through (N) for the 2300’s COMPOSITE OUTPUT 2. (Use the
COMP2 LVL control instead of the COMP1 LVL control.)
P) Using the stereo monitor, verify that pilot tone injection is between 8% and
10% modulation. If it is outside these parameters, adjust it to 9% via SETUP /
STEREO ENCODER / NEXT / PILOT LVL.
If the measured pilot level varies by more than a few tenths of percent
from the pilot level indicated, this indicates there may be a problem
elsewhere—either in your measuring setup, or with the 2300.

Q) With the COMP2 LVL still set to 0.0%, connect a frequency counter to either of
the 2300’s composite outputs. Verify that the pilot tone frequency is 19,000
Hz 1 Hz.

9. Optional tests.

A) You can test each GPI (Remote Interface) input for functionality in the obvi-
ous way, by programming a function for it and then verifying that the func-
tion executes when you activate the input. To program a GPI input, see
Remote Control Interface Programming on page 2-41.
B) You can test the RS-232 Port 1 for functionality by verifying that you can con-
nect to a PC through a null modem cable. See Networking and Remote Con-
trol starting on page 2-42 (in particular, step 4 on page 2-44).

10. Return OPTIMOD-FM to service.

A) Remove the 600 resistors connected across the outputs.

B) Restore your normal operating parameters, using the notes you made in step
(1.B) on page 4-7.
C) Navigate to SETUP / TEST / MODE and choose OPERATE.
D) Recall your normal operating preset.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TROUBLESHOOTING 5-1

Section 5
Troubleshooting
Problems and Potential Solutions
Always verify that the problem is not the source material being fed to the 2300, or
in other parts of the system.

RFI, Hum, Clicks, or Buzzes

A grounding problem is likely. Review the information on grounding on page 2-10.
The 2300 has been designed with very substantial RFI suppression on its analog and
digital input and output ports, and on the AC line input. It will usually operate adja-
cent to high-powered transmitters without difficulty. In the most unusual circum-
stances, it may be necessary to reposition the unit to reduce RF interference, and / or
to reposition its input and output cables to reduce RF pickup on their shields.

Particularly if you are using a long run of coaxial cable between the 2300 and the
exciter, a ground loop may inject noise into the exciter’s composite input—especially
if the exciter’s input is unbalanced. The Orban CIT25 Composite Isolation Trans-
former can almost always cure this problem.

The AES3 inputs and output are transformer-coupled and have very good resistance
to RFI. If you have RFI problems and are using analog connections on either the in-
put or output, using digital connections will almost certainly eliminate the RFI.

Unexpectedly Quiet On-Air Levels

The ITU412 multiplex power controller may have been turned on accidentally. See
step 19 on page 2-22.

The 2300 may be in stand-alone stereo encoder mode. This is determined by the on-
air preset.

Poor Peak Modulation Control

The 2300 ordinarily controls peak modulation to an accuracy of ±2%. This accuracy
will be destroyed if the signal path following the 2300 has poor transient response.
Almost any link can cause problems. Even the FM exciter can have insufficient flat-
ness of response and phase-linearity (particularly at low frequencies) to disturb peak
levels. Section 1 of this manual contains a complete discussion of the various things
that can go wrong.
5-2 TROUBLESHOOTING ORBAN MODEL 2300

Digital STLs using lossy compression algorithms (including MPEG1 Layer 2, MPEG1
Layer 3, Dolby AC2, and APT-X) will overshoot severely (up to 3 dB) on some pro-
gram material. The amount of overshoot will depend on data rate—the higher the
rate, the lower the overshoot.

Even if the transmission system is operating properly, the FM modulation monitor or

reference receiver can falsely indicate peak program modulation higher than that
actually being transmitted if the monitor overshoots at high and low frequencies.
Many commercial monitors have this problem, but most of these problem units can
be modified to indicate peak levels accurately.

Orban uses the Belar “Wizard” series of DSP-based monitors internally for testing,
because these units do not have this difficulty.

Audible Distortion On-Air

Make sure that the problem can be observed on more than one receiver and at sev-
eral locations. Multipath distortion at the monitoring site can be mistaken for real
distortion (and will cause falsely high modulation readings).

Verify that the source material at the 2300's audio inputs is clean. Heavy processing
can exaggerate even slightly distorted material, pushing it over the edge into unac-
ceptability.

The subjective adjustments available to the user have enough range to cause audi-
ble distortion at their extreme settings. There are many controls that can cause dis-
tortion, including 2B CLIPPING, FINAL CLIP DRIVE, and COMPOSITE CLIP DRIVE. Setting
the LESS-MORE control beyond “9” will cause audible distortion of some program
material with all but the CLASSICAL preset. Further, some of the louder presets can
sometimes cause audible distortion with certain program material; this is the price
to be paid for “competitive” loudness as it is defined in certain markets.

Also, note that the 2300 is not capable of as favorable an on-air loudness/distortion
tradeoff as Orban’s five-band processors. If you attempt to increase loudness to
compete with one of these five-band processors, you will get higher distortion than
that produced by the five-band processing.

If you are using analog inputs, the peak input level must not exceed +27 dBu or the
2300's A/D converter will clip and distort.

Unlike earlier digital Optimods, there is no input peak level adjustment

for the A/D converter. Instead, we have provided adequate headroom for
virtually any plant. This is possible because the A/D converter in the 2300
has higher dynamic range than older designs. Therefore, without com-
promising the 2300’s noise level, we could eliminate a control that was
frequently misadjusted.
If you are using the 2300’s stereo enhancer (which most “pop music”-oriented pre-
sets do), then this can exaggerate multipath distortion in high multipath environ-
ments. You may want to reduce the setting of the stereo enhancer’s RATIO LIMIT con-
trol. A similar problem can occur if you are using sum-and-difference processing in
the 2300’s AGC. In this case, reduce the setting of the AGC’s MAXDELTAGR controls.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TROUBLESHOOTING 5-3
If you are using an external processor ahead of the 2300, be sure it is not clipping or
otherwise causing problems.

If the 2300 is in stand-alone stereo encoder mode, you may be overdriving its
left/right protection limiter and/or composite limiter. It is unwise to do more than 3
dB of gain reduction in the protection limiter or to set the COMPOSITE LIMIT DRIVE
control higher than 1.0 DB. See Setup for Stand-Alone Stereo Encoder Mode on page
2-24.

Audible Noise on Air

(See also “RFI, Hums, Clicks, or Buzzes” on page 5-1.)

Excessive compression will always exaggerate noise in the source material.

The 2300 has two systems that fight this problem. The compressor gate freezes the
gain of the AGC and compressor systems whenever the input noise drops below a
level set by the threshold control for the processing section in question, preventing
noise below this level from being further increased.

There are two independent compressor gate circuits in the 2300. The first affects the
AGC and the second affects the Two-band Compressor. Each has its own threshold
control. (See 2B GATE on page 3-31.)

If you are using the 2300's analog input, the overall noise performance of the sys-
tem is usually limited by the overload-to-noise ratio of the analog-to-digital con-
verter used by the 2300 to digitize the input. (This ratio is better than 108 dB.) It is
important to drive the 2300 with professional levels (more than 0 dBu reference
level) to achieve adequately low noise. (Clipping occurs at +27 dBu.)

The 2300's AES3 input is capable of receiving words of up to 24 bits. A 24-bit word
has a dynamic range of approximately 144 dB. The 2300's digital input will thus
never limit the unit's noise performance even with very high amounts of compres-
sion.

If an analog studio-to-transmitter link (STL) is used to pass unprocessed audio to the

2300, the STL's noise level can severely limit the overall noise performance of the
system because compression in the 2300 can exaggerate the STL noise. For example,
the overload-to-noise ratio of a typical analog microwave STL may only be 70-75 dB.
In this case, it is wise to use the Orban 8200ST Studio AGC to perform the AGC func-
tion prior to the STL transmitter and to control the STL's peak modulation. This will
optimize the signal-to-noise ratio of the entire transmission system. An uncom-
pressed digital STL will perform much better than any analog STL. (See Studio-
Transmitter Link, starting on page 1-13.)

Whistle on Air, Perhaps Only in Stereo Reception

The most likely cause is oscillation in the analog input or output circuitry. If the oscil-
lation is in the output circuitry and is between 23 and 53 kHz, it will be detected in a
receiver’s stereo decoder and translated down into the audible range.
5-4 TROUBLESHOOTING ORBAN MODEL 2300

If you encounter this problem, check the analog or digital outputs with a spectrum
analyzer to see if the spurious tone can be detected here. If it appears at both out-
puts, it is probably an input problem. If it only appears at the analog output, then it
is likely a problem with the Left/Right DACs or other analog circuitry. If it appears
only when you use the composite output, then it is likely a problem in the composite
DACs or output amplifiers.

A whistle could also be caused by power supply oscillation, STL problems, or exciter
problems.

Interference from stereo into SCA

A properly operating 2300 generates an immaculately clean baseband, with pro-
gram-correlated noise below –80 dB above 57 kHz even when the composite limiter
is used aggressively. If the 2300 and the rest of the transmission system are operat-
ing correctly, subcarriers should experience no interference.

Interference from the stereo into a subcarrier is best diagnosed with a spectrum
analyzer. First examine the spectrum of the 2300’s composite output to verify that
program correlated noise is less than –80 dB below 100% modulation from 57 to 100
kHz. Any inadvertent composite clipping will dramatically degrade this protection.
Make sure that the link between the 2300’s composite output and the transmitter
has sufficient headroom.

57.088 kHz -72.881 dBVpk If the exciter is nonlinear, this

0
dBVpk
SRS
can cause crosstalk. In general,
a properly operating exciter
should have less than 0.1%
THD at high frequencies to
achieve correct operation
with subcarriers.
10
dB/div
To prevent truncation of the
higher-order Bessel sidebands
of the FM modulation, the RF
system following the exciter
must be wideband (better
-100 than 500 kHz) and must have
dBVpk 0 Hz 51.2 kHz 102.4 kHz
FFT 1 Log Mag BMH PkhAvg 20000 symmetrical group delay
around the carrier frequency.
Fig. 5-1: Typical 2300 baseband spectrum with heavy
An incorrectly tuned transmit-
processing, 0-100 kHz.
ter can exhibit an asymmetri-
cal passband that will greatly increase crosstalk into subcarriers.

Amplitude modulation of the carrier that is synchronous with the program (“syn-
chronous AM”) can cause program-related crosstalk into subcarriers. Synchronous
AM should be better than 35 dB below 100% modulation as measured on a syn-
chronous AM detector with standard FM de-emphasis (50s or 75s).

The subcarrier receiver itself must receive a multipath-free signal, and must have a
wide and symmetrical IF passband and a linear, low-distortion FM demodulator to
prevent program-related crosstalk into subcarriers.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TROUBLESHOOTING 5-5
If the 2300 is in stand-alone stereo generator mode, it is easy to accidentally drive its
internal processing into clipping by applying too much level to the input while rely-
ing on the overshoot limiter and/or composite limiter to limit modulation to 100%.
In addition, if the input signal has not been band-limited to 19 kHz or less, this can
cause aliasing between the stereo main and subchannels. You can eliminate this
aliasing (at the cost of overshoot, which the 2300’s overshoot limiter can remove) by
activating the input lowpass filter (step 5 on page 2-25).

See Setup for Stand-Alone Stereo Encoder Mode on page 2-24.

Shrill, Harsh Sound

Excess HF boost in the HF parametric equalizer or the HF Enhancer can cause this.

If you are driving an external stereo encoder with built-in pre-emphasis, you must
set the 2300’s output to Flat in the System Setup / Output screen to prevent double
pre-emphasis, which will cause very shrill sound (and very poor peak modulation
control).

You will always achieve better peak control by defeating the pre-emphasis and in-
put filters of an external stereo encoder, permitting the 2300 to perform these func-
tions without overshoot. Section 1 of this manual contains a detailed explanation of
these, and other, system design considerations.

Dull Sound
Because processing is two-band, it has less ability to automatically re-equalize such
material than the five-band processing available in products like Optimod-FM 8400.
However, when properly adjusted, the HF Enhancer will usually do a good job of re-
equalizing such material.

If the 2300’s output is set to Flat in System Setup / Output, there will be no pre-
emphasis unless it is supplied elsewhere in the system. This will cause very dull
sound.

System Will Not Pass Line-Up Tones at 100% Modulation

This is normal. Sine waves have a very low peak-to-average ratio by comparison to
program material. The processing thus automatically reduces their peak level to
bring their average level closer to program material, promoting a more consistent
and well-balanced sound quality.

The 2300 can generate test tones itself. The 2300 can also be put into Bypass mode
(locally or by remote control) to enable it to pass externally generated tones at any
desired level. (See Test Modes on page 3-34.)

System Will Not Pass Emergency Alert System (“EAS” USA Standard) Tones
at the Legally Required Modulation Level
See System Will Not Pass Line-Up Tones at 100% Modulation (directly above) for an
explanation. These tones should be injected into the transmitter after the 2300, or
the 2300 should be temporarily switched to BYPASS to pass the tones.
5-6 TROUBLESHOOTING ORBAN MODEL 2300

System Receiving 2300’s Digital Output Will Not Lock

Be sure that the 2300’s output sample rate is set match the sample rate that the
driven system expects. Be sure that the 2300’s output mode (AES3 or SPDIF) is set to
match the standard expected by the driven system.

19 kHz Frequency Out-of-Tolerance

First, verify that a problem really exists by using a second frequency-measuring de-
vice and / or verifying the problem with a monitoring service. If the problem is real,
contact Orban Customer Service for a crystal replacement; there is no frequency trim
available.

L–R (Stereo Difference Channel) Will Not Null with Monophonic Input
This problem is often caused by relative phase shifts between the left and right
channels prior to the 2300’s input. This will cause innocuous linear crosstalk between
the stereo main and subchannels. Such crosstalk does not cause subjective quality
problems unless it is very severe.

General Dissatisfaction with Subjective Sound Quality

The 2300 can be adjusted for many different tastes. For most users, the factory pre-
sets, as augmented by the gamut offered by the LESS-MORE control for each preset,
are sufficient to find a satisfactory “sound.” However, some users will not be satis-
fied until they have accessed other Modify Processing controls and have adjusted
the subjective setup controls in detail to their satisfaction. Such users must fully un-
derstand the material in Section 3 of this manual to achieve the best results from
this exercise.

Of course, the 2300 will not be as competitive as one of Orban’s five-band processors
like the 8400 or 8300. However, if your radio station does not seem to be competi-
tive with others in your market using the 2300’s class of processing, the cause is usu-
ally source material (including excess use of lossy digital compression), overshoot in
the transmission link (including the FM exciter) following the 2300, or an inaccurate
modulation monitor that is causing you to under-modulate the carrier. A station
may suffer from any combination of these problems, and they can have a remark-
able effect on the overall competitiveness of a station’s sound.

Section 1 of this manual provides a thorough discussion of system engineering con-

siderations, particularly with regard to minimizing overshoot and noise.

Security Passcode Lost (When Unit is Locked Out)

Please see If You Have Forgotten Your Passcode on page 2-40.

Connection Issues between the 2300 and a PC, Modem, or Net-

work

 User Interface Slowdown: The more user presets you make, the more slowly
the 2300 will respond to front-panel commands. Delete any user presets you do
not need.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TROUBLESHOOTING 5-7
 Quick Setup: On the Station ID screen (Quick Setup 9): Use Escape in place of
Cancel. The Cancel button will not work.

 Software Updates: Close any running Windows programs before attempting

to update.

 Interrupted Software Updates: If you canceled an update before it com-

pleted, wait at least one minute before attempting your next update.

 Software Updates via Modem: If you are updating via the modem, do not
change the “connection type” parameter on the 2300 while the modem is con-
nected or attempting to connect.

 Security Passcode: An ALL SCREENS (administrator) security passcode is re-

quired for upgrading, regardless of whether you are using a Direct, Modem, or
Ethernet connection.

 Passcode Format: The passcode is case-sensitive. When entering it into Win-

dows’ Dial-up Connection dialog box, it must be typed exactly as it was origi-
nally entered into the Security screen.

 MAC Address: To see the MAC address of your Optimod’s Ethernet hardware,
hold down the SETUP button until the address appears.

Troubleshooting Connections
 If you get an error message such as “the specified port is not connected” or
“There is no answer”…

You may have the wrong interface type set on your 2300. Navigate to SETUP /
NETWORK & REMOTE / PC CONNEC and check the interface setting.
If you are connecting via Direct Serial Connection or modem, review the Proper-
ties you have set on that connection. Double-check to ensure that you have set
Windows parameters as described in Appendix: Setting up Serial Communica-
tions on page 2- 51.

 If your Direct Connect does not work:

A) Check to make sure that the cables are connected properly.

B) Check that you are using a null modem cable.
C) Ensure that the null modem cable is connected to the 2300’s serial connector.

 If your Modem Connect does not work:

A) Ensure that the modem cables and phone lines are connected properly.
B) Check that you have entered the correct phone number for connection.
5-8 TROUBLESHOOTING ORBAN MODEL 2300

C) Check that you have entered the passcode correctly on the 2300, and the
passcode has also been entered correctly on your PC.
D) Ensure that you enabled the correct PC modem port settings.
E) Ensure that the external modem attached to your 2300 is set to AUTO ANSWER.
F) Make sure that the only “Allowed Network Protocol” is TCP/IP. “NetBUI” and
“IPX / SPX Compatible” must not be checked.

You Cannot Access the Internet After

Making a Direct or Modem Connection to the 2300:
If you are connected to the 2300 via modem or direct connect, you cannot access
any other TCP/IP connection. The PPP connection becomes the default protocol
and the default gateway defaults to the 2300 unit’s IP address. This means that
all existing network connections point to the 2300 unit. To correct this:

A) In Start / Settings / Network and Dialup Connections, open the direct or mo-
dem connection you are using to connect to 2300.
B) Select “Properties.”
C) Click the tab that reads “Networking.”
D) Highlight “Internet protocol (TCP/IP).”
E) Select “Properties.”
F) Select “Advanced.”
G) Uncheck the “Use default gateway on remote network” box.
H) Select “OK.”
If this “Use default gateway on remote network” box is not selected, the
gateway will not point to the 2300 unit when you establish a direct or
modem connection.

OS-Specific Troubleshooting Advice

Troubleshooting Windows 2000 Direct Connect:

If you are having trouble establishing a connection, check your New Connection’s
properties to make sure they are set up correctly:

A) Click “Start / Programs / Accessories / Communications / Network and Dialup

Connections” to bring up the Network Connections screen.
B) In the “Network Connections” window, right-click “Optimod 2300 - Direct”
and choose “Properties.”
C) The “Properties” window opens for “Optimod 2300 - Direct
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TROUBLESHOOTING 5-9
D) Click the “Networking” tab.
E) Set “Type of dial-up server I am calling” to “PPP: Windows 95 / 98 / NT4 / 2000,
Internet.”
F) Select the “Settings” button and make sure all PPP settings are unchecked.
Then click “OK.”
G) In “Components checked are used by this connection,” uncheck all except for
“Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).”
H) Select “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” and then click the “Properties” button. The
“Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” window opens.
I) Choose “Obtain an IP address automatically” and “Obtain DNS server address
automatically”
J) Click the “Advanced…” button on the “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” Window.
K) In the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings” select the “General” Tab; make sure that
no check boxes are checked.
L) In the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings” select the “DNS” Tab.
M) In the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings” select the “WINS” Tab.
N) Click “OK” to dismiss the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings” window.
O) Click “OK” to dismiss the “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” window.
P) Click “OK” to dismiss the window whose name is your new connection.
Q) Click “Cancel” to dismiss the “Connect [nnnn]” dialog box
R) Restart your computer. (This resets the serial port and reduces the likelihood
that you will encounter problems connecting to the 2300.)
S) If you see: “Error 777: The connection failed because the modem (or other
connecting device) on the remote computer is out of order”:
The “remote computer” is actually the 2300 and it is not out of order;
you just need to set the Maximum Speed (Bits per second) to 115200. If
you already set this speed when you configured your PC ports, you
shouldn’t have this problem.
The 2300 communicates at 115200 bps. COM ports on some older PCs are
incapable of communications at this rate and may not work reliably.
Most newer PCs use 16550-compatible UARTS, which support the 115200
bps rate.
If you do see this warning message, you can reset the Maximum BPS
Speed by accessing PROPERTIES for the connection:
a) Click START / PROGRAMS / ACCESSORIES / COMMUNICATIONS / NETWORK AND DIAL-
UP CONNECTIONS.

b) Right click the name of your connection and access “PROPERTIES.”

c) Go to the “GENERALS” TAB and select the “CONFIGURE” button.
5-10 TROUBLESHOOTING ORBAN MODEL 2300

d) Set the MAXIMUM SPEED (BPS) to 115200.

e) Select OK and try your connection again.
T) If you see: “Error 619: The specified port is not connected.”
Make sure the INTERFACE TYPE on the 2300 is correct:
a) On the 2300, go to SETUP / NETWORK & REMOTE / PC CONNEC.
b) Set PC CONNECT to DIRECT.
c) Try your connection again.

Troubleshooting Windows 2000 Modem Connect:

If you are having trouble establishing a connection, check your New Connection’s
properties to make sure they are set up correctly:

A) Click “Start / Programs / Accessories / Communications / Network and Dialup

Connections” to bring up the Network Connections screen.
B) In the “Network Connections” window, right-click “Optimod 2300 - Modem”
and choose “Properties.”
C) The “Properties” window opens for “Optimod 2300 – Modem”.
D) Click the “Properties” button.
E) Select the “General” tab and make sure that “Connect Using” displays the
correct modem and port.
F) Click the “Configure…” button.
G) Set the “Maximum Speed (bps) to 115200.
H) Check the “Enable hardware flow control,” make sure all other hardware fea-
tures are unchecked. Then click “OK.”
I) Click the “Networking” tab on the “Properties” window.
J) Set “Type of dial-up server I am calling” to “PPP: Windows 95 / 98 / NT4 / 2000,
Internet.”
K) Select the “Settings” button and make sure all PPP settings are unchecked.
Then click “OK.”
L) In “Components checked are used by this connection,” uncheck all except for
“Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).”
M) Select “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” and then click the “Properties” button. The
“Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” window opens.
N) Choose “Obtain an IP address automatically” and “Obtain DNS server address
automatically”
O) Click the “Advanced…” button on the “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” Window.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TROUBLESHOOTING 5-11
P) In the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings” select the “General” Tab; make sure that
no check boxes are checked.
Q) Click “OK” to dismiss the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings” window.
R) Click “OK” to dismiss the “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” window.
S) Click “OK” to dismiss the window whose name is your new connection.
T) Click “Cancel” to dismiss the “Connect [nnnn]” dialog box
U) Restart your computer.
Although not strictly necessary, this resets the serial port and reduces the
likelihood that you will encounter problems connecting to the 2300.

Troubleshooting Windows XP Direct Connect:

If you are having trouble establishing a connection, check your New Connection’s
properties to make sure they are set up correctly:

A) Click “Start / Programs / Accessories / Communications / Network Connections”

to bring up the Network Connections screen.
B) In the “Network Connections” window, right-click “Optimod 2300 - Direct”
and choose “Properties.”
C) The “Properties” window opens for “Optimod 2300 - Direct.”
D) Click the “Networking” tab.
E) Set “Type of dial-up server I am calling” to “PPP: Windows 95 / 98 / NT4 / 2000,
Internet”
F) Select the “Settings” button and make sure all PPP settings are unchecked,
then click “OK.”
G) In “This connection uses the following items,” uncheck all except for “Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP).” You can also leave “QoS Packet Scheduler” checked if you
like.
H) In “This connection uses the following items,” select “Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP)” and then click the “Properties” button. The “Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) Properties” window opens.
I) Choose “Obtain an IP address automatically” and “Obtain DNS server address
automatically”
J) Click the “Advanced…” button on the “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” Window.
K) In the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings” select the “General” Tab; make sure that
no check boxes are checked.
L) Click “OK” to dismiss the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings” window.
M) On the “Properties” window for “Optimod 2300 – Modem” click the “Ad-
vanced” tab.
5-12 TROUBLESHOOTING ORBAN MODEL 2300

N) Click “OK” to dismiss the window whose name is your new connection.
O) Click “Cancel” to dismiss the “Connect [nnnn]” dialog box
P) Restart your computer.
This resets the serial port and reduces the likelihood that you will en-
counter problems connecting to the 2300.

Troubleshooting Windows XP Modem Connect:

If you are having trouble establishing a connection, check your New Con-
nection’s properties to make sure they are set up correctly.
A) Click “Start / Programs / Accessories / Communications / Network Connections”
to bring up the Network Connections screen.
B) In the “Network Connections” window, right-click “Optimod 2300 - Modem”
and choose “Properties.”
The “Properties” window opens for “Optimod 2300 - Modem.”
C) Click the “Networking” tab.
D) Set “Type of dial-up server I am calling” to “PPP: Windows 95 / 98 / NT4 / 2000,
Internet”
E) Select the “Settings” button. Make sure all PPP settings are unchecked, and
then click “OK.”
F) In “This connection uses the following items,” uncheck all except for “Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP).” You can also leave “QoS Packet Scheduler” checked if you
like.
G) In “This connection uses the following items,” select “Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP)” and then click the “Properties” button.
The “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” window opens.
H) Choose “Obtain an IP address automatically” and “Obtain DNS server address
automatically.”
I) Click the “Advanced…” button on the “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” Window.
J) In the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings,” select the “General” Tab; make sure that
no check boxes are checked.
K) Click “OK” to dismiss the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings” window.
L) Click “OK” to dismiss the window whose name is your new connection.
M) Restart your computer.
This resets the serial port and reduces the likelihood that you will en-
counter problems connecting to the 2300.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TROUBLESHOOTING 5-13
Troubleshooting IC Opamps
IC opamps are operated such that the characteristics of their associated circuits are
essentially independent of IC characteristics and dependent only on external feed-
back components. The feedback forces the voltage at the (–) input terminal to be
extremely close to the voltage at the (+) input terminal. Therefore, if you measure
more than a few millivolts difference between these two terminals, the IC is proba-
bly bad.

Exceptions are opamps used without feedback (as comparators) and opamps with
outputs that have been saturated due to excessive input voltage because of a defect
in an earlier stage. However, if an opamp's (+) input is more positive than its (–) in-
put, yet the output of the IC is sitting at –14 volts, the IC is almost certainly bad.

The same holds true if the above polarities are reversed. Because the characteristics
of the 2300's circuitry are essentially independent of IC opamp characteristics, an
opamp can usually be replaced without recalibration.

A defective opamp may appear to work, yet have extreme temperature sensitivity. If
parameters appear to drift excessively, freeze-spray may aid in diagnosing the prob-
lem. Freeze-spray is also invaluable in tracking down intermittent problems. But use
it sparingly, because it can cause resistive short circuits due to moisture condensation
on cold surfaces.

Technical Support
If you require technical support, contact Orban customer service. See
http://www.orban.com/contact/ for contact information. Be prepared to describe the
problem accurately. Know the serial number of your 2300  this is printed on the
rear panel of the unit.

Please check Orban’s website, www.orban.com, for Frequently Asked Questions and
other technical tips about 2300 that we may post from time to time. Manuals (in
.pdf form) and 2300 software upgrades will be posted there too—click “Downloads”
from the home page.

Factory Service
Before you return a product to the factory for service, we recommend that you refer
to this manual. Make sure you have correctly followed installation steps and opera-
tion procedures. If you are still unable to solve a problem, contact our Customer Ser-
vice for consultation. Often, a problem is relatively simple and can be quickly fixed
after telephone consultation.

If you must return a product for factory service, please notify Customer Service by
telephone, before you ship the product; this helps us to be prepared to service your
5-14 TROUBLESHOOTING ORBAN MODEL 2300

unit upon arrival. Also, when you return a product to the factory for service, we rec-
ommend you include a letter describing the problem.

Please refer to the terms of your Limited One-Year Standard Warranty, which ex-
tends to the first end user. After expiration of the warranty, a reasonable charge will
be made for parts, labor, and packing if you choose to use the factory service facility.
Returned units will be returned C.O.D. if the unit is not under warranty. Orban will
pay return shipping if the unit is still under warranty. In all cases, the customer pays
transportation charges to the factory (which are usually quite nominal).

Shipping Instructions
Use the original packing material if it is available. If it is not, use a sturdy, double-
walled carton no smaller than 7 (H) x 15.5 (D) x 22 (W)  18 cm (H) x 40 cm (D) x
56 cm (W), with a minimum bursting test rating of 200 pounds (91 kg). Place the
chassis in a plastic bag (or wrap it in plastic) to protect the finish, then pack it in the
carton with at least 1.5 inches (4 cm) of cushioning on all sides of the unit. “Bubble”
packing sheets, thick fiber blankets, and the like are acceptable cushioning materi-
als; foam “popcorn” and crumpled newspaper are not. Wrap cushioning materials
tightly around the unit and tape them in place to prevent the unit from shifting out
of its packing.

Close the carton without sealing it and shake it vigorously. If you can hear or feel
the unit move, use more packing. Seal the carton with 3-inch (8 cm) reinforced fi-
berglass or polyester sealing tape, top and bottom in an “H” pattern. Narrower or
parcel-post type tapes will not withstand the stresses applied to commercial ship-
ments.

Mark the package with the name of the shipper, and with these words in red:

DELICATE INSTRUMENT, FRAGILE!

Insure the package properly. Ship prepaid, not collect. Do not ship parcel post. Your
Return Authorization Number must be shown on the label, or the package will
not be accepted.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6-1

Section 6
Technical Data
Specifications
It is impossible to characterize the listening quality of even the simplest limiter or
compressor based on specifications, because such specifications cannot adequately
describe the crucial dynamic processes that occur under program conditions. There-
fore, the only way to evaluate the sound of an audio processor meaningfully is by
subjective listening tests.

Certain specifications are presented here to assure the engineer that they are rea-
sonable, to help plan the installation, and make certain comparisons with other
processing equipment.

Performance
Specifications apply for measurements from analog Left/Right input to stereo composite
output and to FM analog Left/Right output.
Frequency Response (Bypass Mode): Follows standard 50µs or 75µs pre-emphasis curve
±0.10 dB, 2.0 Hz–15 kHz. Analog Left/Right output and digital output can be user-
configured for flat or pre-emphasized output.
Noise: Output noise floor will depend upon how much gain the processor is set for (Limit
Drive, AGC Drive, Two-Band Drive, and / or Multi-Band Drive), gating level, equalization,
noise reduction, etc. The dynamic range of the A/D Converter, which has a specified
overload-to–noise ratio of 110 dB, primarily governs it. The dynamic range of the digital
signal processing is 144 dB.
Total System Distortion (de-emphasized, 100% modulation): <0.01% THD, 20 Hz–1 kHz,
rising to <0.05% at 15 kHz. <0.02% SMPTE IM Distortion.
Total System L / R Channel Separation: >50 dB, 20 Hz – 15 kHz; 60 dB typical.
Polarity (Two-Band and Bypass Modes): Absolute polarity maintained. Positive-going signal
on input will result in positive-going signal on output.
Processing Sample Rate: The 2300 is a “multirate” system, using internal rates from 32
kHz to 512 kHz as appropriate for the processing being performed. Audio clippers oper-
ate at 256 kHz (and are anti-aliased), while the composite limiter operates at 512 kHz.
Processing Resolution: Internal processing has 24 bit (fixed point) or higher resolution;
uses Motorola DSP56362 DSP chips.
Input/Output Delay: Approximately 3 ms (audio processor mode or stereo generator mode
with L/R overshoot limiter defeated; 7ms (stereo generator mode with L/R overshoot lim-
iter active).
6-2 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 2300

Installation

Analog Audio Input

Configuration: Stereo.
Impedance: >10k load impedance, electronically balanced 1.
Nominal Input Level: Software adjustable from –4.0 to +13.0 dBu (VU).
Maximum Input Level: +27 dBu.
Connectors: Two XLR-type, female, EMI-suppressed. Pin 1 chassis ground, Pins 2 (+) and
3 electronically balanced, floating and symmetrical.
A/D Conversion: 24 bit 128x oversampled delta sigma converter with linear-phase anti-
aliasing filter. Converter outputs 64 kHz sample rate, which the 2300 then decimates to
32 kHz in DSP using an ultra-high-quality image-free synchronous sample rate con-
verter.
Filtering: RFI filtered, with high-pass filter at 0.15 Hz (–3 dB).

Analog Audio Output

Configuration: Stereo. Flat or pre-emphasized (at 50µs or 75µs), software-selectable.
Source Impedance: 50, electronically balanced and floating.
Load Impedance: 600 or greater, balanced or unbalanced. Termination not required or
recommended.
Output Level (100% peak modulation): Adjustable from –6 dBu to +24 dBu peak, into 600
or greater load, software-adjustable.
Signal-to-Noise: >= 90 dB unweighted (Bypass mode, de-emphasized, 20 Hz–15 kHz
bandwidth, referenced to 100% modulation).
L / R Crosstalk: <= –70 dB, 20 Hz–15 kHz.
Distortion: <= 0.01% THD (Bypass mode, de-emphasized) 20 Hz–15 kHz bandwidth.
Connectors: Two XLR-type, male, EMI-suppressed. Pin 1 chassis ground, Pins 2 (+) and 3
electronically balanced, floating and symmetrical.
D/A Conversion: 24 bit 128x oversampled.
Filtering: RFI filtered.

Digital Audio Input

Configuration: Stereo per AES3 standard, 24 bit resolution, software selection of stereo,
mono from left, mono from right or mono from sum.
Sampling Rate: 32, 44.1, 48, 88.2, or 96 kHz, automatically selected.
Connector: XLR-type, female, EMI-suppressed. Pin 1 chassis ground, pins 2 and 3 trans-
former balanced and floating, 110 impedance.
Input Reference Level: Variable within the range of –30 dBFS to –10 dBFS.
J.17 De-emphasis: Software-selectable.
Filtering: RFI filtered.

1 No jumper selection available for 600. Through-hole pads are available on I/O
module for user-installed 600 termination.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6-3
Digital Audio Output
Configuration: Stereo per AES3 standard. Output configured in software as flat or pre-
emphasized to the chosen processing pre-emphasis (50µs or 75µs), with or without J.17
pre-emphasis.
Sample Rate: Internal free running at 32, 44.1, 48, 88.2 or 96 kHz, selected in software.
Can also be synced to the AES3 digital input at 32, 44.1, 48, 88.2 or 96 kHz, as config-
ured in software.
Word Length: Software selected for 24, 20, 18, 16 or 14-bit resolution. First-order highpass
noise-shaped dither can be optionally added, dither level automatically adjusted appro-
priately for the word length.
Connector: XLR-type, male, EMI-suppressed. Pin 1 chassis ground, pins 2 and 3 trans-
former balanced and floating, 110 impedance.
Output Level (100% peak modulation): –20.0 to 0.0 dBFS software controlled.
Filtering: RFI filtered.

Composite Baseband Output

Configuration: Two outputs, each with an independent software-controlled output level
control, output amplifier and connector.
Source Impedance: 0 voltage source or 75, jumper-selectable. Single-ended, floating
over chassis ground.
Load Impedance: 37 or greater. Termination not required or recommended.
Maximum Output Level: +12.0 dBu (8.72 Vp-p).
Minimum Output Level: –12 dBu (0.55 Vp-p) for 0.5 dB adjustment resolution.
Pilot Level: Adjustable from 6.0% to 12.0%, software controlled.
Pilot Stability: 19 kHz, ±0.5 Hz (10 degrees to 40 degrees C).
D/A Conversion: 24-bit
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: <= –85 dB (Bypass mode, de-emphasized, 20 Hz – 15 kHz band-
width, referenced to 100% modulation, unweighted).
Distortion: <= 0.02% THD (Bypass mode, de-emphasized, 20 Hz – 15 kHz bandwidth, ref-
erenced to 100% modulation, unweighted).
Stereo Separation: At 100% modulation = 3.5Vp-p, > 60 dB, 30 Hz - 15 kHz. At 100%
modulation = 1.0 - 8.0 Vp-p, > 55 dB, 30 Hz - 15 kHz.
Crosstalk-Linear: <= –80 dB, main channel to sub-channel or sub-channel to main channel
(referenced to 100% modulation).
Crosstalk-Non-Linear: <= –80 dB, main channel to sub-channel or sub-channel to main
channel (referenced to 100% modulation).
38 kHz Suppression: >= 70 dB (referenced to 100% modulation).
76 kHz & Sideband Suppression: >= 80 dB (referenced to 100% modulation).
Pilot Protection: –60 dB relative to 9% pilot injection, ±250 Hz (up to 2 dB composite proc-
essing drive).
Subcarrier Protection (60-100 kHz): >= 70 dB (referenced to 100% modulation; with up to
2 dB composite limiting drive; measured with 800 line FFT analyzer using “maximum
peak hold” display).
57 kHz (RDS / RBDS) Protection: –50 dB relative to 4% subcarrier injection, ±2.0 kHz (up
to 2 dB composite processing drive).
Connectors: Two BNC, floating over chassis ground, EMI suppressed.
6-4 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 2300

Maximum Load Capacitance: 0.047 microfarad (0 source impedance). Maximum cable
length of 100 feet / 30 meters RG–58A / U.
Filtering: RFI filtered.

Subcarrier (SCA) Inputs

Configuration: Subcarrier inputs sum into composite baseband outputs before digitally con-
trolled composite attenuator.
Impedance: >600
SCA1 Sensitivity: Variable from 220 mV p-p to >10 V p-p to produce 10% injection. Sensi-
tivity is adjustable by an internal PC-board-mounted trim pot.
SCA2 Sensitivity: Fixed at 772 mV p-p to produce 10% injection.
Connectors: Two BNC, unbalanced and floating over chassis ground, EMI suppressed.
19 kHz Pilot Reference: SCA2 input can be re-jumpered to provide a 19 kHz pilot reference
output.

Remote Computer Interface

Supported Computer and Operating System: IBM-compatible PC running Microsoft Win-
dows® 2000 (SP3 or higher) or XP.
Configuration: TCP/IP protocol via direct cable connect, modem, or Ethernet interface.
Suitable null modem cable for direct connect is supplied. Modem and other external
equipment is not supplied.
Serial Connector: RS–232 on DB–9 male connector, EMI-suppressed. Uses PPP to pro-
vide for direct or modem connection to the 2300 PC Remote application.
Ethernet Connector: Female RJ45 connector for 10-100 Mbps networks using CAT5 ca-
bling. Native rate is 100 Mbps. Provides for connection to the 2300 PC Remote applica-
tion through either a network, or, using a crossover Ethernet cable, directly to a com-
puter.
Ethernet Networking Standard: TCP/IP.

Remote Control (GPI) Interface

Configuration: Eight (8) inputs, opto-isolated and floating.
Voltage: 6–15V AC or DC, momentary or continuous. 9VDC provided to facilitate use with
contact closure.
Connector: DB–25 male, EMI-suppressed.
Control: User-programmable for any eight of user presets, factory presets, bypass, test
tone, stereo or mono modes, analog input, digital input.
Filtering: RFI filtered.

Power
Voltage: 100–132 VAC or 200–264 VAC, switch-selected on the rear panel, 50–60 Hz, 40
VA.
Connector: IEC, EMI-suppressed. Detachable 3-wire power cord supplied.
Grounding: Circuit ground is independent of chassis ground, and can be isolated or con-
nected with a rear panel switch.
Safety Standards: ETL listed to UL standards, CE marked.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6-5
Environmental
Operating Temperature: 32 to 122 F / 0 to 50 C for all operating voltage ranges.
Humidity: 0–95% RH, non-condensing.
Dimensions (W x H x D): 19” x 1.875” x 14.25” / 48.3 cm x 4.8 cm x 36.2 cm. One rack unit
high.
Humidity: 0–95% RH, non-condensing.
RFI / EMI: Tested according to Cenelec procedures. FCC Part 15 Class A device.
Shipping Weight: 19 lbs / 8.7 kg

Warranty
Two Years, Parts and Service: Subject to the limitations set forth in Orban's Standard
Warranty Agreement.
Because engineering improvements are ongoing, specifications are subject to change with-
out notice.

Circuit Description
This section provides a detailed description of user-serviceable circuits used in the
2300. We do not provide detailed descriptions of the digital circuitry because most
of this is built with surface-mount components that cannot be removed or replaced
with typical tools available in the field. Field repair ordinarily consists of swapping
entire PC boards.

The section starts with an overview of the 2300 system, identifying circuit sections
and describing their purpose. Then each user-repairable section is treated in detail
by first giving an overview of the circuits followed by a component-by-component
description.

The drawing on page 6-29 shows circuit board locations.

Overview
The Control Circuits control the DSP, display, and Input/Output sections of the 2300
system.

The Input Circuits include the connectors and RF filtering for the analog and digital
audio inputs, the digital sync input, and the circuitry to interface these inputs to the
digital processing.

The Output Circuits include the connectors and RF filtering for the analog and digi-
tal audio outputs, and the circuitry to interface the digital processing to these out-
puts.

The DSP Circuits implement the bypass, test tone, and audio processing using digital
signal processing.

The Power Supply provides power for all 2300 circuit sections.
6-6 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 2300

A block diagram of the DSP signal processing appears on page 6-64.

Control Circuits
The control circuit is based on an AMD Elan SC520 microprocessor, which is a 586-
class processor running an Orban executable program over a third-party real-time
operating system. A flash memory emulates a hard drive. The memory is non-volatile
and does not rely on a battery to retain information when mains power is off.

The flash memory holds the operating system, the Orban executable program, and
all preset files, both factory and user. It also contains a write-protected “boot seg-
ment” that functions as a boot ROM.

The control circuits process and execute user-initiated requests to the system. The
source of these requests is the front panel buttons and rotary encoder, the rear
panel RS-232 port, Ethernet port, and the remote contact closures. These changes
affect hardware function and / or DSP processing. The control circuits also send in-
formation to the LCD display.

The control circuit communicates with the DSP and display circuitry through the
SC520’s ISA bus.

The SC520 periodically refreshes a watchdog timer. If the timer times out without
being refreshed, it assumes that the control program has crashed and automatically
reboots the SC520. The DSP chips will continue to process audio until the time comes
to reload DSP program code into them. At this point, the audio will mute for about
30 seconds until the DSP code download has finished. If you hear a 30-second audio
mute on air, you can assume that the 2300 has rebooted for some reason. Be pre-
pared to convey this fact to Orban customer service if you call for technical assis-
tance.

The control board is divided into two assemblies: a “base board,” which has inter-
face circuitry, and a “CPU controller module,” which plugs into the base board and
which contains the CPU, the Ethernet interface chip, the flash memory, the DRAM,
and the real-time clock, which keeps time for the 2300’s automation functions. The
real-time clock is backed up by a DL2032 battery so that it keeps accurate time even
when the 2300 is powered down. The battery is socketed and can be readily ac-
cessed by removing the 2300’s top cover; the battery is located on the foil (top) side
of the CPU controller module.

User Control Interface and LCD Display Circuits

The user control interface enables the user to control the 2300’s functionality. A rear
panel GPI connector allows optically isolated remote control of certain functions,
such as recalling presets, via contact closure. An RS-232 serial port and an Ethernet
port allow you to connect a modem or computer to the 2300. Front panel pushbut-
ton switches select between various operational modes and functions. A rotary en-
coder allows the user to adjust parameters and enter data.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6-7
1. Remote Interface and RS-232 Interfaces
Located on base board

A remote interface connector and circuitry implements remote control of certain

operating modes; Model 2300 OPTIMOD-FM has eight remote contact closure in-
puts.
A valid remote signal is a momentary pulse of current flowing through remote
signal pins. Current must flow consistently for 50msec for the signal to be inter-
preted as valid. Generally, the 2300 will respond to the most recent control op-
eration, regardless of whether it came from the front panel, remote interface, or
RS-232.

Component-Level Description:
After being current limited by resistors, the GPI control signals are applied to
two quad optoisolators, U10, 12, and then to the control circuitry.

Octal driver U1 buffers the RS-232 port, which is located on a small daughter
board.

U10, 12 and U1 are socketed for easy field replacement in the event of over-
load, lightning damage, etc. All other circuitry is surface-mount and is not
field-repairable.

2. Switch Matrix and LED Indicators

Located on display board

Eleven front panel pushbutton switches are arranged in a matrix, configured as

three columns and four rows. These switches are the primary element of the
physical user interface to the 2300 control software. The host microprocessor
controls the system setup and function of the DSP according to the switch / ro-
tary encoder entered commands, the AES status bits from the digital input signal,
the RS-232, and the remote control interface status. The microprocessor updates
the LED control status indicators accordingly.

Component-Level Description:
S1-S11 are the front panel pushbutton switches. CR11-CR15 are the front panel
LED control status indicators. The control microprocessor communicates with
these components through the ISA bus, which is buffered via IC3.

3. LED Meter Circuits

Located on display board

The meter LEDs are arranged in an 8x16 matrix, in rows and columns.
Each row of LEDs in the matrix has a 1 / 8 duty cycle ON time. The rows are mul-
tiplexed at a fast rate so that the meters appear continuously illuminated. Via
the ISA bus, the DSP sends meter data values to the control microprocessor,
6-8 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 2300

which sends the appropriate LED control words (eight bits at a time) to the data
latches that drive the LEDs directly.

Component-Level Description:
The meter LED matrix consists of ten 10-segment LED bar graph assemblies
(CR1-CR9, CR16) and one discrete LED (CR10). Row selector latches IC4, IC5,
IC6, and IC9 are controlled by the host microprocessor and alternately sink cur-
rent through the LEDs selected by column selector latches IC1 and IC2, which
are also controlled by the SC520. IC1 and IC2 drive the selected row of LEDs
through current limiting resistor packs RP1 and RP2.

Input Circuits
This circuitry interfaces the analog and digital inputs to the DSP. The analog input
stages scale and buffer the input audio level to match it to the analog-to-digital
(A/D) converter. The A/D converts the analog input audio to digital audio. The digi-
tal input receiver accepts AES3-format digital audio signals from the digital input
connector and sample rate-converts them as necessary. The digital audio from the
A/D and SRC is transmitted to the DSP.

1. Analog Input Stages

Located on Input/Output board

The RF-filtered left and right analog input signals are each applied to a floating,
balanced amplifier that has an adjustable (digitally controlled) gain. Analog
switches set the gain. The outputs of a latch set the state of the switches. By writ-
ing data to the latch, the control circuits set the gain to correspond to what the
user specifies via the front panel controls. The gain amplifier’s output feeds a cir-
cuit that scales, balances, and DC-biases the signal. This circuit feeds an RC low-
pass filter that applies the balanced signal to the analog-to-digital (A/D) con-
verter.
Note that the small RFI “tee” filter assemblies connected to the input and output
connectors are socketed and user-replaceable.

Component-Level Description:
The left channel balanced audio input signal is applied to the filter / load net-
work made up of L100-103 and associated resistors and capacitors. (There are
solder pads available in the PC board to accept an optional 600 termination
load [R106] on the input signal if the user wishes to install one.) A conven-
tional three-opamp instrumentation amplifier (IC100 and associated circuitry)
receives the input signal. R110-114 and quad analog switch IC101 make up the
circuit that sets the gain of IC100. The switches in IC101 set the gain of the in-
strumentation amplifier by switching resistors in parallel with R104. (Smaller
total resistances produce larger gains.)

IC100 feeds IC104 and associated components. This stage balances, DC-biases,
and scales the signal to the proper level for the analog-to-digital (A/D) con-
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6-9
verter IC107. IC105A and associated components comprise a servo amp to cor-
rectly DC-bias the signal feeding the A/D converter. R137-139, C109, C110
make an attenuator / RC filter necessary to filter high frequency energy that
would otherwise cause aliasing distortion in the A/D converter.

The corresponding right channel circuitry is functionally identical to that just

described.

IC100, 101, 102, 103 are socketed for easy field replacement. All other circuitry
is surface-mounted and is not field-replaceable.

2. Stereo Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter

Located on Input/Output board

The A/D converter, IC107, is a stereo 24-bit sigma-delta converter. (This is a sur-
face-mount part and is not field-replaceable,)
The A/D oversamples the audio, applies noise shaping, and filters and decimates
to 64 kHz sample rate. (An Orban-designed synchronous sample rate converter in
the 2300’s DSP performs the final decimation to 32 kHz. This ensures the flattest
frequency response to 15 kHz without aliasing.)

3. Digital Input Receiver and Sample Rate Converter (SRC)

Located on Input/Output board

The integrated receiver and input sample rate converter, IC500, accepts digital
audio signals using the AES3 interface format (AES3-1992). The built-in sample
rate converter (SRC) accepts and sample-rate converts any of the “standard” 32
kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz rates in addition to any digital audio
sample rate within the range of 32 kHz and 96 kHz. The SRC converts the input
sample rate to 64 kHz. The final, high-quality decimation to the 2300 system
sample rate is done in the system DSP, as was done for the analog input.
This chip is surface-mounted and not field-replaceable.

Output Circuits
This circuitry interfaces the DSP to the analog and digital audio outputs. The digital
audio from the DSP is transmitted to the digital-to-analog converter (D/A) and out-
put sample rate converter (SRC). The digital-to-analog (D/A) converter converts the
digital audio words generated by the DSP to analog audio. High-speed D/A convert-
ers do the same for the composite outputs, each of whose outputs is smoothed by a
passive LC reconstruction filter. The analog output stages scale and buffer the D/A
output signal to drive the analog output XLR connectors with a low impedance bal-
anced output. The digital output transmitter accepts the digital audio words from
the output sample rate converter (SRC) and transmits them in AES3-format digital
audio signals on the digital output connector.
6-10 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 2300

1. Stereo Digital-to-Analog (D/A) Converter

Located on Input/Output board

The D/A, IC211, is a stereo, 24-bit delta-sigma converter. It receives the serial left
and right audio data samples from the DSP at 64 kHz sample rate, and converts
them into audio signals requiring further, relatively undemanding analog filter-
ing. IC211 is surface-mounted and is not field-replaceable.

2. Analog Output Stages

Located on Input/Output board

The left and right analog signals emerging from IC211 are each filtered, ampli-
fied, and applied to a floating-balanced integrated line driver, which has a 50
output impedance. The line driver outputs are applied to the RF-filtered left and
right analog output connectors. These analog signals can represent either the
transmitter or monitor output of audio processing.

Component-Level Description:
IC201 and associated components filter the left channel signal emerging from
IC211. The purpose of these stages is to reduce the out-of-band noise energy
resulting from the delta-sigma D/A’s noise-shaping filter and to translate the
differential output of the D/A converter into single-ended form. These com-
ponents apply a 3rd order low-pass filter to the differential signal from the D/A.
This filter does not induce significant overshoot of the processed audio, which
would otherwise waste modulation.

IC203 is used to set the analog output level. It is a digitally controlled gain
block that sets its gain according to signals on its three digital input lines.

IC204B and associated components form a low-frequency servo amplifier to

remove residual DC from the signal. The 0.15Hz 3 dB frequency prevents tilt-
induced overshoot in the processed audio.

IC204A buffers the output of IC203 and implements de-emphasis if desired.

FET switches Q200 and Q201 implement 75µs and 50µs de-emphasis respec-
tively. This analog de-emphasis rolls off any digital noise produced by earlier
circuitry and also helps implement independent de-emphasis settings between
the analog and digital outputs.

The buffered and optionally de-emphasized output of IC204 is applied to

IC207, a balanced output line driver. This driver emulates a floating trans-
former; its differential output level is independent of whether one side of its
output is floating or grounded. IC207 and its right channel counterpart IC208
are socketed for easy field replacement. All other circuitry is surface-mounted.

The corresponding right channel circuitry is functionally identical to that just

described.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6-11
3. Digital Sample Rate Converter (SRC) and Output Transmitter
Located on Input/Output board

An integrated output sample rate converter (SRC) and AES3 line driver chip,
IC502, converts the 32 kHz 2300 system sample rate to any of the standard 32
kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz rates, and also contains a digital au-
dio interface transmitter to encode digital audio signals using the AES3 interface
format (AES3-1992). This chip is surface-mounted and is not field-replaceable.

4. Composite Output Circuit

Located on the Input/Output board

A composite D/A converter and reconstruction filter drive two digitally controlled
attenuators that permit the levels of the two composite outputs to be set inde-
pendently. The SCA inputs are summed with the composite output before the
digitally controlled attenuators, so the attenuator adjusts the level the entire
composite signal, attenuating the SCA and stereo signals to the same extent.
The second SCA input can be jumpered to serve instead as a pilot reference
source for RDS generators.

Component-Level Description:
We will describe composite output #1. IC300 is a high-speed D/A converter
chip that receives the digital composite signal at a 512 kHz sample rate. It
drives buffer amplifier IC308A. IC308A drives a fifth-order passive LC recon-
struction filter C336-C339, L300-L301, R301-303. (This filter is equalized and
phase-corrected in DSP to obtain excellent flatness and phase-linearity. This
achieves high stereo separation.)

IC302A buffers the output of the anti-imaging filter. IC203B is a servo ampli-
fier to remove DC offset at the output of IC302A. IC401a accepts the SCA in-
puts, summing them with the composite stereo output of IC302A. Any contri-
bution from the SCA inputs is therefore are not indicated on the COMPOSITE
LEVEL meter displayed by the 2300, because this meter indicates only the
composite signal generated by the DSP.

Digitally controlled attenuator IC402B receives the output of IC401A and sets
the composite output level. IC3B, a high-current buffer amplifier, receives the
output of IC402B and drives the composite output connector J4B through an
RFI attenuator network and optional 75 build-out resistor R411.

The pilot reference D/A converter IC400 receives serial data from the DSP cir-
cuitry. After being buffered and low-pass filtered by IC401A, the resulting 19
kHz sine wave signal can be connected to J5A through jumper J400.

The composite line driver amplifiers are socketed for easy field replacement;
all other components are surface-mounted and are not field-replaceable.
6-12 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 2300

DSP Circuit
The DSP circuit consists of six Motorola DSP56362 24-bit fixed-point DSP chips that
execute DSP software code to implement digital signal processing algorithms.

The algorithms filter, compress, and limit the audio signal. The six DSP chips, each
operating at approximately 100 million instructions per second (MIPS), for a total of
600 MIPS, provide the necessary signal processing. A sampling rate of 32 kHz and
power-of-two multiples thereof, up to 512 kHz, is used.

System initialization normally occurs when power is first applied to the 2300 and can
occur abnormally if the 2300’s watchdog timer forces the SC520 to reboot. Upon ini-
tialization, the SC520 CPU downloads the DSP executable code stored in the flash
memory. This typically takes about 7 seconds. Once a DSP chip begins executing its
program, execution is continuous. The SC520 provides the DSP program with pa-
rameter data (representing information like the settings of various processing con-
trols), and extracts the front panel metering data from the DSP chips.

During system initialization, the SC520 queries the DSP hardware about its opera-
tional status and will display an error message on-screen if the DSP fails to initialize
normally. Please note any such messages and be ready to report them to Orban Cus-
tomer Service.

The DSP chips are located on the DSP board—see the drawings starting on page 6-
52. U701 and U702 are local voltage regulators on the DSP board that derive the
+3.3V supply for the DSP chips from the system digital 5V bus.

Power Supply
Warning! Hazardous voltages are present in the power supply when it is connected
to the AC line.

The power supply converts an AC line voltage input to various power sources used
by the 2300. To ensure lowest possible noise, four linear regulators provide 15VDC
and 5VDC for the analog circuits. A switching regulator provides high current
+5VDC for the digital circuits. An unregulated voltage powers the fan and feeds lo-
cal regulators.

The power supply circuits are straightforward and no explanation is required be-
yond the schematic itself. Be aware that C1, C4, C5, and C12 in the switching regula-
tor are premium-quality low-ESR capacitors and must be replaced with equivalent
types to ensure proper operation of the switching supply.

The output of the power supply is monitored by the power-indicator LED circuit,
which causes the power LED to flash according to a preset code to diagnose prob-
lems with the various power supplies in the 2300. See step (2.B) on page 4-9.
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6-13
Abbreviations
Some of the abbreviations used in this manual may not be familiar to all readers:

A/D (or A to D) analog-to-digital converter

AES Audio Engineering Society
AGC automatic gain control
A-I analog input
A-O analog output
BAL balanced (refers to an audio connection with two active conductors and one shield sur-
rounding them).
BBC British Broadcasting Corporation
BNC a type of RF connector
CALIB calibrate
CIT composite isolation transformer
CMOS complementary metal-oxide semiconductor
COFDM Coded Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex—a robust type of digital modulation using
many narrow-bandwidth, low data rate, mutually non-interfering carriers to achieve an ag-
gregate high data rate with excellent multipath rejection.
COM serial data communications port
D/A (or D to A) digital-to-analog converter
dBm decibel power measurement. 0 dBm = 1mW applied to a specified load. In audio, the load
is usually 600. In this case only, 0 dBm = 0.775V rms.
dBu decibel voltage measurement. 0 dBu = 0.775V RMS. For this application, the dBm-into-
600 scale on voltmeters can be read as if it were calibrated in dBu.
DI digital input
DJ disk jockey, an announcer who plays records in a club or on the air
DO digital output
DOS Microsoft disk operating system for IBM-compatible PC
DSP digital signal processor (or processing). May also refer to a special type of microprocessor
optimized for efficiently executing arithmetic.
EBU European Broadcasting Union
EBS Emergency Broadcasting System (U.S.A.)
EMI electromagnetic interference
ESC escape
FCC Federal Communications Commission (USA regulatory agency)
FDNR frequency-dependent negative resistoran element used in RC-active filters
FET field effect transistor
FFT fast Fourier transform
FIFO first-in, first-out
G/R gain reduction
HD Radio See IBOC
HF high-frequency
HP high-pass
IBOC “In-Band On-Channel”—a form of digital radio commercialized by iBiquity Corporation
where the digital carriers use a form of COFDM modulation and share the frequency alloca-
tion of the analog carriers. Also known by its trademarked name of “HD Radio.”
IC integrated circuit
IM intermodulation (or “intermodulation distortion”)
I/O Input/Output
ITU International Telecommunications Union (formerly CCIR). ITU-R is the arm of the ITU dedi-
cated to radio.
JFET junction field effect transistor
6-14 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 2300

LC inductor / capacitor
LCD liquid crystal display
LED light-emitting diode
LF low-frequency
LP low-pass
LVL level
MHF midrange / high-frequency
MLF midrange / low-frequency
MOD modulation
N&D noise and distortion
N/C no connection
OSHOOT overshoot
PC IBM-compatible personal computer
PCM pulse code modulation
PPM peak program meter
RAM random-access memory
RC resistor / capacitor
RDS / RBDS Radio (Broadcasting) Data Service—a narrowband digital subcarrier centered at 57 kHz in
the FM baseband that usually provides program or network-related data to the consumer in
the form of text that is displayed on the radio. Occupied bandwidth is ±2500 Hz.
REF reference
RF radio frequency
RFI radio-frequency interference
RMS root-mean-square
ROM read-only memory
SC subcarrier
SCA subsidiary communications authorization  a non program-related subcarrier in the FM
baseband above 23 kHz (monophonic) or 57 kHz (stereophonic)
S/PDIF Sony / Philips digital interface (standardized as IEC958)
TRS tip-ring-sleeve (2-circuit phone jack)
THD total harmonic distortion
TX transmitter
s Microseconds. For FM pre-emphasis, the +3 dB frequency is 1 / (2  ), where  is the pre-
emphasis time constant, measured in seconds.
VCA voltage-controlled amplifier
VU volume unit (meter)
XLR a common style of 3-conductor audio connector
XTAL crystal

Parts List
Many parts used in the 2300 are surface-mount devices (“SMT”) and are not in-
tended for field replacement because specialized equipment and skills are necessary
to remove and replace them. The list below includes substantially all of the parts
used in the 2300 (including surface-mount devices), and inclusion of a part in this list
does not imply that the part is field-replaceable.

See the following assembly drawings for locations of components.

OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6-15
Obtaining Spare Parts
Special or subtle characteristics of certain components are exploited to produce an
elegant design at a reasonable cost. It is therefore unwise to make substitutions for
listed parts. Consult the factory if the listing of a part includes the note “selected” or
“realignment required.”

Orban normally maintains an inventory of tested, exact replacement parts that can
be supplied quickly at nominal cost. Standardized spare parts kits are also available.
When ordering parts from the factory, please have available the following informa-
tion about the parts you want:

Orban part number

Reference designator (e.g., C3, R78, IC14)
Brief description of part
Model, serial, and “M” (if any) number of unit  see rear-panel label
To facilitate future maintenance, parts for this unit have been chosen from the cata-
logs of well-known manufacturers whenever possible. Most of these manufacturers
have extensive worldwide distribution and may be contacted through their web
sites.

Base Board
PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
SUBASSEMBLY FLAT CABLE-
42008.020Q J7
40P- 2""
16013.000.01 HEATSINK, CLIP ON TO 220 H1
RESISTOR, METALFIM, 1/8W, R28, 30, 33, 35, 37, 39, 44, 46, 48, 49, 50,
20040.604.01
1%, 604 Ω 51, 52, 53, 54, 55
RESISTOR, METALFIM, 1/2W,
20080.301.01 R47
1%, 301 Ω
RESISTOR, METALFIM, 1/8W,
20121.100.01 R43, 45
1%, 10Ω, 1206
RESISTOR, THIN FILM, 1/8W,
20121.750.01 R82, 83, 84
1%, 75 Ω
20128.002.01 RESISTOR 2.0 Ω 1% 0805 R22, R23, R24, R25
20129.301.01 RESISTOR, 301Ω, 0805 R59, R77
20130.100.01 RESISTOR, 1.00K 1% 0805 R79
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 1.62K,
20130.162.01 R41, 42
0805
20130.200.01 RESISTOR, 2.00K, 0805 R4, R56, R62
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 2.49K,
20130.249.01 R76
0805
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 5.62K,
20130.562.01 R57
0805
R5, 6, 15, 16, 17, 26, 60, 61, 63, 65, 67, 68,
20131.100.01 RESISTOR, 10K, 0805
69, 70, 71, 73, 74, 75, 80, 81, 102, 103, 104
20131.140.01 RESISTOR, 14.0K, 0805 R58, 64
20131.301.01 RESISTOR, 30.1K, 0805 R72
6-16 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 2300

PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER

R1, 2, 3, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 20, 27,
20132.100.01 RESISTOR, 100K, 0805 29, 31, 32, 34, 36, 38, 40, 66, 85, 86, 87, 88,
89, 90, 91, 92, 93
20132.332.01 RESISTOR, 332K, 0805 R78
CAPACITOR, X7R, 0.1UF, C3, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 18, 21, 24, 30,
21139.000.01
10%, 0805 32, 33, 34, 35, 38, 39, 43
21147.022.01 CAPACITOR, 22pf, 0805, 1% C40, 41
21319.610.01 CAPACITOR, 10uf, TANT, SMT C1, 4, 14, 15, 17, 19, 22, 36, 37
CAPACITOR, 4.7uf, TANT,
21322.547.01 C2, 5, 20, 23
6032B
DIODE, MMSZ5231B, SOD-
22016.000.01 D12
123
DIODE, VOLTAGE
22083.015.01 D11
SUPPRESSOR, 15 VOLT
22101.001.01 DIODE, 1N4148WT/R D1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10
DIODE, SCHOTTKY 1A, 60V,
22209.000.01 REF, , NO, STUFF, D7, D8
SMD
TRANSISTOR NPN
23214.000.01 Q1, Q3, Q4, Q5
MMBT3904
23606.201.01 TRANSISTOR, PWR, NPN Q2
24635.000.01 IC 74HCT374 U4
24900.000.01 IC, HEX INVERTER, SMT U11, U13
24967.000.01 IC, 74ACT245DW U3, U5
24978.000.01 IC, 74ACT244SC U14, 15
24979.000.01 IC, BAT54C-7 D13, 14, 15, 16, 17
24982.000.01 IC, 74HC4051M U19
24983.000.01 IC, 7064STC100-10 U1
24984.000.01 IC, LP2987IM-5.0 U20
25008.000.01 IC, PS2506-4 U10, 12
LED, RED/GREEN, BI-
25112.001.01
CLR/POLR
CONNECTOR, RIGHT ANGLE,
27017.025.01 J10
PC BOARD MOUNT, 25P
IC, SOCKET, DIP, 18 PIN,
27147.018.01 SU18
DUAL
CABLE, FLAT, 2 LONG, 14
27223.002.01 J8
CONDUCTOR
CONNECTOR HEADER PC104
27371.040.01 HEADER2
STACK 40P
CONNECTOR HEADER PC104
27371.064.01 HEADER1, HEADER3
STACK 64P
CONNECTOR, SOCKET,
27406.014.01 J2
STRIP, 14 PIN
CONNECTOR, HEADER,
27421.004.01 J3B, J6
DOUBLE ROW, 4P, 2 X 2
CONNECTOR, HEADER,
27421.006.01 J5
DOUBLE ROW, 6P, 2 X 3
CONNECTOR, HEADER,
27421.010.01 J12
DOUBLE ROW, 23", 2 X 5
CONNECTOR HEADER STR
27421.050.01 J9
.23 2x25
27426.003.01 CONNECTOR, HEADER, 3 J11
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6-17
PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
PIN, SINGLE RW
CONNECTOR, STR, DBL
27451.005.01 J4
ROW, 26 PIN
HEADER, STR, DBLROW,
27451.024.01 J1
PCMOUNT
CONNECTOR MOL53047-0510
27500.000.01 J14
5PIN
28086.000.01 CRYSTAL, 4.0 MHz, HC49US X1
29521.000.01 INDUCTOR, 3.9UH, JM391K L1, L2, L3
CIRCUIT BOARD, BASE
32166.000.06
BOARD
44093.100.01 SOFTWARE PIC 8300 U18 U18
SUBASSEMBLY RECPTL-
47010.016.01 J3A
W/SHRINK
SUBASSEMBLY RECPTL-
47010.017.01 J3A
W/SHRINK

CPU Module
PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT, IDENTIFIER
20128.010.01 RESISTOR, 10 OHM,0805 R31, R34
20128.022.01 RESISTOR, 22 OHM 1% 0805 R5, R6
20128.332.01 RESISTOR, 33.2 OHM,0805 R10, R11, R14
RESISTOR, 49.9 OHM 1%
20128.499.01 R19, R20, R21, R22, R23
0805
20129.160.01 RESISTOR, 160 OHM 1% 0805 R24, R25
20129.330.01 RESISTOR, 330 OHM 1% 0805 R12, R16
20129.470.01 RESISTOR, 470 OHM 1% 0805 R13, R15
20130.100.01 RESISTOR, 1.00K 1% 0805 R17, R35
R3, R4, R7, R8, R26, R27, R28, R29, R30,
20130.475.01 RESISTOR, 4.75K,0805
R32
20130.931.01 RESISTOR, 9.31K, 1%, 0805 R33
20131.100.01 RESISTOR, 10K,0805 R1, R2, R9
RESISTOR, 1 /
20131.147.01 R18
8W,1%,14.7K,0805
RESISTOR NETWORK 1K
20233.102.01 RN1
CTS745C 8R BUSSED
RESISTOR NETWORK 4.7K
20233.472.01 RN2, RN3, RN4
CTS745C 8R BUSS
RESISTOR NETWORK 8R,
20237.472.01 RN5
ISO, 5%
CAPACITOR,
21139.000.01 C8, C9, C20, C21, C177, C179, C182
X7R,0.1uF,10%,0805
CAPACITOR,
21141.000.01 C10
NPO,1000pF,1%,0805
CAPACITOR,
21142.000.01 C2
NPO,100pF,1%,0805
C11, 126, 127, 133, 134, 150, 152, 154,
21146.310.01 CAPACITOR, .01uF,0805,10%
156, 158,160, 162, 180
CAPACITOR, 4.7pF 50V X7R
21167.047.01 C1
0805
CAPACITOR, 18pF 1% 50V
21170.018.01 C3, C4, C5, C6, C7
COG 0805
21171.105.01 CAPACITOR, 1uF X7R 0805 C14, 17, 125, 132, 151, 153, 155, 157, 159,
6-18 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 2300

PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT, IDENTIFIER

161, 175, 176, 178, 181, 183
CAPACITOR,
21322.547.01 C12
4.7uF,TANT,6032B
CAPACITOR, 10uF 10% TANT
21325.610.01 C13, C15, C16, C18
6032-B
22101.001.01 DIODE,1N4148WT / R D1, D2, D3
IC VOLTAGE REGULATOR
24331.025.01 U14
LT1963-2.5 SOT223
IC VOLTAGE REGULATOR
24331.033.01 U15
LT1963-3.3 SOT223
IC SDRAM MT48LC16
24541.000.01 U2, U3
TSOP54P
IC FLASH MEMORY E28F128
24542.000.01 U4
TSOP56
24543.000.01 IC CY2305 0DLYBuF 8P U11
IC NM93C46 SEEPROM
24544.000.01 U12
TSSOP
24653.000.01 IC PWRST MIC8114 SOT143 U5
24670.000.01 IC 10 / 100BT NIC NATIONAL U10
24965.000.01 IC,74ALVC164245DGG U7, U8, U9
IC MICROPROCESSOR
24972.520.01 U1
ELANSC520 BGA388
27306.000.01 CONN RJ45 PCMT W / MAGS J1
27370.040.01 CONN SCKT PC104 40PIN P2
27370.064.01 CONN SCKT PC104 64PIN P1, P3
28031.000.01 HOLDER,BATTERY,LITH CELL BT1HLDR
28041.000.01 CELL,COIN,BATTERY,LITH,3V BT1
28089.000.01 OSC 33MHZ SG636 4P SMD X1
28090.000.01 IC TCXO DS32KHZ 36P BGA U13
CRYSTAL 25MHZ RXD MP35L
28091.000.01 Y1
SMD
CONTROL MODULE
32200.000.02
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
32201.000.02 PCB CONTROL MODULE 2300
44094.100.01 FIRMWARE 2300 U6 20LV8D
SCHEMATIC, CONTROL
62200.000.02
MODULE 2300

RS-232 Board
PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
CAPACITOR, X7R, 0.1uF, 10%,
21139.000.01 C1, C2, C3, C4, C5, C6
0805
DIODE, SHOTTKY 1A, 60V,
22209.000.01 D1, D2, (NO STUFF)
SMD
24968.000.01 IC, MAX208ECNG U1
CONNECTOR, RIGHT ANGLE,
27017.009.01 J2
PC MOUNT, 9-PIN
IC, SOCKET, DIP, 24-PIN,
27147.124.01 SU1
DUAL
CONNECTOR, SOCKET 2X8
27489.016.01 J1
STACKER
29521.000.01 INDUCTOR, 3.9UH, JM391K L1
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6-19
Power Supply
PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
10012.404.01 SCREW MS SEM P / P 4-40 X 1 / 4
TRANSISTOR, MOUNTING KIT, TO
15025.000.01 HW1, HW2, HW3, HW4, HW5
220
LED MOUNT, 1 POSITION, 0.240"
15061.005.01 H1, H2, H3, H4
HIGH
RESISTOR, 1 / 4W, 0 OHM,
20020.025.01 R1
(JUMPER)
CAPACITOR, AXIAL LEADS, 0.1uF, C6, C10, C11, C12, C15, C19, C20,
21129.410.01
50V, 20% C21
CAPACITOR, RADIAL LEADS 100uF
21227.710.01 C1
16V HFS
CAPACITOR, RADIAL LEADS 470uF
21227.747.01 C4, C5
16V HFS
CAPACITOR, RADIAL LEADS 100uF
21230.710.01 C22
50V HFS
CAPACITOR, SNAP-IN, 6800uF, 16V,
21255.000.01 C13, C14
20%
CAPACITOR, RADIAL LEADS,
21256.000.01 C17, C18
1000uF, 35V, 20%
CAPACITOR, RADIAL LEADS, 100uF,
21263.710.01 C2, C3, C8, C9
25V, 10%
CAPACITOR, RADIAL LEADS, 2.2uF,
21307.522.01 C7, C16
35V, 10%
22004.056.01 ZENER-DIODE-1W-5%-5.6V-1N CR19, CR20
22015.000.01 DIODE-SHOTTKY RECTIFIER-SBL CR21, CR22, CR23
DIODE, VOLTAGE SUPPRESSOR, 22
22083.022.01 CR2, CR13, CR14
VOLT
DIODE, VOLTAGE SUPPRESSOR, 33
22083.033.01 CR9, CR10
VOLT
DIODE, VOLTAGE SUPPRESSOR,
22083.068.01 CR4, CR17, CR18
6.8 VOLT
CR5, CR6, CR7, CR8, CR11, CR12,
22201.400.01 DIODE, RECTIFIER IN4004 PRV400V
CR15, CR16
22208.040.01 DIODE, SHOTTKY-31DQ04-3.3 CR3
22500.271.01 ZENER, TRANSORB, VARISTOR V1, V2
IC, LINEAR, DC REGULATOR, 15V
24303.901.01 U2
NEG
24304.901.01 IC, REGULATOR U1
IC, LINEAR, DC REGULATOR, 5V
24307.901.01 U3
POS
IC, LINEAR, DC REGULATOR, 5V
24308.901.01 U4
NEG
24323.000.01 IC, SIMPLE SWITCH, 0 TO 220 U5
26143.000.01 SWITCH, SLIDE, VOLT, 115 / 230 SW1
SWITCH, SLIDE, SPDT, VERTICAL
26146.000.01 SW2
MOUNT
27060.000.01 CONNECTOR, VERTICAL HEADER J1
CONNECTOR, HEADER, DOUBLE
27421.010.01 J7
ROW , 23", 2 X 5
CONNECTOR, HEADER, 3-PIN,
27426.003.01 J6 (OPTIONAL FAN CONNECTOR)
SINGLE ROW
27451.003.01 HEADER, STR, DOUBLE ROW, J3
6-20 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 2300

PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER

PCMOUNT
HEADER, STR, DOUBLE ROW,
27451.004.01 J4
PCMOUNT
HEADER, STR, DOUBLE ROW,
27451.024.01 J5
PCMOUNT
CONNECTOR, VERTICAL, HEADER,
27493.000.01 J2
6 POS.
TERM, CRIMP, RING, INSULATED,
27711.206.01 LUG
6R
28004.150.01 FUSE, 3AG, SLOBLO, 1 / 2 AMP F1
28112.003.01 KNOB-FUSE-DOM-GRY-FOR 281 H7
28112.005.01 BODY-FUSEHOLDER-PC MNT H6
29262.000.01 LINE FILTER, PC MOUNT, 1A A1
29519.000.01 INDUCTOR-TORODIAL- 7.7UH L2
29526.000.01 INDUCTOR, PE92108K L1
50286.000.02 HEATBAR POWER SPLY 2300 HS1

Input/Output (I/O) Board

PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
RESISTOR, METAL-FILM, 1 / 8W, 1%,
20039.750.01 R411, R420
75.0 OHM
RESISTOR, METAL-FILM, 1 / 8W, 1%, R401, R412, R421 (REF NO STUFF
20040.604.01
604 OHM R106, R119)
RESISTOR, METAL-FILM, 1 / 8W, 1%,
20041.100.01 R100, R107, R115, R120, R400
1.00 k OHM
RESISTOR, METAL-FILM, 1 / 8W,
20058.187.01 R301
0.1%, 1.87K
20058.205.01 RESISTOR, 1 / 8W.1%, 2.05K R302
RESISTOR, RF, 1 / 8W, 1%, 10 OHM,
20121.100.01 R154, R200, R232, R522, R531
1206
20121.750.01 RESISTOR, TF, 1 / 8W, 1%, 75 OHM R416, R158, R530
20122.110.01 RESISTOR, TF, 1 / 8W, 1%, 110 OHM R238, R330, R500, R514, R517
R304, R521, R600, R601, R602,
20123.100.01 RESISTOR, TF, 1 / 8W, 1%, 1.00K
R603
RESISTOR, TF, 1.8W, 1%, 1.50K, R131, R134, R140, R141, R144,
20123.150.01
SURFACE-MOUNT 1 R146
RESISTOR, TF, 1.8W, 1%, 2.49K,
20123.249.01 R403
SURFACE-MOUNT 1
R101, R103, R105, R108, R116,
20123.499.01 RESISTOR, TF, 1 / 8W, 1%, 4.99K
R118, R121, R124, R502, R515
R110, R125, R237, R243, R244,
RESISTOR, TF, 1 / 8W, 1%, 10.0K,
20124.100.01 R406, R407, R409, R413, R414,
SURFACE-MOUNT
R519, R527, R528, R529
20124.200.01 RESISTOR, TF, 1 / 8W, 1%, 20.0K R402, R404, R417, R418
20124.249.01 RESISTOR, TF, 1 / 8W, 1%, 24.9K R405
20126.100.01 RESISTOR, TF, 1 / 8W, 1%, 1.00M R142, R152, R225, R231, R306
RESISTOR, 1 / 8W, 1%, 150 OHM,
20129.150.01 R138, R151, R235, R236
0805
RESISTOR, 1 / 8W, 1%, 249 OHM,
20129.249.01 R137, R139, R149, R150, R155
0805
RESISTOR, 1 / 8W, 1%, 768 OHM,
20129.768.01 R111, R126
0805
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6-21
PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
20130.162.01 RESISTOR, 1 / 8W, 1%, 1.62K, 0805 R132, R153, R156, R157
20130.210.01 RESISTOR, 1 / 8W, 1%, 2.10K, 0805 R112, R127
20130.249.01 RESISTOR, 1 / 8W, 1%, 2.49K, 0805 R300
20130.348.01 RESISTOR, 1 / 8W, 1%, 3.48K, 0805 R204, R210, R217, R220
20130.562.01 RESISTOR, 1 / 8W, 1%, 5.62K, 0805 R113, 128
R201, R202, R205, R207, R208,
20130.845.01 RESISTOR, 1 / 8W, 1%, 8.45K, 0805
R211, R212, R214, R215, R218
20131.113.01 RESISTOR, 1 / 8W, 1%, 11.3K, 0805 R206, R219, R233, R234
20131.143.01 RESISTOR, 1 / 8W, 1%, 14.3K, 0805 R221, R224, R227, R230
20131.147.01 RESISTOR, 1 / 8W, 1%, 14.7K, 0805 R114, R129
20131.249.01 RESISTOR, 1%, 24.9K 0805 R203, R209, R213, R216
R222, R223, R228, R229, R239,
20131.499.01 RESISTOR, 1 / 8W, 1%, 49.9K, 0805 R240, R241, R242, R501, R504,
R513, R520, R524, R526
20131.825.01 RESISTOR, 1 / 8W, 1%, 82.5K, 0805 R104, R123, R303, R408, R415
20132.154.01 RESISTOR, 1 / 8W, 1%, 154K, 0805 R328
R130, R133, R135, R136, R143,
20151.365.01 RESISTOR, 0.1%, 3.65K, 0805
R145, R147, R148
20151.536.01 RESISTOR, 0.1%, 5.36K, 0805 R102, R109, R117, R122
TRIM POTS, 10K, 20%, TOP-
20511.310.01 VR200, VR201, VR400
ADJUSTABLE
CAPACITOR, CERAMIC, 0.001uF,
21112.210.01 C100, C102, C104, C106
1KV, 10%
CAPACITOR, RADIAL LEADS, 1.0uF,
21123.510.01 C224, C230
50V, 20%
21137.447.01 CAPACITOR, 0.47uF 25V 10% 1206 C113, C117, C340
CAPACITOR, SMD1206, 4700pF, 50V, C109, C110, C115, C116, C411,
21138.247.01
5% C412
C111, C118, C119, C120, C121,
C123, C124, C125, C126, C127,
C128, C202, C203, C211, C212,
C214, C215, C233, C302, C303,
C306, C309, C404, C407, C410,
C500, C501, C502, C510, C513,
C600, C601, C602, C603, C604,
21139.000.01 CAPACITOR, X7R, 0.1uF, 10%, 0805 C605, C606, C607, C608, C609,
C610, C612, C613, C616, C617,
C618, C619, C620, C621, C622,
C623, C624, C625, C626, C628,
C629, C632, C633, C634, C635,
C636, C637, C638, C639, C640,
C641, C642, C643, C644, C648,
C649, C650, C651
21140.000.01 CAPACITOR, NPO, 470pF, 1%, 0805 C217, 218, 219, 220, 336, 339
C1, C2, C226, C228, C337, C517,
21141.000.01 CAPACITOR, NPO, 1000pF, 1%, 0805
C521, C652, C653
21142.000.01 CAPACITOR, NPO, 100pF, 1%, 0805 C338
C221, C222, C225, C227, C401,
21143.000.01 CAPACITOR, NPO, 1500pF, 1%, 0805
C408
C101, C103, C105, C107, C108,
21144.000.01 CAPACITOR, 5%, 100V, 47pF, 1206
C114, C333
CAPACITOR, NPO, 5%, 100V, 33pF-
21145.000.01 C231, C335, C351, C406
1206
6-22 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 2300

PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER

21156.020.01 CAPACITOR, 12pF, 1206 C223, C229, C334, C402
21172.222.01 CAPACITOR, 2200pF 50V NPO 1206 C512, C518
21172.103.01 CAPACITOR, 0.01uF 50V NPO 1206 C400
21173.823.01 CAPACITOR, 0.082uF 50V X7R 1206 C503, C511
CAPACITOR, RADIAL LEADS, 100uF,
21263.710.01 C304, C305, C308
25V, 10%
CAPACITOR, TANTALUM, 1.0uF,
21318.510.01 C200, C201, C232, C515, C516
35V, B-CASE
C112, C122, C129, C130, C131,
CAPACITOR, 10uF, TANTALUM, C210, C213, C216, C300, C301,
21319.610.01
SURFACE-MOUNT C307, C310, C403, C405, C409,
C645, C646, C647
22101.001.01 DIODE, 1N4148WT / R CR101, 102, 106, 107
22102.001.01 DIODE 1N5711TR CR500
CR100, 103, 104, 105, 202, 203, 204,
22106.000.01 DIODE, SMCJ26C, TRAN20RB
205
TRANSISTOR, JFET SST113
23415.000.01 Q200, 201, 202, 203
SURFACE-MOUNT
24024.000.01 IC, OPA2134PA IC3, IC100, IC102
24025.000.01 IC, BuF634P, DIP8 IC1, IC2
24538.000.01 IC PCM1744 D/A SOIC14 IC400
24634.000.01 IC, OCTAL 3 STATE NONINVR IC504
24652.450.01 IC MCP809 / 4.5 PRST SOT23 IC509
24728.302.01 IC, QUAD, SPST SWITCH, DIP / 16 IC101, IC103
24748.000.01 IC, LM339M S014 IC210
24752.000.01 IC DIGIPOT DS1267 SO1C16 IC402
24857.000.01 IC 74HC374 DLATCH SOL20 IC108, IC209
24858.000.01 IC, SO / 14, SURFACE-MOUNT IC604
IC, HEX INVERTER, SURFACE-
24900.000.01 IC603
MOUNT
24924.000.01 IC CSS3310KS IC203
IC, SINGLE 2 INPUT, SURFACE-
24938.000.01 IC508
MOUNT
24951.000.01 IC HC151 8CH MUX SOIC16 IC507
24957.000.01 IC, PCM1704U IC300
24958.000.01 IC, DRV134PA-DIP IC207, IC208
IC104, IC105, IC106, IC201, IC202,
24960.000.01 IC, OPA2134UA
IC204, IC206, IC302, IC401
24961.000.01 IC, OPA627AP IC308
24962.000.01 IC CS8420CS REV D IC500, IC502
24963.000.01 IC, 5383 VS IC107
24992.000.01 IC, 74AHCT244 SOIC IC601
24997.000.01 IC, DAC AK4393 SSOP28 IC211
CONNECTOR, MALE, INSERT,
27053.003.01 J201, 202, 502
RIGHT ANGLE
CONNECTOR, FEMALE, INSERT,
27054.003.01 J100, 103, 500
RIGHT ANGLE
CONNECTOR, DOUBLE BNC,
27055.000.01 J4, J5
VERTICAL PC-MOUNT BOMAR
IC100, IC102, IC207, IC208, IC1,
27147.008.01 IC, SOCKET, DIP, 8-PINS, DUAL
IC2, IC3
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6-23
PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
27147.016.01 IC, SOCKET, DIP, 16-PIN, DUAL IC101, 103
27147.020.01 IC, SOCKET, DIP, 20-PIN, DUAL IC602
27174.044.01 IC, SOCKET, 44-PIN, LOW PROFILE IC503
CONNECTOR, JUMPER, RECPT,
27401.000.01 JJ2, JJ3
BLACK
CONNECTOR, SOCKET, STRIP, 14-
27406.014.01 JP600
PIN
L1, L2, L3, L4, L100, L102, L104,
27408.003.01 CONNECTOR, 3P SOCKET STRIP L106, L200, L201, L202, L203, L500,
L501, L504, L505
CONNECTOR, HEADER, DOUBLE
27421.002.01 J400
ROW , 2P, 2 X 1
CONNECTOR, HEADER, DOUBLE
27421.004.01 J2, J3, J400, J505
ROW , 4P, 2 X 2
27426.005.01 HEADER, UNSHRD REF, J504
HEADER, STR, DOUBLE ROW,
27451.004.01 J601
PCMOUNT
CONNECTOR, STR, DOUBLE ROW,
27451.005.01 J600
26-PIN
27630.001.01 JUMPER, PC MOUNT, TEST POINT TP600, 607
AES3 TRANSFORMER, SURFACE-
29015.000.01 T500, 502
MOUNT
L1, L2, L3, L100, L102, L104, L106,
29508.210.01 FILTER, EMI SUPPRESSION, 50V L200, L201, L202, L203, L500, L501,
L504, L505, L400, L401, L402
L5, L6, L7, L204, L205, L206, L207,
29521.000.01 INDUCTOR, 3.9UH, JM391K
L403, L404, L405
29522.000.01 INDUCTOR, 1200UH, 5%, 1-M-10-22 L101, L103, L105, L107
29707.002.01 INDUCTOR, 3.501 mH L300
29707.003.01 INDUCTOR, 3.39 mH L301
44092.100.01 FIRMWARE, FM I/O IC503 2300 IC503

DSP Board
PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
42007.030 SUBASSEMBLY, FLAT CBL-26P- 3 J601
HEATSINK, VERTICAL MOUNT,
16021.000.01 HS700
BLACK ANODIZED
R505, R506, R508, R604, R605, R606,
R607, R608, R609, R610, R611, R612,
20128.075.01 RESISTOR, 75OHM, 1%, 0805
R705, R806, R807, R808, R809, R810,
R811
R301, R302, R303, R304, R305, R306,
20131.100.01 RESISTOR, 10K, 0805 R307, R308, R507, R510, R801, R802,
R803, R804, R805
R101, R102, R103, R104, R502, R503,
20132.100.01 RESISTOR, 100K, 0805
R504, R509, R601, R602, R603
RESISTOR NETWORK, SIP, 2%,
20221.101.01 RN501
100K, 10PIN
CAPACITOR, 8200pF, ±15%, 1206, C101, C103, C105, C107, C109, C111,
21137.282.01
50V C113, C115
6-24 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 2300

PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER

C102, C104, C106, C108, C110, C112,
21137.447.01 CAPACITOR, 0.47uF 25V 10% 1206
C114, C116
C701, C702, C703, C704, C705, C706,
C707, C708, C709, C710, C711, C712,
C713, C714, C715, C716, C718, C719,
C720, C723, C724, C725, C726, C727,
C728, C729, C732, C733, C734, C739,
21139.000.01 CAPACITOR, X7R, 0.1uF, 10%, 0805
C740, C741, C742, C743, C744, C749,
C751, C752, C753, C754, C755, C756,
C757, C758, C759, C760, C761, C762,
C764, C765, C768, C769, C802, C803,
C805, C806, C808, C809
21141.000.01 CAPACITOR, NPO, 1000pF, 1%, 0805 C771, C772, C773, C774
CAPACITOR, 22uF , TANTALUM,
21309.622.01 C736
SURFACE-MOUNT
CAPACITOR, 10uF, TANTALUM, C763, C766, C767, C770, C801, C804,
21319.610.01
SURFACE-MOUNT C807
DIODE, VOLTAGE SUPPRESSOR,
22083.068.01 CR700, CR701
6.8 VOLT
24326.000.01 IC, REG, 1086, 3.3V IC701, IC702
24857.000.01 IC 74HC374 DLATCH SOL20 IC504
IC, EPM 7064AETC44-10, SURFACE-
24944.000.01 IC503
MOUNT
24945.000.01 IC 74AHC541 OCTAL BUFFER SOL20 IC501
24946.000.01 IC-8 BIT-DUAL TRANSCEIVER W / 3 IC502
IC 74LVC2244 OCTAL BUFFER,
24948.000.01 IC601, IC602
SOL20
IC, SURFACE-MOUNT, PLL1700,
24955.000.01 IC801, IC802
SSOP / 20
IC101, IC102, IC103, IC104, IC105,
24991.000.01 IC, DSP 56362PV100
IC106
24993.000.01 IC, EPM7256AETC100-10 IC603
24994.000.01 IC, 74ACT04, SOIC 14P IC807
CONNECTOR, HEADER, DOUBLE
27421.002.01 J500
ROW , 2P, 2 X 1
CONNECTOR, HEADER, DOUBLE
27421.004.01 J101
ROW , 4P, 2 X 2
CONNECTOR, HEADER, DOUBLE
27421.010.01 J603
ROW , 23", 2 X 5
27451.003.01 HEADER, STR, DRLROW, PCMOUNT J701
CONNECTOR, DOUBLE ROW , PC
27451.007.01 J504
MNT, 40-PIN
27630.001.01 JUMPER, PC-MOUNT, TEST POINT TP702, TP703
OSC, CRYSTAL CLOCK, 27MHz, 3
28083.000.01 U804
VOLT

Display Board
PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
SUBASSEMBLY, FLAT CABLE-
42007.080
26P- 8"
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6-25
PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
15062.390.01 LED SPACER, 390 HIGH
RESISTOR, TF, 1 / 8W, 1%, 110
20122.110.01 R17-R24
OHM
RESISTOR, TF, 1 / 8W, 1%,
20124.100.01 R29, R30
SURFACE-MOUNT 10K
RESISTOR, TF, 1 / 8W, 1%,
20125.100.01 R25, R26, R27, R28
100K
RESISTOR, NETWORK, DIL,
20226.000.01
2%, 100 OHM
CAPACITOR, SURFACE
21131.410.01 C2-C10
MOUNT, 1206, 0.1uF, 50V, 20%
CAPACITOR, TANTALUM,
21313.568.01 C1
6.8uF, 25V, 10%
24851.000.01 IC, SOL20, SURFACE-MOUNT IC8
24857.000.01 IC 74HC374 DLATCH, SOL20 IC3
IC, HEX INVERTER, SURFACE-
24900.000.01 IC7
MOUNT
24905.000.01 IC, CMOS OCTAL D REG. 3 ST IC4, IC5, IC6, IC9
24908.000.01 IC, OCTAL, D TYP, FLIP / FLOP IC1, IC2
LED, YELLOW, T-1, HIGH-
25106.001.01 CR11, CR12, CR13, CR14, CR15
EFFICIENCY LAMP
25119.003.01 LED, T-3 FLAT TP FLNGL, RED
LED, ARRAY, 10 -POSITION, 1
25167.000.01 CR7, CR16
RED, 1 YEL, 8 GRN
LED, ARRAY, 10 -POSITION, 9
25168.000.01 CR1, CR2, CR3, CR4, CR5, CR6, CR8, CR9
YEL, 1 RED
27216.012.01 CBL FLEXSTRIP 4P 12"
CONNECTOR, HEADER,
27421.004.01 J1
DOUBLE ROW , 4P, 2 X 2

Schematics and Parts Locator Drawings

These drawings reflect the actual construction of your unit as accurately as possible.
Any differences between the drawings and your unit are probably due to product
improvements or production changes since the publication of this manual.

If you intend to replace parts, please read page 6-14. Please note that because sur-
face-mount parts are used extensively in the 2300, few parts are field-replaceable.
Servicing ordinarily occurs by swapping circuit board assemblies. However, many
vulnerable parts connected to the outside world are socketed and can be readily re-
placed in the field.
6-26 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 2300

Function Description Drawing Page

Chassis Circuit Board Locator and Basic In- Top view 6-29
terconnections (not to scale)
Base Board Glue logic; supports CPU module Parts Locator 6-30
and RS-232 daughterboard. Drawing
Contains:
System Connections Schematic 1 of 4 6-31
CPU module interface Schematic 2 of 4 6-32
CPU module interface (ver. .06) Schematic 2 of 4 6-33
Power Supply Monitor Schematic 3 of 4 6-34
CPLD, General Purpose Interface, Schematic 4 of 4 6-35
and Remotes
CPU Module Control microprocessor. Services Parts Locator 6-36
front panel, serial port, Ethernet, Drawing
DSP board, and control board. Re-
sides on base board.
Contains:
Ethernet Schematic 1 of 5 6-37
General Purpose Bus Schematic 2 of 5 6-38
Memory Schematic 3 of 5 6-39
Miscellaneous Functions Schematic 4 of 5 6-40
Power and Ground Distribution Schematic 5 of 5 6-41
RS-232 Board Supports Serial Port Parts Locator 6-42
Drawing
Schematic 1 of 1 6-43
Power Supply ±15V analog supply; ±5V analog Parts Locator 6-44
supply; +5V digital supply Drawing
Schematic 1 of 1 6-45
I/O Board Analog Input/Output Parts Locator 6-46
AES3 Input/Output Drawing
Composite Output
SCA Input.
Contains:
L and R Analog Inputs Schematic 1 of 5 6-47
L and R Analog Outputs Schematic 2 of 5 6-48
Composite / SCA Schematic 3 of 5 6-49
Control and Digital I/O Schematic 4 of 5 6-50
Interface and Power Distribution Schematic 5 of 5 6-51
DSP Board DSP Chips; Local +3.3V regulator. Parts Locator 6-52
Contains: Drawing
DSP Extended Serial Audio Inter- Schematic 1 of 7 6-53
face (ESAI)
DSP Host Interface Schematic 2 of 7 6-54
DSP Serial Peripheral Interface, Schematic 3 of 7 6-55
Power, and Ground
ISA Bus 8-bit I/O Schematic 4 of 7 6-56
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6-27
Serial Audio Interface and Clock Schematic 5 of 7 6-57
Generation
Power Distribution Schematic 6 of 7 6-58
No-Connects Schematic 7 of 7 6-59
Display Board Front-Panel LCD, LEDs, Buttons, Parts Locator 6-60
and Rotary Encoder Drawing
Schematic 1 of 1 6-61
Display Board Front-Panel electronics Parts Locator 6-62
(Rear) Drawing
Schematic 1 of 1 6-63
DSP Block Shows signal processing 6-64
Diagram
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6-29
6-30 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 2300

Base Board Parts Locator Drawing

(for schematic 62165.000.06)
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6-31
+5VD +RAW
SD(0..15)
2-1A, 1-5A FROM POWER SUPPLY TV9 TV8 TV11 TV12 TV13 TV14
U5
JP8 +5VD
2-1A, 1-5D /GPIOWR 74ACT245DW J1
14 SIN2 /GPIORD
2-1A, 1-5D 1 DIR 20 +5vD
Vcc 1
13
SOUT2 2-1B /FP_BUSEN 19 /OE
2
12 3
/RTS2 4
11 FPLED1
4-2B SD0 9 A8 B8 11
FP_D0 5
10 /CTS2 FPLED2 6
SD1 8 A7 B7 12
FP_D1 +RAW
9
4-2B 7
DISPLAY SD2 7 A6 FP_D2
B6 13
2-1D 8
8 AUX_COMM 2-1B, 1-4B CONTRAST 9
2-1A SD3 6 A5 B5 14
FP_D3
10
7 DIRTY_GND
SD4 5 A4 B4 15
FP_D4 11
6 12 +5vA —5vA -15V +15V
18.432MHz SD5 4 A3 B3 16
FP_D5
13 DGND
5 1-4B, 2-1B TV6 TV7 TV5 TV4
SD6 3 A2 B2 17
FP_D6 14
4 TV15 15
SD7 2 A1 B1 18
FP_D7 16
3
17
36.864MHz Gnd
10
1
2 1-4B 18

0.1uF
C43
19 AGND
1 2 20
21 Plus5VA (Monitor)
24.576MHz 22
4-8C
1-4B, 2-1B Minus5VA (Monitor)
23 4-8C
TO I/O BOARD U13e
+5VD
24 Minus15V (Monitor)
4-8D
Plus15V (Monitor)
/_IO_RESET 10 11 RSTDRV 4-8D
100K R86 100K
SD0 R14 FP_D0
74HC14D 100K
RSTDRV R13 100K R87
2-1B, 1-5D SD1 FP_D1
/SPI_CS 100K
2-1B R12 100K R88
SSI_DI SD2 FP_D2
1-2C
SSI_CLK 100K R89 100K
1-4C SD3 R11 FP_D3 BACKLIGHT
SSI_DO
1-2C 100K 100K
SD4 R10 R90 FP_D4
/DACK1 16013.000.01 2
1-5D 100K 100K Q2
DRQ1 SD5 R9 R91 FP_D5
1-5D
1
100K 100K TIP120
SD6 R8 R92 FP_D6
JP7 3
SD7 100K 3
1 R7 100K R93 Heatsink R26
SD7 FP_D7

2.00K
1N4148
2 SD6 1 K

R4
D1
3
SD4 10.0 K
4 Q1 A
SD5 FP_D(0..7) 2
5 +RAW
6 SD(0..15) C42 MMBT3904
7
SD3
8 SD2 1 2 1
BACKLIGHT

2Ω

2Ω

2Ω

2Ω

0.1uF
R24

R25
9

R22

R23
SD1

C9
10
10uF 2
11 SD0
12 DIRTY_GND DIRTY_GND
13 GPAEN
14
2-1A, 1-5D Note: C42 is not populated
15 /SMEMWR in standard build.
16
1-5D
17 /SMEMRD
1-5D /GPIOWR
18
19
20 /GPIORD LED_PULSE
21
2-1D
22 FP_D0 FP_D7
23 /LED
FP_D1 FP_D6 2-1D
24 FPLED1
25 DSP3.3VA FP_D2 FP_D5 /ENCODER 2-1D
26 4-8B FPLED2
FP_D3 FP_D4
27 SA9 DSP3.3VB Reserved
28 4-8B DISPLAY FP_D4 FP_D3 N/C
29 SA8
30 SA6 CONTRAST FP_D5 FP_D2
31 FP_D6 FP_D1 R20 100K FP_ROW-COL
SA7 +5vD 2-1D
32 /GPIOWR FP_D7 FP_D0
33 SA4 ENC1
2-8D
34 SA5 /FPCOL_A
35 SA3 SA0 ENC2
/FPCOL_B 2-8D
36
37 SA1 /FPROW_A
38 SA2
39 SA0 /FPROW_B Note: J6 is not populated
40 /FPROW_C in standard build.
DIRTY_GND
SA(0..25) 2-1A, 1-5A /FPROW_D Key
+5VD +5VD 2 4

ENCODER
TO DSP BOARD +5vD
J6
(optional)
1 3
10uF
4.7uF

1 1 1
0.1uF
C21

C20

C19

DGND
1 1 1

10uF
2 2 2

4.7uF

0.1uF
+5VD +RAW

C22

C23

C24
+RAW
Key Key 2 2 2 Key Key
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314151617181920212223242526
Q5 2 4 2 4 2 4 6

MMBT3904 3
R5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 +RAW 1 3 1 3 1 3 5
J3B J4 J5
10.0K J14 Key J3A J2
R17 2 1
TO SUPPLY LCD DATA DISPLAY LOGIC POWER
10.0K TO 8300 SERIES
TO FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY
2
TV25 DIRTY_GND MONITOR LED
R6 3 TO 8500 SERIES LCD BACKLIGHT

2-5A BKLITE_ON 4 LCD BACKLIGHT

10.0K R16 5 DRIVER
2-5A MISC_OUT4 TV26

2-5A MISC_OUT5
R15 10.0K
Base Board Schematic:
10.0K
System Connections
(version 62165.000.06)
Sheet 1 of 4
 6-32 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 2300

/MEMCS16
2-1B
/MEMWR
2-1B
/MEMRD
2-1B
/SMEMWR
3-7B
/SMEMRD
3-7B
/SBHE TV66
/GPIOCS
2-1B
/GPIOCS16
2-1B
/GPIOWR
2-1A, 3-6D
/GPIORD
3-6D, 2-1A
+5VD
RSTDRV
2-1B, 3-7C
GPRDY TV67
GPAEN JTAG_TRIG TV85
2-1A, 3-7B
GPTC TV68 A1b JTAG_STOP/TX
A1a GPALE TV86
TV69 JTAG_CMD/ACK
/DACK1 TV87
PC-104 Pinouts A B 3-7C E F
DRQ1 J13
/CHCHK A1 3-7C
Ground B1
SD7 E1 F1 JTAG_/TRST 1
SD7 A2
2
RESDRV B2
SD6 JTAG_TRIG E2 F2 JTAG_TDI 3
SD6 A3
4
+5v. B3
SD5 JTAG_BR/TC E3 F3 JTAG_TDO JTAG_TDO 5
SD5 A4
6
IRQ9 B4
SD4 JTAG_TMS E4 F4 JTAG_/TRST JTAG_TMS 7
GPIRQ10 SD4 A5
8
-5v. B5
SD3 JTAG_TDI E5 F5 JTAG_TCK 9
GPIRQ11 SD3 A6
10
DRQ2 B6 N/C
SD2 JTAG_TCK E6 F6 11
GPIRQ12 SD2 A7 TV88 12
-12v. B7
SD1 E7 F7 /DTR2 TV74 (Reserved) N/C 13
GPIRQ15 SD1 A8
14
D C /ENDXFR B8 N/C /RING2 E8 F8 /RTS2 JTAG_BR/TC 15
GPIRQ14 SD0 A9 SD0 TV75 16
D0 Ground +12v. B9 /DCD2 E9 F9 SIN2
C0 Ground CHRDY A10 TV76
D1 /MCS16 (Key) /DSR2 E10 F10 SOUT2
C1 /SBHE AEN A11 TV77 2x8 Pin Header
D2 /IO16 /SMWTC B11 /CTS2 /DTR1
SA23 SA19 E11 F11
C2 A12

SA22
D3 IRQ10
LA23 SA19
/SMRDC B12
SA18 /RI1 E12 F12 /RTS1 CPU Module JTAG Port
C3 LA22 SA18 A13
D4 IRQ11 /IOWC B13 /DCD1 SIN1
SA21 SA17 E13 F13
C4 LA21 SA17 A14
D5 IRQ12 /IORC B14 /DSR1 SOUT1
SA20 SA16 E14 F14
C5 LA20 SA16 A15

SA19
D6 IRQ15 /DACK3 B15 N/C
SA15 TV2 /CTS1 E15 F15
C6 LA19 SA15 A16

SA18
D7 IRQ14 DRQ3 B16 N/C
SA14 CPU_+3.3V E16 F16 SSI_DI
C7 LA18 SA14 A17 4-8B 3-7C
SA17 /DACK0 D8 /DACK0 /DACK1 B17
SA13 SSI_CLK E17 F17 SSI_DO
C8 LA17 SA13 A18 3-7C 3-7C
DRQ0 D9 DRQ0 DRQ1 B18
SA12 CPU_+2.5V E18 F18
C9 /MEMRD SA12 A19 4-8B
/DACK5 D10 /DACK5 /REFRESH B19
SA11 TV3 E19 F19 (Rsvd_1) TV71
C10 /MEMWR SA11 A20

SD8 DRQ5 D11 DRQ5 CLK B20 N/C

SA10 TV72 (Rsvd_2) E20 F20 (Rsvd_0) TV70
C11 SD8 SA10 A21
/DACK6 D12 /DACK6 IRQ7 B21
SD9 C12 SD9 SA9 A22 SA9 E21 F21
============= "Future Accomodations Kit" ===========
DRQ6 D13 DRQ6 IRQ6 B22 18.432MHz +5VD
SD10 SA8 E22 F22
C13 SD10 SA8 A23 2-1B, 3-7C Default Default
/DACK7 D14 /DACK7 IRQ5 B23 36.864MHz E23 F23 /GPCS1 TV30 GPIRQ15 TV41 TV60
SD11 C14 SD11 SA7 A24 SA7 3-7C
DRQ7 D15 DRQ7 IRQ4 B24 24.576MHz E24 F24 /GPCS2 TV31 GPIRQ14 TV42 TV61
SD12 C15 SD12 SA6 A25 SA6 2-1B, 3-7C
D16 +5V. IRQ3 B25 (Rsvd_3) /GPCS3 GPIRQ12 TV43
SD13 C16 SD13 SA5 A26 SA5 TV73 E25 F25 TV32 TV62
SD14
D17 /MASTER16 /DACK2 B26 N/C
SA4 TV82 CLK_TIME/TEST E26 F26 /GPCS4 TV33 GPIRQ11 TV44 Patch 4 TV52 /DACK0
C17 SD14 SA4 A27
D18 Ground TC B27 (Rsvd_6) /GPCS5 GPIRQ10 TV45 Patch 3 DRQ0
SD15 C18 SD15 SA3 A28 SA3 TV80 E27 F27 TV34 TV53
D19 Ground BALE B28
SA2 TV81 (Rsvd_7) E28 F28 /GPCS6 TV35 GPIRQ9 TV46 TV54 /DACK5
(Key) SA2 A29
+5v. B29
TV83 IDE_DREQ E29 F29 /GPCS7 TV36 GPIRQ7 TV47 TV55 DRQ5
SA1 A30 SA1
OSC B30
SA0 TV84 IDE_/DACK E30 F30 PATCH1 TV37 GPIRQ4 GPIRQ6 TV48 TV56 /DACK6
SA0 A31
Ground B31
E31 F31 PATCH2 TV38 GPIRQ3 GPIRQ5 TV49 TV57 DRQ6
Ground A32
Ground B32
E32 F32 PATCH3 TV39 GPIRQ10 GPIRQ4 TV50 Patch 1 TV58 /DACK7
GPIRQ9 PATCH4 GPIRQ3 DRQ7
TV40 GPIRQ11 TV51 Patch 2 TV59
GPIRQ7
AUX_COMM TV63
0.1uF

4.7uF

10uF

2-1B, 3-7D
1

GPIRQ6
C3

C2

C1

AUX_PATCH TV64
2

GPIRQ5
2-1B TV65
GPIRQ4
GPIRQ3

GPIRQ(3..15)
+5VD

0.1uF

4.7uF

10uF
SA(0..25)

1
C6

C5

C4
2-1A, 3-7A

2
SD(0..15)
3-6D, 2-1A

BASE BOARD: CPU MODULE INTERFACE

OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6-33
Revision History: 62165.000.06
/MEMCS16
2-1B ECO# DATE REV DESCRIPTION DONE CHECKED
/MEMWR
2-1B WRS
/MEMRD #2984 06/19/02 01 Release to Production WRS
2-1B
#3022 12/19/02 Changed Power Supply connector WRS WRS
/SMEMWR 02
3-7C
/SMEMRD #3033 01/13/03 03 Implemented Brian’s hit list WRS WRS
3-7C
/SBHE #3077 05/27/03 04 Implemented Manufacturing’s hit list WRS BC
TV66
/GPIOCS Change Value R76 (Updated concurrently w/ ECO #3204)
2-1B #3198 07/21/04 05 WRS
/GPIOCS16
2-1B 8500 Mods (backlight ckt, /_IO_RESET signal, populate U3)
/GPIOWR #3204 07/21/04 06 WRS
3-6D, 2-1A
/GPIORD
3-6D, 2-1A
+5VD
RSTDRV
3-7C, 2-1B
GPRDY
TV67
GPAEN JTAG_TRIG TV85
2-1A, 3-7C
GPTC
TV68 A1b JTAG_STOP/TX
TV86
A1a GPALE TV69 JTAG_CMD/ACK
/DACK1 TV87
PC-104 Pinouts A B 3-7C E F
DRQ1 J13
/CHCHK A1 3-7C
B1
Ground E1 F1 JTAG_/TRST 1
SD7 A2 SD7 2
B2
RESDRV JTAG_TRIG E2 F2 JTAG_TDI 3
SD6 A3 SD6 4
B3
+5v. JTAG_BR/TC E3 F3 JTAG_TDO JTAG_TDO 5
SD5 A4 SD5 6
IRQ9 B4 JTAG_TMS JTAG_/TRST JTAG_TMS
E4 F4 7
GPIRQ10 SD4 A5 SD4 8
B5 JTAG_TDI
-5v. E5 F5 JTAG_TCK 9
GPIRQ11 SD3 A6 SD3 10
DRQ2 B6 N/C JTAG_TCK E6 F6 11
GPIRQ12 SD2 A7 SD2 TV88 12
B7
-12v. E7 F7 /DTR2 TV74 (Reserved) N/C 13
A8 SD1
GPIRQ15 D C
SD1
B8
14
/ENDXFR N/C /RING2 E8 F8 /RTS2 JTAG_BR/TC 15
A9 SD0 TV75
GPIRQ14 SD0 16
D0 B9 /DCD2
Ground +12v. E9 F9 SIN2
C0 Ground CHRDY A10 TV76
D1 /DSR2
/MCS16 (Key) E10 F10 SOUT2
C1 /SBHE AEN A11 TV77
D2 B11
/IO16 /SMWTC /CTS2 E11 F11 /DTR1
SA23 C2 A12 SA19
D3 IRQ10
LA23 SA19
/SMRDC B12
/RI1 E12 F12 /RTS1 CPU Module JTAG Port
SA22 C3 LA22 SA18 A13 SA18
D4 B13
IRQ11 /IOWC /DCD1 E13 F13 SIN1
SA21 C4 LA21 SA17 A14 SA17
D5 B14
IRQ12 /IORC /DSR1 E14 F14 SOUT1
SA20 C5 LA20 SA16 A15 SA16
D6 B15 N/C TV2
IRQ15 /DACK3 /CTS1 E15 F15
SA19 C6 LA19 SA15 A16 SA15
D7 IRQ14 DRQ3 B16 N/C CPU_+3.3V SSI_DI
E16 F16
SA18 C7 LA18 SA14 A17 SA14 4-8B 3-7C
/DACK0 D8 /DACK0 /DACK1 B17 SSI_CLK SSI_DO
E17 F17
SA17 C8 LA17 SA13 A18 SA13 3-7C 3-7C
DRQ0 D9 DRQ0 DRQ1 B18 CPU_+2.5V E18 F18
C9 /MEMRD SA12 A19 SA12 4-8B
/DACK5 D10 /DACK5 /REFRESH B19 Rsvd_1
TV3 E19 F19 TV71
C10 /MEMWR SA11 A20 SA11
DRQ5 D11 DRQ5 CLK B20 N/C Rsvd_2 Rsvd_0
TV72 E20 F20 TV70
SD8 C11 SD8 SA10 A21 SA10
/DACK6 D12 /DACK6 IRQ7 B21
E21 F21
SD9 C12 SD9 SA9 A22 SA9 ============= "Accomodation Provisions" ===========
DRQ6 D13 DRQ6 IRQ6 B22
3-7D, 2-1B
18.432MHz E22 F22 Default
+5VD
SD10 C13 SD10 SA8 A23 SA8 Default
/DACK7 D14 B23 36.864MHz /GPCS1
/DACK7 IRQ5
3-7D E23 F23 TV30 GPIRQ15 TV41 TV60
SD11 C14 SD11 SA7 A24 SA7
DRQ7 D15 B24 24.576MHz /GPCS2
DRQ7 IRQ4
3-7D, 2-1B E24 F24 TV31 GPIRQ14 TV42 TV61
SD12 C15 SD12 SA6 A25 SA6
D16 B25 Rsvd_3 /GPCS3
+5V. IRQ3
TV73 E25 F25 TV32 GPIRQ12 TV43 TV62
SD13 C16 SD13 SA5 A26 SA5
D17 B26 N/C CLK_TIME/TEST /GPCS4 /DACK0
/MASTER16 /DACK2
TV82 E26 F26 TV33 GPIRQ11 TV44 Patch 4 TV52
SD14 C17 SD14 SA4 A27 SA4
D18 B27 Rsvd_6 /GPCS5 DRQ0
Ground TC
TV80 E27 F27 TV34 GPIRQ10 TV45 Patch 3 TV53
SD15 C18 SD15 SA3 A28 SA3
D19 B28 Rsvd_7 /GPCS6 /DACK5
Ground BALE
TV81 E28 F28 TV35 GPIRQ9 TV46 TV54
(Key) SA2 A29 SA2
B29 IDE_DREQ /GPCS7 DRQ5
+5v.
TV83 E29 F29 TV36 GPIRQ7 TV47 TV55
SA1 A30 SA1
B30 IDE_/DACK /DACK6
OSC
TV84 E30 F30 PATCH1 TV37 GPIRQ4 GPIRQ6 TV48 TV56
SA0 A31 SA0
B31 DRQ6
Ground E31 F31 PATCH2 TV38 GPIRQ3 GPIRQ5 TV49 TV57
Ground A32
B32 /DACK7
Ground E32 F32 PATCH3 TV39 GPIRQ10 GPIRQ4 TV50 Patch 1 TV58
GPIRQ9 PATCH4 GPIRQ3 DRQ7
TV40 GPIRQ11 TV51 Patch 2 TV59
GPIRQ7
AUX_COMM TV63
10uF
0.1uF

4.7uF

1 1 1
2-1B, 3-7D
GPIRQ6
C3

C2

C1

2 2 2
TV64
AUX_PATCH
GPIRQ5
2-1B TV65
GPIRQ4

GPIRQ3

GPIRQ(3..15) +5VD

10uF
0.1uF

4.7uF
1 1 1

C6

C5

C4
SA(0..25) 2-1A, 3-7B 2 2 2

SD(0..15)
3-6D, 2-1A

Base Board Schematic:

CPU Module Interface
(version 62165.000.06)
Sheet 2 of 4
 6-34 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 2300

+RAW +5VD —5vA +5vA -15vA +15vA

+15vA +RAW

R62
U20 LP2987IM-5.0
2.00K R82 R83 D12

1
N.C. D9 Plus15V
5 4 A K K A
OUTPUT INPUT
R60 R78 6
SENSE /SHUTDOWN
8
1N4148
Plus15V 7 2
/ERROR DELAY
GND R84 D10 +RAW
10.0K 332K K A

0.1uF
R67

10.0K

10uF

10uF

10uF
1N4148

C39
Vcc_PSM

1
10uF

K
1
R64 R61

C36
Minus15V

D11
D15

2
0.1uF
10%
1

2
C38

C37

C14

C15
1
14.0K 10.0K 3

2
2
D13
1 BAT54C
DGND
3 U19

16
2

VDD
13 11 PMA0
X0 A
R63 R70 BAT54C 14 10 PMA1
Plus5VA X1 B
15 9 PMA2
X2 C
10.0K 10.0K D14 12
X3
R69

10.0K

1 1
3 X4
TV29 2
TV1 5
X5
R72 R71 TV27 TV28 2 3 U18
Minus5VA X6 X
C40
BAT54C 4
X7 2 1 16
OSC1

4.000 MHz
30.1K 10.0K

VSS
VEE
10.0K

10.0K

INH
R102
22pF

1
R68
6 PMA0

X1
8
7
6
RB0/INT
7 PMA1
C41

2
RB1
(A SMALL PATCH OF GROUND)
2 1 15 8 PMA2
OSC2/OUT RB2 PWRFAIL
9
DGND 22pF RB3 2-8D
17 10
RA0/AN0 RB4 ERROR
18
RA1 RB5
11 2-8D
1 12
+5vD R65 RA2/AN2/VREF RB6

3.32K
R76
2 13
RA3/AN3 RB7
10.0K TV24 MCLR

100K
4 3

R66

100K
MCLR RA4/T0CK1

R85
R75 J11
+RAW VDD VSS SOCKET
Vcc_PSM
1

14

5
10.0K 18-PIN DEBUG
DIP 2

R79 C35 3LCD DEBUG/TEST

R73 1 2 SU18
DSP3.3VA DGND DGND
3-7B 1.00K 0.1uF
10.0K 1 D16 10%
Vcc_PSM Vcc_PSM
3
2

DSP3.3VB R74 BAT54C

3-7B
10.0K
R77

R80
CPU_+3.3V
1-4C
10.0K 1 D17
3
2 FPLED1 3-6D
R81 BAT54C
CPU_+2.5V
1-4C
FPLED2 3-6D
10.0K

BASE BOARD: POWER SUPPLY MONITOR

OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6-35
FP_ROW-COL
3-1B
DISPLAY
3-6D
ENC1 /LED
3-1B 3-1B
ENC2 /ENCODER
3-1B 3-1B
PWRFAIL U3 LED_PULSE
4-2C 3-1B
ERROR +5VD +5VD +5VD 74ACT245DW +5VD
4-2C
/GPIORD 1 DIR 20
/AUX_BUSEN Vcc To Serial I/O Card
R103 R104 19 /OE
TV22 TV23 +5VD
U11g U13g 10.0K J9

14

14
U13e 10.0K
SD0 9 A8 B8 11
AUX_D0 1
11 10 SD1
C33 C34 AUX_D1

1
74HC14D 74HC14D U13c 8 A7 B7 12
2
SD2 AUX_D2 3
0.1uF 0.1uF ENC1 7 A6 B6 13

2
74HC14D 5 6
SD3
4
6 A5 B5 14
AUX_D3 /CTS2 5

7
SD4 AUX_D4 /RTS2 6
TV78 TV79 U13d 74HC14D 5 A4 B4 15 SIN2 7
SD5 AUX_D5 R3 J12 SOUT2
U13f
4 A3 B3 16 TCK 1 2
8
ENC2 SD6 AUX_D6 /RI1 9
9 8 3 A2 B2 17
100K TDO 3 4 /DCD1 10
13 12
SU11 SU13 SD7 2 A1 B1 18
AUX_D7 TMS /DSR1 11
5 6
74HC14D NC /CTS1 12
ERROR Gnd R2 /DTR1

1
SOCKET SOCKET
74HC14D NC 7 8 13

0.1uF
10
NC
/RTS1

C8
PWRFAIL TDI 9 10
14
16-PIN 16-PIN SIN1

2
(Spares) DIP DIP 100K SOUT1
15
ENC2 16
NOTE:
ENC1 R1 17

U11a +5VD RSTDRV 18

D7 and D8 are not populated in R46 604 18.432MHz

19
1 16 1 2
100K 20
standard build. 21
AUX_D7 22
74HC14D +5VD AUX_D6 23

0.1uF

0.1uF

0.1uF

0.1uF
1

1
C10

C11

C12

C13
2 15
U15 +5VD AUX_D5 24
D7 D8 U10 a R27 AUX_D4 25
R48 604

2
PS2506-4 SD0 AUX_D3 26
2 18 AUX_D2
100K 1A1 1Y1 27
SD1 AUX_D1

11
26
38
43
59
74
86
88
89
90
95
39
91
82
66
51
34
18

62
73
15
4 16 28

4
1 A. 1 A. R28 604 U11b 1A2 1Y2
SD2 AUX_D0 29
6 14
3 14 3 4 TV16 1A3 1Y3 G G G G G G G G G G G V V V V V V V V # # # # 30
8 12 SD3 U1 n n n n n n n n n n n c c c c c c c c T T T T 31
1A4 1Y4 PATCH1 32
11 9 SD4 d d d d d d d d d d d c c c c c c c c C D M D PATCH2
4 13 74HC14D 2A1 2Y1
SD5 I I I I I I I I K O S I
33
TV17 13 7 PATCH3 34
R29 2A2 2Y2 1 N/C N N / / / / / / PATCH4
REMOTE INTERFACE R49 604 U10 b 15 5 SD6
2 T T O O O O O O 57 DISPLAY
35
36
PS2506-4 2A3 2Y3 N/C DISPLAY AUX_0
(DB-25 - Rear Panel) DGND 100K 17
2A4 2Y4
3 SD7 SA0 16 58 /LED AUX_1 37
TV18 (RESERVED) #LED AUX_2 38
R30 604 U11c SA1 94 SA1 #ENCODER 48 /ENCODER AUX_3 39
Chas
5 12 5 6
1
1G VCC
20 SA2 96 SA2 LED_PULSE 84 LED_PULSE 40
41
L1

0.1uF
19 10 SA3 /FPCOL_A

1
C32
J10 TV10 2G
GND 12 SA3 #FPCOL_A 46 42
74HC14D SA4 /FPCOL_B SA2 43
3.9uH 6 11
R31
10 SA4 #FPCOL_B 54 SA1

2
44
U10 c 74ACT244DW SA5 9 SA5 #FPROW_A 45 /FPROW_A SA0 45
1 R50 604 46
PS2506-4 100K SA6 8 SA6 #FPROW_B 47 /FPROW_B /USB_CS
14 47
2 U11d
TV19 SA7 6 SA7 P/N: 24983.000.01 #FPROW_C 52 /FPROW_C
/GPIOWR
48
SA8 /FPROW_D 49
15 R44 604 U10 d /MISC_IN 13 SA8 Altera EPM 7064 STC 100-10 #FPROW_D 56
50
7 10 9 8 SA9 14 SA9 #FP_BUSEN 79 /FP_BUSEN /GPIORD
3
U14 +5VD SA10 17 (RESERVED) #AUX_BUSEN 76 /AUX_BUSEN
16
8 9 74HC14D SA11
4 R32 2 18 SD0 19 (RESERVED) #DSP_BUSEN 80
C18
R51 604 PS2506-4 1A1 1Y1
SD1 SA12 20 #AUX0 65 AUX_0
17 4 16 (RESERVED) 2 1
100K 1A2 1Y2 SA13 21 71 AUX_1
5 6 14 SD2 (RESERVED) #AUX1
1A3 1Y3 SA14 AUX_2 0.1uF
18 U11e 8 12 SD3 23 (RESERVED) #AUX2 64
R33604 U12 a 1A4 1Y4 SA15 25 42 AUX_3
6 1 16 11 10 11 9 SD4 (RESERVED) #AUX3 C17
2A1 2Y1
SD5 SA16 29 #SPI_CS 41 /SPI_CS
19 13 7 (RESERVED) 2 1
74HC14D
2A2 2Y2
SD6 SA17 30 #USB_CS 40 /USB_CS
7 2 15 15 5 (RESERVED)
2A3 2Y3 SA18 10uF
20 PS2506-4 R34 17 3 SD7 31 (RESERVED)
R52 604 2A4 2Y4 SA19 32 63 RSTDRV
8 (RESERVED) (RESERVED)
100K SA20 33 67 /GPIOCS
21 1 20 (RESERVED) (RESERVED)
U11f
1G VCC SA21 35 68 /MEMCS AUX_COMM
9 R35 604 19 10 (RESERVED) (RESERVED) 1-4B, 3-7D

1
U12 b GND SA22 /GPIOCS16

0.1uF
C30
2G 36 (RESERVED) (RESERVED) 69
22 3 14 13 12
/MEMCS16 AUX_PATCH
SA23 1-4B

2
37 (RESERVED) (RESERVED) 75
10 74ACT244DW /MEMRD
74HC14D SA24 93 (RESERVED) (RESERVED) 81
23 4 13
R36 B /MEMWR RSTDRV
SA25 92 (RESERVED) # (RESERVED) 83 3-7C, 1-5D
11
R53 604 PS2506-4 K # # M 24.576MHz /FP_BUSEN 3-6D
5 N/C # # L (RESERVED) 85
24 100K G G M R I
TV20 7 N/C I I E S
12
U13a G P P M T S M C /SPI_CS
R37 604 /REMT_IN P I I H E 3-7C
25 U12 c z C T
13
5 12 1 2 N N N N A O O N N O N N N N N N /GPIOCS
/ / / / E R W 1 O / / I I U / / / / / /
8 N C C N N T C C 1-5D
74HC14D BKLITE_ON C C C C N D R C C C C /MEMCS
6 11
R38 /GPIOCS16
1-5D

100
22
24
27
28
99
98

87
97
49
50
61
44
60
53
55
70
72
77
78
L3 L2 R54 604 PS2506-4 /MEMCS16
Chas
100K R56 2.00K 1-5D
3.9uH 3.9uH CONT1 CONTRAST /MEMRD
1-5D
U13b R57 /MEMWR
R39 604 U12 d CONT2 5.62K 1-5D

R59
7 10 3 4 24.576MHz

301
1-4B, 3-7C
R58 18.432MHz
CONT3 14.0K 1-4B, 3-7C
74HC14D /GPIOWR
R47

8 9
R40 3-6D, 1-5D
301

TV26 TV25 /GPIORD

R55 604 PS2506-4 3-6D, 1-5D
+RAW 100K TV21 GPAEN
+5VD 3-7B, 1-5D
R45 10.0 D3 U4 CONTRAST
A K 3-6D
Q3 20
Vcc OE 1 /MISC_OUT SA(0..25)
3

D4 1N4148 1-5A, 3-7A

1N4148

R43 10.0 R41 TALLY1 CP 11

K

A K 1
SD0
D5

2
QO D0 3 SD(0..15)
Q4 SD1 3-6D, 1-5A
1N4148 3

1N4148 1.62K 5 Q1 D1 4
A

6 7 SD2
K

Q2 D2
2

1 MMBT3904 SD3
D6

9 Q3 D3 8
12 Q4 D4 13 SD4
A

15 Q5 D5 14 SD5
2

MMBT3904 R42 16 17 SD6

DGND TALLY2 Q6 D6 SD7
19 Q7 D7 18
C7
1

DGND
1.62K
0.1uF
10 Gnd
BASE BOARD: CPLD, GENERAL PURPOSE INTERFACE & REMOTES
2

74HC374
6-36 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 2300

CPU Module
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6-37
+3.3 VDC

R24 R25
150 ohm, 5%, 0805 150 ohm, 5%, 0805
10

5
C

RN4
4.7 k, 5%, CTS 745?083472J
PCI_AD[0..31]
1
9
8
7
6
4
3
2

PCI_AD31 PCI_AD31 D
AD31 A2 66 AD31
Req4-n U3 A1 PCI_AD30 PCI_AD30 67 +3.3 VDC
Req3-n Req4-n AD30 PCI_AD29 PCI_AD29 AD30
R3 Req3-n AD29 B1 68 AD29
Req2-n P4 B2 PCI_AD28 PCI_AD28 70
Req1-n Req2-n AD28 PCI_AD27 PCI_AD27 AD28
N3 Req1-n AD27 D2 71 AD27
D1 PCI_AD26 PCI_AD26 72
AD26 PCI_AD25 +3.3 VDC PCI_AD25 AD26 R21
AD25 E1 73 AD25
U4 E2 PCI_AD24 PCI_AD24 74 0 ohm, 1%, 0805
Gnt4-n AD24 PCI_AD23 PCI_AD23 AD24
T3 Gnt3-n AD23 F1 78 AD23
P3 G1 PCI_AD22 PCI_AD22 79
Gnt2-n AD22 PCI_AD21 PCI_AD21 AD22 TxData+
N4 Gnt1-n AD21 G2 81 AD21 TPTDP 54
H2 PCI_AD20 PCI_AD20 82
AD20 PCI_AD19 PCI_AD19 AD20
AD19 H1 83 AD19
IntD-n H4 J1 PCI_AD18 PCI_AD18 86 R19
IntC-n IntD-n AD18 PCI_AD17 PCI_AD17 AD18 49.9 ohm, 1%, 0805
H3 IntC-n AD17 J2 87 AD17
IntB-n J3 K2 PCI_AD16 PCI_AD16 88
IntB-n AD16 AD16

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
R2 PCI_AD15 PCI_AD15 101 C5
PCI_IntA-n AD15 PCI_AD14 RN5 PCI_AD14 AD15 10 pf, 1206
AD14 T2 102 AD14 1 Tx+
T1 PCI_AD13 PCI_AD13 104 C6
AD13 PCI_AD12 R-PACK PCI_AD12 AD13 0.1 uf
AD12 U1 105 AD12
U2 PCI_AD11 PCI_AD11 106 R20
AD11 PCI_AD10 PCI_AD10 AD11 49.9 ohm, 1%, 0805 TxCT
AD10 V2 108 AD10 2 CT1

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
V1 PCI_AD9 PCI_AD9 109

9
AD9 PCI_AD8 PCI_AD8 AD09
AD8 W1 110 AD08
Y2 PCI_AD7 PCI_AD7 112 53 TxData- 3
AD7 PCI_AD6 PCI_AD6 AD7 TPTDM Tx-
AD6 Y1 113 AD6
AA1 PCI_AD5 PCI_AD5 115
AD5 PCI_AD4 PCI_AD4 AD5
AD4 AA2 116 AD4
AB2 PCI_AD3 PCI_AD3 118 46 RxData+ 4
AD3 PCI_AD2 PCI_AD2 AD3 TPRDP Rx+
AD2 AB1 119 AD2
AC1 PCI_AD1 PCI_AD1 120
AD1 PCI_AD0 PCI_AD0 AD1 R22
AD0 AC2 121 AD0 49.9 ohm, 1%, 0805 C8
F2 PCI_CBE3-n 75 0.1 uf
CBE3-n PCI_CBE2-n CBEN3-n
CBE2-n K1 89 CBEN2-n
R1 PCI_CBE1-n 100 RxCT 5
CBE1-n PCI_CBE0-n CBEN1-n C7 CT2
CBE0-n W2 111 CBEN0-n 0.1 uf
A5 PCI_Reset-n 62 R23
Reset-n PCI_DevSel-n Reset-n 49.9 ohm, 1%, 0805
DevSel-n M1 95 DevSel-n
N1 PCI_Stop-n 96
Stop-n PCI_IRdy-n Stop-n
IRdy-n L2 92 IRdy-n
M2 PCI_TRdy-n 93 45 RxData- 6
TRdy-n PCI_Frame-n TRdy-n TPRDM Rx-
Frame-n L1 91 Frame-n
N2 PCI_PErr-n 97
PErr-n PCI_SErr-n PErr-n
SErr-n P2 98 SErr-n 7 NC
P1 PCI_Parity 99
Parity Par YelLEDA 9 YelLEDA
L3 PCI_Req0-n 64 17 X1 10
Req0-n PCI_Gnt0-n Req-n X1 YelLEDC
Gnt0-n M3 63 Gnt-n
K3 PCI_IntA-n 61 GrnLEDA 11
IntA-n IntA-n Y1 GrnLEDA
12 GrnLEDC
Ecliptek ECSMA-25.000M
8 Gnd
PCI_AD24 76 18 X2 13
IDSel X2 Gnd
14 Gnd

+3.3 VDC 122 3VAux

123 RJ-45 MAGJack LED
PwrGood C3 C4 J1
59 PME-n/ClkRun-n 18 pf 18 pf

+3.3 VDC +3.3 VDC

R12 +3.3 VDC

330 ohm, 5%, 0805 R16
R10 330 ohm, 5%, 0805
33.2 ohm, 5%, 0805 6
PCI_ClkOut PCI_ClkReference Vcc
ClkPCIOut A6 1 ClkRef
3 PCI_Clk1Out PCI_Clk1 60
Clk1 PCIClk
Clk2 2
R13 5 R14
470 ohm, 5%, 0805 Clk3 33.2 ohm, 5%, 0805
Clk4 7
4 Vss 28 ColDetect
8 R15 29 5
ClkOut 470 ohm, 5%, 0805 CarSense MgmtDataClk MDIO
6 RxClk MgmtDataIO 4
CY2305SI-1H 15 13
C2 U11 RxDataVal/MA11 RxOE
14 RxErr/MA10 TxEn 30
100 pf 12 25
R11 RxData3/MA9 TxData3/MA15 R18
11 RxData2/MA8 TxData2/MA14 24
33.2 ohm, 5%, 0805 10 23 14.7 k, 5%, 0805
PCI_ClkIn PCI_ClkReturn RxData1/MA7 TxData1/MA13
ClkPCIIn G3 7 RxData0/MA6 TxData0/MA12 22
31 TxClk
AMD ElanSC520-100AC
U1C
141 MD7 MWRN 131
140 MD6 MRDN 130
139 MD5 MCSN 129
138 MD4/EEDO EESel 128
135 MD3 MA5 3
134 MD2 MA4/EECLK 2
CnfgDisn 133 1
MD1/CNFGDISN MA3/EEDI LED100Link
132 MD0 MA2/LED100Link
MA1/LED10Link
144
143
LEDActivity
CPU MODULE: ETHERNET
MA0/LEDAcitvity 142

R17 National DP83815/83816

1 k, 5%, 0805 U10A
 6-38 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 2300

GP_SMemRd-n = GPA20 + GPA21 + GPA22 + GPA23 + GPA24 + GP_MemRd-n +5 VDC +5 VDC +5 VDC

GPA23 3 18 GP_SMemWr-n GP_SMemWr-n = GPA20 + GPA21 + GPA22 + GPA23 + GPA24 + GP_MemWr-n

R1 I0 Out0 GP_SMemRd-n
4 I1 Out1 19
MasterReset-n +3.3 VDC 5 I2 Out2 20
GPA24 ResetDrv-n = GP_Reset
6 I3 Out3 21

2
10 k, 5%, 0805 GPA21 7 23
GPA20 I4 Out4 JP1 JP2 JP3
9 I5 Out5 24 ResetDrv-n PrgReset = !MasterReset-n
GPA22 10 25 BuffRd-n
I6 Out6
11 I7 Out7 26 BuffRd-n = GP_MemRd-n & GP_IORd-n
12

1
I8
13 I9
17 I10 BHE
27 I11 +5 VDC
+3.3 VDC 2 IClk
16 OutEn P1B
3 MstrReset Vcc 4 B1 Gnd
GAL 20LV8D-7LJ ISA_Reset B2
U6A Reset
B3 Vcc
1 2 PwrGood C20 AE8 IRQ9 B4
Gnd Reset-n PwrGood PIO14/GPIRQ9 -5 VDC IRQ9
B5 -5 VDC
MIC8114TU DReq2 B6
U5 GP_Reset -12 VDC DReq2
GPReset AC22 B7 -12 VDC
D20 PrgReset B8
PrgReset +12 VDC OWS-n
B9 + 12 VDC
B10 Gnd
R2 ISA_SMemWr-n B11
10 k, 5%, 0805 ISA_SMemRd-n SMemWr-n
B12 SMemRd-n
ISA_IOWr-n B13
ISA_IORd-n IOWr-n
B14 IORd-n
DAck3-n B15
DReq3 DAck3-n
B16 DReq3
AC9 DAck1-n B17
PIO11/GPDAck1-n DReq1 DAck1-n
PIO7/GPDReq1 AF10 B18 DReq1
B19 Refresh-n
B20 SysClk
AF7 IRQ7 B21
PIO16/GPIRQ7 IRQ6 IRQ7
PIO17/GPIRQ6 AE7 B22 IRQ6
AD7 IRQ5 B23
PIO18/GPIRQ5 IRQ4 IRQ5
PIO19/GPIRQ4 AD6 B24 IRQ4
AE6 IRQ3 B25
PIO20/GPIRQ3 DAck2-n IRQ3
B26 DAck2-n
AD11 TC B27
PIO4/GPTC ALE TC
PIO0/GPALE AE12 B28 ALE
GPCS1-n B24 ROMCS1-n/GPCS1-n B29 Vcc
GPCS2-n C23 ROMCS2-n/GPCS2-n B30 OSC
GPCS3-n AC21 PITGate2/GPCS3-n B31 Gnd
GPCS4-n AA24 TimerIn1/GPCS4-n B32 Gnd
GPCS5-n AC20 TimerIn0/GPCS5-n PC104-P1
FlashStatus AE10 PIO6/GPDReq2 PIO2/GPRdy AF11
AD9 AE11 P1A
PIO10 PIO10/GPDAck2-n PIO3/GPAEN NMI
PIO27/GPCS0-n AE4 A1 IOChk-n
AC23 ISA_D7 A2
GPCS6-n TimerOut1/GPCS6-n ISA_D6 D7
GPCS7-n AD23 TimerOut0/GPCS7-n A3 D6
AD10 ISA_D5 A4
IDE_DReq PIO5/GPDReq3 ISA_D4 D5
IDE_DAck-n AE9 PIO9/GPDAck3-n A5 D4
ISA_D[0..15] ISA_D3 A6
ISA_D2 D3
A7 D2
D17 GPD15 GPD7 47 2 ISA_D7 ISA_D1 A8
GPD15 GPD14 GPD6 1A1 1B1 ISA_D6 ISA_D0 D1
GPD14 C17 46 1A2 1B2 3 A9 D0
C15 GPD13 GPD5 44 5 ISA_D5 IOChRdy A10
GPD13 GPD12 GPD4 1A3 1B3 ISA_D4 ISA_AEN IOChRdy
GPD12 D14 43 1A4 1B4 6 A11 AEN
D13 GPD11 GPD3 41 8 ISA_D3 ISA_A19 A12
GPD11 GPD10 GPD2 1A5 1B5 ISA_D2 ISA_A18 A19
GPD10 C13 40 1A6 1B6 9 A13 A18
C12 GPD9 GPD1 38 11 ISA_D1 ISA_A17 A14
GPD9 GPD8 GPD0 1A7 1B7 ISA_D0 ISA_A16 A17
GPD8 C11 37 1A8 1B8 12 A15 A16
C10 GPD7 GPD15 36 13 ISA_D15 GPA15 47 2 ISA_A15 ISA_A15 A16
GPD7 GPD6 GPD14 2A1 2B1 ISA_D14 GPA14 1A1 1B1 ISA_A14 ISA_A14 A15
GPD6 D10 35 2A2 2B2 14 46 1A2 1B2 3 A17 A14
D9 GPD5 GPD13 33 16 ISA_D13 GPA13 44 5 ISA_A13 ISA_A13 A18
GPD5 GPD4 GPD12 2A3 2B3 ISA_D12 GPA12 1A3 1B3 ISA_A12 ISA_A12 A13
GPD4 C9 32 2A4 2B4 17 43 1A4 1B4 6 A19 A12
C8 GPD3 GPD11 30 19 ISA_D11 GPA11 41 8 ISA_A11 ISA_A11 A20
GPD3 GPD2 GPD10 2A5 2B5 ISA_D10 GPA10 1A5 1B5 ISA_A10 ISA_A10 A11
GPD2 C7 29 2A6 2B6 20 40 1A6 1B6 9 A21 A10
B5 GPD1 GPD9 27 22 ISA_D9 GPA9 38 11 ISA_A9 ISA_A9 A22
GPD1 GPD0 GPD8 2A7 2B7 ISA_D8 GPA8 1A7 1B7 ISA_A8 ISA_A8 A9
GPD0 C4 26 2A8 2B8 23 37 1A8 1B8 12 A23 A8
GPA7 36 13 ISA_A7 ISA_A7 A24
GPA6 2A1 2B1 ISA_A6 ISA_A6 A7
1 1DIR 1OE 48 35 2A2 2B2 14 A25 A6
24 25 GPA5 33 16 ISA_A5 ISA_A5 A26
GPA25 2DIR 2OE GPA4 2A3 2B3 ISA_A4 ISA_A4 A5
GPA25 C3 32 2A4 2B4 17 A27 A4
D4 GPA24 74ACLV162450/SO GPA3 30 19 ISA_A3 ISA_A3 A28
GPA24 GPA23 U7A GPA2 2A5 2B5 ISA_A2 ISA_A2 A3
GPA23 D3 29 2A6 2B6 20 A29 A2
F3 GPA22 GPA24 GPA1 27 22 ISA_A1 ISA_A1 A30
GPA22 GPA21 GPA23 GPA0 2A7 2B7 ISA_A0 ISA_A0 A1
GPA21 C19 26 2A8 2B8 23 A31 A0
C14 GPA20 4.75 k, 5%, 0805 A32
GPA20 GPA19 4.75 k, 5%, 0805 R4 Gnd
GPA19 C21 1 1DIR 1OE 48
B22 GPA18 R3 24 25 PC104-P1
GPA18 GPA17 +3.3 VDC +3.3 VDC 2DIR 2OE
GPA17 E24
D24 GPA16 4.75 k, 5%, 0805 74ACLV162450/SO ISA_A[0..23]
GPA16 R36 U9A
GPA[0..24] P2A
AF12 BHE-n C1
PIO1/GPBHE-n Gnd
C2 SBHe
C24 GPA15 ISA_A23 C3
GPA15 GPA14 ISA_A22 LA23
GPA14 R24 C4 LA22
P24 GPA13 ISA_A21 C5
GPA13 GPA12 GPA23 ISA_A23 ISA_A20 LA21
GPA12 N24 47 1A1 1B1 2 C6 LA20
N23 GPA11 GPA22 46 3 ISA_A22 ISA_A19 C7
GPA11 GPA10 GPA21 1A2 1B2 ISA_A21 ISA_A18 LA19
GPA10 M23 44 1A3 1B3 5 C8 LA18
C2 GPA9 GPA20 43 6 ISA_A20 ISA_A17 C9
GPA9 GPA8 GP_SMemWr-n 1A4 1B4 ISA_SMemWr-n ISA_MemRd-n LA17
GPA8 M24 41 1A5 1B5 8 C10 MemRd-n
F23 GPA7 GP_SMemRd-n 40 9 ISA_SMemRd-n ISA_MemWr-n C11
GPA7 GPA6 1A6 1B6 ISA_IOWr-n ISA_D8 MemWr-n
GPA6 C1 38 1A7 1B7 11 C12 SD8
H24 GPA5 37 12 ISA_IORd-n ISA_D9 C13
GPA5 GPA4 GPA19 1A8 1B8 ISA_A19 ISA_D10 SD9
GPA4 L24 36 2A1 2B1 13 C14 SD10
J23 GPA3 GPA18 35 14 ISA_A18 ISA_D11 C15
GPA3 GPA2 GP_Reset 2A2 2B2 ISA_Reset ISA_D12 SD11
GPA2 K24 33 2A3 2B3 16 C16 SD12
G4 GPA1 GP_AEN 32 17 ISA_AEN ISA_D13 C17
GPA1 GPA0 GPA17 2A4 2B4 ISA_A17 ISA_D14 SD13
GPA0 J24 30 2A5 2B5 19 C18 SD14
GPA16 29 20 ISA_A16 ISA_D15 C19
GP_MemRd-n GP_MemRd-n 2A6 2B6 ISA_MemRd-n SD15
GPMemRd-n F24 27 2A7 2B7 22 C20 Key
C18 GP_MemWr-n GP_MemWr-n 26 23 ISA_MemWr-n
GPMemWr-n 2A8 2B8 PC104-P2
C16 GP_IOWr-n 1 48 ISA_OE-n
GPIOWr-n GP_IORd-n 1DIR 1OE
GPIORd-n G24 +3.3 VDC 24 2DIR 2OE 25

AD5 GPDBufOE-n 74ACLV162450/SO

PIO24/GPDBUFOE-n U8A
GPD[0..15]
GPD[0..15]

GPA[0..24]
P2B
D1 Gnd
AD4 MemCS16-n D2 +3.3 VDC
PIO26/GPMemCS16-n IOCS16-n MemCS16-n
PIO25/GPIOCS16-n AC4 D3 IOCS16-n
AD8 IRQ10 D4
PIO13/GPIRQ10 IRQ11 IRQ10 DReq2 DAck3-n
PIO23/GPIRQ0 AE5 D5 IRQ11 2 5 2 5
AF5 IRQ12 D6 DReq3 3 DAck5-n 3
PIO22/GPIRQ1 IRQ15 IRQ12 DReq1 DAck1-n
PIO21/GPIRQ2 AF6 D7 IRQ15 4 4
AF8 IRQ14 D8 DReq0 6 DAck0-n 6
PIO15/GPIRQ8 DAck0-n IRQ14 DReq5
PIO12/GPDAck0-n AC8 D9 DAck0-n 7 7
AF9 DReq0 D10 8 DAck6-n 8
PIO8/GPDReq0 DAck5-n DReq0 DReq6 DAck7-n
D11 DAck5-n 9 9
DReq5 D12 DReq7 1 10 DAck2-n 1 10
AMD ElanSC520-100AC DAck6-n DReq5
D13 C C
U1B DReq6
DAck7-n
D14
D15
DAck6-n
DReq6
DAck7-n
4.7 k, 5%, CTS 745?083472J
RN2
4.7 k, 5%, CTS 745?083472J
RN3
CPU Module:
DReq7 D16
+5 VDC D17
D18
DReq7
+5 VDC
Master-n
General Purpose
D19 Gnd
D20 Gnd
PC104-P2
Bus
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6-39
DRAM Circuitry
MD[0..31]

MA[0..12]

V26 MA12 MA12 36 53 MD15 MA12 36 53 MD31

MA12 MA11 MA11 A12 DQ15 MD14 MA11 A12 DQ15 MD30
MA11 U26 35 A11 DQ14 51 35 A11 DQ14 51
MD31 A24 T26 MA10 MA10 22 50 MD13 MA10 22 50 MD29
MD30 MD31 MA10 MA9 MA9 A10/AP DQ13 MD12 MA9 A10/AP DQ13 MD28
A23 MD30 MA9 R26 34 A9 DQ12 48 34 A9 DQ12 48
MD29 B21 R25 MA8 +3.3 VDC MA8 33 47 MD11 +3.3 VDC MA8 33 47 MD27
MD28 MD29 MA8 MA7 MA7 A8 DQ11 MD10 MA7 A8 DQ11 MD26
A20 MD28 MA7 P25 32 A7 DQ10 45 32 A7 DQ10 45
MD27 A19 P26 MA6 MA6 31 44 MD9 MA6 31 44 MD25
MD26 MD27 MA6 MA5 MA5 A6 DQ9 MD8 MA5 A6 DQ9 MD24
B18 MD26 MA5 N26 30 A5 DQ8 42 30 A5 DQ8 42
MD25 A17 N25 MA4 MA4 29 13 MD7 MA4 29 13 MD23
MD24 MD25 MA4 MA3 R7 MA3 A4 DQ7 MD6 R8 MA3 A4 DQ7 MD22
B16 MD24 MA3 M25 26 A3 DQ6 11 26 A3 DQ6 11
MD23 A15 M26 MA2 4.75k, 5%, 0805 MA2 25 10 MD5 4.75k, 5%, 0805 MA2 25 10 MD21
MD22 MD23 MA2 MA1 MA1 A2 DQ5 MD4 MA1 A2 DQ5 MD20
B14 MD22 MA1 L26 24 A1 DQ4 8 24 A1 DQ4 8
MD21 A13 L25 MA0 MA0 23 7 MD3 MA0 23 7 MD19
MD20 MD21 MA0 A0 DQ3 MD2 A0 DQ3 MD18
B12 MD20 DQ2 5 DQ2 5
MD19 A11 U25 BA1 21 4 MD1 21 4 MD17
MD18 MD19 BA1 BA0 BA1 DQ1 MD0 BA1 DQ1 MD16
B10 MD18 BA0 T25 20 BA0 DQ0 2 20 BA0 DQ0 2
MD17 A9
MD16 MD17 CKELow SDQM1 CKEHigh SDQM3
B8 MD16 37 CKE UDQM 39 37 CKE UDQM 39
MD15 B23 15 SDQM0 15 SDQM2
MD14 MD15 RAMWE-n LDQM LDQM
A22 MD14 SWEA-n E26 16 WE-n 16 WE-n
MD13 A21 F25 RAMCAS-n 17 17
MD12 MD13 SCASA-n RAMRAS-n CAS-n CAS-n
B20 MD12 SRASA-n K25 18 RAS-n 18 RAS-n
MD11 A18 V25 RAMCS-n 19 19
MD10 MD11 SCS0-n CS-n CS-n
B17 MD10
MD9 A16 H25 SDQM3 38 38
MD8 MD9 SDQM3 SDQM2 CLK CLK
B15 MD8 SDQM2 G26
MD7 A14 H26 SDQM1
MD6 MD7 SDQM1 SDQM0 32 Mbit x 16 SDRAM 32 Mbit x 16 SDRAM
B13 MD6 SDQM0 G25
MD5 A12 SDQM[0..3] U2A U3A
MD4 MD5
B11 MD4 SRASB-n K26
MD3 A10 F26
MD2 MD3 SCASB-n
B9 MD2 SWEB-n E25
MD1 A8
MD0 MD1
B7 MD0 SCS1-n W25
J25 R5
MECC6 SCS2-n 22 ohm, 5%, 0805
Y26 MECC6 SCS3-n J26
MECC5 D25 DRAMClk
MECC5
MECC4 C26 MECC4 ClkMemOut B19 ClkMemOut
MECC3 Y25
MECC2 MECC3
W26 MECC2
MECC1 D26 22 ohm, 5%, 0805
MECC0 MECC1 R6
C25 MECC0
5 2 MECC4 A4 ClkMemIn
+3.3 VDC ClkMemIn
3 Route the ClkMemIn trace back and forth so that it is the
4 MECC6 same length as the SDRAMClk trace to either chip.
6 MECC3 AMD ElanSC520-100AC
7 MECC2 U1A C1
4.7 pf Route the SDRAMCLK "T" style so that the trace length
8 MECC5
MECC1 to each SDRAM chip is the same length.
9
10 1 MECC0
C Place the two (2), 22 ohm series terminating resistors as
CTS 745?083102J close as possible to the ElanSC520.
RN1
Place the 4.7 fp capacitor as close as possible to the
Elan SC520. Adjust the value to equalize loading on
SDRAMCLK and ClkMemIn nets.

Flash Circuitry

GPA[0..24]
GPA24 56
GPA23 A24
30 A23
GPA22 1
GPA21 A22 GPD[0..15]
3 A21 GPD[0..15]
GPA20 4 52 GPD15
GPA19 A20 D15 GPD14
5 A19 D14 50
GPA18 6 47 GPD13
GPA17 A18 D13 GPD12
7 A17 D12 45
GPA16 8 41 GPD11
GPA15 A16 D11 GPD10
10 A15 D10 39
GPA14 11 36 GPD9
GPA13 A14 D9 GPD8
12 A13 D8 34
GPA12 13 51 GPD7
GPA11 A12 D7 GPD6
17 A11 D6 49
GPA10 18 46 GPD5
GPA9 A10 D5 GPD4
19 A9 D4 44
GPA8 20 40 GPD3
GPA7 A8 D3 GPD2 +3.3 VDC
22 A7 D2 38
GPA6 23 35 GPD1
GPA5 A6 D1 GPD0
24 A5 D0 33
GPA4 25
GPA3 A4
26 A3 Vpen 15 +3.3 VDC
GPA2 27 R9
+3.3 VDC GPA1 A2 10k, 5%, 0805
28 A1
GPA0 32 A0
31 Byte-n
STS 53 FlashStatus
ROMRd-n 54 OE-n
FlashWR-n 55 WE-n

BootCS-n 14 CE0-n
2 CE1-n
29 CE2-n

ResetDrv-n 16 RP-n
E28F128J3A-150
U4A CPU Module: Memory
 6-40 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 2300

+3.3 VDC

R26
4.75 k, 5%, 0805

P3A
A1 A1
AF25 AC13 Trig/Trace A2
NC0 Trig/Trace BR/TC A2
AF23 NC1 BR/TC AD24 A3 A3
AF1 AE21 JTAG_TMS A4
NC2 JTAG_TMS JTAG_TDI A4
AE25 NC3 JTAG_TDI AF21 A5 A5
AE24 AD21 JTAG_TCK A6
NC4 JTAG_TCK A6
AE1 NC5 A7 A7
AD26 AD3 Ring2-n A8
NC6 PIO31/Ring2-n DCD2-n A8
AD25 NC7 PIO30/DCD2-n AE3 A9 A9
AD2 AF3 DSR2-n A10
NC8 PIO29/DSR2-n CTS2-n A10
AD1 NC9 PIO28/CTS2-n AF4 A11 A11
AC25 AA3 Ring1-n A12 +2.5 VDC
NC10 Ring1-n DCD1-n A12
AC3 NC11 DCD1-n V4 A13 A13
AA26 Y3 DSR1-n A14
NC12 DSR1-n CTS1-n A14
AB4 NC13 CTS1-n V3 A15 A15
AB3 NC14 A16 A16
E23 AD19 SSI_Clk A17
NC15 SSI_Clk A17
D23 NC16 A18 A18
C22 A19 C10 C11
NC17 CFG2 A19 0.001 uf 0.01 uf
E3 NC18 CF_DRAM-n/CFG2 W24 A20 A20
C6 NC19 A21 A21
C5 +3.3 VDC +2.5 VDC A22
NC20 A22
B6 NC21 A23 A23
B4 NC22 A24 A24
B3 Y24 PITOut2/CFG3 A25 4.75 k, 5%, 0805
NC23 PITOut2/CGF3 ClkTimer/ClkTest A25 R32
A3 NC24 ClkTimer/CltTest A7 A26 A26
A27 +3.3 VDC C12
A27 0.01 uf
A28 A28
AE17 PData15 IDE_DReq A29 A29
AD17 R28 A30
PData14 IDE_DAck-n A30
AC17 PData13 +3.3 VDC A31 A31
AC16 A32 R31
PData12 R27 4.75 k, 5%, 0805 A32 10 ohm, 5%, 0805
AD16 PData11
AE16 R29 32X2Conn +3.3 VDC
PData10
AF16 PData09 +3.3 VDC
AF15 4.75 k, 5%, 0805
PData08 4.75 k, 5%, 0805 Vcc_Osc LF_PLL
AE15 PData07 4 1 AF24
P3B VccOsc VccCPU LF_PLL
AD15 PData06
AD14 AF17 Stop/TX B1
PData05 Stop/TX CmdAck B1
AE14 U24 B2 C9 2 3 AC26
PData04 CmdAck JTAG_TDO B2 Gnd ClkOut 33MXtal2
AF14 AF22 B3 0.1 uf
PData03 JTAG_TDO JTAG_TRst-n B3
AF13 PData02 JTAG_TRst-n AE22 B4 B4
AE13 B5 Epson SG-636PCE-33MC2 AB26
PData01 B5 X1 33MXtal1
AD13 PData0 B6 B6
AE23 DTR2-n B7
DTR2-n RST2-n B7 RTC_Clock
AD18 PAddr2 RTS2-n AD22 B8 B8 A4 C4 AE26
SIn2 VBat Vbat 32.768 khz 32kXtal2
AE18 PAddr1 SIn2 V24 B9 B9 A5 C5
SOut2 Vbat 32.768 khz
AF18 PAddr0 SOut2 U23 B10 B10
W3 DTR1-n B11 B4 D4 AF26
DTR1-n RTS1-n B11 Vbat 32.768 khz 32kXtal1
AC12 ICE_Dis RTS1-n W4 B12 B12 B5 D5
SIn1 Vbat 32.768 khz
T24 PBReq SIn1 AE2 B13 B13
T23 AF2 SOut1 B14 A7 C7
TV SOut1 B14 T T
AF20 PBGnt B15 B15 A8 C8
SSI_DI T T
AE20 PRW SSI_DI AE19 B16 B16
AD12 AF19 SSI_DO B17 B7 D7 AMD ElanSC520-100AC
TClk SSI_DO B17 T T U1E
B18 B18 B8 D8
DataStrb/CFG1 T T
DataStrb/CFG1 AC24 B19 B19
AD20 CS_ROM_GPCS-n/CFG0 B20
CS_ROM_GPCS-n/CFG0 B20 DS32khz
B21 B21
B22 U13A
+3.3 VDC B22
GPCS1-n B23 B23
GPCS2-n B24 B24
GPCS3-n B25 B25
GPCS4-n B26 B26
GPCS5-n B27 B27
4.75 k, 5%, 0805 B28
GPCS6-n B28
R30 B29
GPCS7-n B29
B30 B30
B31 B31
B32 B32
32X2Conn

ROMRd-n AB23 ROMRd-n

FlashWr-n AB24 FlashWr-n
BootCS-n AB25 BootCS-n
ROMBufOE-n AA25

AMD ElanSC520-100AC
U1D

CPU Module: Miscellaneous Connections

OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6-41
5 4 3 2 1
+3.3 VDC

+2.5 VDC +3.3 VDC +3.3 VDC +3.3 VDC

+5 VDC C201 34 127
See Table NC1 Res3
42 NC2 Res2 50
43 NC3 Res1 41 28 Vss Vdd 1 28 Vss Vdd 1 Vcc 37
1 Vin Vout 3 48 NC4 41 Vss Vdd 14 41 Vss Vdd 14 Vcc 9
54 Vss Vdd 27 54 Vss Vdd 27
C14 C15 +3.3 VDC 43
1 uf 10 uf, low ESR Vccq
6 Vssq Vddq 3 6 Vssq Vddq 3 21 Gnd
C13 + 2 4 35 36 12 9 12 9 42
10 uf, low ESR Gnd Gnd FSGnd FSVdd Vssq Vddq Vssq Vddq Gnd
46 Vssq Vddq 43 46 Vssq Vddq 43 48 Gnd
20 PHYGnd1 PHYVdd1 33 52 Vssq Vddq 49 52 Vssq Vddq 49
LT1963EST_2.5 32 21
U14 PHYGnd2 PHYVdd2 R200 E28F128J3A-150
8 137 See Table, 5%, 0805 32 Mbit x 16 SDRAM 32 Mbit x 16 SDRAM U4B
IOGnd1 IOVdd1 U2B U3B
16 IOGnd2 IOVdd2 85
+3.3 VDC 26 27
+5 VDC IOGnd3 IOVdd3
D
84 IOGnd4 IOVdd4 19 D
136 IOGnd5 IOVdd5 9 +3.3 VDC +3.3 VDC
C200 C202
1 3 65 117 See Table See Table C125 C126 C127 C132 C133 C134
Vin Vout PCIGnd1 PCIVdd1 1 uf 0.1 uf 0.01 uf 1 uf 0.1 uf 0.01 uf
77 PCIGnd2 PCIVdd2 107
C17 C18 90 94
1 uf 10 uf, low ESR PCIGnd3 PCIVdd3
103 PCIGnd4 PCIVdd4 80
C16 + 2 4 114 69
10 uf, low ESR Gnd Gnd PCIGnd5 PCIVdd5
57 MACGnd1 MACVdd1 125
LT1963EST_3.3 124 58
U15 MACGnd2 MACVdd2
51 TxDigGnd TxDigVdd 56

52 TxIOGnd1
55 TxIOGnd2
38 RxAnalGnd1 RxAnalVdd1 47 +3.3 VDC
44 RxAnalGnd2 RxAnalVdd2 39

37 SubGnd1
49 40 Vref
SubGnd2 Vref
126 SubGnd3 +3.3 VDC +3.3 VDC +3.3 VDC
National DP83815/8316 +3.3 VDC
U10B R33 4 4 4
See Table, 5%, 0805 Gnd Gnd Gnd
10 Gnd Vcc 42 10 Gnd Vcc 42 10 Gnd Vcc 42
1 NC Vcc 28 15 Gnd Vcc 31 15 Gnd Vcc 31 15 Gnd Vcc 31
+3.3 VDC +3.3 VDC 8 NC 21 Gnd 21 Gnd 21 Gnd
15 +5 VDC +5 VDC +5 VDC
C178 C179 C180 C181 C182 C183 NC
22 NC 28 Gnd 28 Gnd 28 Gnd
1 uf 0.1 uf 0.01 uf 1 uf 0.1 uf 1 uf 34 18 34 18 34 18
Gnd Vcc Gnd Vcc Gnd Vcc
14 Gnd 39 Gnd Vcc 7 39 Gnd Vcc 7 39 Gnd Vcc 7
45 Gnd 45 Gnd 45 Gnd
Component Value Table for 83815/83816 shared components GAL 20LV8D-7LJ
U6B 74ACLV162450/SO 74ACLV162450/SO 74ACLV162450/SO
U7B U8B U9B
C Component 83815 Value 83815 Value C
+3.3 VDC +3.3 VDC +5 VDC
+5 VDC +5 VDC
C175 C176 C177
+3.3 VDC
1 uf 1 uf 0.1 uf R33 9.31 k ohm, 5%, 0805 10.0 k ohm, 5%, 0805
C150 C151 C155 C156 C159 C160
R200 0 ohm, 5%, 0805 No Stuff 0.01 uf 1 uf 1 uf 0.01 uf 1 uf 0.01 uf

C200 0.01 uf, 0805 0.1 uf, 0805

C201 No Stuff 1.0 uf, 0805

C202 No Stuff 1.0 uf, 0805

+3.3 VDC +3.3 VDC +3.3 VDC
C153 C157 C158 C161 C162
1 uf 1 uf 0.01 uf 1 uf 0.01 uf

A1 Gnd
A2 Gnd
A3 Gnd
+3.3 VDC VBat +2.5 VDC A6
D1 Gnd
A9 Gnd Vcc C2
1N4148 B1 C3
Gnd Vcc
A26 VccRTC VccCore AC15 B2 Gnd
VccCore AC14 B3 Gnd
10 ohm, 5%, 0805 AC7 B6
R34 C20 VccCore Gnd
B VccCore AC6 B9 Gnd B
0.1 uf AC5 C1 D2
VccCore Gnd Vcc
B25 BBatSense VccCore R23 C6 Gnd Vcc D3
VccCore P23 C9 Gnd
T16 Gnd VccCore T4 D1 Gnd
D3 D2 T15 R4 D6
1N4148 1N4148 Gnd VccCore Gnd
T14 Gnd VccCore H23 D9 Gnd
T13 Gnd VccCore G23
T12 Gnd VccCore F4
T11 Gnd VccCore E4
BBatSense R16 D19 DS32khz
Gnd VccCore U13B
R15 Gnd VccCore D18
1 k, 5%, 0805 R14 D12
Gnd VccCore
1

R35 C21 R13 D11 +3.3 VDC

BT1 0.1 uf Gnd VccCore
R12 Gnd
BATTERY R11 Gnd
P16 Gnd VccIO AC19
P15 AC18
2

Gnd VccIO
P14 Gnd VccIO AC11
P13 Gnd VccIO AC10
P12 Gnd VccIO AA4
P11 Gnd VccIO Y4
N16 Gnd VccIO AA23
N15 Gnd VccIO Y23
N14 Gnd VccIO W23
N13 Gnd VccIO V23
N12 Gnd VccIO L23
N11 Gnd VccIO K23
M16 Gnd VccIO M4
M15 Gnd VccIO L4
M14 Gnd VccIO K4
M13 Gnd VccIO J4
M12 Gnd VccIO D22
M11 Gnd VccIO D21
L16 Gnd VccIO D16
L15 Gnd VccIO D15
L14 Gnd VccIO D8
L13 Gnd VccIO D7
A L12 Gnd VccIO D6 A
L11 Gnd VccIO D5

+2.5 VDC

A25 GndAnalog VccAnalog B26

AMD ElanSC520-100AC
U1F

CPU Module: Power and Ground Distribution

5 4 3 2 1
6-42 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 2300

RS232 BOARD PARTS LOCATOR

OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6-43
+5VD

SU1

C5 SOCKET
0.1uF
24 PIN DIP
C4
U1 0.1uF

9
MAX208ECNG
C3

VCC
10 11
C1+ V+
0.1uF 12
C1-
C2 C6
13 15
C2+ V-
14
C2- 0.1uF
0.1uF
5 2
T1 IN T1 OUT
18 1
T2 IN T2 OUT
19 24
T3 IN T3 OUT
21 20
T4 IN T4 OUT
6 7
R1 OUT R1 IN
4 3
R2 OUT R2 IN
22 23
R3 OUT R3 IN
+5VD 17 16

GND
R4 OUT R4 IN

C1

8
J1 J2
0.1uF L1 5
2 1
3.9uH 9
4 3
RESERVED RESERVED 4
6 5
RESERVED RESERVED 8
8 7
/DCD1 RESERVED 3
10 9 D1 D2
/CTS1 /DSR1 7
12 11
/RTS1 /DTR1 2
14 13
SOUT1 SIN1 6
16 15 DIODE SCHOTTKY 1
HEADER 8X2
DIODE SCHOTTKY DB9M

RS232 DAUGHTER BOARD

6-44 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 2300

POWER SUPPLY PARTS LOCATOR

OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6-45
Plus15V

Gnd Lift
SW2 CR11 CR15
1 2 1 2
Mounting Mounting

3
Kit 1N4004 1N4004 Kit
N/C

U3 +5v Reg Plus15V

R1 C21 +15v Reg 15025.000.01
15025.000.01 U1
1 2 1 2 MC78M15CT MC78M05CT
0.1 F, 50v PlusRAW 1 3 1 3 Plus5VA
20%

0.1 F, 50v
0.1 F, 50v
AGND

20%
0.1 F, 50v
0.1 F, 50v
1

20%
C19
CR9 33V Transorb

1
20%
C20

C10

100 F, 25v
C9 100 F, 25v 10%

6.8V Transorb
C11

5.6v Zener
1000 F, 35v 20%

20%

1N4734A
CR13 22V Transorb
2

2
(Monitor) Plus15V

1N4004

1
2

10%

CR19
CR17
1N4004

C3
Chassis Ground Pigtail, 3" long
(Monitor) Minus15V

2
(Lug w/Green AWG 18) J5

2
C18
1

1
(Monitor) Minus5VA

2
24

CR5
2

2
AGND AGND

CR8
(Monitor) Plus5VA 23
Power Transformer 22
A1 Lug YELLOW/WHITE 21
Toroid Assy 20
AGND
Line Filter Assembly
(off board) AGND 19
18

100 F, 25v10%
17

CR10 33V Transorb

YELLOW

1000 F, 35v 20%

1N4004
16

22V Transorb
15

1N4004
WHITE ORANGE/WHITE
14

100 F, 25v
6.8V Transorb
1

1
4 CR12 DGND

5.6v Zener
1

1
CR16 13

1N4734A
C17
To: Base Board

1
10%

CR20
2 1 2 1 12

CR18

C2
2

2
DirtyGnd
2

2
11

CR6
BLUE ORANGE

CR7

2
C_Gnd 1N4004 1N4004 10

2
9

C8
8

CR14
BROWN RED/WHITE
U2 -15v Reg U4 -5v Reg +RAW 7
MC79M15CT MC79M05CT 6
1/2 A, Slow Blow Blow
Cap

MinusRAW 5
H7

2 3 2 3 Minus5VA
BLACK RED 4

0.1 F, 50v
3

0.1 F, 50v 20%

4 2 3 1 1 4 2 5 3 6

2.2 F, 35v

2.2 F, 35v
1

1
2

1
Minus15V

C6
2

2
Fuse

+5VD

20%
C16

C15
1
Fuse Holder

Mounting

C7
F1

20%

20%
Kit

2
1

1
H6

15025.000.01
J1 J2
AGND AGND

J4
4
2
3
1

1
4
2
5
3
6

Minus15V
1

Mounting 20
2

Kit 19
2

115v/230v
18
1

17
V1
1

V2 15025.000.01 16
4

SW1 15
AGND
14
+5VD 13
12
AGND
DGND 11
10 To: I/O Board
AGND 9
8
Plus15V 7
6
J7 Minus15V 5
PlusRAW MinusRAW 4
1 2
Minus5VA 3
DGND 3 4 C_Gnd 2
Plus15V Minus15V Plus5VA 1
5 6
+5VD 7 8 Plus5VA
CR22 Minus5VA 9 10

1 +RAW
2
Testing Access
3
J3
Dual Schotkey CR23 +RAW 16
Mounting 15
1 Kit 14
2 +RAW DGND
13
3 U5 DGND 12
Ref: PCB

5
15025.000.01 11
/ON 10
FAB 32181.000.02 Dual Schotkey
CR21 4
9
FDBK +5VD To: DSP Board
6800 F, 16v 20%

6800 F, 16v 20%

8
L1 L2
1 1 LM2576T 7
22V Transorb

VIN
2 6

100 F, 50v, Low ESR

OUT 2 1 2 1 2
1

3 5
CR2
C14

C13

0.1 F, 50v 20%

4
100uH, 3A 7.7uH, 4A

470 F, 16v, HFS

470 F, 16v, HFS

100 F, 16v, HFS

GND
2

1
2

6.8V Transorb
Dual Schotkey

C22
2

1
3

Schottky
+5VD

40v, 3A
2
1

1
2

C12

CR4
CR3

C5

C4

C1
1
DGND +RAW

2
1 J6

2
2
2
(optional fan)
DGND DGND 3

Heatsink Bar, 8300 DGND

50286.000.01 * DirtyGnd DirtyGnd

(Isolated return path for LCD backlight current.)

POWER SUPPLY
6-46 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 2300

I/O BOARD PARTS LOCATOR

OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6-47
LEFT ANALOG INPUT
+15V
J100 R130 R131
FEMALE L100 IC100A 3.65K 1.50K 1%

8
FILTER 0.1%
1 2 1 3 R100 L101 R101 3 OPA2134PA
E201 C108
4 1.00K H 1200uH 4.99K 1
SHELL
1% 5% 1% C101 2

2
1000PF C100 47PF 47PF

3
0.001UF 5%,100V -15V 5%,100V
R132 TP100

4
CR100 1KV -15V+15V 6 IC104B
R102 7 R137
TRANSZORB R103 CR102 CR101 1.62K
5.36K AGND3 1%
5 249OHM
1N4148W 1N4148W
0.1% 4.99K OPA2134UA 1%
R110 R135
1% R156 R134 3.65K
10.0K R111 0.1% +5VA

12

13
1% IC101 1.62K 1.50K 1%

4
ADG222 R136 R138 C109 C110
768OHM 1% R154
R104 R133 150OHM 4700PF 4700PF
1% 3.65K

Vss
WR

Vdd
AGND3 82.5K AGND3 3 AGND3 3.65K AGND3 1% 5%,50V 5%,50V
S1 R112 0.1% 10OHM
1% 2 0.1% -15V + C129 C127 1% C128 + C130
D1 10UF 10UF
15 14 2.10K +15V 0.1UF 0.1UF
D2 S2

4
10 20V 50V 50V 20V
D3 1% TP102
R106 7 11 2 IC104A
D4 S3

8
604OHM R113 IC105A 1 R139

23
IC107

7
1% DO NOT STUFF R105 TP101
5 6 5.62K
3 3 249OHM AK5383
GND S4
4.99K 1%
1 1%
OPA2134UA

VD
VA
1% 2 + C131 C118 C119
R114

8
IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4
+15V +5VA 10UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 1 6
AGND3 -15V 20V VREFL ZCAL
IC100B 14.7K OPA2134UA 50V 50V

4
L102 6 1% 10 /RSTAD
RST (SHT3)

16

8
FILTER 7 C113 R140 C120 C121 2
R107 L103 R108 R142 1.50K GNDL
1 3 5 0.1UF 0.1UF 9
1%
CAL NC
AGND4 50V 50V

DD0

DD1

DD2

DD3
1.00K H 1200uH 4.99K C103 1.00M
OPA2134PA 0.47UF 3 18
1% 5% 1% 1% VCOML DFS
2

1000PF C102 DD[0..3] 25V

0.001UF R109 47PF 12
CR103 5.36K 5%,100V SMODE1
1KV 4
TRANSZORB 0.1% AINL+
E202 11
SMODE2
AGND3 + C112
C111 10UF R141 5 19
20V 1.50K
AINL- HPFE
0.1UF
RIGHT ANALOG 1%
AGND3 50V
+15V 17 8.192MHZA
J103 R143 R144 MCLK (SHT6)
FEMALE L104 25
3.65K 1.50K 1% AINR+

8
FILTER IC102A 14 IN_BCLK
R115 L105 R116 0.1% SCLK (SHT6)
1 2 1 3 3 OPA2134PA E203 C114 AGND5
4 1.00K H 1200uH 4.99K 1 24
AINR-
SHELL
1% 5% 1% C105 2 16
FSYNC
2

1000PF C104 47PF 47PF C123 C124

3

0.001UF 5%,100V -15V 5%,100V 0.1UF 0.1UF 26

CR104 R153 TP103 VCOMR

4
1KV -15V+15V 6 IC106B AGND4 50V 50V 13 IN_FCLK
TRANSZORB R150 LRCK (SHT6)
R117 1.62K 7
R118 CR107 CR106
5.36K AGND4 1%
5 249OHM
28
1N4148W 1N4148W VREFR R158
0.1% 4.99K OPA2134UA 1% + C122 C125 C126 15 AIN_DATA
R125 R147 10UF SDATA
1% 0.1UF 0.1UF 75OHM
R157 R146 3.65K 20V (SHT6)
10.0K 50V 50V 27 20 1%
R126 0.1% GNDR TEST

12

13
1% IC103 1.62K 1.50K 1%

4
R148 E205

DGND
BGND

AGND
ADG222 R151 C115 C116 R155
AGND4 768OHM 1%
R123 R145 150OHM 4700PF 4700PF 249OHM
1% 3.65K 0.1%

Vss
WR

Vdd
82.5K AGND4 3 AGND4 3.65K AGND4 1% 5%,50V 5%,50V AGND4 1%
1%
S1 R127 0.1%
2 -15V
D1

21

22

8
15 14 2.10K
D2 S2

4
10 1%
R119 D3 IC106A TP105
7 11 2
604OHM D4 S3 R128 R149
DO NOT STUFF IC105B 1
1% R124 TP104
5 6 5.62K 5 3 249OHM
GND S4
4.99K 1%
7 OPA2134UA 1% AGND4
1%
6 +15V
R129

8
IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4
AGND4
IC102B 14.7K OPA2134UA
L106 6 1% A/D GND

16

8
FILTER 7 C117
1 3 R120 L107 R121 5 R152

DD4

DD5

DD6

DD7
1.00K H 1200uH 4.99K 1.00M
C107 OPA2134PA 0.47UF AGND4
1% 5% 1% 1%
2

1000PF C106 R122 DD[4..7] 25V

0.001UF 5.36K 47PF
CR105 1KV 0.1% 5%,100V
TRANSZORB
AGND4 E204
AGND4 +5VD
20

IC108
D0 3 2 DD0
D0 Q0
VCC

D1 4 5 DD1 AGND7 AGND6 AGND5 AGND4 AGND3 AGND

D1 Q1
D2 7 6 DD2
D2 Q2
D3 8 9 DD3
D3 Q3
D4 13 12 DD4
D4 Q4
D5 14 15 DD5
D5 Q5
D6 17 16 DD6
D6 Q6
D7 18 19 DD7
D7 Q7
GND

DD[0..7]
CLK

D[0..7]
OE

(SHT5)
74HC374
LEFT & RIGHT ANALOG INPUTS
10

11

/INGAINCS
(SHT5)
 6-48 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 2300

+5VA
MCLK R232 +5VA
(SHT6) 10OHM 1%
C201
1.0UF
R238 35V + C210 C211 C212 + C213 C214
C232
110OHM 10UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 10UF 0.1UF

12
1.0UF

4
1% 20V IC203 20V
35V 50V 50V 50V

+
3

ZCEN

VA+
VD+
C203 Butterworth AGND6 AGND6 AGND5 AGND5
C231 0.1UF 50V 13
R200 C233 f 3dB = 40KHz VA
33PF 0.1UF 50V (SHT5) /OUTGAINCS 2
10OHM CS C216
5%,100V (SHT5) GATESDO 3 C215
1% SDATAI +
10UF LEFT ANALOG
(SHT5) GATESCK 6 7 0.1UF
SCLK SDATAO 20V OUTPUT

AGND5
C221 /MUTELROUTS 50V
R201 R202 R203 8
MUTE TP204 AGND5 J201
IC201B

18

24
8.45K 8.45K 24.9K 1%

2
IC211 1500PF OPA2134UA TP202 GAINDATAO MALE
1% 1% 5 (SHT5)
1%,50V 7 16 14 R235 1% R221 R222
AINL AOUTL

DVDD

VCOM
AVDD

4
TP200 6 150OHM 14.3K 49.9K 1% 2 1
3 IC201A 9 11 1% 4
MCLK 2 R210 AINR AOUTR C223
/RSTDA 4 17 C217 R204 R205 SHELL
PD VREFH 1 L204
AOUT_BCLK 5 470PF TP205 L200

AGNDR
AGNDL
(SHT6) BICK 3 3.48K JM391K

DGND
3.48K 8.45K R206 12PF 5%

3
AOUT_DATA 6 25 1%,50V OPA2134UA 1% LEFT +15V FILTER
(SHT6) SDATA P/S NC 1% 1% 11.3K
AOUT_FCLK 7 +15V OUTPUT 1 3

4
(SHT6) LRCK E301 1% IC204A 3.9UH
8 R233 C219 TRIM

CW
8

6
R237 SMUTE
9 22 11.3K 470PF CS3310 2 OPA2134UA IC207

7
DFS AOUTL R207 R208 R209 1000PF

2
5

8
E302 1%,50V VR200 1 4 DRV134PA

15

10
10.0K 1% 1%
10 23 8.45K 1% 8.45K 1% 24.9K 1% AGND5 10K 3 CR202
DEM0 AOUTL+ TRANSZORB
11 C222AGND5 AGND5 +15V 3
DEM1 R211 R212 R213
20 AGND5 AGND6 AGND5 AGND6

1
AOUTR AGND5 L205

2
12 E303 8.45K 1% 8.45K 1% 24.9K 1% IC202B L201
DIF0 1500PF OPA2134UA R224 JM391K

5
13 21 5 AGND5 FILTER
DIF1 AOUTR+ 1%,50V
14 7 14.3K 1 3
DIF2 E304 TP201 R225 3.9UH

4
6 1%
TP203 R223 1.00M
26 IC202A AGND5
CKS0 2 R220 1000PF

2
27 16 C218 R217 R218 49.9K C224 1%
CKS1 VREFL 1
+ C200 28 470PF 1% CR203
DVSS

AVSS

BVSS
CKS2 3 3.48K
1.0UF C202 1%,50V OPA2134UA 3.48K 8.45K R219 TRANSZORB
1%
35V 0.1UF +15V 1% 1% 11.3K 1.0UF 50V
50V C220 1% IC204B 6
R234

8
AK4393VF
1

470PF 7
19

15

R214 R215 R216 11.3K Servo

1% 1%,50V 5
f 3dB = 0.15Hz
8.45K 1% 8.45K 1% 24.9K 1% OPA2134UA
AGND6 AGND6
AGND6 AGND5
Q200
AGND6 RIGHT ANALOG
+5VD 2 SST113 1
OUTPUT
IC210A
R243 4 C225 J202
10.0K MALE

3
2
1% 5
R239 Q201 1500PF 1%,50V 2 1
LM339 49.9K 2 SST113 1 4
1% C226
SHELL
R244 L206
L202
10.0K JM391K

3
1000PF 1%,50V +15V FILTER
1% IC210B

3
+5VD 1 3
6 3.9UH
AGND6 C227

6
1
Q202 IC208
20

7
7 1000PF

2
8
IC209 R240 2 SST113 1 4 DRV134PA
D0 3 2 75uS LEFT 49.9K 1500PF 1%,50V CR204
D0 Q0 LM339
VCC

D1 4 5 50uS LEFT 1% 3 TRANSZORB

D1 Q1 C228
D2 7 6 75uS RIGHT

1
D2 Q2 L207

2
D3 8 9 50uS RIGHT L203
D3 Q3 JM391K

5
D4 13 12 /MUTELROUTS IC210C 1000PF 1%,50V AGND6 FILTER
D4 Q4 Q203
D5 14 15 /RSTAD 8 1 3
D5 Q5 (SHT2) AGND6 2 SST113 1 3.9UH
D6 17 16 /RSTDA 14
D6 Q6
D7 18 19 /SRCRST 9
D7 Q7 (SHT5) 1000PF

2
LM339 R241
GND

CLK

D[0..7] 49.9K CR205

OE

3
(SHT5) 1% TRANSZORB
+15V
74HC374
R228
1
10

11

3
/MISCANLGCS IC210D 49.9K 1%
(SHT5)
10 AGND6
13 R236 C229
11 150OHM
R242 1% 12PF 5%
LM339 49.9K

4
1% IC206A

12
R227 2 OPA2134UA
14.3K 1
1% 3
AGND6
+15V
RIGHT

8
OUTPUT
TRIM R230

CW
14.3K 1%
VR201 R231
R229
10K AGND6 1.00M
49.9K
C230 1%
1%
AGND6

1.0UF TH 50V
IC206B 6
7
5
Servo
f 3dB = 0.15Hz
LEFT & RIGHT ANALOG OUTPUTS
OPA2134UA

AGND6
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6-49
R330
110OHM C306 C307
1% 0.1UF 10UF -5VA
C304
+
50V 20V
IC300

+
C351 AGND7
COMP_DATA 1 20
33PF (SHT6) DATA -VCC
100UF 25V AGND7
5%,100V COMP_BCLK 2 19 C305
(SHT6) BCLK REF DC +5VA
3 18 R300
C334 C335

+
-5VA NC NC NC NC R304 R305 C409
AGND7 2.49K 1%
4 17

+
-VDD SERVO DC 100UF 25V 1.00K 2.21K 1%
C302 5 16 C333 47PF 12PF 33PF 10UF 20V
C300 DGND AGND R328 1%
0.1UF 5%,100V 5%,100V AGND7
10UF 6 15

4
+
50V +VDD AGND 5%,100V 154K -15V C410
20V L300 L301
COMP_WCLK 7 14 1% 2 IC302A
WCLK IOUT E402

4
3.501MH 3.397MH 0.1UF 50V
C301 (SHT6) -15V 1
C303 8 13 AGND7 IC308A R301
10UF NC NC NC NC 2 3 AGND7

16
+
0.1UF C308 OPA2134UA
20V 9 12 6 1.87K 0.1%
+5VA 50V NC 20BIT BPO DC R302 R303 IC402A
3 C337 C338 C339 +15V

+
10 11 R306

8
NC INVERT +VCC C336 1000PF 100PF 470PF 2.05K 82.5K

VCC
+5VA OPA627AP 1.00M 2
100UF 25V +15V 470PF 1%,50V 1%,50V 1%,50V 0.1% 1% NC NC
PCM1704U C340 1% 15

7
AGND7 1%,50V NC NC
C309 + C310 E401 POTSDO 9 10
10UF 0.47UF 25V,10% (SHT5) DQ COUT NC
0.1UF
20V AGND7 AGND7 AGND7
50V POTSCK 7 14
IC302B (SHT5) CLK SOUT NC
POTCS 6

GND
6 (SHT5) RST
AGND7

VB
7
AGND7
5
DS1267
OPA2134UA

1
SCA1 INPUT
SENSITIVITY -5VA
AGND7
VR400

CW
10K
AGND7
SCA 1 INPUT R402 R405
L405 20 0K 24 9K
1 L402 JM391K
FILTER R410
C400 C402 E405
2 1 3 3.9UH R403
2.21K 1%
2.49K C1
0.01UF 1%,50V 12PF

12
R400 1% COMPOSITE 1
2

5%,100V IC402B L5 OUTPUT

NC

1.00K
J4A L404 1000PF JM391K L1
1%

H0
L401 JM391K C401 IC1 J2 FILTER
FILTER R404 6 3 6 R411 1% 3.9UH 1 3 J4B
IC401B IC3B VIN VOUT 1 2
C411 1 3 3.9UH 7 2 1
20.0K 6 NC NC BW NC 75.0OHM 3 4 R412
1500PF1%,50V 1% 13 5 5 8
7 W0 NC NC NC NC 604OHM

2
4700PF 4 7 HDR2X2 1000PF 4
5 OPA2134PA V- V+ 1%
2

+15V UNSHRD
NC

R401 R418 -15V BUF634P L6 3

OPA2134UA
AGND7 604OHM JM391K L2

L0
PILOT REF/ 20.0K
1% AGND7 1% FILTER BNC DUAL
SCA 2 INPUT DS1267 3.9UH 1 3

11
L403
1 L400 JM391K

2
FILTER 1000PF
2 1 3 3.9UH E1
AGND7
J400 C412

2
4
AGND7 J2/J3 Source Impedance
HDR2X2
2

1
3
UNSHRD R419 1 2 75 ohm
NC

J5A 4700PF
2.21K 1%
3 4 0 ohm (as shipped)
Function J400 R409 C2
+5VA C403
SCA 2 INPUT 1 2 10.0K
+

1000PF

3
IC402C
10UF 20V PILOT REF (as shipped) 3 4 COMPOSITE 2
C407 L7 OUTPUT
-15V

4
H1
C404 0.1UF JM391K L3
R408 2 IC3A IC2 J3 FILTER
AGND7 R420 1% J5B
0.1UF 50V 82.5K 1% 1 3 6 3.9UH 1 3
VIN VOUT 1 2
5 3 2 1 75.0OHM R421
AGND7 W1 NC NC BW NC 3 4
5 8 604OHM
NC NC
8

NC NC

2
IC400 OPA2134PA 4 7 HDR2X2 1000PF 4
C406 V- V+
R406 R407

8
9 +15V +15V UNSHRD 1%
VoutL
VCC

PILOT_WCLK 1 C405 10.0K 10.0K R417 -15V BUF634P 3

L1
(SHT6) LRCIN 33PF 20.0K
5
+

CAP C408 5%,100V R416 1%

PILOT_DATA 2 10UF 20V DS1267 BNC DUAL
DIN -15V
4

(SHT6)

4
6 1500PF 75OHM
VoutR
PILOT_BCLK 3 1%,50V 2 IC401A
(SHT6) BCKIN AGND7
4 1
NC NC R414
12 3
DM OPA2134UA E410
10 10.0K
NC NC R413 AGND7
13 +15V
NC TEST 10.0K
8

11 R415 AGND7
GND

NC NC 82.5K
MCLK 14
(SHT6) SCKI 1%
PCM1744
7

AGND7
COMPOSITE/SCA
 6-50 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 2300

E550
PICSDI
/AESINCS
AES/EBU PICSDI AES/EBU
DIGITAL PICSCK DIGITAL
R501 /AESOUTCS
INPUT OUTPUT
TP502 49.9K PICSDO
J500 1% R513 J502
FEMALE L500 49.9K T502 L504 MALE
1% TP500
FILTER C500 PICSCK SC937 FILTER
TP504 R517
1 2 1 3 T500 R500 IC500 IC502 1 5 3 1 2 1
PICSDO
4 SC937 1% 1 28 1 28 110OHM 4
0.1UF SDA/CDOUT SCL/CCLK SDA/CDOUT SCL/CCLK
SHELL 5 1 110OHM R514 1% SHELL
1000PF 2 27 2 27 4 8 1000PF

2
AD0/CS AD1/CDIN 110OHM
AD0/CS AD1/CDIN

3
3 1% 3
8 4 EMPH 26 EMPH 26

2
L501 TXP E536 +5VD TXP TP501
FILTER TP503 4 25 4 25
RXP TXN E537 TP505 RXP TXN L505

2
1 3 +5VD
+5VD 5 5 FILTER
RXN 24 C521 RXN 24
H/S C510 H/S 3 1
1000PF
1000PF 6 23 6 23

2
C517 VA+ VD+ C502 0.1UF 1%,50v VA+ VD+ +5VD
C501 1000PF 7 22 0.1UF 7 22 1000PF

2
0.1UF AGND DGND AGND DGND
1%,50v
8 C511 C512 8 C513
FILT 21 MCLK FILT 21 MCKOUT
OMCK (SHT6) OMCK 0.1UF
0.082UF 2200PF R526 50V
C503 C518 9 20 R524 9 20
RST U E500 5%,50V 1%,50V RST U
0.082UF 2200PF R515 49.9K
10 19 INTA 49.9K 1%
10 19 INTB
5%,50V 1%,50V RMCK INT 4.99K
RMCK INT 1%
11 R530 1%
11
R502 RERR 18 DIN_DATA RERR 18
SDOUT (SHT6) SDOUT
4.99K 12 17 75OHM 1% IN_FCLK 12 17
1% ILRCK OLRCK (SHT6) ILRCK OLRCK

AESINRMCK
13 16 IN_BCLK 13 16
ISCLK OSCLK (SHT6) ISCLK OSCLK
R504 14 15 14 15
/SRCRST SDIN TCBL E532 8.192MHZA R531 SDIN TCBL E534
(SHT3) 49.9K 1% (SHT6)
10OHM 1%
DOUT_FCLK
CS8420 (SHT6) CS8420
DOUT_BCLK +5VD
(SHT6)
DOUT_DATA
E521 (SHT6)

16
IC507
RB1_SEL 11
A

VCC
RB2_SEL 10
B
RB3_SEL 9
C
/MCKOUTEN 7 5 MCKOUT
S Y
IC503
PICPWR PIC16C67 L 12.288MHZA 4
(SHT6) D0
+5VD 16.9344MHZ 3
(SHT6) D1
2
12

35

AESINRMCK
D2
18.432MHZA 1 6
E551 (SHT6) D3 W
15
D4
VDD

VDD

33.8688MHZ 14
(SHT6) D5
+ C516 R527 13

GND
1.0UF /AESINCS 10.0K
D6
D0 21 16 36.864MHZA 12
35v RD0/PSP0 RC0/T1OSO/T1CKI +5VD 1% (SHT6) D7
D1 22 18 /AESOUTCS
RD1/PSP1 RC1/T1OSI/CCP2
D2 23 19 POTCS 74HC151
RD2/PSP2 RC2/CCP1 (SHT4)

8
D3 24 20 PICSCK R529 R528
RD3/PSP3 RC3/SCK/SCL
D4 30 25 PICSDI 10.0K 10.0K
RD4/PSP4 RC4/SDI/SDA +5VD
D5 31 26 PICSDO 1% 1%
RD5/PSP5 RC5/SDO R520 J505
D6 32 27 SIN
RD6/PSP6 RC6/TX/CK (SHT6) 49.9K
+5VD RA5
D7 33 29 SOUT 1 2
RD7/PSP7 RC7/RX/DT (SHT6) 1%
9 /CTS 3 4
RE0/RD

20
(SHT6)
10 /RTS IC504
D[0..7] RE1/WR (SHT6) +5VD IC508 HDR2X2
11
RE2/CS E515 74AHC1G32 2 18 GATESCK UNSHRD
/MISCANLGCS 3 A1 YA1 (SHT3)

VCC
RA0 4 16
5
(SHT3) GAINDATAO
/INGAINCS 4 36 (SHT3) A2 YA2
(SHT2) RA1 RB0/INT 1 6 14 GATESDO
/OUTGAINCS 5 37 RB1_SEL A3 YA3 (SHT3)
(SHT3) RA2 RB1 4 8 12
/MCKOUTEN 6 38 RB2_SEL A4 YA4
RA3 RB2 2
7 39 RB3_SEL
E513 E512 RA4/T0CKI RB3 11 9 POTSCK
RA5 8 41 INTA B1 YB1 (SHT4)
RA5/SS RB4 13 7 POTSDO
3

42 INTB B2 YB2 (SHT4)

RB5 15 5
12.288MHZA 14 43 B3 YB3
(SHT6) OSC1/CLKIN RB6 17 3
44 B4 YB4
RB7

GND
15

AEN

BEN
OSC2/CLKOUT
2
R519
MCLR/Vpp
10.0K 74HC241A

19

10
VSS

VSS

1%
NC
NC
NC
NC

* DO NOT STUFF J504.

+5VD
13

34

1
17
28
40

POTCS
J504 * (SHT4)
R521 /OUTGAINCS
1.00K 1 (SHT3)
PICPWR
1% 2
CR500 3
R522 4
10OHM 5
5082 1% HDR1X5
2

+5VD +5VD UNSHRDED

+ C515
/RST

1.0UF 3 1
35V VDD VSS

IC509
MCP809T T
CONTROL & DIGITAL I/O
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6-51
DSP BOARD
CONNECTOR +5VD
IC603B
E607 J600 C652 IC603D
18.432MHZA 4 3 DOUT_FCLK PILOT_WCLK 1000PF
(SHT5) (SHT5) 1 2 (SHT4) 9 8 12.288MHZA
BASE BOARD 18.432MHZ PILOT_BCLK 1%,50V (SHT5)
3 4 (SHT4)

20
CONNECTOR 36.864MHZ PILOT_DATA
74HC14A 5 6 (SHT4)
R601 24.576MHZ COMP_DATA IC601 74HC14A
JP600 7 8 (SHT4) IC603E
1.00K 33.8688MHZ DOUT_DATA
9 10 (SHT5)

VCC
14 1% DOUT_BCLK 2 11 10 8.192MHZA
SIN (SHT5) 11 12 A1 (SHT2,5)
13 (SHT5) 4 18 AOUT_DATA
SOUT 13 14 A2 Y1 (SHT3)
12 (SHT5) 6 16 COMP_WCLK E609
/RTS 15 16 A3 Y2 (SHT4) +5VD 74HC14A
11 (SHT5) 8 14 COMP_BCLK
/CTS 17 18 A4 Y3 (SHT4)
10 (SHT5) 11 12 AOUT_FCLK
E612 IC603C 19 20 A5 Y4 (SHT3)
9 13 9

4
MCLK IC604A
18.432MHZA 21 22 A6 Y5 (SHT3,5)
8 6 5 AIN_DATA 15 7 IN_BCLK
(SHT5) (SHT2) 23 24 A7 Y6 (SHT2,5)

PR
7 DIN_DATA 17 5 IN_FCLK
36.864MHZA (SHT5) 25 26 A8 Y7 (SHT2,5) 2 5
6 3 AOUT_BCLK D Q
74HC14A R602
Y8 (SHT3)
5 1
24.576MHZA 1.00K IDC HEADER 2X13 G
4 19

GND
1% G 3 6
3 CLK Q
+5VD
2

CLR
1

14

10
IC603F 74AHCT244
HEADER 14 E605 E606
74HC74

1
12 13 +5VD
C653
1000PF
74HC14A 1%,50V

7
R603 +5VD
+5VD
1.00K
1%

10

14
IC604B
IC603A E611

PR

VCC
12 9 1 2 16.9344MHZ
D Q (SHT5)

R600 74HC14A
33.8688MHZ 11 8
CLK Q

GND
1.00K 1%

CLR
E610

13

7
+5VD 74HC74
POWER SUPPLY (SHT5)
CONNECTOR
+5VA +5VA
-5VA J601 -5VA
-15V -15V
1 2
+15V +15V
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16 +5VD
17 18
19 20

IDC HEADER 2X10

+5VD

+ C645
10UF C600 C601 C602 C603 C604 C605 C606 C607 C608 C609 C642 C643 C644 C648 C651
20V 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF

TP607
TEST_POINT
+15V

M1 M3 M5

+ C646 M2 M4 M21 M33 M34 M35

10UF C610 C612 C613 C616 C618 C621 C649 C617 C619 C620 C622 C623 C624 C625
TP600 20V 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF
TEST_POINT

+ C647 AGND6 AGND5 AGND4 AGND3

C626 C628 C629 AGND7 C632 C634 C637 C650 C633 C635 C636 C638 C639 C640 C641
10UF
20V 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF INTERFACE AND POWER DISTRIBUTION
-15V
6-52 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 2300

DSP BOARD PARTS LOCATOR DRAWING

32170.300.11
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6-53
E50
FSYNCB FSYNCA
(SHT7) (SHT7)
BCLKB BCLKA
(SHT7) (SHT7)
EXTALB EXTALA
(SHT7) (SHT7)
IBCLK
(SHT7)
IFSYNC
(SHT7)
IDATA1
(SHT7)
IDATA0
(SHT7)

IC101A IC102A IC103A IC104A

DSP56362-120 E28 E29 DSP56362-120 E30 E31 DSP56362-120 E32 E33 DSP56362-120 E34 E35

11 4 11 4 11 4 11 4
SD10 SDO0 SD10 SDO0 SD10 SDO0 SD10 SDO0
10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5
SD11 SDO1 SD11 SDO1 SD11 SDO1 SD11 SDO1
13 12 13 12 13 12 13 12
FSR FST N/C FSR FST N/C FSR FST N/C FSR FST
15 14 15 14 15 14 15 14
SCKR SCKT N/C SCKR SCKT N/C SCKR SCKT N/C SCKR SCKT
17 16 N/C 17 16 (SHT7) 17 16 (SHT7) 17 16
N/C HCKR HCKT (SHT7) N/C HCKR HCKT N/C N/C HCKR HCKT N/C N/C HCKR HCKT N/C
+3.3V 55 6 SD_00 +3.3V 55 6 SD10 +3.3V 55 6 SD20 +3.3V 55 6 SD30
EXTAL SDO2/SD13 EXTAL SDO2/SD13 EXTAL SDO2/SD13 EXTAL SDO2/SD13 (SHT7)
59 7 SD_01 59 7 SD11 59 7 SD21 59 7 SD31
N/C CLKOUT SDO3/SD12 N/C CLKOUT SDO3/SD12 N/C CLKOUT SDO3/SD12 N/C CLKOUT SDO3/SD12 (SHT7)
61 137 (SHT7) 61 137 (SHT7) 61 137 (SHT7) 61 137
PINIT/NMI MODA/IRQA PINIT/NMI MODA/IRQA PINIT/NMI MODA/IRQA PINIT/NMI MODA/IRQA
45 136 +3.3V 45 136 +3.3V 45 136 +3.3V 45 136 +3.3V
VCCP MODB/IRQB VCCP MODB/IRQB VCCP MODB/IRQB VCCP MODB/IRQB
C101 46 135 C103 46 135 C105 46 135 C107 46 135
PCAP MODC/IRQC PCAP MODC/IRQC PCAP MODC/IRQC PCAP MODC/IRQC
47 134 47 134 47 134 47 134
GNDP MODD/IRQD GNDP MODD/IRQD GNDP MODD/IRQD GNDP MODD/IRQD
8200PF 8200PF 8200PF 8200PF
C102 C104 C106 C108

0.47UF 0.47UF 0.47UF

0.47UF IRQB2 IRQB1
(SHT7) (SHT7)

FSYNCA FSYNCB
(SHT7) (SHT7)
BCLKB
(SHT7)
EXTALA EXTALB
(SHT7) (SHT7)

+3.3V +3.3V
BCLKA R101 R102
(SHT7)
100K 1% 100K 1%
SD62
(SHT7)
SD63
(SHT7)

+3.3V +3.3V
R105 R103 R104
IC105A 0 OHM IC106A IC107A IC108A
E36 E37 E38 E39 E40 E41 100K 1% 100K 1%
DSP56362-120 DSP56362-120 DSP56362-120 DSP56362-120

11 4 11 4 11 4 11 4 ODATA2
SD10 SDO0 SD10 SDO0 SD10 SDO0 SD10 SDO0 (SHT7)
10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 ODATA3
SD11 SDO1 SD11 SDO1 SD11 SDO1 SD11 SDO1 (SHT7)
13 12 13 12 13 12 13 12 OFSYNCA
N/C FSR FST N/C FSR FST N/C FSR FST FSR FST (SHT7)
15 14 15 14 15 14 15 14 OBCLKA
N/C SCKR SCKT N/C SCKR SCKT N/C SCKR SCKT SCKR SCKT (SHT7)
17 16 (SHT7) 17 16 (SHT7) 17 16 (SHT7) 17 16
N/C HCKR HCKT N/C N/C HCKR HCKT N/C N/C HCKR HCKT N/C N/C HCKR HCKT N/C
+3.3V 55 6 SD40 +3.3V 55 6 SD50 +3.3V 55 6 SD60 +3.3V 55 6 SD70
EXTAL SDO2/SD13 EXTAL SDO2/SD13 EXTAL SDO2/SD13 EXTAL SDO2/SD13 (SHT7)
59 7 SD41 59 7 SD51 59 7 SD61 59 7 SD71
N/C CLKOUT SDO3/SD12 N/C CLKOUT SDO3/SD12 N/C CLKOUT SDO3/SD12 N/C CLKOUT SDO3/SD12 (SHT7)
61 137 (SHT7) 61 137 (SHT7) 61 137 (SHT7) 61 137
PINIT/NMI MODA/IRQA PINIT/NMI MODA/IRQA PINIT/NMI MODA/IRQA PINIT/NMI MODA/IRQA
45 136 +3.3V 45 136 +3.3V 45 136 +3.3V 45 136 +3.3V
VCCP MODB/IRQB VCCP MODB/IRQB VCCP MODB/IRQB VCCP MODB/IRQB
C109 46 135 C111 46 135 C113 46 135 C115 46 135
PCAP MODC/IRQC PCAP MODC/IRQC PCAP MODC/IRQC PCAP MODC/IRQC
47 134 47 134 47 134 47 134
GNDP MODD/IRQD GNDP MODD/IRQD GNDP MODD/IRQD GNDP MODD/IRQD
8200PF 8200PF 8200PF 8200PF
C110 C112 C114 C116

0.47UF 0.47UF 0.47UF 0.47UF

IRQB1 IRQB2
(SHT7) (SHT7)

DSP ESAI SCHEMATIC

62170.000.12
 6-54 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 2300

A[0..2]
(SHT6)

D[0..7]
(SHT6,7)

IC101B IC102B IC103B IC104B

DSP56362-120 DSP56362-120 DSP56362-120 DSP56362-120

D7 34 31 A2 D7 34 31 A2 D7 34 31 A2 D7 34 31 A2
H7 HA2 H7 HA2 H7 HA2 H7 HA2
D6 35 32 A1 D6 35 32 A1 D6 35 32 A1 D6 35 32 A1
H6 HA1 H6 HA1 H6 HA1 H6 HA1
D5 36 33 A0 D5 36 33 A0 D5 36 33 A0 D5 36 33 A0
H5 HA0 H5 HA0 H5 HA0 H5 HA0
D4 37 22 HRD D4 37 22 HRD D4 37 22 HRD D4 37 22 HRD
H4 HRD (SHT6) H4 HRD (SHT6) H4 HRD (SHT6) H4 HRD (SHT6)
D3 40 30 DSPEN0 D3 40 30 DSPEN1 D3 40 30 DSPEN2 D3 40 30 DSPEN3
H3 HCS (SHT6) H3 HCS (SHT6) H3 HCS (SHT6) H3 HCS (SHT6)
D2 41 24 D2 41 24 D2 41 24 D2 41 24
H2 HOREQ N/C H2 HOREQ N/C H2 HOREQ N/C H2 HOREQ N/C
D1 42 23 HACK D1 42 23 HACK D1 42 23 HACK D1 42 23 HACK
H1 HACK (SHT6) H1 HACK (SHT6) H1 HACK (SHT6) H1 HACK (SHT6)
D0 43 21 HWR D0 43 21 HWR D0 43 21 HWR D0 43 21 HWR
H0 HWR (SHT6) H0 HWR (SHT6) H0 HWR (SHT6) H0 HWR (SHT6)
44 DSPRST 44 DSPRST 44 DSPRST 44 DSPRST
RESET (SHT6) RESET (SHT6) RESET (SHT6) RESET (SHT6)

IC105B ? IC106B IC107B IC108B

DSP56362-120 DSP56362-120 DSP56362-120 DSP56362-120

D7 34 31 A2 D7 34 31 A2 D7 34 31 A2 D7 34 31 A2
H7 HA2 H7 HA2 H7 HA2 H7 HA2
D6 35 32 A1 D6 35 32 A1 D6 35 32 A1 D6 35 32 A1
H6 HA1 H6 HA1 H6 HA1 H6 HA1
D5 36 33 A0 D5 36 33 A0 D5 36 33 A0 D5 36 33 A0
H5 HA0 H5 HA0 H5 HA0 H5 HA0
D4 37 22 HRD D4 37 22 HRD D4 37 22 HRD D4 37 22 HRD
H4 HRD (SHT6) H4 HRD (SHT6) H4 HRD (SHT6) H4 HRD (SHT6)
D3 40 30 DSPEN4 D3 40 30 DSPEN5 D3 40 30 DSPEN6 D3 40 30 DSPEN7
H3 HCS (SHT6) H3 HCS (SHT6) H3 HCS (SHT6) H3 HCS (SHT6)
D2 41 24 D2 41 24 D2 41 24 D2 41 24
H2 HOREQ N/C H2 HOREQ N/C H2 HOREQ N/C H2 HOREQ N/C
D1 42 23 HACK D1 42 23 HACK D1 42 23 HACK D1 42 23 HACK
H1 HACK (SHT6) H1 HACK (SHT6) H1 HACK (SHT6) H1 HACK (SHT6)
D0 43 21 HWR D0 43 21 HWR D0 43 21 HWR D0 43 21 HWR
H0 HWR (SHT6) H0 HWR (SHT6) H0 HWR (SHT6) H0 HWR (SHT6)
44 DSPRST 44 DSPRST 44 DSPRST 44 DSPRST
RESET (SHT6) RESET (SHT6) RESET (SHT6) RESET (SHT6)

* NOTE:
IC 104 & IC 105
ARE NOT POPULATED
IN 2300 BUILD. DSP HOST INTERFACE SCHEMATIC
62170.000.12
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6-55
+3.3V IC101D +3.3V IC102D +3.3V IC103D +3.3V IC104D
DSP56362-120 DSP56362-120 DSP56362-120 DSP56362-120

57

25

65

38
57

65

38

25

65

38

25

57

65

38

57

25
8

8
+3.3V +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V

VCCS

VCCS

VCCS

VCCS
VCCC

VCCC

VCCC

VCCH
VCCC

VCCC

VCCH

VCCH

VCCC

VCCC

VCCH

VCCC
129 1 SCK 129 1 SCK 129 1 SCK 129 1 SCK
SCK (SHT6) SCK (SHT6) SCK (SHT6) SCK (SHT6)
119 144 SDO 119 144 SDO 119 144 SDO 119 144 SDO
MISO (SHT6) MISO (SHT6) MISO (SHT6) MISO (SHT6)
111 143 SDI 111 143 SDI 111 143 SDI 111 143 SDI
VCCD MOS1 (SHT6) VCCD MOS1 (SHT6) VCCD MOS1 (SHT6) VCCD MOS1 (SHT6)
103 2 SS1 103 2 SS2 103 2 SS3 103 2 SS4
VCCD SS (SHT6) VCCD SS (SHT6) VCCD SS (SHT6) VCCD SS (SHT6)
86 3 86 3 86 3 86 3
VCCA HREQ N/C VCCA HREQ N/C VCCA HREQ N/C VCCA HREQ N/C
80 80 80 80
VCCA VCCA VCCA VCCA
74 28 74 28 74 28 74 28
VCCA ACI N/C VCCA ACI N/C VCCA ACI N/C VCCA ACI N/C
95 95 95 95
VCCQH VCCQH VCCQH VCCQH
49 27 49 27 49 27 49 27
VCCQH ADO N/C VCCQH ADO N/C VCCQH ADO N/C VCCQH ADO N/C
20 20 20 20
VCCQH VCCQH VCCQH VCCQH
126 29 126 29 126 29 126 29
VCCQL TIO0 N/C VCCQL TIO0 N/C VCCQL TIO0 N/C VCCQL TIO0 N/C
91 91 91 91
VCCQL VCCQL VCCQL VCCQL
56 141 56 141 56 141 56 141
VCCQL TCK N/C VCCQL TCK N/C VCCQL TCK N/C VCCQL TCK N/C
18 18 18 18
VCCQL VCCQL VCCQL VCCQL
48 140 48 140 48 140 48 140
GNDP1 TDI N/C GNDP1 TDI N/C GNDP1 TDI N/C GNDP1 TDI N/C
19 19 19 19
GNDQ GNDQ GNDQ GNDQ
54 139 54 139 54 139 54 139
GNDQ TDO N/C GNDQ TDO N/C GNDQ TDO N/C GNDQ TDO N/C
90 90 90 90
GNDQ GNDQ GNDQ GNDQ
127 142 127 142 127 142 127 142
GNDQ TMS N/C GNDQ TMS N/C GNDQ TMS N/C GNDQ TMS N/C
75 75 75 75
GNDA GNDA GNDA GNDA
81 138 81 138 81 138 81 138
GNDA TRST N/C GNDA TRST N/C GNDA TRST N/C GNDA TRST N/C
87 87 87 87
GNDA GNDA GNDA GNDA
96 53 96 53 96 53 96 53
GNDA DE N/C GNDA DE N/C GNDA DE N/C GNDA DE N/C
104 104 104 104
GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD
112 60 112 60 112 60 112 60
GNDD N/C N/C GNDD N/C N/C GNDD N/C N/C GNDD N/C N/C
120 120 120 120

GNDC
GNDC

GNDC
GNDC

GNDH

GNDC

GNDH

GNDC
GNDC

GNDH

GNDC

GNDH
GNDS

GNDS

GNDS

GNDS

GNDS

GNDS

GNDS

GNDS
130 130 130 130

58
58

66

39

26

66

39

26

58

26

58
66

39

66

39

26
* NOTE:
IC 104 & IC 105
ARE NOT POPULATED
IN 2300 BUILD.
IC105D IC106D IC107D IC108D
+3.3V DSP56362-120 +3.3V DSP56362-120 +3.3V DSP56362-120 +3.3V DSP56362-120
38

25
57

65
57

65

38

25

57

65

38

25
57

65

38

25
8
8

8
+3.3V +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V
VCCS
VCCS

VCCH
VCCC

VCCC

VCCC
VCCC

VCCH

VCCS

VCCS
VCCC

VCCC

VCCC

VCCH
VCCH

VCCC
129 1 SCK 129 1 SCK 129 1 SCK 129 1 SCK
SCK (SHT6) SCK (SHT6) SCK (SHT6) SCK (SHT6)
119 144 SDO 119 144 SDO 119 144 SDO 119 144 SDO
MISO (SHT6) MISO (SHT6) MISO (SHT6) MISO (SHT6)
111 143 SDI 111 143 SDI 111 143 SDI 111 143 SDI
VCCD MOS1 (SHT6) VCCD MOS1 (SHT6) VCCD MOS1 (SHT6) VCCD MOS1 (SHT6)
103 2 SS5 103 2 SS6 103 2 SS7 103 2 SS8
VCCD SS (SHT6) VCCD SS (SHT6) VCCD SS (SHT6) VCCD SS (SHT6)
86 3 86 3 86 3 86 3
VCCA HREQ N/C VCCA HREQ N/C VCCA HREQ N/C VCCA HREQ N/C
80 80 80 80
VCCA VCCA VCCA VCCA
74 28 74 28 74 28 74 28 IOLINK
VCCA ACI N/C VCCA ACI N/C VCCA ACI N/C VCCA ACI (SHT7)
95 95 95 95
VCCQH VCCQH VCCQH VCCQH
49 27 49 27 49 27 49 27
VCCQH ADO N/C VCCQH ADO N/C VCCQH ADO N/C VCCQH ADO N/C
20 20 20 20
VCCQH VCCQH VCCQH VCCQH
126 29 126 29 126 29 126 29
VCCQL TIO0 N/C VCCQL TIO0 N/C VCCQL TIO0 N/C VCCQL TIO0 N/C
91 91 91 91
VCCQL VCCQL VCCQL VCCQL
56 141 56 141 56 141 56 141
VCCQL TCK N/C VCCQL TCK N/C VCCQL TCK N/C VCCQL TCK N/C
18 18 18 18
VCCQL VCCQL VCCQL VCCQL
48 140 48 140 48 140 48 140
GNDP1 TDI N/C GNDP1 TDI N/C GNDP1 TDI N/C GNDP1 TDI N/C
19 19 19 19
GNDQ GNDQ GNDQ GNDQ
54 139 54 139 54 139 54 139
GNDQ TDO N/C GNDQ TDO N/C GNDQ TDO N/C GNDQ TDO N/C
90 90 90 90
GNDQ GNDQ GNDQ GNDQ
127 142 127 142 127 142 127 142
GNDQ TMS N/C GNDQ TMS N/C GNDQ TMS N/C GNDQ TMS N/C
75 75 75 75
GNDA GNDA GNDA GNDA
81 138 81 138 81 138 81 138
GNDA TRST N/C GNDA TRST N/C GNDA TRST N/C GNDA TRST N/C
87 87 87 87
GNDA GNDA GNDA GNDA
96 53 96 53 96 53 96 53
GNDA DE N/C GNDA DE N/C GNDA DE N/C GNDA DE N/C
104 104 104 104
GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD
112 60 112 60 112 60 112 60
GNDD N/C N/C GNDD N/C N/C GNDD N/C N/C GNDD N/C N/C
120 120 120 120
GNDC

GNDC
GNDC

GNDH

GNDC

GNDH

GNDC

GNDC

GNDH

GNDC

GNDC

GNDH
GNDS

GNDS

GNDS

GNDS

GNDS

GNDS

GNDS

GNDS
130 130 130 130

DSP SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE,

58

26

58
66

39

66

39

26

66

39
58

26

58

66

39

26
POWER, AND GROUND SCHEMATIC
62170.000.12
 6-56 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 2300

IC503
IC502
EPM7064AETC44-10
74LVX4245
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V P1TDI
+5VB (SHT7) * DO NOT STUFF J503
+3.3V +3.3V
R506
75.0 OHM

17

29
9
24

1
SA[3..9] R502 R503

1
IC504 100K 100K

20
BD[0..7] 74HC374

TDI

VCCINT

VCCINT
1% 1% J503 ?

VccA

VccB
(SHT7)
PTMS 7 41 HDR 2X2
TMS VCCINT

VCC
D[0..7] 40 2
R/W 2 23 (SHT3,7) OE2 1 2
B to A NC D0 3 2 SS1 44
BD0 3 22 BUSEN D0 Q0 (SHT5) 3 4
A0 OE D1 4 5 SS2 SA9 3 43
BD1 4 21 D0 D1 Q1 (SHT5)
A1 B0 D2 7 6 SS3 SA8 5 42 UNSHRD
BD2 5 20 D1 D2 Q2 (SHT5)
A2 B1 D3 8 9 SS4 SA7 20 35 DSPEN7
BD3 6 19 D2 D3 Q3 (SHT5) (SHT3)
A3 B2 D4 13 12 SS5 SA6 6 34 DSPEN6
BD4 7 18 D3 D4 Q4 (SHT5) (SHT3)
A4 B3 D5 14 15 SS6 SA5 8 33 DSPEN5
BD5 8 17 D4 D5 Q5 (SHT5) (SHT3)
A5 B4 D6 17 16 SS7 SA4 10 31 DSPEN4
BD6 9 16 D5 D6 Q6 (SHT5) (SHT3)
A6 B5 D7 18 19 SS8 SA3 11 30 DSPEN3
BD7 10 15 D6 D7 Q7 (SHT5) (SHT3)
A7 B6 AEN 12 28 DSPEN2
11 14 D7 (SHT3)
GND B7 SMEMR 13 39 DSPEN1

GND

CLK
GCLRn
GND

GND

(SHT3)

OE
SMEMW 14 27 DSPEN0
(SHT3)
BIOR 15 25 DSPRST
D[0..7] (SHT3,7)
(SHT3,7) BIOW 18 23 BUSEN

10
1

11
RESET 19 22 PLDEN
12

13

TCK (SHT7)
PTCK 26 21 R/W
+3.3V (SHT7)

N/C
P2TDI 32 38 START
(SHT7) TDO OE1 (SHT7)
4 37
GND GCLK1

GND

GND

GND
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

J503 I/O ADDRESS SPACE

16

24

36
RN501
100K-RESNET NONE 3XX

1 - 2 2XX

3 - 4 (R506) 1XX

IC501
74AHC541

+3.3V

J504 +5VB

20
RESET BIOR 2 18 HRD
1 2 D1 Q1

VCC
(SHT3)
/SPI_CS BD7 +3.3V +3.3V BIOW 3 17 HWR
3 4 D2 Q2 (SHT3)
BD6 SA0 4 16 A0
5 6 D3 Q3 (SHT3)
BD4 BD5 SA1 5 15 A1
7 8 D4 Q4 (SHT3)
BD3 BD2 SA2 6 14 A2
9 10 R505 R508 D5 Q5 (SHT3)
BD1 DACK1 7 13 HACK
11 12 75.0 OHM 75.0 OHM D6 Q6 (SHT3)
BD0 AEN /SPI_CS 8 12
13 14 1% 1% R504 D7 Q7
SMEMW 9 11
15 16 100K D8 Q8
SMEMR BIOW J500
17 18 1%
BIOR 1 DRQ1

GND
19 20 E1 1
SDO 19
(SHT5) 21 22 E2 2
SCK DACK1
(SHT5) 23 24
R510 DRQ1 HDR 2
25 26

10
10.0K SA9 SDI
27 28 (SHT5)
R509
1% SA8 SA6
29 30 100K
SA7
31 32 1%
SA4 SA5
33 34
SA3 R507
35 36
SA1 SA2 10.0K
37 38
SA0 1%
39 40
HDR 20X2
SHRD

BASE BOARD DSP ISA BUS 8-BIT I/O SCHEMATIC

62170.000.12
CONNECTOR
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6-57
+3.3V
IC604 +3.3V
IC603
+5V
EPM7256ATC100-10
6
VCC L1
+3.3V EXTALA 1
(SHT2) CLKREF R613 Ferrite 0805
EXTALB 3 IMCLK
(SHT2) CLK1
FSYNCA 2 75.0 OHM
(SHT2) CLK2 N/C
FSYNCB 5 +5V
(SHT2) CLK3 N/C 1%
BCLKA 7

39

91
CLK4 N/C

16
(SHT2)
+3.3V +3.3V BCLKB 4

8
(SHT2) VSS IC802
IFSYNC 8

14
(SHT2) CLKOUT N/C
18 51 PLL1700E IC807G

Vdd

Vddp

Vddb
IBCLK
34 66 (SHT2) 74AHCT04
18 10 C809
(SHT6) START 69 82 R605 75.0 OHM CY2305 RST MCKO E44
11 0.1UF
68 MCKO E45
C601 +3.3V +3.3V 2

7
67 R606 75.0 OHMOBCLKB MODE
1
65 ML/SR01
C2 0.1UF 20 9
6 64 J615 ? 1000PF MC/FS1 RSV N/C
(SHT2) 19
8 63
1 2
OBCLKA I/O BOARD MD/FS0
9 61 DACBCLK C600
10 60
3 4 CONNECTOR
12
12 58 * 0.1UF C1 0.1UF SCK01 E46
6 14
13 57 J601 XT1 SCK02 E47 R808
17 24.576MHz
14 56 PILOTWCLK SCK03
1 2 13 33.2OHM
16 54 OFSYNCA 18.432MHzA PILOTBCLK SCK04 E48
(SHT2) 3 4 5
DSPRST 17 52 IRQB1 36.864MHzB PILOTDATA XT2

Gndp

Gndb
(SHT6) (SHT2) 5 6

Gnd
HWR 19 48 IRQB2 24.576MHzB
(SHT6) (SHT2)
R607 7 8
PLDEN 20 47 SD_00 33.8688MHz IC807D
(SHT6) (SHT2) 75.0 OHM 9 10
24.576MHZ 87 46 SD_01
GCLK1 (SHT2) 11 12 R806
89 45 SD10 9 8 24.576MHzB

15
GCLRn (SHT2) 13 14
88 44 SD11 OFSYNCB 33.2OHM
OE1 (SHT2) 15 16
36.864MHZ 90 42 SD20
OE2/GCLK2 (SHT2) 17 18 74AHCT04
11 41 SD21
(SHT2) 19 20
26 40 SD30
(SHT2) 21 22
38 37 SD31
(SHT2) 23 24
43 36 SD40 C806 0.1UF
(SHT2) 25 26

+3.3V_FILTERED
59 35 SD41
(SHT2)
74 33 SD50 RIBBON CABLE_26P
(SHT2) * J616
86 32 SD51 C810 +5V
(SHT2)
95 31 SD60 +3.3V 1
P2TDI 4 30 SD61
(SHT2) R608 PILOTDATA 2
(SHT6) TDI (SHT2)
R812*
PTMS 15 29 SD70 75.0 OHM
TMS (SHT2) HDR 2
PTCK 62 25 SD71

20
TCK (SHT2) R609 IC601
PTDO 73 23 PILOTWCLK
TDO
IDATA2 71 21 75.0 OHM

16
VCC
SD62 75 81 IFSYNC
2 R801

8
(SHT2) R610 A1 10.0K IC801
SD63 76 80 PILOTBCLK IBCLK
4 18
(SHT2) A2 Y1 1%
DOUTFSYNC 83 79 IMCLK
6 16 PLL1700E

Vdd

Vddp

Vddb
75.0 OHM A3 Y2
DOUTBCLK 77 78 DACFSYNC 8 14
A4 Y3 18 10
72 R611 11 12 IDATA0 RST MCKO E42
ODATA0 (SHT5)IOLINK A5 Y4 (SHT2) 11
13 9 IDATA1 MCKO E43
75.0 OHM A6 Y5 (SHT2) 2
1 100 DACFSYNC 15 7 IDATA2 MODE
A7 Y6 1
2 99 R612 DACBCLK 17 5 ML/SR01
ODATA1 A8 Y7 20 9
5 98 3 MC/FS1 RSV N/C
75.0 OHM Y8 19
7 97 1 MD/FS0
DACBCLK OE1 IC807C
22 96 19

GND
OE2
24 94 R807
12 5 6 33.8688MHz
27 93 C801 SCK01
6 14 33.2OHM
28 92 XT1 SCK02 N/C
74LVC2244 10UF 20V 17

+
10
49 85 SCK03 74AHCT04
13
50 84 SCK04
* DO NOT STUFF 5
53 XT2 IC807A

Gndp

Gndb
C802

Gnd
55 0.1UF
70 1 2 R809 18.432MHzA
? 33.2OHM

15
JUMPERS C803 C804 74AHCT04
9400 OTHER +3.3V 0.1UF
INSTALL
IC807B

+
J615_1-2 NO YES
10UF 20V 3 4 R811 36.864MHzB
20

J615_3-4 YES NO IC602 +3.3V

C805 0.1UF 33.2OHM
+3.3V J616 YES NO
R810 74AHCT04
VCC

OFSYNCB 2
A1 33.2OHM
+3.3V OBCLKB 4 18
R601 A2 Y1 L2 R802
+3.3V ODATA0 6 16 36.864MHz
100K A3 Y2 150OHM
ODATA1 8 14
R602 A4 Y3
1% J603 ODATA2 11 12
A5 Y4

4
(SHT2)
100K PTCK ODATA3 13 9 IC804
(SHT6) 1 2 (SHT2) A6 Y5
1% PTDO DOUTFSYNC 15 7
3 4 A7 Y6

GND +3
PTMS DOUTBCLK 17 5 1 3
(SHT6) 5 6 N/C A8 Y7 OE OSC
3
N/C 7 8 N/C Y8
+3.3V 1
9 10 OE1
19 C3
GND

OE2 CMX-309FBC-27.000000M
HDR 5X2 0.1UF

2
R603 UNSHRD
100K DSP SERIAL AUDIO INTERFACE
74LVC2244
10

P1TDI
1% JTAG PORT AND CLOCK GENERATION
(SHT6)
62170.000.12
 6-58 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 2300

+3.3V

C709 C711 C712 C713 C714 C715 C716 C718 C719 C720 C723 C724 C725 C726 C727 C732 C733 C734 C739 C740 C741 C742 C744 C751 C754 C756 C758 C759 C761 C762 C771 C772 C773 C774
0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 1000PF 1000PF 1000PF 1000PF

+3.3V
+3.3V

C701 C702 C703 C704 C705 C706 C707 C708 C710 C728 C729 C743 C752 C753 C755 C757 C760
0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF
+ C4 + C5 + C6 + C7 + C8 + C9
10UF 20V 10UF 20V 10UF 20V 10UF 20V 10UF 20V 10UF 20V
+ C10
10UF 20V

POWER SUPPLY
+3.3V
CONNECTOR

+5V

CR700 J701
6.8V
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10 IC807F
11 12
13 12
13 14
15 16
HDR 2X8 74AHCT04
L701 IC807E
SHROUDED
TP703 1 2
+RAW 11 10
+5VB TP-DUAL
250UH
TP702 74AHCT04
TP-DUAL
+ C736 C749 HS703
22UF 0.1UF
HEAT_SINK

+RAW
IC703
5

4
FDBK
/ON

1 +3.3V
VIN
GND

2 L700
OUT
CR702 + C776 PE-53113
100UF C775
33V 150UH
0.1UF *
3

50V CR703 + C777 + C778

31DQ04 470UF 470UF DSP POWER DISTRIBUTION
16V 16V 62170.000.12
OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6-59
IC101C IC102C IC103C IC104C?
DSP56362-120 DSP56362-120 DSP56362-120 DSP56362-120

99 133 99 133 99 133 99 133

N/C A17 D23 N/C N/C A17 D23 N/C N/C A17 D23 N/C N/C A17 D23 N/C
98 132 98 132 98 132 98 132
N/C A16 D22 N/C N/C A16 D22 N/C N/C A16 D22 N/C N/C A16 D22 N/C
97 131 97 131 97 131 97 131
N/C A15 D21 N/C N/C A15 D21 N/C N/C A15 D21 N/C N/C A15 D21 N/C
94 128 94 128 94 128 94 128
N/C A14 D20 N/C N/C A14 D20 N/C N/C A14 D20 N/C N/C A14 D20 N/C
93 125 93 125 93 125 93 125
N/C A13 D19 N/C N/C A13 D19 N/C N/C A13 D19 N/C N/C A13 D19 N/C
92 124 92 124 92 124 92 124
N/C A12 D18 N/C N/C A12 D18 N/C N/C A12 D18 N/C N/C A12 D18 N/C
89 123 89 123 89 123 89 123
N/C A11 D17 N/C N/C A11 D17 N/C N/C A11 D17 N/C N/C A11 D17 N/C
88 122 88 122 88 122 88 122
N/C A10 D16 N/C N/C A10 D16 N/C N/C A10 D16 N/C N/C A10 D16 N/C
85 121 85 121 85 121 85 121
N/C A9 D15 N/C N/C A9 D15 N/C N/C A9 D15 N/C N/C A9 D15 N/C
84 118 84 118 84 118 84 118
N/C A8 D14 N/C N/C A8 D14 N/C N/C A8 D14 N/C N/C A8 D14 N/C
83 117 83 117 83 117 83 117
N/C A7 D13 N/C N/C A7 D13 N/C N/C A7 D13 N/C N/C A7 D13 N/C
82 116 82 116 82 116 82 116
N/C A6 D12 N/C N/C A6 D12 N/C N/C A6 D12 N/C N/C A6 D12 N/C
79 115 79 115 79 115 79 115
N/C A5 D11 N/C N/C A5 D11 N/C N/C A5 D11 N/C N/C A5 D11 N/C
78 114 78 114 78 114 78 114
N/C A4 D10 N/C N/C A4 D10 N/C N/C A4 D10 N/C N/C A4 D10 N/C
77 113 77 113 77 113 77 113
N/C A3 D9 N/C N/C A3 D9 N/C N/C A3 D9 N/C N/C A3 D9 N/C
76 110 76 110 76 110 76 110
N/C A2 D8 N/C N/C A2 D8 N/C N/C A2 D8 N/C N/C A2 D8 N/C
73 109 73 109 73 109 73 109
N/C A1 D7 N/C N/C A1 D7 N/C N/C A1 D7 N/C N/C A1 D7 N/C
72 108 72 108 72 108 72 108
N/C A0 D6 N/C N/C A0 D6 N/C N/C A0 D6 N/C N/C A0 D6 N/C
107 107 107 107
D5 N/C D5 N/C D5 N/C D5 N/C
70 106 70 106 70 106 70 106
N/C AA0/RAS0 D4 N/C N/C AA0/RAS0 D4 N/C N/C AA0/RAS0 D4 N/C N/C AA0/RAS0 D4 N/C
69 105 69 105 69 105 69 105
N/C AA0/RAS1 D3 N/C N/C AA0/RAS1 D3 N/C N/C AA0/RAS1 D3 N/C N/C AA0/RAS1 D3 N/C
51 102 51 102 51 102 51 102
N/C AA0/RAS2 D2 N/C N/C AA0/RAS2 D2 N/C N/C AA0/RAS2 D2 N/C N/C AA0/RAS2 D2 N/C
50 101 50 101 50 101 50 101
N/C AA0/RAS3 D1 N/C N/C AA0/RAS3 D1 N/C N/C AA0/RAS3 D1 N/C N/C AA0/RAS3 D1 N/C
52 100 52 100 52 100 52 100
N/C CAS D0 N/C N/C CAS D0 N/C N/C CAS D0 N/C N/C CAS D0 N/C
68 68 68 68
N/C RD N/C RD N/C RD N/C RD
67 67 67 67
N/C WR N/C WR N/C WR N/C WR
62 62 62 62
TA TA TA TA
+3.3V 63 +3.3V 63 +3.3V 63 63
N/C BR N/C BR N/C BR N/C BR
71 71 71 71
R301 BG R302 BG R303 BG BG
64 64 64 64
BB BB BB BB
10.0K 10.0K 10.0K +3.3V
1% 1% 1%
R304
10.0K
1%

IC105C?
IC106C
IC107C
DSP56362-120 IC108C
DSP56362-120 DSP56362-120
DSP56362-120

99 133 99 133 99 133

99 133 N/C A17 D23 N/C N/C A17 D23 N/C N/C A17 D23 N/C
N/C
98
A17 D23
132
N/C
N/C
98
A16 D22
132
N/C N/C
98
A16 D22
132
N/C N/C
98
A16 D22
132
N/C * NOTE:
N/C A16 D22 N/C 97 131 97 131 97 131
N/C
97
A15 D21
131
N/C
N/C
94
A15 D21
128
N/C N/C
94
A15 D21
128
N/C N/C
94
A15 D21
128
N/C IC 104 & IC 105
94 128 N/C A14 D20 N/C N/C A14 D20 N/C N/C A14 D20 N/C ARE NOT POPULATED
N/C A14 D20 N/C 93 125 93 125 93 125
93 125 N/C A13 D19 N/C N/C A13 D19 N/C N/C A13 D19 N/C
N/C A13 D19 N/C 92 124 92 124 92 124 IN 2300 BUILD.
92 124 N/C A12 D18 N/C N/C A12 D18 N/C N/C A12 D18 N/C
N/C A12 D18 N/C 89 123 89 123 89 123
89 123 N/C A11 D17 N/C N/C A11 D17 N/C N/C A11 D17 N/C
N/C A11 D17 N/C 88 122 88 122 88 122
88 122 N/C A10 D16 N/C N/C A10 D16 N/C N/C A10 D16 N/C
N/C A10 D16 N/C 85 121 85 121 85 121
85 121 N/C A9 D15 N/C N/C A9 D15 N/C N/C A9 D15 N/C
N/C A9 D15 N/C 84 118 84 118 84 118
84 118 N/C A8 D14 N/C N/C A8 D14 N/C N/C A8 D14 N/C
N/C A8 D14 N/C 83 117 83 117 83 117
83 117 N/C A7 D13 N/C N/C A7 D13 N/C N/C A7 D13 N/C
N/C A7 D13 N/C 82 116 82 116 82 116
82 116 N/C A6 D12 N/C N/C A6 D12 N/C N/C A6 D12 N/C
N/C A6 D12 N/C 79 115 79 115 79 115
79 115 N/C A5 D11 N/C N/C A5 D11 N/C N/C A5 D11 N/C
N/C A5 D11 N/C 78 114 78 114 78 114
78 114 N/C A4 D10 N/C N/C A4 D10 N/C N/C A4 D10 N/C
N/C A4 D10 N/C 77 113 77 113 77 113
77 113 N/C A3 D9 N/C N/C A3 D9 N/C N/C A3 D9 N/C
N/C A3 D9 N/C 76 110 76 110 76 110
76 110 N/C A2 D8 N/C N/C A2 D8 N/C N/C A2 D8 N/C
N/C A2 D8 N/C 73 109 73 109 73 109
73 109 N/C A1 D7 N/C N/C A1 D7 N/C N/C A1 D7 N/C
N/C A1 D7 N/C 72 108 72 108 72 108
72 108 N/C A0 D6 N/C N/C A0 D6 N/C N/C A0 D6 N/C
N/C A0 D6 N/C 107 107 107
107 D5 N/C D5 N/C D5 N/C
D5 N/C 70 106 70 106 70 106
70 106 N/C AA0/RAS0 D4 N/C N/C AA0/RAS0 D4 N/C N/C AA0/RAS0 D4 N/C
N/C AA0/RAS0 D4 N/C 69 105 69 105 69 105
69 105 N/C AA0/RAS1 D3 N/C N/C AA0/RAS1 D3 N/C N/C AA0/RAS1 D3 N/C
N/C AA0/RAS1 D3 N/C 51 102 51 102 51 102
51 102 N/C AA0/RAS2 D2 N/C N/C AA0/RAS2 D2 N/C N/C AA0/RAS2 D2 N/C
N/C AA0/RAS2 D2 N/C 50 101 50 101 50 101
50 101 N/C AA0/RAS3 D1 N/C N/C AA0/RAS3 D1 N/C N/C AA0/RAS3 D1 N/C
N/C AA0/RAS3 D1 N/C 52 100 52 100 52 100
52 100 N/C CAS D0 N/C N/C CAS D0 N/C N/C CAS D0 N/C
N/C CAS D0 N/C 68 68 68
68 N/C RD N/C RD N/C RD
N/C RD 67 67 67
67 N/C WR N/C WR N/C WR
N/C WR 62 62 62
62 TA TA TA
TA 63 63 63
63 N/C BR N/C BR N/C BR
N/C BR 71 71 71
71 BG BG BG
BG 64 64 64
64 BB +3.3V BB BB
BB +3.3V +3.3V
+3.3V R306 R308
R305
R307 DSP NO-CONNECT SCHEMATIC
10.0K 10.0K
10.0K 1%
10.0K
1% 62170.000.12
1%
1%
6-60 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 2300

2300 FRONT PANEL PART LOCATOR DIAGRAM -- FRONT CIRCUIT BOARD

OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6-61

1 RY10

3 RY11

5 RY12

7 RY13

9 RY14

11 RY15
1 RY0

3 RY1

5 RY2

7 RY3

9 RY4

11 RY5

13 RY6

15 RY7

17 RY8

19 RY9
NOTES: This PCB supports two assembly versions for two different products,
the principal difference being the LED colors. When different, CR1A CR1B CR1C CR1D CR1E CR1F CR1G CR1H CR1I CR1J CR2A CR2B CR2C CR2D CR2E CR2F
YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL RED YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL
both LED colors are indicated, with the 6200S product (Ver. 000) being first,

8
10

12

14

16

18

20

10

12
R1
and 2300 product (Ver.300) coming last. (e.g. RED/GRN) R2
R3
R4

13 RY10

15 RY11

17 RY12

19 RY13

1 RY14

3 RY15
13 RY0

15 RY1

17 RY2

19 RY3

1 RY4

3 RY5

5 RY6

7 RY7

9 RY8

11 RY9
CR2G CR2H CR2I CR2J CR3A CR3B CR3C CR3D CR3E CR3F CR3G CR3H CR3I CR3J CR4A CR4B
YEL YEL YEL RED YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL RED YEL YEL

4
14

16

18

20

10

12

14

16

18

20
R5
R6
R7
R8
J2 GNDF J4
RY0 1
..
2 RY1 TO GND PLANE ONLY GNDF 1
..
2 GNDF
RY2 3 4 RY3 R1 3 4 R2
.. ..

5 RY10

7 RY11

9 RY12

11 RY13

13 RY14

15 RY15
RY4 5 6 RY5 R3 5 6 R4

5 RY0

7 RY1

9 RY2

11 RY3

13 RY4

15 RY5

17 RY6

19 RY7

1 RY8

3 RY9
.. ..
RY6 7 8 RY7 R5 7 8 R6
.. ..
RY8 9 10 RY9 R7 9 10 R8
.. ..
RY10 11 12 RY11 R9 11 12 R10
.. ..
RY12 13 14 RY13 R11 13 14 R12 CR4C CR4D CR4E CR4F CR4G CR4H CR4I CR4J CR5A CR5B CR5C CR5D CR5E CR5F CR5G CR5H
.. ..
RY14 15 16 RY15 R13 15 16 R14 YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL RED YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL
.. ..

8
10

12

14

16

18

20

10

12

14

16
8x2 SKT 8x2 SKT R9
R10
R11
R12

17 RY10

19 RY11

1 RY12

3 RY13

5 RY14

7 RY15
17 RY0

19 RY1

1 RY2

3 RY3

5 RY4

7 RY5

9 RY6

11 RY7

13 RY8

15 RY9
CR5I CR5J CR6A CR6B CR6C CR6D CR6E CR6F CR6G CR6H CR6I CR6J CR7A CR7B CR7C CR7D
YEL RED YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL RED RED YEL GRN GRN
/GRN /GRN /GRN /GRN /GRN /GRN /GRN /GRN /YEL /RED

8
18

20

10

12

14

16

18

20
R13
R14
R15
R16
J3
R15 1 2 R16
..
R17 3 4 R18
..

9 RY10

11 RY11

13 RY12

15 RY13

17 RY14

19 RY15
R19 5 6 R20

9 RY0

11 RY1

13 RY2

15 RY3

17 RY4

19 RY5

1 RY6

3 RY7

5 RY8

7 RY9
..
R21 7 8 R22
..
R23 9 10 R24
..
R25 11 12 R26
.. CR8B CR8C CR8D CR8E CR8F CR8G CR8H CR8I CR8J
RS1 RS1 13 14 RS2 CR7E CR7F CR7G CR7H CR7I CR7J CR8A
..
RS3 15 16 RS4 GRN GRN GRN GRN GRN GRN YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL RED
RECALL MODIFY ..
SYSTEM /GRN /GRN /GRN /GRN /GRN /GRN /GRN /GRN /GRN /RED
PRESET PRO-

8
10

12

14

16

18

20

10

12

14

16

18

20
SETUP 8x2 SKT R17
1

CESSING
R18
CR11 CR12 CR13 R19
YEL YEL YEL R20
RS4

1 RY10
2

RS2

1 RY0

3 RY1

5 RY2

7 RY3

9 RY4

11 RY5

13 RY6

15 RY7

17 RY8

19 RY9
RS3

CR9A CR9B CR9C CR9D CR9E CR9F CR9G CR9H CR9I CR9J CR10
RED
GATE
YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL RED
/GRN /GRN /GRN /GRN /GRN /GRN /GRN /GRN /GRN /RED

2
10

12

14

16

18

20
+5V R21
R22
R23
PREVIOUS NEXT J1
1 2 RS5
..
RS6 3 4 RS7
..
CR14 CR15 RS8 5 6 RS9
..
YEL YEL RS10 7 8 RS11

1 RY0

3 RY1

5 RY2

7 RY3

9 RY4

11 RY5

13 RY6

15 RY7

17 RY8

19 RY9
..
RS12 9 10 RS13
..
5x2 SKT
RS6 CR16A CR16B CR16C CR16D CR16E CR16F CR16G CR16H CR16I CR16J
RS5 RED YEL GRN GRN GRN GRN GRN GRN GRN GRN

10

12

14

16

18

20
R24
RS7 R25
RS8 R26
RS9
2

S11 S10 S9 S8 S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 NOTE: BAR GRAPHS ARE

NUMBERED LIKE AN IDC.
1

RS10
RS11 Drawing Number Ver. Rev. Sheet
RS12
RS13 62150 000 01 1 of 1
SOFT 2 SOFT 4 SOFT 3 SOFT 1 PREVIOUS NEXT ESCAPE RECALL MODIFY SYSTEM CONTRAST
PRESET PRO- SETUP
CESSING

2300 FRONT PANEL SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM -- FRONT CIRCUIT BOARD

6-62 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 2300

2300 FRONT PANEL PART LOCATOR DIAGRAM -- REAR CIRCUIT BOARD

OPTIMOD-FM DIGITAL TECHNICAL DATA 6-63
+5V P4-1 and P4-2 provide GND to gnd plane on front bd. +5V
+5V
There is no other connection to GND on the front bd to the plane.

20

20
IC4 IC2

14
RP2
IC7C IC7F
D0 2 19 F1 D0 2 19 1 16 FY7

VCC

VCC
1D 1Q 1D 1Q
D1 3 18 F2 D1 3 18 2 15 FY6 5 6 13 12
2D 2Q 2D 2Q N/C N/C
D2 4 17 F3 D2 4 17 3 14 FY5
3D 3Q 3D 3Q
D3 5 16 F4 D3 5 16 4 13 FY4
4D 4Q 4D 4Q 74HC14A 74HC14A

7
D4 6 15 F5 D4 6 15 5 12 FY3
5D 5Q 5D 5Q
D5 7 14 F6 D5 7 14 6 11 FY2
6D 6Q 6D 6Q IC7D
D6 8 13 F7 D6 8 13 7 10 FY1
7D 7Q 7D 7Q
D7 9 12 F8 D7 9 12 8 9 FY0 9 8
8D 8Q 8D 8Q N/C

GND

GND
OC

CK

OC

CK
RES_NET P2
74HC14A
D[0..7] D[0..7] 100 OHM FY0 1 2 FY1
..
P4 74AC574 FY2 3 4 FY3
74FCT574 .. IC7E

1
10

11

10

11
DISROWA 1 2 FY4 5 6 FY5
.. ..
F1 3 4 F2 DISCOLB FY6 7 8 FY7 11 10
.. .. N/C
F3 5 6 F4 FY8 9 10 FY9
.. ..
F5 7 8 F6 FY10 11 12 FY11
.. .. 74HC14A
F7 9 10 F8 FY12 13 14 FY13
.. .. SPARES
F9 11 12 F10 FY14 15 16 FY15
.. ..
+5V F11 13 14 F12 +5V
..
F13 15 16 F14 8x2 POSTS
20 ..

20
IC5 IC1
8x2 POSTS RP1
D0 2 19 F9 D0 2 19 1 16 FY15
VCC

VCC
1D 1Q 1D 1Q
D1 3 18 F10 D1 3 18 2 15 FY14
2D 2Q 2D 2Q
D2 4 17 F11 D2 4 17 3 14 FY13
3D 3Q 3D 3Q
D3 5 16 F12 D3 5 16 4 13 FY12
4D 4Q 4D 4Q
D4 6 15 F13 D4 6 15 5 12 FY11
5D 5Q 5D 5Q
D5 7 14 F14 D5 7 14 6 11 FY10
6D 6Q 6D 6Q
D6 8 13 F15 D6 8 13 7 10 FY9
7D 7Q 7D 7Q
D7 9 12 F16 D7 9 12 8 9 FY8 CR1
8D 8Q 8D 8Q
GND

GND
J1
OC

CK

OC

CK
RES_NET
D[0..7] D[0..7] 100 OHM 1 2
1
74AC574
74FCT574 2
1

1
10

11

10

11
DISROWB
DISCOLA HDR 2_RA
LED BY COLOR
+5V
20

IC6
MAIN BOARD
D0 2 19 F17 D[0..7] D[0..7]
VCC

1D 1Q
D1 3 18 F18
2D 2Q
D2 4 17 F19 JP203 +5V
3D 3Q
D3 5 16 F20 D0 D1 JP202
4D 4Q 1 2
D4 6 15 F21 D2 D3 FROM
5D 5Q 3 4 1
D5 7 14 F22 D4 D5 POWER
6D 6Q 5 6 2
D6 8 13 F23 D6 D7 SUPPLY
7D 7Q 7 8 3 +9VB
D7 9 12 P3 LED DISROWD BOARD
8D 8Q 9 10 4
N/C F15 1 2 F16 ENCODER IN_SENSIT + C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8
GND

.. 11 12 6.8UF
OC

CK

F17 3 4 F18 DISCOLA DISROWA HDR 4 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF 0.1UF
.. 13 14 25V
D[0..7] F19 5 6 F20 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V
.. 15 16
F21 7 8 F22 DISROWB DISROWC
74FCT574 .. 17 18
1
10

11

DISROWC F23 9 10 F24 DISCOLB

.. 19 20
+5V F25 11 12 F26
.. 21 22 N/C
13 14 FS2
.. N/C 23 24 N/C
+5V FS3 15 16 FS4
.. N/C 25 26 N/C
20

8x2 POSTS CABLE_26P

IC9
D0 2 19 F24
VCC

1D 1Q
D1 3 18 F25
2D 2Q
D2 4 17 F26 +5V P1
3D 3Q
D3 5 16 1 2 FS5
4D 4Q N/C ..
D4 6 15 FS6 3 4 FS7
5D 5Q N/C ..
D5 7 14 FS2 FS3 FS4 FS8 5 6 FS9
6D 6Q N/C ..
D6 8 13 FS10 7 8 FS11
7D 7Q N/C R17 R18 R19 ..
D7 9 12 FS12 9 10 FS13
8D 8Q N/C 110.0 110.0 110.0 ..
+5V +5V +5V +5V
GND

OC

CK

5x2 POSTS +5V

D[0..7] +5V 1% 1% 1%
R25 R26 R27 R28

20
74FCT574 IC3 IC8
1
10

11

100K 100K 100K 100K

20

DISROWD +5V
1% 1% 1% 1%

VCC
D0 3 2 R20 FS5 1 19 ENCODER
VCC

D0 Q0 DIR E
D1 4 5 110.0 1% 2
FS10 18 D7
D1 Q1 A0 B0
D2 7 6 3
FS11 17 D6
D2 Q2 R21 A1 B1
D3 8 9 FS6 4
FS12 16 D5
D3 Q3 A2 B2
D4 13 12 110.0 1% 5
FS13 15 D4
D4 Q4 A3 B3
D5 14 15 6 14 D3
D5 Q5 R22 A4 B4
D6 17 16 FS7 +5V 7 13 D2
D6 Q6 R29 IC7A A5 B5
D7 18 19 110.0 1% S12 10.0K 1% IN_SENSIT 8 12 D1
D7 Q7 A6 B6
ROTARY ENCODER 1 2 9 11 D0
GND

GND
CLK

R23 A7 B7
FS8
OE

D[0..7] 110.0 1% 74HC14A

74HC374 4 +5V 74HC245
R24 R30
1
10

11

10
LED FS9 10.0K 1% D[0..7]
IC7B
110.0 1%
3 4

74HC14A Drawing Number Ver. Rev. Sheet

2
3
1

62155 000 02 1 of 1

SOEARTH

MNT HOLE

2300 FRONT PANEL SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM -- REAR CIRCUIT BOARD

 6-64 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 2300

MPX POWER
GAIN CONTROL

TWO-BAND TWO-BAND TWO-BAND DISTORTION-

STEREO EQUALIZER HIGH FREQ OVERSHOOT
CANCELLED
ENHANCER HF ENHANCER LIMITER COMPENSATOR
LIMITER CLIPPER
AGC COMPRESSOR

COMPRESSOR/LIMITER
CONTROL COUPLING AES/EBU OUTPUT

ANALOG OUTPUT

MPX POWER AUDIO

GAIN CONTROL PROCESSOR
15, 16, 17 kHz
COMPOSITE OUTPUT
(BYPASSABLE) STEREO
L\R DOMAIN ENCODER
OVERSHOOT COMP LIMITER
LOWPASS LIMITER STAND-ALONE
STEREO HALF-COSINE
FILTER PRE-EMPHASIS PRE-EMPHASIS/ ENCODER INTERPOLATION
DE-EMPHASIS LIMITER

MULTIPLEX
POWER
CONTROLLER

OPTIMOD-FM 2300 VERSION 2

SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM